S4H_118.pdf

Reference Guide SAP S/4HANA, on premise edition 1511 Feature Package Stack 01 March 2016 English

How to localize with SAP Best Practices SAP S/4HANA, on premise edition 1511 FPS 01

CUSTOMER

Typographic Conventions Type Style

Description

Example

Words or characters quoted from the screen. These include field names, screen titles, pushbuttons labels, menu names, menu paths, and menu options. Textual cross-references to other documents.

Example

Emphasized words or expressions.

EXAMPLE

Technical names of system objects. These include report names, program names, transaction codes, table names, and key concepts of a programming language when they are surrounded by body text, for example, SELECT and INCLUDE.

Example

Output on the screen. This includes file and directory names and their paths, messages, names of variables and parameters, source text, and names of installation, upgrade and database tools.

Example

Exact user entry. These are words or characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation.



Variable user entry. Angle brackets indicate that you replace these words and characters with appropriate entries to make entries in the system.

EXAMPLE

Keys on the keyboard, for example, F 2 or E N T E R .

CUSTOMER 2

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Typographic Conventions

Document History Revision

Date

Change

0.1

2016-02-26

Draft ready for review and validation.

1.0

2016-04-01

Released

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Document History

CUSTOMER 3

Table of Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3

Introduction Purpose of this document Scope of this document Out of scope

14 14 14 14

2 2.1 2.2

New Features of SAP Best Practices Baseline SAP Best Practices new content architecture S/4 HANA Best Practices Global Template 2.2.1 Multi-countries in one client 2.2.2 Parallel accounting for multi-national company

16 16 18 18 18

3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6

Scope coverage of SAP Best Practices Baseline contents Scope Coverage in 1511 SPS01: On-Premise Edition, Overview Scope Coverage in 1511 SPS01: On-Premise Edition, Procure to Pay Scope Coverage in 1511 SPS01: On-Premise Edition, Plan to Product Scope Coverage in 1511 SPS01: On-Premise Edition, Order to Cash Scope Coverage in 1511 SPS01: On-Premise Edition, Core Finance Scope Coverage in 1511 SPS01: On-Premise Edition, Analytics

20 20 21 21 22 22 23

4 4.1 4.2

Localization objects - per Business Priority Configuration sequence and simultaneous configuration Localization objects for basic settings 4.2.1 Enterprise structure (J57) 4.2.1.1 IFRS/ Local GAAP 4.2.1.2 Configuration - On Premise 4.2.1.2.1 Defining Transportation Zones 4.2.1.2.2 Create Company 4.2.1.2.3 Creating Company Code 4.2.1.2.4 Entering Global Parameters for Company Code 4.2.1.2.5 Checking for Duplicate Invoices 4.2.1.2.6 Configuring Price Change in Previous Period/Year 4.2.1.2.7 Assigning Company Code to Controlling Area 4.2.1.2.8 Assign Company Code to Company 4.2.1.2.9 Assigning Company Code to Credit Control Area 4.2.1.2.10 Defining and Assigning Sales Organization 4.2.1.2.11 Defining Distribution Channel 4.2.1.2.12 Assigning Distribution Channel to Sales Organization 4.2.1.2.13 Creating Divisions 4.2.1.2.14 Assigning Division to Sales Organization

CUSTOMER 4

24 24 26 26 27 27 27 28 29 30 31 31 32 33 33 34 35 36 36 37

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Table of Contents

4.3

4.2.1.2.15 Setting up Sales Area 38 4.2.1.2.16 Defining Common Distribution Channels 38 4.2.1.2.17 Defining Common Divisions 39 4.2.1.2.18 Creating Purchasing Organization 39 4.2.1.2.19 Assigning Purchasing Organization to Company Code 40 4.2.1.2.20 Defining Valuation Area 40 4.2.1.2.21 Creating Plant 41 4.2.1.2.22 Assigning Sales Organization - Distribution Channel - to Plant44 4.2.1.2.23 Assigning Purchasing Organization to Plant 44 4.2.1.2.24 Defining Shipping Points 45 4.2.1.2.25 Assigning Shipping Point to Plant 46 4.2.1.2.26 Shipping Point Determination 46 4.2.1.2.27 Creating Storage Location 47 4.2.1.2.28 Assigning Picking Locations 47 4.2.1.2.29 Creating Sales Office 48 4.2.1.2.30 Assigning Sales Office to Sales Area 49 4.2.1.2.31 Maintaining Sales Group 49 4.2.1.2.32 Assigning Sales Group to Sales Office 50 4.2.1.2.33 Maintaining Transportation Planning Point 50 4.2.2 (Delta) Enterprise Structure (J47) 51 4.2.2.1 Configuration – On Premise 51 4.2.2.1.1 Creation of Organization Structure 51 4.2.2.2 Manual Rework 57 Localization objects for Finance 58 4.3.1 B Bank Account Management - Core [local] (J74) 58 4.3.1.1 Configuration - On Premise 58 4.3.1.1.1 Create Banks, House Banks, Bank Accounts 58 4.3.1.2 Manual Rework 63 4.3.2 Bank Account Management - Delta for Extended Version [local] (BFE) 64 4.3.2.1 Configuration - On Premise 64 4.3.2.1.1 Assign Approval Patterns 65 4.3.2.1.2 Define Responsibilities for Rules Used in Workflow StepsCreate Responsibilities 66 4.3.2.1.3 Manual Rework 68 4.3.3 External Financial Accounting [local] (J16) 69 4.3.3.1 Configuration – Cloud Edition 69 4.3.3.1.1 General Settings (from SAP NetWeaver) 69 4.3.3.1.2 Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) 69 4.3.3.1.3 General Ledger Accounting (New) (from 'Financial Accounting (New)') 87 4.3.3.1.4 Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable 92

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Table of Contents

CUSTOMER 5

4.3.3.1.5 Bank Accounting 119 4.3.3.1.6 Period End Activities 126 4.3.3.2 Manual Rework 144 4.3.4 External Financial Accounting [local] (J16_OP) 146 4.3.4.1 Configuration – On-Premise Edition 146 4.3.4.1.1 Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable 146 4.3.4.2 Manual Rework 159 4.3.5 SEPA for External Financial Accounting [local] (BFS) 161 4.3.5.1 Configuration - On Premise 161 4.3.5.1.1 Accounts Receivable 161 4.3.6 Cash Daily Operation [local] (J76) 162 4.3.6.1 Configuration – Cloud Edition 162 4.3.6.1.1 Enter GL Account for Bank Account 162 4.3.6.1.2 Activate Individual Source Application 163 4.3.6.1.3 Define Clearing Accts for Receiving Bank for Acct. Transfer 164 4.3.6.1.4 Define Clearing Accts for Paying Bank for Acct. Transfer 165 4.3.6.1.5 Settings for Bank Statement Monitor 166 4.3.6.2 Manual Rework 167 4.3.7 Delta Cash Daily Operation [local] (BF3) 168 4.3.7.1 Configuration – On-Premise Edition 168 4.3.7.1.1 Define Clearing Accts for Paying Bank for Acct. Transfer 168 4.3.8 Financial Master Data (Manufacturing) [local] (BF2) 169 4.3.8.1 Configuration - On Premise 169 4.3.8.1.1 FI Master Data Manufacturing 170 4.3.9 Extended Accounting for Trading/Manufacturing [local] (J67) 176 4.3.9.1 Configuration - On Premise 176 4.3.9.1.1 Cost Centers and Groups 177 4.3.9.1.2 Maintain Required Planning Data 186 4.3.9.1.3 Cost Centers and Groups 190 4.3.9.1.4 Maintaining Required Planning Data 193 4.3.9.1.5 Assessments 196 4.3.9.1.6 Manual Rework 200 4.3.9.1.7 Manual Transport of Controlling Data OKE7 202 4.3.10 Activate Material Ledger (J72) 202 4.3.10.1 Configuration - On Premise 202 4.3.10.1.1 Enterprise Structure: Define Valuation Level 203 4.3.10.1.2 Controlling 203 4.3.10.1.3 Materials Management: Maintain Number Ranges for Material Ledger Documents 206 4.3.10.1.4 Run Report SAPRCKM_OBLIGATORY_SETTINGS 206 4.3.10.1.5 Production Startup of Material Ledger 207 4.3.10.2 Manual Rework 207

CUSTOMER 6

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Table of Contents

4.4

4.3.11 Credit Management [local] (BD8) 208 4.3.11.1 Configuration - On Premise 208 4.3.11.1.1 Maintain Pricing Procedures 208 4.3.11.1.2 Integration with Accounts Receivable Accounting 209 4.3.12 Sample Master Data for SAP Credit Management Processing [local] (BN8) 210 4.3.12.1 Configuration - On Premise 210 4.3.12.1.1 Create Domestic Customers 210 4.3.12.1.2 Adding Credit Management Data in BP 213 4.3.13 Asset Accounting [local] (J49) 214 4.3.13.1 Configuration - On Premise 214 4.3.13.1.1 Organizational Structures 214 4.3.13.1.2 Integration with the General Ledger 227 4.3.13.1.3 General Valuation 231 4.3.13.1.4 Depreciation 245 4.3.13.1.5 Transactions 250 4.3.13.1.6 Asset Data Transfer 252 4.3.13.1.7 Preparations for Going Live 256 4.3.13.1.8 Period End Closing 257 Localization objects for Controlling 258 4.4.1 Basic Overhead Cost Controlling [local] (J18) 258 4.4.1.1 Configuration - On Premise 258 4.4.1.1.1 Overhead Controlling 258 4.4.1.1.2 Configuration with Use of CO Master Data 271 4.4.1.2 Manual Rework 276 4.4.1.2.1 Manual Transport of Controlling Data OKE7 278 4.4.2 Delta Basic Overhead Cost Controlling [local] (BE2) 279 4.4.2.1 Configuration – On Premise 279 4.4.2.1.1 Internal Orders and Groups 279 4.4.2.1.2 Accrual Calculation 280 4.4.2.1.3 Assessments 282 4.4.2.2 Manual Rework 285 4.4.2.2.1 Manual Transport of Controlling Data OKE7 286 4.4.3 Profitability Analysis [local] (J53) 287 4.4.3.1 Configuration - On Premise 287 4.4.3.1.1 Create Actual Assessments CCA to CO-PA 287 4.4.3.1.2 Activate Profitability Analysis 289 4.4.4 Profitability Analysis for Manufacturing/Trading [local] (BEF) 290 4.4.4.1 Configuration - On Premise 290 4.4.4.1.1 Create additional assessment segments for Trading/manufacturing in Actual Assessments CCA to CO-PA 290 4.4.5 Product Cost Planning [local] (BE5) 292

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Table of Contents

CUSTOMER 7

4.5

4.4.5.1 Configuration – On-Premise 4.4.5.1.1 Costing Sheet 4.4.5.2 Manual Rework 4.4.6 Cost Object Controlling – by Order [local] (BE7) 4.4.6.1 Configuration – On Premise 4.4.6.1.1 Define Goods Received Valuation for Order Delivery 4.4.7 Cost Object Controlling – by Period [local] (BE9) 4.4.7.1 Configuration – On-Premise 4.4.7.1.1 Define Goods Received Valuation for Order Delivery Localization objects for Material Managements 4.5.1 Output Management - MM [local] (J21) 4.5.1.1 Configuration of Output Management MM – Local Data (for Onpremise) 4.5.1.1.1 Output Condition Record: Invoice Verification 4.5.1.2 Manual Rework 4.5.2 Materials Management - Settings [local] (J05) 4.5.2.1 Logistics General 4.5.2.1.1 Maintaining Company Codes for Materials Management 4.5.2.1.2 Define Attributes of Material Types 4.5.2.2 Configuration of Materials Management 4.5.2.2.1 MRP Settings 4.5.2.2.2 Purchasing 4.5.2.2.3 ERP-Pricing 4.5.2.2.4 Tax Condition Records 4.5.2.2.5 Valuation and Account Assignment 4.5.2.2.6 Logistics Invoice Verification 4.5.3 Materials Management - Settings [local] (BR5) 4.5.3.1 Configuration for OP and CE 4.5.3.1.1 Settings for Logistics General 4.5.3.2 Manual Rework 4.5.4 Batch Management (BLH) 4.5.4.1 Configuration - On Premise 4.5.4.1.1 Batch Management General 4.5.4.1.2 Configuration of Batch Management 4.5.5 Serial Number Management (BLN) 4.5.5.1 Configuration - On Premise 4.5.5.1.1 Configuration 4.5.5.2 Manual Rework 4.5.6 Procurement & Consumption of Consigned Inventory (BMT) 4.5.6.1 Configuration - On Premise 4.5.6.1.1 Master Data 4.5.7 Return to Vendor (BMZ)

CUSTOMER 8

292 292 299 300 300 300 303 303 303 305 305 305 306 307 308 308 308 308 309 309 310 315 319 321 322 330 330 330 333 334 334 334 335 345 345 345 345 346 346 346 351

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Table of Contents

4.6

4.5.7.1 Configuration - On Premise 351 4.5.7.1.1 Returns to Vendor 351 4.5.8 Sample Master Data Business Partners [local] (JA2) 351 4.5.8.1 Configuration - On Premise 351 4.5.8.1.1 Create Domestic Customers 351 4.5.8.1.2 Create Domestic Vendors 357 4.5.8.1.3 Create Domestic Contacts for Business Partners 362 4.5.9 Trading Goods (HAWA) related sample master data [local] (BM7) 365 4.5.9.1 Configuration - On Premise 365 4.5.9.1.1 Creating Material Master – Organization Dependent Views for Trading Materials 365 4.5.10 BP-Customers and -Suppliers, Sample Master Data [local] (BN6) 372 4.5.10.1 Configuration - On Premise 372 4.5.10.1.1 Create Domestic Customers 372 4.5.10.1.2 Create Domestic Vendors 381 4.5.11 Physical Inventory / Inventory Count and Adjustment (BMN) 383 4.5.11.1 Configuration - On Premise 383 4.5.11.1.1 Allow Freezing of Book Inventory Balance in Storage Location 383 4.5.11.1.2 Define Tolerances for Physical Inventory Differences 384 4.5.11.1.3 Define Tolerances for Physical Inventory Differences 385 4.5.12 General materials (MAT) related sample master data sLog/Local (J51) 386 4.5.12.1 Configuration - On Premise 386 4.5.12.1.1 Create Material Master 386 4.5.12.1.2 Create Info Records 389 4.5.12.1.3 Condition Maintenance Purch. Prices 391 4.5.12.1.4 Condition Maintenance Sales Prices 393 4.5.13 Sample Master Data Ariba Integration [local] (J88) 394 4.5.13.1 Configuration - On Premise 394 4.5.13.1.1 Create Domestic Vendors 394 4.5.13.1.2 Create Info Record 396 4.5.13.1.3 Map Company Codes for Log. Invoice 398 4.5.13.1.4 Map Tax Codes for Logistics Invoice Verification 399 4.5.14 BP-Customers and -Suppliers CPD, Sample Master Data [local] (BRC) 399 4.5.14.1 Configuration - On Premise 399 4.5.14.1.1 Create CPD Customers 399 Localization objects for Sales and Distribution 402 4.6.1 Sales and Distribution - Common Settings [local] (J94) 403 4.6.1.1 Configuration - On Premise 403 4.6.1.1.1 ERP Tax 403

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Table of Contents

CUSTOMER 9

4.6.1.1.2 Maintain Tax Condition Records 407 4.6.2 Sales and Distribution - Common Settings [local] (BD2) 408 4.6.2.1 Configuration – Cloud Edition 408 4.6.2.1.1 SD Business Partner Configuration 408 4.6.2.1.2 LIS Configuration 409 4.6.3 Sales and Distribution - Sale from Stock [local] (J04) 411 4.6.3.1 Configuration - On Premise 411 4.6.3.1.1 SD Core Configuration and Logistics Execution 412 4.6.3.1.2 Sales Order Processing I 416 4.6.3.1.3 Country Specific Sale from Stock Pricing 418 4.6.3.1.4 Delivery and Transportation Schedule 421 4.6.3.1.5 Routes 422 4.6.4 Sales and Distribution - Sale from Stock [local] (BD5) 427 4.6.4.1 Configuration – Cloud Edition 427 4.6.4.1.1 SD Core Configuration and Logistics Execution 427 4.6.4.1.2 SD Process Configuration I 433 4.6.4.1.3 Master Data 433 4.6.4.2 Manual Rework 434 4.6.5 Sample Master Data Business Partners [local] (JA2) 435 4.6.5.1 Configuration - On Premise 435 4.6.5.1.1 Create Domestic Customers 435 4.6.5.1.2 Create Domestic Vendors 441 4.6.5.1.3 Create Domestic Contacts for Business Partners 445 4.6.6 Free of Charge Delivery [local] (BDC) 450 4.6.6.1 Configuration - On Premise 450 4.6.6.1.1 Creating Condition Records for Output Type 450 4.6.7 Customer Returns [local] (BDF) 451 4.6.7.1 Configuration - On Premise 451 4.6.7.1.1 Creating Condition Records BA00 451 4.6.8 Returnable Packaging (LEIH) related sample master data [local] (BDZ) 452 4.6.8.1 Configuration - On Premise 452 4.6.8.1.1 Create Material Master – Organization Dependency View for Returnable Packaging 452 4.6.8.1.2 Create Pricing Conditions 455 4.6.9 Returnables Processing [local] (BDY) 456 4.6.9.1 Configuration - On Premise 456 4.6.9.1.1 Master Data 456 4.6.10 SEPA Direct Debit Handling in Sales and Distribution (BKW) 457 4.6.10.1 Configuration – On-Premise 457 4.6.10.1.1 Output Control 457 4.6.10.2 Manual Rework 458

CUSTOMER 10

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Table of Contents

4.7

4.6.11 BP-Customers and -Suppliers, Sample Master Data [local] (BN6) 459 4.6.11.1 Configuration - On Premise 459 4.6.11.1.1 Create Domestic Customers 459 4.6.11.1.2 Create Domestic Vendors 468 4.6.12 BP-Customers and -Suppliers CPD, Sample Master Data [local] (BRC) 470 4.6.12.1 Configuration - On Premise 470 4.6.12.1.1 Create CPD Customers 470 4.6.13 Free Goods Processing [local] (BKC) 474 4.6.13.1 Configuration - On Premise 474 4.6.13.1.1 Activating Free Goods Determination 474 4.6.13.1.2 Master Data 475 4.6.14 Sample Master Data for SEPA Processing [local] (BN9) 476 4.6.14.1 Configuration for OP 476 4.6.14.1.1 Create Domestic Customers 476 4.6.14.1.2 Creating SEPA Mandate Master Data 479 Localization objects for Production Planning 481 4.7.1 Production Planning and Control Settings [local] (BJ1) 481 4.7.1.1 Configuration – On-Premise 481 4.7.1.1.1 Basic Data 481 4.7.1.1.2 Material Requirements Planning (MRP) 490 4.7.1.1.3 Shop Floor Control (SFC) 508 4.7.1.1.4 Repetitive Manufacturing 508 4.7.2 Make-to-Stock Production - Discrete Industry [local] (BJ7) 510 4.7.2.1 Configuration - On Premise 510 4.7.2.1.1 Shop Floor Control (SFC) 510 4.7.3 Make-to-Stock Production - Process Industry [local] (BJA) 517 4.7.3.1 Configuration – On-Premise 517 4.7.3.1.1 Define Order Types-Dependent Parameters 517 4.7.3.1.2 Define and Set Up Control Recipe Destinations 519 4.7.3.1.3 Define Checking Controls 520 4.7.3.1.4 Specify Scheduling Parameters 521 4.7.3.1.5 Define Production Scheduling Profiles 522 4.7.3.1.6 Define Production Supervisor 523 4.7.3.1.7 Define Confirmation Parameters 524 4.7.4 Make-to-Order Production w/o Variant Configuration [local] (BJG) 526 4.7.4.1 Configuration - On Premise 526 4.7.4.1.1 Sales and Distribution 526 4.7.4.1.2 Production Planning and Batch Management 527 4.7.5 Repetitive Manufacturing [local] (BJJ) 540 4.7.5.1 Configuration – On Premise 540 4.7.5.1.1 Defining Production Scheduling Profile 540

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Table of Contents

CUSTOMER 11

4.7.5.1.2 Defining Production Supervisor 541 4.7.6 Production Material Related Sample Master Data [local] (BM2) 541 4.7.6.1 Configuration - On Premise 541 4.7.6.1.1 Create Material Master – Organization Dependent for Production material 541 4.7.7 Rework Production Order - Stock-Manufactured Material [local] (BJP) 570 4.7.7.1 Configuration - On Premise 570 4.7.7.1.1 Shop Floor Control 570 4.7.8 Rework Production Order Sample Master Data [local] (BJY) 576 4.7.8.1 Master Data –OP 576 4.7.9 Production Subcontracting - External Processing [local] (BJM) 580 4.7.9.1 Configuration - On Premise 580 4.7.9.1.1 Master Data 580 4.7.10 Central Production Sample Master Data (for Library - Mfg.) [local] (BJ3) 582 4.7.10.1 Configuration - On Premise 582 4.7.10.1.1 Logistics – General Data 582 4.7.10.1.2 General Data Production 584 4.7.10.1.3 Rework 602 4.7.11 Repetitive Manufacturing Sample Master Data [local] (BR4) 604 4.7.11.1 Master Data – On Premise 604 4.7.11.1.1 Creating Material Master - Work Scheduling View 604 4.7.11.1.2 Changing Material Master – MRP Views 605 4.7.11.1.3 Creating BOMs 607 4.7.11.1.4 Creating Routing 608 4.7.11.1.5 Creating Production Version for Semi - finished Product 610 4.7.12 Make-to-Order Production w/o Variant Configuration Master Data [local] (BJU) 611 4.7.12.1 Configuration - On Premise 611 4.7.12.1.1 Master Data – On Premise 611 4.7.13 MTS Production - Process Industry Sample Master Data [local] (BJR) 622 4.7.13.1 Configuration – On-Premise 622 4.7.13.1.1 Master Data 622 4.7.14 MTS Production - Discrete Industry Sample Master Data [local] (BJL) 638 4.7.14.1 Master Data –OP 638 4.7.14.1.1 Create Material Master - Work Scheduling View 638 4.7.14.1.2 Change Material Master – General Plant Data/Storage 1 639 4.7.14.1.3 Create Routing - Finished- and Semi Finished Product 640 4.7.14.1.4 Create BOMs - Finished- and Semi Finished Products 644

CUSTOMER 12

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Table of Contents

4.7.14.1.5 4.7.14.1.6

Create Production Version for Finished Product Create Batch Search Strategy for Production Order

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Table of Contents

646 649

CUSTOMER 13

1 Introduction 1.1 Purpose of this document This document explains how to carry out country localization by leveraging SAP Best Practices Baseline contents (Germany) (http://service.sap.com/s4op) for SAP S/4 HANA onpremise edition 1511 feature package stack 01. Note that the activities recorded in this document represent the status as of March 2016. For the most up-to-date SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition information, please refer to the standard documentation from (http://help.sap.com/s4hana_op_1511_001 ). Before you decide to add your country localization on top of SAP Best Practices Baseline contents, you should have checked the SAP Note 2244659 for the installation of SAP Best Practices S/4HANA on premise edition (Germany).

1.2 Scope of this document The SAP Best Practices for SAP S/4HANA are tailored specifically to accelerate and simplify the adoption of SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition for faster time to value, by providing pre-configured content for core business processes with role-specific, responsive, and simple user experience. However, as with all new products, it will take time for S/4 HANA to be localized for many other countries. This document intents to enable customers or partners on how to carry out the customizing activities in the transaction SPRO (implementation guide IMG) for the special legislation and business practice. This document provides you with the following information about localizations: 1. New features of SAP Best Practices Baseline solution 2. Scope coverage of SAP Best Practices Baseline solution 3. Localization objects per Business Priority

1.3 Out of scope This document is created based on SAP S/4 HANA on-premise edition 1511 feature package stack 01, it might not be applicable for other versions below or higher. It does not describe a generic implementation of SAP S/4 HANA on-premise edition 1511 feature package stack 01. It does not support the system conversion scenario, so it might not be applicable if you are doing the customizing on a converted system. It does not provide best practices for new scope items creation. (For the definition of scope items, you can find more information at SAP Best Practices new content architecture )

CUSTOMER 14

Introduction

It does not provide specific globalization for countries. You can refer to the Simplification List from (http://help.sap.com/s4hana_op_1511_001), sap note 2244803 Fiscal and Accounting Legal Reporting for SAP S/4H, sap note 2029012, sap note 2227963, and further relevant notes on country specific restrictions.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Introduction

CUSTOMER 15

2 New Features of SAP Best Practices Baseline With SAP S/4HANA (SAP Business Suite 4 SAP HANA), on-premise edition, SAP is providing a new product and a next generation of business applications – simple enterprise software for big data and designed to help you run simple in the digital economy. In order to accelerate and simplify the path to SAP S/4HANA, on-premise edition for faster time to value, SAP developed a renewed SAP Best Practices Baseline solution. With this solution, customers can quickly and affordably implement functionalities to enable pre-defined business. Customers can set up a best-practice client without configuration content from client 000. A best-practice client facilitates automatic content activation. The additional customizing activities are carried out in the transaction SPRO. You can find how to use best-practice implementation contents at (http://service.sap.com/~sapidp/012002523100012419282015E/ ). You can find the pre-defined business processes at Scope coverage of SAP Best Practices Baseline contents.

2.1 SAP Best Practices new content architecture SAP Best Practices methodology brings together: Business view (Content Modeling) and Implementation view (consistent content implementation). A solution consists of a specific number of scope items (business view) and a scope item contains a certain number of building blocks (implementation view). The picture below indicates the content structure, 1. Scope item is the pre-defined business process, which contains a certain number of building blocks; 2. Building Block is a set of customizing and master data steps for the respective piece of business content; 3. Activity is the smallest logical unit in the SAP Best Practices architecture, which includes a specific customizing and master data steps.

CUSTOMER 16

New Features of SAP Best Practices Baseline

In order to support the Global Template concept S/4 HANA Best Practices Global Template, the following two building block types are used: 1. Central Building Blocks are required to be activated only once. These building blocks contain all the central settings as well as some country specific local content that have no dependence on the localized organizational units 2. Country Specific Building Blocks are required to be activated for the specific country selected. These building blocks contain only the local content that have dependence on the localized organizational units. How to localize with SAP Best Practices New Features of SAP Best Practices Baseline

CUSTOMER 17

2.2 S/4 HANA Best Practices Global Template SAP Best Practices Baseline solution provides a Global Template to easily handle the multi-national company's headquarter and subsidiary business requirements. It defines business processes and related master data, which can be used as a basis across countries and industries o Flexibility: To add industry and/or country specific extensions o Extensibility: easy to enhance for partners, countries and industries that SAP does not cover o Simplification of master data management o Include integration scenarios o Simplify testing o Optimize business processes to utilize latest technology o Possible one global layer for all delivery options

2.2.1 Multi-countries in one client With SAP S/4 HANA, the ERP scope for multiple countries is implemented in one client for the first time. If a company has several legal entities (several company codes) in one or several countries its solution will run in only one client. This functionality is available for the complete enterprise structure of the company. This results in the following key features: 1. Country based preconfigured content is activated in one client 2. Country specific settings are available in one client for all countries 3. Period end closing processes on local level fully supported 4. It allows country related regulatory reporting and overall processes on company level (For example, controlling)

2.2.2

Parallel accounting for multi-national company

With SAP S/4 HANA, customers can use parallel ledger to o manage General Ledger Accounting in accordance with several accounting principles simultaneously, for example with a local accounting principle and the accounting principle of a corporate group; o manage Asset Accounting in accordance with several accounting principles simultaneously, for example with a local accounting principle and the accounting principle of a corporate group. This happens analog to General Ledger Accounting. Separate documents are posted for each accounting principle.

CUSTOMER 18

New Features of SAP Best Practices Baseline

Parallel ledger in Global Template was designed to address the multi-national company reporting requirements. These companies need to report in most cases under IFRS, but still have specific local reporting requirements, according with local GAAP. International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) are used by 135 countries, therefore SAP Best Practices Baseline solution delivers a preconfigured content with two ledgers: -

Leading Ledger for IFRS (0L)

-

Local Ledger for local GAAP (2L).

Localized content is maintained in order to cover local requirements. Related to local ledger, common Global Template covers pre configuration for Local GAAP. All the company codes use the Operational Chart of Accounts (YCOA). This YCOA is mapped to the Alternative Chart of Accounts (YIKR) if it is needed for local reporting purposes (for example, Germany). Different accounting principles, valuation methods and depreciation areas were designed to cover all reporting requirements (Local and IFRS). To accommodate the Global Template, the following configuration was added: o Balance sheet and P/L statement by function based on CoA YCOA o Balance sheet and P/L statement by nature based on CoA YIKR (for Germany) o New set of financial statement versions designed for IFRS Other impact of parallel ledger design concept is related to Inventory valuation. At this time, only inventory valuation based on first in – first out method (FIFO) is taken into consideration. The picture below indicates the structure configured in the Baseline solution package.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices New Features of SAP Best Practices Baseline

CUSTOMER 19

3 Scope coverage of SAP Best Practices Baseline contents Before you start to localize the contents through customizing activities, it is strongly recommended that you get familiar with the pre-defined solution scope. This section provides an overview of the pre-defined business processes within the Global Template. You can find the business process overview and related documents by downloading the solution package at http://service.sap.com/s4op.

3.1 Scope Coverage in 1511 SPS01: On-Premise Edition, Overview

CUSTOMER 20

Scope coverage of SAP Best Practices Baseline contents

3.2 Scope Coverage in 1511 SPS01: On-Premise Edition, Procure to Pay SAP Best Practices for Streamlined Procure to Pay: While companies often focus on revenue, procurement savings can increase profits about five times more. The key to

maximizing procurement's success in this critical role is to deliver consistent quality, savings, and compliance over time.

3.3 Scope Coverage in 1511 SPS01: On-Premise Edition, Plan to Product SAP Best Practices for Accelerated Plan to Product: Manage your entire manufacturing process – from planning and scheduling to monitoring and analysis – while improving efficiency across your value chain. We provide business scenarios that are crucial for

companies in the process, discrete, and repetitive manufacturing industries. How to localize with SAP Best Practices Scope coverage of SAP Best Practices Baseline contents

CUSTOMER 21

3.4 Scope Coverage in 1511 SPS01: On-Premise Edition, Order to Cash SAP Best Practices for Optimized Order to Cash: Technology has changed the dynamics of customer relationships. People today are more informed and empowered than ever

before. Companies today need to adapt to this new reality to engage customers and succeed.

3.5 Scope Coverage in 1511 SPS01: On-Premise Edition, Core Finance SAP Best Practices for Core Finance: Achieve excellence in financial management & accounting: In the face of sustained market volatility, increasing regulatory compliance, growing pressure on margins, and managers demanding instantaneous financial insight

CUSTOMER 22

Scope coverage of SAP Best Practices Baseline contents

at any time, from anywhere, finance organizations must have best practices in place to excel.

3.6 Scope Coverage in 1511 SPS01: On-Premise Edition, Analytics SAP Best Practices for Analytics: Increase your organization's IQ with business intelligence Empower your people with easy access to the business intelligence (BI) and data exploration tools they need to make faster, more informed decisions. Boost your

organization's collective IQ by providing information that can help business users drive smarter processes, improve performance, and become more effective in everything they do.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Scope coverage of SAP Best Practices Baseline contents

CUSTOMER 23

4 Localization objects - per Business Priority This section gives a detailed step by step instructions on how the SAP Best Practices team localized the Netherlands. The Netherlands serves as an example to enable you to localize a different country. The order in which the instructions are followed is significant. After completing the customizing activities in the order given in this document, you can test the business process by referring to the test script provided by the solution package from http://service.sap.com/s4op.

4.1 Configuration sequence and simultaneous configuration The following configuration objects are the first building blocks that must be configured in the exact sequence listed in the table below. We start with the Germany solution as a foundation and the sequence is derived from that solution. Therefore you will encounter references to Germany (DE) in the following table. #

BBID

Title

Module

1

J57 (DE)

Enterprise Structure [local]

All

2

J47(DE)

(Delta) Enterprise Structure [local]

All

3

J74 (DE)

Bank Account Management - Core [local]

FI

4

J16 (DE)

External Financial Accounting [local]

FI

5

J16 (DE)_OP External Financial Accounting [local]

FI

6

J18 (DE)

Basic Overhead Cost Controlling

CO

7

BE2 (DE)

Delta Basic Overhead Cost Controlling

CO

8

J53 (DE)

Profitability Analysis [local]

CO

9

J05 (DE)

Materials Management

MM

10 BR5 (DE)

Materials Management - Settings [local]

MM

11 J94 (DE)

Sales and Distribution - Common Settings [local]

SD

12 BD2 (DE)

Sales and Distribution - Common Settings [local]

SD

13 J04 (DE)

Sales and Distribution - Sale from Stock [local]

SD

14 BD5 (DE)

Sales and Distribution - Sale from Stock [local]

SD

15 BF2 (DE)

Financial Master Data (Manufacturing) [local]

FI

16 J67 (DE)

Extended Accounting for Trading/Manufacturing [local]

FI

CUSTOMER 24

Localization objects - per Business Priority

17 BEF (DE)

Profitability Analysis for Manufacturing/Trading [local]

CO

18 J72 (DE)

Activate Material Ledger [local]

FI

19 JA2 (DE)

Sample Master Data Business Partners [local]

SD/MM

20 BM7 (DE)

Trading Goods (HAWA) related sample master data [local] MM

The other building blocks should not be dependent on one another therefore they can be configured simultaneously. In this document the localization objects/ building blocks are grouped by functional area and are in the correct configuration sequence. In the Excel File below you can find the Prerequisites Matrix for configuration.

Prerequisites_Matri x_BP_OP_ENTPR_S4HANAX_DEV2_EN_DE (3).xlsx

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 25

4.2 Localization objects for basic settings 4.2.1 Enterprise structure (J57) In the Baseline solution, a pre-defined enterprise structure is set as below. You are expected to create a local enterprise structure according to the instructions provided below.

CUSTOMER 26

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.2.1.1

IFRS/ Local GAAP

If your country does not apply IFRS, you need to add a local GAAP for local accounting principle. You can refer to the following table for IFRS/Local GAAP designing differences: Item

IFRS

Local GAAP

Ledger

0L

2L

Accounting principle

IFRS

LG

Valuation Area

IF

NL

Valuation method

IFRS

BILM (for NL)

Fixed assets classes

Standard fixed assets classes

Standard fixed assets classes + Special classes according with local requirements

32 - for local currency (posts in real time)

01 - for local currency (post APC immediate and depreciation to 2L)

33 - for group currency (does not post)

31 - for group currency (does not post)

Depreciatio n Area

4.2.1.2

15 - Tax depreciation area. Tax depreciation area does not post.

Configuration - On Premise

4.2.1.2.1 Defining Transportation Zones UseC This activity defines transportation zones according to country, and depending on your company's needs. Transportation zones represent delivery recipient (ship-to party) regions, or delivery shipper (vendor) regions. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 27

IMG Menu

Alternative IMG paths: Sales and Distribution  Basic Functions  Routes  Route Determination  Define Transportation Zones OR Logistics Execution  Shipping  Basic Shipping Functions  Routes  Route Determination  Define Transportation Zones OR Logistics Execution  Transportation  Basic Transportation Functions  Routes  Route Determination  Define Transportation Zones

Transaction Code

OVR1

2.

On the Change View “Customers: Transportation Zones”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

Make the following entries:

4.

Ctry

TranspZone

Description

NL

3700010000

Region North Holland

NL

3700020000

Region South Holland

NL

3700030000

Region Friesland Gro

NL

3700040000

Region Overijsel Dre

NL

3700050000

Region Gelderland

NL

3700060000

Region Utrecht

NL

3700070000

Region Zeeland

NL

3700080000

Region North Brabant

NL

3700090000

Region Flevoland

NL

3700100000

Region Limburg

Save your entries.

4.2.1.2.2 Create Company Use In this activity, you create your company.

CUSTOMER 28

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG path

Enterprise Structure  Definition  Financial Accounting  Define Company

Transaction code

SPRO

On the Change View Internal trading partners: Overview screen, choose New Entries to enter: Company

3710

Company name

Company 3710

Country

NL

Save your entries.

4.2.1.2.3 Creating Company Code Use This activity creates your company code. The company code is an organizational unit used in accounting. It is used to structure the business organization from a financial accounting perspective. If you would like to create several company codes, we recommend that you create them as a copy of an existing company code. This action has the advantage that you also copy the existing company code-specific parameters. If necessary, you can change certain data in the relevant application. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Definition  Financial Accounting  Edit, Copy, Delete, Check Company Code

Transaction Code

OX02

2.

On the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Edit Company Code Data.

3.

On the Change View “Company Code”: Overview screen, choose New Entries to enter the following data.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 29

Company Code

Company Name

City

Country Currency Language

3710

Company Code 3710

'sHertogenbosch

NL

4.

Save your entries.

5.

Maintain the address data for your Company Code.

EUR

NL

4.2.1.2.4 Entering Global Parameters for Company Code Use In this activity, you can make various global specifications for the company code. In addition, you can look at the most important specifications of the company code at any time in the overview. This action includes, among other things, the chart of accounts, and the fiscal year variant.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting  Financial Accounting Global Settings  Global Parameters for Company Code  Enter Global Parameters

Transaction Code

OBY6

2.

On the Change View “Company Code Global Data”: Overview screen, switch the screen to change mode, if necessary.

3.

Select the line with Company Code 3710 and choose Details.

4.

On the Change View “Company Code Global Data”: Details screen, enter the following data: Accounting organization Chart of accts

YCOA

Company Credit control area

A000

Fiscal Year Variant

K4

VAT Registration Number

NL123456789B01

Processing parameters Field status variant

0010

CUSTOMER 30

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Max. Exchange rate deviation

10

Workflow variant Negative postings permitted 5.

X

Save your entries.

4.2.1.2.5 Checking for Duplicate Invoices Use This step specifies for each company code that the system is to check for duplicate invoices when invoices are entered. This check prevents incoming invoices being accidentally entered, and paid more than once. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management  Logistics Invoice Verification  Incoming Invoice  Set Check for Duplicate Invoices

Transaction Code

SM30 (Customizing Object V_169P_DC)

2.

On the Change View “Duplicate Invoice Check”: Overview screen, switch the screen to change mode, if necessary.

3.

Select the line with CoCd (Company Code) 3710 and choose Details.

4.

On the Change View “Company Code Global Data”: Details screen, enter the following data:

5.

CoCd Name

Check co. code

Check reference

Check inv. date

3710 Company Code 3710

X

X

X

Save your entries.

4.2.1.2.6 Configuring Price Change in Previous Period/Year Use In this IMG activity, you configure price changes in the previous period or year.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 31

Under inflation accounting in Materials Management (MM), the system can post the replacement cost resulting from replacement cost valuation (Market Price Determination or Inflation Index Adjustment) as a price change in Financial Accounting (FI). If you want a price change that was posted in the previous period to be carried forward to the current period, you make the system settings in this IMG activity Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management  Valuation and Account Assignment  Balance Sheet Valuation Procedures  Set Up Replacement Cost Valuation (Inflation) Price Changes  Configure Price Change in Previous Period/Previous Year

Transaction Code

OMRN

2.

On the Change View “Price Change in Previous Period, not in Current Period”: Overview screen, switch the screen to Change mode, if necessary.

3.

Select the line with CoCd (Company Code) 3710.

4.

Enter the following data: CoCd Price carr. Over 3710 Deselected

5.

Save your entries.

4.2.1.2.7 Assigning Company Code to Controlling Area Use This step assigns the company codes for which you want to carry out common cost controlling to a controlling area. You may carry out cross-company code cost accounting only by explicitly assigning the company codes to a controlling area.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Assignment  Controlling  Assign company code to controlling area

CUSTOMER 32

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Transaction Code

OX19

2.

On the Change View “Basic data”: Overview screen, select the line with COAr (controlling area) set to A000.

3.

Double click the Assignment of company codes folder.

4.

Enter the following data:

5.

CoCd

Company name

3710

Company Code 3710

Save your entries.

4.2.1.2.8 Assign Company Code to Company Use In this step, you assign company codes to a company. Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG path

Enterprise Structure  Assignment  Financial Accounting  Assign company code to company

Transaction code

SPRO

On the Change View “Assign company code -> company”: Overview screen, enter the following data: CoCd

City

Company

3710

s-Hertogenbosch

3710

Save your entries

4.2.1.2.9 Assigning Company Code to Credit Control Area Use This step assigns company codes to a credit control area.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 33

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Assignment  Financial Accounting  Assign company code to credit control area

Transaction Code

OB38

2.

On the Change View “Assign company code -> credit control area”: Overview screen, find the lines with CoCd (Company Code) set to BP01.

3.

Enter the following data:

4.

CoCd Company Name

City

CCAr

Overwrite CC area

3710

's-Hertogenbosch

A000

X

Company Code 3710

Save your entries.

4.2.1.2.10 Defining and Assigning Sales Organization Defining Sales Organization Use This step defines the sales organizations in your company. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Definition  Sales and Distribution  Define, copy, delete, check sales organization

Transaction Code

OVX5

2.

On the Change View “Sales organizations”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

Enter the following data: Field

Value entered

Sales Organization

3710

(Description)

Dom. Sales Org NL

Statistics currency

EUR

CUSTOMER 34

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.

Save your entries.

Assigning Sales Organization to Company Code Use This step assigns a sales organization to your company code. You can use this step to define the allocation of sales organizations to company codes. This action establishes a link between the SD and FI systems. A sales organization belongs to just one company code. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Assignment  Sales and Distribution  Assign sales organization to company code

Transaction Code

OVX3

2.

On the Sales Organizations -> Company Code: Overview screen, select Sales Organization 3710 and assign both to Company Code 3710.

3.

Save your entries.

4.2.1.2.11 Defining Distribution Channel Use This step defines the distribution channels in your company, adapting the functional scope of a distribution channel to your organization. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Definition  Sales and Distribution  Define, copy, delete, check distribution channel.

Transaction Code

OVXI

In the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Define distribution channel.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 35

3.

On the Change View “Distribution Channels”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

4.

Enter the following data.

5.

Distr. Channel

Name

10

Direct Sales

Save your entries.

4.2.1.2.12 Assigning Distribution Channel to Sales Organization Use This step allocates the distribution channels to a sales organization. In this case, you can assign as many distribution channels as desired to a sales organization. In addition, a distribution channel can be valid for several sales organizations. Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Assignment  Sales and Distribution  Assign distribution channel to sales organization

Transaction Code

OVXK

On the Sales Organization  Distribution Channels: Overview screen, choose New Entries, and maintain the following assignments: SOrg

Name

DChl

Name

3710

Dom. Sales Org (NL)

10

Direct Sales

Save your entries.

4.2.1.2.13 Creating Divisions Use This step defines the divisions at your company. You use divisions to group together materials, products, or services. The system uses the division to determine the sales areas and business areas to which a material, product, or service is assigned.

CUSTOMER 36

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Logistics - General  Material Master  Settings for Key Fields  Define Divisions

Transaction Code

OMSP

2.

On the Change View “Divisions”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

Enter the following data:

4.

Division

Name

00

Product Division 00

Save your entries.

4.2.1.2.14 Assigning Division to Sales Organization Use This step allocates as many divisions as desired to a sales organization. Any one division can belong to several sales organizations. Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Assignment  Sales and Distribution  Assign division to sales organization

Transaction Code

OVXA

On the Assignment Sales Organization - Division: Overview screen, choose New Entries, and create the following entries: SOrg.

Name

Dv

Name

3710

Dom. Sales Org NL

00

Product Division 00

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 37

4.2.1.2.15 Setting up Sales Area Use This step sets up the sales areas. You can create a sales area for any combination of sales organization, distribution channel, and division.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Assignment  Sales and Distribution  Set up sales area

Transaction Code

OVXG

2.

On the Assignment Sales Org. – Distribution Channel – Division screen, choose New Entries.

3.

Make the following entries:

4.

SOrg.

Name

DChl

Name

Dv

Name

3710

Dom. Sales Org NL

10

Direct Sales

00

Product Division 00

Save your entries.

4.2.1.2.16 Defining Common Distribution Channels Use This menu option defines common distribution channels. You use this menu item to define distribution channels, which have common master data. The allocation is valid within a sales organization. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Sales and Distribution  Master Data  Define Common Distribution Channels

Transaction Code

VOR1

On the Change View “Dist. Channel per Sales Org. - Assign Master Data”: Overview screen, make the following entries. CUSTOMER

38

Localization objects - per Business Priority

3.

SOrg. DChi Name

DChConds

Name

DChCust/Mt

Name

3710 10

10

Direct Sales

10

Direct Sales

Direct Sales

Save your entries.

4.2.1.2.17 Defining Common Divisions Use This step defines the divisions that common master data should apply to. The definition is valid within each sales organization. Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Sales and Distribution  Master Data  Define Common Divisions

Transaction Code

VOR2

On the Change View “Org. Unit: Divisions per Sales Org – Assign Master Data”: Overview screen, make the following entries: SOrg. Dv Name

DivCon Name

DivCus Name

3710 00 Product Division 00

00

00

Product Division 00

Product Division 00

Save your entries.

4.2.1.2.18 Creating Purchasing Organization Use This step creates a purchasing organization in your company. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 39

IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Definition  Materials Management  Maintain purchasing organization

Transaction Code

OX08

2.

On the Change View “Purchasing Organizations”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

Enter the following data:

4.

Purch. Organization

Purch. org. descr.

3710

Purch. Org.3710

Save your entries.

4.2.1.2.19 Assigning Purchasing Organization to Company Code Use This step assigns purchasing organizations to company codes. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Assignment  Materials Management  Assign purchasing organization to company code

Transaction Code

OX01

2.

On the Purchasing Organizations -> Company Code: Overview screen, select Company Code 3710, and assign it to Purchasing organization 3710.

3.

Save your entries.

4.2.1.2.20Defining Valuation Area Use This step defines a valuation area in your company. A plant can only belong to one company code.

CUSTOMER 40

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Definition  Logistics - General  Define valuation level

Transaction Code

OX14

2.

On the Valuation Level screen, select the Valuation area is a plant radio button.

3.

Save your entries.

4.2.1.2.21 Creating Plant Defining Plant Use This step assigns each plant to a company code. A plant can only belong to one company code.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Definition  Logistics - General  Define, copy, delete, check plant

Transaction Code

OX10

2.

In the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Define Plant.

3.

On the Change View “Plants”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

4.

Make the following entries. Plnt

Name 1

3710

Plant 1

5.

Enter address data for each plant.

6.

Enter the Factory Calendar NL.

7.

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 41

Defining Plant Parameters Use This step makes and defines general plant settings.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management  Inventory Management and Physical inventory  Plant Parameters

Transaction Code

SM30 with Customizing Object V_159L

2.

On the Change View “General plant settings in inventory Management”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

Select Plant 3710, and make the following entries: Field

Entry

Del. Compl. Default

X

BBD/Prod Date

X

BOM Usage

1

BOM Application

BEST

Trans./Event Type

WV

Stock type

1

Alternative unit

X

Batch in background

X

Movement allowed

X

Days mvt. Allowed

10

Retention period

30

4.

Save your entries.

5.

Choose Back.

6.

Save your entries.

CUSTOMER 42

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Assigning Plant to Company Code Use This step assigns each plant to a company code. A plant can only belong to one company code.

Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Assignment  Logistics - General  Assign Plant to Company Code

Transaction Code

OX18

On the Allocation of Plants -> Company Code: Overview screen, make the following assignments. CoCD

Plnt

Company Code 3710

3710 Plant 1NL

Save your entries.

Assigning Standard Purchasing Organization to Plant Use This step assigns a standard purchasing organization to a plant. If several purchasing organizations procure for a certain plant, you can define one of them as the standard purchasing organization for the transactions. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Assignment  Materials Management  Assign Standard Purchasing Organization to Plant

Transaction Code

OMKI

On the Change View “Default Purchasing Organization”: Overview screen, set 3710 as the Standard Purchasing Organization, as follows.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 43

3.

Plnt

POrg

Name 1

3710

3710

Plant 1

Save your entries.

4.2.1.2.22 Assigning Sales Organization - Distribution Channel - to Plant Use This step, assigns any number of plants to a combination of sales organization, and distribution channel. A plant can be assigned more than once. Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Assignment  Sales and Distribution  Assign sales organization – distribution channel – plant

Transaction Code

OVX6

On the Plants -> Sales Organization/Distribution Channel”: Overview screen, make the following assignments. Sales organization/distribution channel

Assign to Plants

3710 / 10 Dom. Sales Org NL (NL) / Direct Sales

3710 Plant 1 NL(NL)

Save your entries.

4.2.1.2.23 Assigning Purchasing Organization to Plant Use This step assigns purchasing organizations to the plants for which they are responsible. You have the following options:  One purchasing organization procures for one plant. This action is plant-specific purchasing.  One purchasing organization procures for several plants.  Several purchasing organizations procure for one plant.

CUSTOMER 44

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Assignment  Materials Management  Assign purchasing organization to plant

Transaction Code

0X17

On the Change view "Assign Purchasing Organization to Plant ": Overview screen make following assignments. POrg

Description

Plnt

Name 1

3710

Purch. Org 3710

3710

Plant 1(NL)

Save your entries.

4.2.1.2.24Defining Shipping Points Use This step defines the shipping points, and adapts them to your organization. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Definition  Logistics Execution  Define, copy, delete, check shipping point

Transaction Code

OVXD

2.

In the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Define Point.

3.

On the Change View “Shipping Points”: Overview screen, choose New Entries, and make the following entries.

4.

Shipping Point

Description

Departure/Transportation Zone

Factory Calendar

3710

Shipping Point 3710

3700080000

NL

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 45

4.2.1.2.25 Assigning Shipping Point to Plant Use This step allocates as many shipping points as desired to the plants. Any one shipping point can belong to several plants.

Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Assignment  Logistics Execution  Assign shipping point to plant

Transaction Code

OVXC

On the Shipping Points -> Plants: Overview screen, make the following assignments. Plants

Assign to Shipping Points

3710 Plant 1 (NL)

Shipping Point 3710

Save your entries.

4.2.1.2.26Shipping Point Determination Use This step allocates the shipping points to the desired combinations of shipping condition, and loading group for each plant. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Logistics Execution  Shipping  Basic Shipping Functions  Shipping Point and Goods Receiving Point Determination  Assign Shipping Points

Transaction Code

OVL2

On the Change View “Shipping Point Determination”: Overview screen, make the following assignments. CUSTOMER

46

Localization objects - per Business Priority

3.

SC

LGrp

Plnt

PrShP

01

0001

3710

3710

02

0001

3710

3710

03

0001

3710

3710

04

0001

3710

3710

Save your entries.

4.2.1.2.27 Creating Storage Location Use This step creates a storage location (the place where stock is physically kept within a plant).

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Definition  Materials Management  Maintain Storage Location

Transaction Code

OX09

2.

On the Determine Work Area: Entry screen, in the Plant field, enter 3710, and choose Enter.

3.

On the Change View “Storage Locations”: Overview screen, enter the following:

4.

Plant

SLoc

Description

3710

371A

Std. storage 1

371B

Std. storage 2

Save your entries.

4.2.1.2.28 Assigning Picking Locations Use This step assigns the picking locations to the combinations of shipping point and storage condition for every plant.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 47

Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Logistics Execution  Shipping  Picking  Determine Picking Location  Assign Picking Location

Transaction Code

OVL3

On the Change View “Picking Location Determination”: Overview screen, enter the following: ShPt

Plnt

SC

SLoc

3710

3710



371A

Save your entries.

4.2.1.2.29Creating Sales Office Use This step defines the sales offices in your company. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Definition  Sales and Distribution  Maintain sales office

Transaction Code

OVX1

On the Change View “Sales offices”: Overview screen, enter the following data: Sales Office

Description

370

Sales Office 370

3.

Maintain the Address Data for each Sales Office.

4.

Save your entries.

CUSTOMER 48

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.2.1.2.30

Assigning Sales Office to Sales Area

Use This step allocates as many sales offices as desired to the sales areas. Any one sales office can belong to several sales areas at the same time. The sales areas previously defined are automatically proposed as defaults for allocation.

Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Assignment  Sales and Distribution  Assign sales office to sales area

Transaction Code

SPRO

On the Sales Offices -> Sales Area: Overview screen, make the following assignments: SOrg. Name

DChl Name

Dv Name

SOff.

3710 Dom. Sales

10

00 Product Division 00

3710 Sales Office 100

Direct Sales

Name

Save your entries.

4.2.1.2.31 Maintaining Sales Group Use This step defines sales groups in your company. The definition of sales groups is optional. You can use the SD system without creating sales groups. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Definition  Sales and Distribution  Maintain sales group

Transaction Code

OVX4

On the Change View “Sales Groups”: Overview screen, enter the following data:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 49

3.

Sales group

Description

370

Sales Group 370

Save your entries.

4.2.1.2.32 Assigning Sales Group to Sales Office Use This step assigns as many sales groups as desired to the sales offices. Any one sales group can belong to several sales offices. Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Assignment  Sales and Distribution  Assign sales group to sales office

Transaction Code

OVXJ

On the Sales Groups -> Sales Office: Overview screen, make the following assignments. SOff.

Description

SGrp

Description

370

Sales Office 370

370

Sales Group 370

Save your entries.

4.2.1.2.33 Maintaining Transportation Planning Point Use This step defines a transportation planning point. The transportation planning point is responsible for planning shipments with particular features. A shipment is assigned to one transportation planning point. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Definition  Logistics Execution  Maintain Transportation Planning Point

CUSTOMER 50

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Transaction Code 2.

3.

SM30

On the Change View “Sales Groups”: Overview screen, enter the following data: TPPt

Description

CoCd

3710

Transp. 3710

3710

Save your entries.

4.2.2

(Delta) Enterprise Structure (J47)

4.2.2.1

Configuration – On Premise

4.2.2.1.1 Creation of Organization Structure Define Shipping Point and Maintain Shipping Point Address Data Use In this activity, you define the shipping point 371R. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Logistics Execution  Define, copy, delete, check shipping point

Transaction Code

SM30 (Customizing Object V_TVST)

2.

On the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Define Shipping Point.

3.

On the Change View "Shipping Points": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

4.

Make the following entries: Field

Value

Shipping Point

371R

Description (EN)

Shipping Point 371R

Description (DE)

Versandstelle 371R

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 51

Location Country

NL

Departure zone

#0000000001

Times Factory calendar

01

Determine Times Rounding Work Days

0

Print Picking List Output Type

EK00

Message language

EN

Number of messages

1

Send Time

3

Transmission Medium

#1

5.

Choose the Address button.

6.

Make the following entries: Field

User Action or Values

House Number

16

Street

Waterlooplein

Post Code

1011

City

Amsterdam

Country

NL

Region Time Zone 7.

CET

Save your entries.

Result You defined the shipping point.

CUSTOMER 52

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Assign Shipping Point to Plant Use In this activity, you assign the shipping point to the plant.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Assignment  Logistics Execution  Assign Shipping Point to Plant

Transaction Code

OVXC

2.

On the Change View "Shipping Points  Plants": Overview screen, select the entry 3710 Plant 1 and choose the Assign button.

3.

On the Shipping Points -> Plants screen, in the Shipping Point dialog box, select the entry 371R and choose Enter.

4.

Save your entries.

Result You assigned the shipping point to the plant.

Define Loading Groups Use In this activity, you define the loading groups.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Logistics Execution  Shipping  Basic Shipping Functions  Shipping Point and Goods Receiving Point Determination  Define Loading Groups

Transaction Code

SM30 (Customizing Object V_TLGR)

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 53

2.

On the Change View "Routes: Loading Groups": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

Make the following entries:

4.

Loading Group

Description

0002

Forklift

0003

Manual

Save your entries.

Result You defined the loading groups.

Assign Shipping Points Use In this activity, you assign shipping points to shipping conditions, loading groups, and plants.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Logistics Execution  Shipping  Basic Shipping Functions  Shipping Point and Goods Receiving Point Determination  Assign Shipping Point

Transaction Code

SM30 (Customizing Object V_TVSTZ)

2.

On the Change View "Shipping Point Determination": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

Make the following entries: Shipping Condition

Loading Group

Plant

Proposed Shipping Point

01

0001

3710

3710

01

0002

3710

3710

01

0003

3710

3710

02

0001

3710

3710

CUSTOMER 54

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.

Shipping Condition

Loading Group

Plant

Proposed Shipping Point

02

0002

3710

3710

02

0003

3710

3710

03

0001

3710

3710

03

0002

3710

3710

03

0003

3710

3710

04

0001

3710

3710

04

0002

3710

3710

04

0003

3710

3710

RE

0001

3710

371R

RE

0002

3710

371R

RE

0003

3710

371R

Save your entries.

Result You assigned the shipping points.

Maintain Storage Location Use In this activity, you maintain storage locations. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Enterprise Structure  Definition  Materials Management  Maintain Storage Location

Transaction Code

OX09

2.

On the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box, in the Plant field, enter 3710 and choose Continue.

3.

On the Change View “Storage Locations”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

4.

Make the following entries:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 55

5.

Storage Location

Description

371C

Returns

371R

Shipping (LWM)

Save your entries.

Result You maintained the storage locations.

Assign Picking Locations Use In this activity, you assign picking locations.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Logistics Execution  Shipping  Picking  Determine Picking Location  Assign Picking Locations

Transaction Code

SM30 (Customizing Object V_TVKOL)

2.

On the Change View "Picking Location Determination": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

Make the following entries:

4.

ShPt

Plnt

Storage Conditions

SLoc

3710

3710

3710

3710

10

371B

3710

3710

20

371B

371R

3710

371R

3710

10

371R

371R

3710

20

371R

371B

371R

Save your entries.

CUSTOMER 56

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Result Picking locations are assigned.

4.2.2.2

Manual Rework

If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure, the following additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity

Manual transport possible

Manual action in target system / client required

Maintain Address for Shipping Points

Yes

Yes

Remarks

If a manual transport is possible, proceed as follows: 1.

Log on to the source system / client.

2.

Go to the customizing activity as described in the respective section.

3.

Select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request. This can usually be done by choosing Table View  Transport. If this is not possible, refer to the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the affected customizing activity.

4.

The new transport request must be released and imported in the target system or client. Also check the documentation for the related IMG activity for specific information.

If manual action in the target system or client is required, proceed as follows: 1.

Log on to the target system or client.

2.

Go to the respective customizing activity, and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 57

4.3 Localization objects for Finance 4.3.1 B Bank Account Management - Core [local] (J74) 4.3.1.1

Configuration - On Premise

The following section describes the complete settings for this building block. These settings can be divided into three main groups: 1.

Prerequisite settings that have to be checked and which were delivered by SAP (as part of the standard delivery) The term Check refers to these prerequisite settings.

2.

Settings defined by the customer (in the customer namespace and customerspecific): The system uses automation to request individual customer settings during the personalization process. These settings can be initial or reused from existing SAP ERP layers and are indicated in the text by .

3.

Additional settings that must be made, covered either by automation or manual configuration (in the customer namespace). The term Create refers to these additional settings in the text.

4.3.1.1.1 Create Banks, House Banks, Bank Accounts Create Bank Master Data Use If you want to run the automatic payment run program, or if you want to post a bank statement automatically you must set up bank master data in your system. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP menu

SAP Menu  Accounting  Financial Accounting  Banks  Master Data  Bank Master Record  Create

Transaction code

FI01

On the Create Bank: Initial Screen, make the following entries: CUSTOMER

58

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field name

3.

Description

User action and values

Bank Country

NL

Bank Key

ABN

Note

On the Create Bank: Detail Screen, make the following entries: Field name

Description

Bank Name

User action and values

Note

Bank 1

Region Street City

Amsterdam

Swift Code

ABNANL2A

Bank Group 4.

Save your entries.

5.

Repeat this activity to create other bank keys listed in following Excel sheet: Bank Keys

Define House Banks - House Banks Use In the SAP system, each house bank of a company code is represented by a bank ID, and every account at a house bank is represented by an account ID. In the SAP system, you use the bank ID, and the account ID to specify bank details. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

N/A

Transaction code

FI12_HBANK

2.

On the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box, in the Company Code field, enter 3710, and choose Enter.

3.

On the Change View "House Banks": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

4.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 59

Field name

Description

User action and values

House Bank

BANK1

Bank Country

NL

Bank Key

ABN

Customer number

1110001

Company number

3710

Create Central Bank Report

Select

Area number

11

Forward pay. Data

Select

Note

5.

Choose Back.

6.

On the Change View "House Banks": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

7.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field name

8.

Description

User action and values

House Bank

BANK2

Bank Country

NL

Bank Key

ING

Customer number

2220002

Company number

3710

Note

Save your entries.

Create Bank Accounts in Cash Management Use For each house bank several bank accounts must be maintained. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Supply Chain Management Cash and Liquidity Management  Bank Account Management  Maintain the Event Type Linkage for Triggering Workflow Processes

Transaction code

SWETYPV

CUSTOMER 60

Localization objects - per Business Priority

2.

3.

On the Change View "Event Type Linkage ": Overview screen, choose the default entry with the following field values and choose Details. Field Name

Entry Value

Object Category

BO(BOR Object Type)

Object Type

FCLM_CR

Event

CREATED

Receiver Type

WS74300043

On the Change View "Event Type Linkage ": Details screen, check the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Linkage Activated

(Unselect the checkbox)

4.

Save your entries.

5.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: Fiori Launchpad

Please contact system administrator to get the url of Fiori Launchpad, the user and password. The user must be assigned with the following role: SAP_BR_CASH_SPECIALIST (for On-premise Edition) SAP_BCR_FIN_CM_BAM_MC (for Cloud Enterprise Edition) SAP_BCR_FIN_CM_BANK_ACC_MGM (for Cloud Project Services Edition)

Fiori app

Manage Bank Accounts

6.

On the Bank Hierarchy: Active Accounts (XX Accounts) screen, choose New Bank Account.

7.

On the New Bank Account screen, enter the following data: Field Name

Entry Value

Company Code

3710

Account Holder

Company Code 3710

Bank Country

NL

Bank Key

ABN

Currency

EUR

Account Number

0123456789

Description

Bank 1 Giro

Account Type

01

IBAN

NL02ABNA0123456789

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 61

Field Name

Entry Value

IBAN Valid From



Opening Date



8.

Choose Save as Active.

9.

Choose Edit.

10.

Choose the Connectivity Path tab, choose Add, and enter the following data: Field Name

Entry Value

ID Category

Central System: House Bank Account

Company Code

3710

House Bank

BANK1

House Bank Acct ID

GIRO

G/L Account

0011001000 (leave blank if the G/L account doesn’t exist in company code 3710)

11.

Choose Save as Active.

12.

Create another bank account by repeating the steps above using the following data: Field Name

Entry Value

Company Code

3710

Account Holder

Company Code 3710

Bank Country

NL

Bank Key

ING

Currency

EUR

Account Number

0005544499

Description

Bank 2 Giro

Account Type

01

IBAN

NL40INGB0005544499

IBAN Valid From



Opening Date



ID Category

Central System: House Bank Account

Company Code

3710

House Bank

BANK2

House Bank Acct ID

GIRO

G/L Account

0011002000 (leave blank if the G/L account doesn’t exist in company code 3710)

CUSTOMER 62

Localization objects - per Business Priority

13.

14.

15.

16.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Supply Chain Management Cash and Liquidity Management  Bank Account Management  Maintain the Event Type Linkage for Triggering Workflow Processes

Transaction code

SWETYPV

On the Change View "Event Type Linkage ": Overview screen, choose the default entry with the following field values and choose Details. Field Name

Entry Value

Object Category

BO(BOR Object Type)

Object Type

FCLM_CR

Event

CREATED

Receiver Type

WS74300043

On the Change View "Event Type Linkage ": Details screen, check the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Linkage Activated

X (Select the checkbox)

Save your entries.

4.3.1.2

Manual Rework

If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity

Manual transport possible

Manual action in target system / client required

Create Bank Master Data

No

Yes

Define House Banks House Banks

Yes

No

Create Bank Accounts in Cash Management

No

Yes

Remarks

In case a manual transport is possible please proceed as follows: How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 63

1.

Logon to the source system / client.

2.

Go to the respective customizing activity as described in the respective section.

3.

Select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request. Most likely this can be done by choosing Table View -> Transport. If this is not possible please refer to the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity.

4.

The newly created transport request needs to be released and imported in the target system / client.

Remark: Please also check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information. In case manual action in the target system / client is required please proceed as follows: 1.

Logon to the target system / client.

2.

Go to the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.

4.3.2 Bank Account Management - Delta for Extended Version [local] (BFE) 4.3.2.1

Configuration - On Premise

The following section describes the complete settings for this building block. These settings can be divided into three main groups: 1.

Prerequisite settings that have to be checked and which were delivered by SAP (as part of the standard delivery) . The term Check refers to these prerequisite settings.

2.

Settings defined by the customer (in the customer namespace and customerspecific): The system uses automation to request individual customer settings during the personalization process. These settings can be initial or reused from existing SAP ERP layers and are indicated in the text by .

3.

Additional settings that must be made, covered either by automation or manual configuration (in the customer namespace). The term Create refers to these additional settings in the text.

CUSTOMER 64

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.3.2.1.1 Assign Approval Patterns Use In the Assign Approval Patterns view, you can assign patterns to company codes and account types.

Procedure 1.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: Transaction Code

SPRO

IMG Menu

Financial Supply Chain Management  Cash and Liquidity Management  Bank Account Management  Basic Settings  Define Settings for Bank Account Master Data

2.

On the Change View "Bank Account Master Data Setting ": Details screen, in the Dialog Structure pane, double click Assign Approval Patterns.

3.

Choose New Entries.

4.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, create the following settings:

5.

CoCd

Type

Pattern

Priority

3710

01

P001

1

3710

02

P001

1

3710

03

P001

1

3710

04

P001

1

3710

05

P001

1

3710

06

P001

1

3710

07

P001

1

3710

08

P001

1

3710

09

P001

1

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 65

4.3.2.1.2 Define Responsibilities for Rules Used in Workflow Steps-Create Responsibilities Use In this step, you can define responsibilities for the workflow rules used in your workflow processes. SAP predefines the following rules for Bank Account Management:  74300006: Cash Manager  74300007: Bank Accountant  74300008: Key User Procedure 1.

2.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: IMG Menu

Financial Supply Chain Management Cash and Liquidity Management  Bank Account Management  Define Responsibilities for Rules Used in Workflow Steps

Transaction Code

OOCU_RESP

On the Responsibility: Choose rule screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Rule Number

74300006

3.

On the Responsibilities for Rule FCLM_CASHMGR Cash Manager screen, choose Create responsibility.

4.

On the Create responsibility screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Object abbr.

CASHMGR_3710

Name

Cash Manager 3710

Start date

Current Date

End date

31.12.9999

5.

Choose Continue E n t e r .

6.

On the Responsibility Change for Rule CASHMGR_1010 screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Account Type of

0000000000

Account Type to

ZZZZZZZZZZ

CUSTOMER 66

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Entry Value

Company Code of

3710

Company Code to

3710

7.

Save your entries. The red light No responsibility defined turns to a green light Responsibility complete.

8.

On the Responsibility: Choose rule screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Rule Number

74300007

9.

On the Responsibilities for Rule FCLM_CASHOPR Bank Accountant screen, choose Create responsibility.

10.

On the Create responsibility screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Object abbr.

CASHOPR_3710

Name

Bank Accountant 3710

Start date

Current Date

End date

31.12.9999

11.

Choose Continue E n t e r .

12.

On the Responsibility Change for Rule CASHOPR_1010 screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Account Type

0000000000

Of Account Type

ZZZZZZZZZZ

To Company Code

3710

of Company Code

3710

to 13.

Save your entries. The red light No responsibility defined turns to a green light Responsibility complete.

14.

On the Responsibility: Choose rule screen, create the following settings:

15.

Field Name

Entry Value

Rule Number

74300008

On the Responsibilities for Rule FCLM_SYSCOLL Key User screen, choose Create responsibility.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 67

16.

On the Create responsibility screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Object abbr.

SYSCOLL_3710

Name

Key User 3710

Start date

Current Date

End date

31.12.9999

17.

Choose Continue E n t e r .

18.

On the Responsibility Change for Rule SYSCOLL_1010 screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Account Type

0000000000

of Account Type

ZZZZZZZZZZ

to Company Code

3710

of Company Code

3710

to 19.

Save your entries. The red light No responsibility defined turns to a green light Responsibility complete.

4.3.2.1.3 Manual Rework If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure, additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity

Manual transport possible

Manual action in target system / client required

Define Responsibilities for Rules Used in Workflow StepsCreate Responsibilities

No

Yes

Remarks

In case a manual transport is possible please proceed as follows: CUSTOMER 68

Localization objects - per Business Priority

1.

Logon to the source system / client.

2.

Go to the respective customizing activity as described in the respective section.

3.

Select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request. Most likely this can be done by choosing Table View -> Transport. If this is not possible please refer to the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity.

4.

The newly created transport request needs to be released and imported in the target system / client.

Remark: Please also check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information. In case manual action in the target system / client is required please proceed as follows: 1.

Logon to the target system / client.

2.

Go to the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.

4.3.3

External Financial Accounting [local] (J16)

4.3.3.1

Configuration – Cloud Edition

4.3.3.1.1 General Settings (from SAP NetWeaver) Set Countries 4.3.3.1.2 Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Ledgers Define Settings for Journal Entry Ledger Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)  Ledgers  Ledger  Define Settings for Ledgers and Currency Types

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 69

Transaction code

SPRO

2.

Select the row with ledger 0L, and double click on Company Code Settings for the Ledger on the left hand side.

3.

Check if following entries are available for company code 3710. Company Code

3710

Local Currency: Currency Type

Company code currency (10)

Local Currency: Exchange Rate Type

Standard translation at average rate (M)

Local Currency: Source currency type

Document Currency (00)

Local Currency: Translation Date Type

Translation date (3)

Real time conversation

X

Deviation in CO Deviation in AA Deviation in material Group Currency: Currency Type

Group currency (30)

Group Currency: Exchange Rate Type

Standard translation at average rate (M)

Group Currency: Source currency type

Company Code Currency (10)

Group Currency: Translation Data Type

Translation date (3)

Real time conversion

X

Deviation in CO Deviation in AA Deviation in material Fiscal Year Variant

Cal. Year, 4 Special Periods (K4)

Posting period variant

Variant 3710 (3710)

Parallel Accounting Using G/L Accounts 4.

Double click on Accounting Principles for Ledger, and Company Code on the left hand side. CUSTOMER

70

Localization objects - per Business Priority

5.

Choose New Entries, and make the following entries for Ledger 0L, and Company Code 3710: Accounting Principle

IFRS

Name/Description of Accounting Principle

International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS)

6.

Save your entries.

7.

Go back twice.

8.

On the Ledger for the Universal Journal entry sub screen, enter a new entry ledger :

9.

Ledger Leading

Ledger Type

Ledger Name

Base ledger

2L

Standard Ledger

Local GAAP Ledger



unmarked

Choose on Company Code Settings for the Ledger on the left hand side. Choose New Entries, and make the following entries for company code 3710: Company Code

3710

Local Currency: Currency Type

Company code currency (10)

Local Currency: Exchange Rate Type

Standard translation at average rate (M)

Local Currency: Source currency type

Document Currency (00)

Local Currency: Translation Date Type

Translation date (3)

Real time conversion

X

Deviation in CO Deviation in AA Deviation in material Group Currency: Currency Type

Group currency (30)

Group Currency: Exchange Rate Type

Standard translation at average rate (M)

Group Currency: Source currency type

Company Code Currency (10)

Group Currency: Translation Data Type

Translation date (3)

Real time conversion

X

Deviation in CO How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 71

Company Code

3710

Deviation in AA Deviation in material Fiscal Year Variant

Cal. Year, 4 Special Periods (K4)

Pstng period variant

Variant 3710 (3710)

10.

Double click Accounting Principles for Ledger, and Company Code on the left hand side.

11.

Choose New Entries, and make the following entries for Ledger 0L, and company code 3710:

12.

Accounting Principle

Name/Description of Accounting Principle

LG

Local GAAP

Save your entries.

Fields Assigning Company Code to Field Status Variants Use In this activity, you assign the company code to the status variant field. Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)  Ledgers  Fields  Assign Company Code to Field Status Variants

Transaction code

OBC5

Make the following entries for Company Code 3710: Company Code

Field Status Variant

3710

0010

Save your entries.

CUSTOMER 72

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Fiscal Year and Posting Periods Maintain Fiscal Year Variant Use For Baseline the standard customizing is required with fiscal year variant K4. This activity is only necessary if the standard fiscal year variants cannot be used.

Posting Periods Define Variants for Open Posting Periods Use In this activity, you define variants for open posting periods. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)  Ledgers  Fiscal Year and Posting Periods  Posting Periods  Define Variants for Open Posting Periods

Transaction code

OBBO

On the Change View "Posting Periods: Define Variants": Overview screen, make the following entries: Field name

3.

Description

User action and values

Variant

3710

Name

Variant 3710

Note

Save your entry.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 73

Assign Variants to Company Code Use In this activity, you make the specification that is necessary to be able to work in several company codes with the same variant for open posting periods.

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)  Ledgers  Fiscal Year and Posting Periods  Posting Periods  Assign Variants to Company Code

Transaction code

OBBP

On the Change View "Assign Com.Code-> Posting Period Variants": Overview screen, make the following entries: Field name

Description

User action and values

CoCd

Company Code

3710

Variant 3.

Note

3710

Save your entries.

Open and close posting periods Use In this activity, you can specify which periods are open for posting for each variant. You have two time intervals (time period 1 and time period 2). In each interval, specify a period lower limit, a period upper limit, and the fiscal year. You close a period by selecting the period specifications so that the period to be closed does not fall within them. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)  Ledgers  Fiscal Year and Posting Periods  Posting Periods  Open and Close Posting Periods

CUSTOMER 74

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Transaction code 2.

OB52

On the Change View "Posting Periods: Specify Time Intervals": Overview screen, make the following entries:

Var.

A To account

3710 +

3.

From From per. per. To To 1 Year period Year 2 Year period Year 1

2000 12

2030 13

2000 16

2030

3710 A ZZZZZZZZZZ 1

2000 12

2030 13

2000 16

2030

3710 D ZZZZZZZZZZ 1

2000 12

2030 13

2000 16

2030

3710 K ZZZZZZZZZZ 1

2000 12

2030 13

2000 16

2030

3710 M ZZZZZZZZZZ 1

2000 12

2030 13

2000 16

2030

3710 S ZZZZZZZZZZ 1

2000 12

2030 13

2000 16

2030

Save your entries.

Parallel Accounting Activate Cost of Sales Accounting Use In this activity, you activate cost of sales accounting for your company codes. This action means that when you post data to these company codes, the functional areas are derived and updated.

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)  Ledgers  Ledger Activate Cost of Sales Accounting

Transaction Code

SPRO

On the Change View “Cost of Sales Accounting”: Overview screen, make the following entries:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 75

3.

Co

Company Name

COS Status

3710

Company Code 3710

2 Active

Save your entries.

Result You have activated the cost of sales accounting for company code 3710.

Global Parameters for Company Code Enter Global Parameters (additional details) Use In this activity, you can make various global specifications for the company code. In addition, you can look at the most important specifications of the company code at any time in the overview (including, for example, the chart of accounts, and the fiscal year variant).

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting(New)  Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)  Global Parameters for Company Code Enter Global Parameters

Transaction code

OBY6

2.

On the Change View "Company Code Global Data": Overview screen, select Company Code 3710.

3.

Make the following entries: Field name

Description

User action and values

Chart of Accts

Chart of account

YCOA

Note

Country Chart/Accts Credit Control Area

A000

Fiscal Year Variant

K4

CUSTOMER 76

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field name

Description

User action and values

VAT Registration No.



Document entry screen variant

2

Field status variant

0010

Pstng period variant

3710

Max. exchange rate deviation

10

Workflow variant

0001

Negative postings permitted



Note

Do not change the other fields. In some cases they are maintained by other areas (building blocks). 4.

On the Change View "Company Code Global Data": Details screen, choose Additional Data.

5.

Make the following entries: Field name

6.

Description

User action and values

INTRASTAT ID number

NL0123456

INTRASTAT additional number

001

EXTRASTAT company number

NL3710

EXTRASTAT material number

123456

Note

Save your entries.

Tax Define Foreign VAT Registration Numbers Use In this activity, you define the VAT registration number that you received in another EC member state for every company code with: A headquarters in an EC country. The business transactions maintained with other EC member states.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 77

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)  Global Parameters for Company Code  Tax  VAT Registration Numbers (VAT Reg. No.)  Define Foreign VAT Registration Numbers

Transaction code

OB87

On the Change View "View for "Foreign VAT Registration Numbers": Overview screen, Make the following entries: Field name

Description

User action and values

CoCD

Company Code

3710

Cty

Country

NL

VAT Registration No. 3.

Note



Save your entries.

Document Documents in Entry View Define Document Number Ranges for Entry View Use Only one document number interval can be defined for each document type in a company code. The document number intervals in a company code must not overlap. In this activity you define the number ranges to be used for the document types.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)  Document  Document Number Ranges  Documents in Entry View  Define Document Number Ranges for Entry View

CUSTOMER 78

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Transaction code 2.

FBN1

On the Number Ranges For Accounting Documents screen, make the following entries: Field name

Description

Company Code

User action and values

Note

3710

3.

Choose Change Intervals.

4.

On the Maintain Number Range Intervals view, choose Insert Interval.

5.

In the Insert Interval dialog box, make the following entries. After each entry, choose Insert, and Insert Interval: No

To Fiscal Year

From No.

To No.

01

9999

0100000000

0199999999

02

9999

0200000000

0299999999

03

9999

0300000000

0399999999

04

9999

0400000000

0499999999

05

9999

0500000000

0599999999

06

9999

0600000000

0699999999

07

9999

0700000000

0799999999

08

9999

0800000000

0899999999

09

9999

0900000000

0999999999

10

9999

1000000000

1099999999

11

9999

1100000000

1199999999

12

9999

1200000000

1299999999

13

9999

1300000000

1399999999

14

9999

1400000000

1499999999

15

9999

1500000000

1599999999

16

9999

1600000000

1699999999

17

9999

1700000000

1799999999

18

9999

1800000000

1899999999

19

9999

1900000000

1999999999

20

9999

2000000000

2099999999

21

9999

2100000000

2199999999

22

9999

2200000000

2299999999

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

External

CUSTOMER 79

No

To Fiscal Year

From No.

To No.

23

9999

2300000000

2399999999

24

9999

2400000000

2499999999

47

9999

4700000000

4799999999

48

9999

4800000000

4899999999

49

9999

4900000000

4999999999

50

9999

5000000000

5099999999

51

9999

5100000000

5199999999

52

9999

5200000000

5299999999

53

9999

5300000000

5399999999

81

9999

8100000000

8199999999

82

9999

8200000000

8299999999

83

9999

8300000000

8399999999

84

9999

8400000000

8499999999

85

9999

8500000000

8599999999

90

9999

9000000000

9099999999

X1

9999

9100000000

9199999999

X2

9999

9299999999

9399999999

Z1

9999

0090000000

0090999999

70

9999

0070000000

0070999999

External

X

X

6.

Save your entries.

7.

Confirm the dialog box regarding transport of number range intervals.

8.

Choose Back twice to leave the IMG activity.

Tolerance Groups Define Tolerance Groups for Employees Use In this activity, you predefine various amount limits for your employees with which you determine:  The maximum document amount the employee is authorized to post. CUSTOMER 80

Localization objects - per Business Priority

 The maximum amount the employee can enter as a line item in a customer, or vendor account.  The maximum cash discount percentage the employee can grant in a line item.  The maximum acceptable tolerance for payment differences for the employee. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)  Document  Tolerance Groups  Define Tolerance Groups for Employees

Transaction code

OBA4

2.

On the Change View "FI Tolerance Groups for Users": Overview screen, select New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:

4.

5.

Company Code

Currency Amount per document

Amount per Open Item Account Item

Cash Discount per Line Item

3710

EUR

9.999.999.999,00

5,000

9.999.999.999,00

Permitted Payment Differences: Amount

Percent

Revenue

5,00

2,0

Expense

5,00

2,0

Cash Discnt Adj. to

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 81

Tax on Sales / Purchases Basic Settings Define Procedures Use In this activity, you can define the procedure that defines the valid condition types and the sequence for calculation, and posting of taxes on sales or purchases. The calculation procedure determines for which amount the individual condition types are to be calculated.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)  Tax on Sales/Purchases  Basic Settings  Check Calculation Procedure  Define Procedures

Transaction code

SPRO

2.

On the Change View “Procedures”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Procedure

Descript.

0TXNL

Sales Tax - Netherlands

4.

Choose Control data.

5.

On the Change View “Control data”: Overview screen, make the following entries: Level Cntr CTyp

Pricing procedure line

From Print

Account key

100

0

BASB

Base Amount

110

0

MWAS

Output Tax

100

It was not printed

MWS

120

0

MWVS

Input Tax

100

It was not printed

VST

It was not printed

CUSTOMER 82

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Level Cntr CTyp

6.

Pricing procedure line

From Print

Account key

130

0

MWRK Travel Expenses (%)

100

It was not printed

VST

140

0

MWVN Non-deduc. Input Tax

100

It was not printed

NAV

150

0

MWVZ

Non-deduc. Input Tax

100

It was not printed

NVV

200

0

NLXA

Acquisition Tax Cred

100

It was not printed

ESA

210

0

NLXV

Acquisition Tax Deb.

200

It was not printed

ESE

Save your entries.

Assign country to Calculation Procedure Use In this activity, you enter the key for the calculation procedure, which determines the conditions, which are allowed per document, and which defines the sequence of the conditions in the document for each country. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)  Tax on Sales/Purchases  Basic Settings  Assign Country to Calculation Procedure

Transaction code 2.

On the Change View “Assign Country -> Calculation Procedure”: Overview screen, choose the entry for country NL and Name Netherlands.

3.

In the Proc field, enter 0TXNL.

4.

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 83

Calculation Define Tax Codes for Sales and Purchases Use You have to define a separate tax on sales/purchases code for each country in which one of your company codes is located. Each code contains one or more tax rates for the different tax types. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)  Tax on Sales/Purchases  Calculation  Define Tax Codes for Sales and Purchases

Transaction code

FTXP

2.

Choose Country NL.

3.

On the next screen, in the Tax Code field, enter AH, and choose Enter.

4.

In the Properties dialog box, make the following entries: Tax Name Code

Tax Condition Type Type

AH

V

Domestic purchase of goods reverse charge, Reduced rate (6%)

Comment

NLXA/NLXV

5.

Choose Enter.

6.

On the Maintain Tax Code: Tax Rates screen, make the following entries: Field name

Description

User action and values

Acquisition Tax Credit (ESA)

6,000-

Acquisition Tax Debit (ESE)

100,00-

Note

Comment

7.

Save your entries.

8.

Repeat these steps for the entire list of Tax codes mentioned in the document YCOA_ACCDET_DOCU_NL.xlsx

CUSTOMER 84

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Import/Create Tax Codes Prerequisites The Define Tax Codes for Sales and Purchases activity of this configuration guide has been performed and a transport request has been created that contains the tax codes to be transported. The transport request, and the entries contained in it to be transported (tax codes, tax rates, and so on) are stored in Table T007V. To look up the transport request number and/or the tax codes and rates contained in it you can execute transaction code SE16; then enter T007V as table name. On the following screen, make the selections you want to make (for example, transport request no. or tax code). Then choose Execute. On the next screen the table entries are displayed. These entries are transported into the system.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity as follows: SAP System Menu

System  Services  Reporting

Transaction code

SA38

2.

On the ABAP: Program Execution screen, in the Program field, enter RFTAXIMP, and choose Execute.

3.

On the Import Tax Codes After Transport screen, make the following entries: Field name

Description

User action and values

Transport number



For example, /SMBUSE/0TXNL

Country

Country key

NL

4.

Choose Execute.

5.

On the next screen, the session ID, and a log are displayed. Ensure that the log contains the entry 1 Sessions successfully processed.

Result The system has created a batch input session that is executed in the background. When the execution has ended successfully the tax codes and tax rates are available in the system for productive use. If execution in the background was not successful execute transaction code SM35 to check the cause of errors.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 85

Posting Assign Tax Codes for Non-Taxable Transactions Use In this step, you specify an input tax indicator per company code. The system then uses this indicator when you post acquisitions that are not subject to tax. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)  Tax on Sales/Purchases  Posting  Assign Tax Codes for Non-Taxable Transactions

Transaction code

OBCL

On the Change View "Allocate Co.Cd. -> Non-Taxable Transactions": Overview screen, make the following entries: Field name

Description

User action and values

CoCd

Company Code

3710

Input tax code Output tax code 3.

Note

O1 Output tax

O2

Save your entries.

CUSTOMER 86

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.3.3.1.3 General Ledger Accounting (New) (from 'Financial Accounting (New)') Master Data G/L Accounts Preparations Edit Chart of Accounts List Use In the chart of accounts list, you enter the charts of accounts that you want to use in your organization (at client level). In the Baseline for the Netherlands, the standard chart of accounts YCOA is used. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  General Ledger Accounting (New)  Master Data  G/L Accounts  Preparations  Edit Chart of Accounts List

Transaction code

OB13

2.

On the Change View "List of All Charts of Accounts": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field name

Description User action and values

Chart of Accts

YCOA

Description

Chart of Accounts – Industry – Netherlands(or any other appropriate description)

Maint. Language

English

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

Note

CUSTOMER 87

Field name

Description User action and values

Length of G/L account number 4.

Note

8

Save your entries.

Transport Chart of Accounts Use The following sections describe the activities that must take place if the accounts are created manually. To maintain the descriptions in a different language, log on with the relevant language and execute the maintenance of the texts in the logon language.

Define Account Group Use The procedure for copying G/L account groups is described in this section. For Baseline the Netherlands, the chart of accounts YCOA is used with the listed standard G/L account groups. Chrt/Accts Acct Group Name

From acct To account

YCOA

ABST

Recon. account ready for input

999999

YCOA

ANL.

'Fixed assets accounts'

999999

YCOA

ERG.

Income statement accounts

999999

YCOA

FIN.

Liquid funds accounts

999999

YCOA

MAT.

Materials management accounts

999999

YCOA

SAKO

G/L accounts (general)

999999

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  General Ledger Accounting (New)  Master Data  G/L Accounts  Preparations  Define Account Group

CUSTOMER 88

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Transaction code

OBD4

2.

Select the account group from the chart of accounts you want to copy, and choose Copy.

3.

On the next screen, overwrite the Chart of accounts, and or the Account group name, and the Description.

4.

Choose Enter.

5.

To adapt the status field, double click the line with the new entry.

6.

On the next screen, make your settings for the Status field, and save your entries.

7.

Copy the next account group, and repeat the previously mentioned steps as required.

8.

Save your entries.

Create Accounts If the chart of accounts is maintained manually, this activity is done during the creation of Accounts in the application itself. 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP system Menu

SAP Menu  Accounting  Financial Accounting  General Ledger  Master Records  G/L Accounts  Individual Processing  Centrally

Transaction Code

FS00

2.

To maintain data for an account, on the Edit G/L Account Centrally view screen, enter the account number and the Company Code 3710.

3.

Choose Create (next to the company code field).

4.

Save your entries.

Define Retained Earnings Account Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New) → General Ledger Accounting (New) → Periodic Processing → Carry Forward → Define Retained Earnings Account

Transaction code

OB53

In the Chart of Accounts field, enter YCOA, and choose Continue.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 89

Field Name

Value

Chart of Accounts

YCOA

Transaction

BIL

3.

Choose Accounts.

4.

Make the following entries:

5.

Field Name

Value

P&L statmt acct type

X

Account

33000000

Save your entries.

Business Transactions Open Item Clearing Define Tolerance Groups for G/L Accounts Use When G/L accounts are cleared, tolerance groups are used to define limits that define the differences that are accepted and posted automatically to predefined accounts. The groups that are defined here are assigned in the G/L account master record. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting(New)  General Ledger Accounting (New)  Business Transactions  Open Item Clearing  Clearing Differences  Define Tolerance Groups for G/L Accounts

Transaction code

OBA0

2.

On the Change View "Tolerances for Groups of G/L Accounts in Local Currency" screen, select New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:

CUSTOMER 90

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Company Code

Tol. Group

3710

3710

4.

DEFT

Name

Debit Posting

Credit Posting

Percentage (Deb.)

Percentage (Cre.)

Tolerance Group G/L accounts

1,00

1,00

1,0

1,0

Default Tolerance Grp G/L acct

Save your entries.

Adjustment Posting/Reversal Permit Negative Posting Use In this activity, you specify whether reverse documents can be comprised of negative postings for each company code. Negative postings are permitted for Company Code 3710. Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting(New)  General Ledger Accounting (New)  Business Transactions  Adjustment Posting/Reversal  Permit Negative Posting

Transaction code

S_ALR_87004651

On the Change View "Maintain Negative Postings in Company Code": Overview screen, make the following entry: Company Code

Negative Postings Allowed

3710

Set the indicator

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 91

Actual Postings Profit Center Define Number Ranges for Local Documents Use Number ranges must be assigned for actual postings. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Controlling  Profit Center Accounting  Actual Postings  Basic Settings: Actual  Define Number ranges for local documents

Transaction code

GB02

2.

On the Range Maintenance: Local GL document screen, choose the Change Intervals button.

3.

If the Get Subobject dialog box displays, in the Company Code field, enter 3710, and choose Enter.

4.

On the Interval Maintenance: Number Range Object Local GL document, Subobject screen, make the following entries:

5.

Year

From Number

To Number

9999

0000000001

0199999999

Ext

Save your entries.

4.3.3.1.4 Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Reconciliation Account for company, employee expenses Use To populate the reconciliation account in the Company Code segment of the BP to make sure the user creation (either by XLS upload or via EC-integration) works. BP-Employee/User creation as well as the EC (Employee Central) integration rely on a table (/SHCM/RECON) during the BP-Employee creation when the BP-role “Supplier” is

CUSTOMER 92

Localization objects - per Business Priority

added to a BP-Employee. This logic is in place in the HCM-code. Businesswise an employee assumes the BP-Supplier role when “his company” is reimbursing expenses. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

n/a

Transaction code

SM30 (Customizing Object /SHCM/RECON)

2.

Choose Maintain.

3.

On the Change View “Reconciliation Account for company”: Overview screen, choose New Entries and make the following entry:

4.

Company Code

Reconciliation acct

3710

21105000

Save your entries.

Vendor accounts Master Data Preparations for Creating Vendor Master Data Define Accounting Clerks Use You define the names of the accounting clerks under a name identification code. You enter the identification code in the vendor master records that the accounting clerk supervises. You can use this information for evaluations and for correspondence.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable  Vendor Accounts  Master Data  Preparations for Creating Vendor Master Data  Define Accounting Clerks

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 93

Transaction code

OB05

2.

Choose New Entries.

3.

Make the following entries:

4.

Company Code

Accounting Clerk

Accounting Clerk Descr.

3710

01

Michaela Schneider

3710

AM

Anna Müller

User Name

Save your entries.

Business Transactions Payments Global Settings Payment Differences Define Tolerances (Customers and Vendors) Define Tolerances (Vendors) Use In this step, you specify the tolerances for customers and vendors. These tolerances are used for dealing with differences in payment and residual items that can occur during payment settlement. Specify the tolerances under one or more tolerance groups. Allocate a tolerance group to each customer and each vendor via the master record. For each tolerance group, specify the following:  Tolerances up to which differences in payment are posted automatically to expense or revenue accounts when clearing open items.  The handling of the terms of payment for residual items, if they are to be posted during clearing.  The tolerance group can be assigned to customers and vendors (general tolerance group).

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: CUSTOMER

94

Localization objects - per Business Priority

IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions  Outgoing Payments  Manual Outgoing Payments  Define Tolerances (Vendors)

Transaction code

OBA3

2.

On the Change View "Customer/Vendor Tolerances": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Company Tolerance Text Code Group 3710

Default Tolerance Cust/Vend 5,00

Loss

Percent Percent Adj. Disc. (Gain) (Loss) By 2,0

2,0

2,00

5,00

3710

CUS1

999,00 5,00

10,0

2,5

1,00

3710

CUS2

10,00

10,0

2,5

1,00

3710

VEN1

200,00 100,00

3710

VEN2

0,02

Company Code

Tolerance Group

3710

4.

Rev.

Grace Days due date

PT from Invoice

00

3,00

0,02

Only grant Fixed partial PT cash disc X

3710

CUS1

01

X

X

3710

CUS2

02

X

X

3710

VEN1

03

3710

VEN1

03

Dunning key

NT00 2

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 95

Define Reason Codes (Overpayments and Underpayments) Use In this step, you define reason codes per company code for handling payment differences in the form of residual items, partial payments, and postings on account.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable  Business Transactions  Outgoing Payments  Manual Outgoing Payments  Overpayment/Underpayment  Define Reason Codes (Manual Outgoing Payments)

Transaction code

OBBE

2.

On the Determine Work Area Entry dialog box, choose Company Code 3710.

3.

On the Change View "Classification of Payment Differences": Overview screen, make the following entries: RCd Short Text

Long Text

CorrT

050

Cash discount period

Cash discount period exceeded

SAP50

051

Cash discount rate

Cash discount rate not kept to

SAP51

052

Cash discount f. net

Cash discount deduction for net terms

SAP52

053

Cash discount retro.

No csh disc.retrograde calc.frm crd.memo

SAP53

054

Disc. period and rate

Disc. per. exceeded and disc. rate incorr.

SAP54

055

Pmnt on acct

General payment on account

SAP55

056

Pmnt advice error

Pmt adv.on acct is missing or incomplete

SAP56

057

Calculation error

Customer calculation error

SAP57

058

Debit reduced

Debit reduced instead of paid

SAP58

059

Debit paid twice

Debit paid twice

SAP58

060

Credit memo paid

Credit memo paid instead of reduced

SAP60

061

Credit memo twice

Credit memo reduced twice

SAP60

CUSTOMER 96

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.

Save your entries.

Automatic Outgoing Payments Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program Set Up All Company Codes for Payment Transactions Use In this activity, you specify paying company code (process payment transactions centrally for several company codes) for all company codes involved in payment transactions. Cash discount strategy: determination of maximum cash discount for the company code. Special G/L transactions: are to be settled for customers and vendors. Vendors - Special G/L transactions to be paid: A (Down payment), B (Financial assets down payment), F (Down payment request), I (Intangible asset down payment), M (Tangible asset down payment), V (Stocks down payment) Customers - Special G/L transactions to be paid: A (Down payment), F (Down payment request). Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable  Business Transactions  Outgoing Payments  Automatic Outgoing Payments  Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program  Set Up All Company Codes for Payment Transactions

Transaction code

S_ALR_87100687 or FBZP, select button All Company codes.

2.

On the Change View "Company Codes": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field name

Description User action and values

Company Code

3710

Sending Company Code

3710

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

Note

CUSTOMER 97

Field name

Description User action and values

Paying Company Code

Note

3710

Max. Cash Discount Vendors: Sp. G/L transactions to be paid Customers: Sp. G/L transactions to be paid 4.

Save your entries.

Set Up Paying Company Codes for Payment Transactions Use Minimum amount for which an incoming (€ 1,-) or outgoing payment (€ 5,-) is created. (SAP standard is used with minor changes.) Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable  Business Transactions  Outgoing Payments  Automatic Outgoing Payments  Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program  Set Up Paying Company Codes for Payment Transactions

Transaction code

S_ALR_87100688 or FBZP, select button Paying Company codes

2.

On the Change View "Paying Company Codes": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field

Value

Company Code

3710

Min. Amount for incoming payment Min. Amount for outgoing payment One bill of exch. Per due date per.

select

Specification for SEPA Payments – Vendor CUSTOMER 98

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.

Save your entries.

Set Up Payment Methods per Country for Payment Transactions Use In this activity, you specify which payment methods are to be used in each country. The following payment methods are used: Pmt Method

Description (local language)

F

Description (English)

Provided by

Foreign bank transfer (BTL91)

Standard ERP

SEPA Credit Transfer

Standard ERP

T

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable  Business Transactions  Outgoing Payments  Automatic Outgoing Payments  Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program  Set Up Payment Methods per Country for Payment Transactions

Transaction code

S_ALR_87100689 or FBZP, select button Pmnt methods in country

2.

On the Change View "Payment Method/Country": Overview screen, select country NL, and choose New Entries if additional payment methods are required.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field name

Description

Country Pymt Method

User action and values NL

Payment Method

T

Description

SEPA Credit Transfer

Outgoing Payments



Bank transf How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

Note

Bank transfer

CUSTOMER 99

Field name

Description

User action and values

Bank details



Account number required



IBAN Required



SWIFT Code Required



Document type for payment

ZP

Clearing document type

ZV

Use payment medium workbench



Format

FSN_CT_00100103

Format supplement

EUSEPA

Note

4.

Choose Back.

5.

On the Change View "Payment Method/Country": Overview screen, select Pmt method T.

6.

In the left-hand frame, double click Currencies Allowed.

7.

Enter EUR as the allowed currency.

8.

Choose Back.

9.

On the Change View "Payment Method/Country": Overview screen, select Pmt method T.

10.

In the left-hand frame, double click Permitted Destination Countries.

11.

Enter the following country keys: Country Key AU BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI CUSTOMER

100

Localization objects - per Business Priority

FR GB GR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MT NL NO PL PT RO SE SK SL 12.

Choose Back.

13.

On the Change View "Payment Method/Country": Overview screen, select Pmt method T.

14.

In the left-hand frame, double click Note to Payee by Origin.

15.

Enter SAP

16.

Save your entries.

17.

Choose Back.

18.

On the Change View "Payment Method/Country": Overview screen, select country NL, and choose New Entries if additional payment methods are required.

19.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:

SEPA

as Note to payee.

Field name

Description

Country Pymt Method How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

User action and values

Note

NL Payment Method

F CUSTOMER 101

Field name

Description

User action and values

Description

Foreign bank transfer (BTL91)

Outgoing Payments



Bank transf

Bank transfer

Note



Bank details



Account number required



IBAN Required



SWIFT Code Required



Document type for payment

ZP

Clearing document type

ZV

Use payment medium workbench



Format

FSN_CT_00100103

Format supplement

BTL91

20.

Choose Back.

21.

On the Change View "Payment Method/Country": Overview screen, select Pmt method F.

22.

In the left-hand frame, double click Currencies Allowed.

23.

In the left-hand frame, double click Note to Payee by Origin.

24.

Enter Sample01 as Note to payee.

25.

Save your entries.

Set Up Payment Methods per Company Code for Payment Transactions Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable  Business Transactions  Outgoing Payments  Automatic Outgoing Payments  Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program  Set Up

CUSTOMER 102

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Payment Methods per Company Code for Payment Transactions Transaction code

S_ALR_87100690

2.

On the Change View "Maintenance of Company Code Data for a Payment Method" screen, select company code 3710 and the payment method (see following table).

3.

On the Change View "Maintenance of Company Code Data for a Payment Method" screen, make your entries as listed in the following table (note that this table is continued on the next page as it is too wide for one page): Amount Limits and Foreign Payments/Foreign Currency Payments/Bank Selection Control Pmt Metho d

T F

Minimu m amount

Maximum amount

Foreign busines s partner allowed

Foreign currenc y allowed

Cust./ vendor bank abroad allowed ?

No optimizatio n

0,00

99999.999.999, 00

X

X

X

X

0,00

99999.999.999, 00

X

X

X

X

Form Data Pmt Method

Form for the payment medium

Next form

Drawer on the Form Drawer name 1 Phone of drawer 0123 / 456 – 789 Street of drawer 123

F

123456 Town of drawer Drawer name 1 Drawer name 2

T

123456 Town of drawer

Pyt adv.ctrl. Pmt Method

Restricted to

Rows Pymt adv. After … lines

Always pyt adv

T

X

4

X

F

X

4

X

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

NoPYtAdv

CUSTOMER 103

4.

Save your entries.

Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions: Ranking Order Use The program selects banks or bank accounts from which payment are to be made. Therefore the following specifications are made: 1. Ranking order of banks: specify which house banks are permitted and rank them in a list. 2. Bank accounts: specify which bank account is to be used for payments for each house bank, and payment method (and currency, if required), and to which G/L account the payment is posted. 3. Available amounts: for each account at a house bank, the amount (incoming, and outgoing payments) that is available must be specified. 4. Value date: specify how many days elapse between the posting date of the payment run and the value date at the bank, dependent on the payment method, bank account, payment amount, and currency.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable  Business Transactions  Outgoing Payments  Automatic Outgoing Payments  Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program  Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions

Transaction code

S_ALR_87100691 or FBZP

2.

On the Display View "Bank Selection": Overview screen, choose Paying Company Code 3710.

3.

Choose Ranking Order.

4.

Choose New Entries.

5.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: PM

Crcy

Rank Order

House Bk

T

EUR

1

BANK1

T

EUR

2

BANK2

CUSTOMER 104

Localization objects - per Business Priority

PM

6.

Crcy

Rank Order

House Bk

F

1

BANK1

F

2

BANK2

Save your entries.

Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions: Available Amounts Use In this section you determine the available amounts of each bank. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable  Business Transactions  Outgoing Payments  Automatic Outgoing Payments  Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program  Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions

Transaction code

S_ALR_87100691 or FBZP

2.

On the Display View "Bank Selection": Overview screen, choose Paying Company Code 3710.

3.

Choose Available Amounts.

4.

Choose New Entries.

5.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:

6.

House Bank

Accoun t ID

Day s

Currenc y

Available for outgoing payment

Scheduled incoming payment

BANK 1

GIRO

999

EUR

9.999.999.999.999,0 0

9.999.999.999.999,0 0

BANK 2

GIRO

999

EUR

9.999.999.999.999,0 0

9.999.999.999.999,0 0

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 105

Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions: Bank Accounts Use In this section you determine the available bank accounts.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable  Business Transactions  Outgoing Payments  Automatic Outgoing Payments  Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program  Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions

Transaction code

S_ALR_87100691 or FBZP

2.

On the Display View "Bank Selection": Overview screen, choose Paying Company Code 3710.

3.

Choose Bank Accounts.

4.

Choose New Entries.

5.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:

6.

House Bank

Payment Method

BANK1

F

BANK1

T

BANK2

F

BANK2

T

Currency

EUR

EUR

Account ID

Bank subaccount

GIRO

11001020

GIRO

11001020

GIRO

11002020

GIRO

11002020

Save your entries.

Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions: Value Date Use In this section you determine the value date.

CUSTOMER 106

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable  Business Transactions  Outgoing Payments  Automatic Outgoing Payments  Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program  Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions

Transaction code

S_ALR_87100691 or FBZP

2.

On the Display View "Bank Selection": Overview screen, choose Paying Company Code 3710.

3.

Choose Value Date.

4.

Choose New Entries.

5.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:

6.

Prnt. Methd.

House Bank

Account

Amount Limit

Currency

Days

T

BANK1

GIRO

0,00

EUR

1

T

BANK2

GIRO

0,00

EUR

1

F

BANK1

GIRO

0,00

EUR

1

F

BANK2

GIRO

0,00

EUR

1

Save your entries.

Payment Media Define Sender Details for Payment Forms Use In this activity you specify the standard texts that you want to use for the letter header, letter footer, and the sending address in the letter window per company code.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable  Business Transactions  Outgoing

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 107

Payments  Automatic Outgoing Payments  Payment Media  Define Sender Details for Payment Forms Transaction code 2.

S_ALR_87003346

On the Change View "Sender details (Payment program)": Overview screen, make the following entries: Co.Cd. ID 3710

3.

Letter header

Footer text

Signature

Sender

ADRS ADRS_HEADER ADRS_FOOTER ADRS_SIGNATURE ADRS_SENDER

Save your entries.

Assign Payment Medium Format and Note to Payee to Payment Method Use In this activity you assign the payment medium format to a combination of payment method and country. You also determine the note to payee to be used, depending on the country and origin. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable  Business Transactions  Outgoing Payments  Automatic Outgoing Payments  Payment Media  Make Settings for Payment Medium Formats from Payment Medium Workbench  Assign Payment Medium Format and Note to Payee to Payment Method

Transaction code

S_ALR_87100701 or FBZP

On the Change View "Payment Method/Country": Overview screen, make the following entries (double click the payment method): Payment Method (forthe Netherlands)

Format

Format supplement

F

FSN_CT_00100103 BTL91

T

FSN_CT_00100103 EUSEPA

Payment medium program

Print dataset

Key Print dataset b/exch.

CUSTOMER 108

Localization objects - per Business Priority

3.

Save your entries.

Dunning Procedure Define Dunning Procedures Use You enter the settings that control the dunning program by:  Specifying the company codes to include in dunning.  Setting up the dunning procedure you want to use (dunning interval, grace periods for the due date determination, and number of dunning levels)  Setting the dunning charges.  Specifying the net payment due date at which a particular dunning level is reached.  Specifying the dunning notice you want to send to your customers. The following dunning procedures are defined for dunning customers:  3701

Four-level dunning notice, every two weeks.

 3702

One-level dunning notice, every 30 days.

The dunning procedure 3702 specifies that customers who do not pay within 30 days are automatically in arrears. The customers receive a dunning notice without interest amounts. From then on, interest is calculated for the open items using the interest calculation program (see also the section on the interest calculation program). Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable  Business Transactions  Dunning  Dunning Procedure  Define Dunning Procedures

Transaction code

FBMP

2.

On the Maintain Dunning Procedure screen choose New Procedure.

3.

On the Maintain Dunning Procedure: Overview screen, make the following entries: Field name Dunn. Procedure

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

Description

User action and values

Note

3701

CUSTOMER 109

Field name

Description

User action and values

Name

Four-level dunning notice, every two weeks

Dunning intervals in days

14

No. of dunning levels

4

Total due items from dunning level

3

Min. days in arrears (acct)

6

Line items grace periods

2

Interest calculator

01

Public hol cal ID

holiday calendar

Note

NL

NL = Netherlands

Standard transaction dunning



Ref. Dunning procedures for texts

3701

4.

Choose Dunning Levels.

5.

On the Maintain Dunning Procedure: Dunning levels screen, make the following entries: Field name Days in arrears

Calculate interest?

Always dun?

Description

User action and values 1

2

3

4

2

16

30

44

1

2

3

4





3

4

1

2

Note

Print all items

Payment deadline

6.

1

1

2

2

3

4





3

4

10

7

Choose Charges. CUSTOMER

110

Localization objects - per Business Priority

7.

On the Dunning Charges dialog box, choose EUR.

8.

On the Maintain Dunning Procedure: Charges screen, make the following entries: Dunn. Level

Dunn. Charge

1

500,00

2

500,00

3

1000,00

4

1000,00

9.

Choose Minimum amounts.

10.

On the Minimum amounts dialog box, choose EUR.

11.

On the Maintain Dunning Procedure: Minimum amounts screen, make the following entries: Dun

Minimum amount

Min. amount for interest

1

10,00

10,00

2

20,00

50,00

3

50,00

100,00

4

100,00

100,00

12.

Choose Back.

13.

Save your entries.

14.

Choose Dunning texts.

15.

On the Company Code/Account type dialog box, choose company 3710.

16.

On the Maintain Dunning Procedure: Dunning texts screen, make the following entries: Normal dunning procedure

Form

1

FIN_FO_DUNN_NOTE

2

FIN_FO_DUNN_NOTE

3

FIN_FO_DUNN_NOTE

4

FIN_FO_DUNN_NOTE

Legal dunning procedures

FIN_FO_DUNN_NOTE

17.

Save your entries.

18.

Choose Back.

19.

Choose Sp. G/L indicator.

20.

Mark F Down Payment Request for Customers and Vendors.

21.

Save your entries.

22.

Choose Back.

23.

Maintain the next dunning procedure.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 111

24.

On the Maintain Dunning Procedure: List screen choose New Procedure.

25.

On the Maintain Dunning Procedure: Overview screen, make the following entries: Field name

Description

User action and values

Dunn. Procedure

Dunning procedure

3702

Name

One-level dunning notice, every 30 days

Dunning intervals in days

30

No. of dunning levels

1

Note

Total due items from dunning level Min. days in arrears (acct) Line items grace periods Interest indicator Public hol cal ID

01 holiday calendar

NL

Standard transaction dunning



Ref. Dunning procedures for texts

3702

NL = Netherlands

26.

Choose Dunning Levels.

27.

On the Maintain Dunning Procedure: Dunning levels screen, make the following entries: Field name Days in arrears

Description

User action and values

Note

1 1

Calculate interest

1

Always dun?

1

Print all items

1

CUSTOMER 112

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field name

Description

User action and values

Note

Payment deadline

1 7

28.

Choose Dunning texts.

29.

On the Company Code/Account type dialog box, choose company code 3710.

30.

On the Maintain Dunning Procedure: Dunning texts screen, make the following entries: Normal dunning procedure

Form

1

FIN_FO_DUNN_NOTE

Legal dunning procedures

FIN_FO_DUNN_NOTE

31.

Save your entries.

32.

Choose Back.

33.

Choose Sp. G/L indicator.

34.

Mark F Down Payment Request for Customers.

35.

Save your entries.

Define Dunning Procedures (Dunning Control) Use In this activity you enter the settings that control the dunning program. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (NEW) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions  Dunning  Dunning Procedure  Define Dunning Procedures

Transaction code

FBMP

2.

From the menu, choose Environment  Company Code Data.

3.

On the Change View "Company Code Dunning Control": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

4.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 113

5.

Field name

Description

User action and values

CoCd

Company Code

3710

By don. Ar.

by dunning area

Deselected

Ref.CoCode

Reference company code

3710

Sort. MHNK

K1

Sort. MHND

P1

Dun CoDC

3710

Note

Save your entries.

Interest Calculation Define Reference Interest Rates Use In this step, you define your reference interest rates by entering a key, and a mnemonic name. All other fields are purely informative.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable  Business Transactions  Interest Calculation  Interest Calculation  Define Reference Interest Rates

Transaction code

OBAC

2.

On the Change View "Define Reference Interest Rate": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field name

Description

User action and values

Ref.Int.Rate

Reference Interest rate

UICEUR

Long Text

Credit interest

Description

Credit

Date from

01.01.1999

Note

CUSTOMER 114

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field name

Description

Currency

User action and values

Note

EUR

Finan. center 4.

Choose New Entries.

5.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field name

Description

User action and values

Ref.Int.Rate

Reference Interest rate

UIDEUR

Long Text

Debit interest

Description

Debit

Date from

01.01.1999

Currency

EUR

Note

Finan. center 6.

Save your entries.

Define Time-Based Terms Use In this step, you define your reference interest rates by entering a key and a mnemonic name. All other fields are purely informative.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions  Interest Calculation  Interest Calculation  Define Time-Based Terms

Transaction code

OB81

2.

On the Change View "Time-Dependent Interest Terms": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 115

4.

Int. Calc. Indicato r

Currenc y Key

Eff. from

Sequentia Term Referenc l number (Debit/Credi e t Interest) Interest

Premiu m

02

EUR

01.01.200 1

1

Debit interest: balance interest calc.

UIDEUR

0

02

EUR

01.01.200 1

2

Credit interest: balance interest calc.

UICEUR

0

02

EUR

01.01.200 0

1

Credit interest: balance interest calc.

UICEUR

-1

02

EUR

01.01.200 0

4

Debit interest: balance interest calc.

UIDEUR

5

Save your entries.

Enter Interest Values Use An interest rate is defined for the discount rate. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Accounts Receivable/ Accounts Payable  Business Transactions  Interest Calculation  Interest Calculation  Enter Interest Values

Transaction code

OB83

2.

On the Change View "Reference Interest Rate Values": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:

CUSTOMER 116

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field name

Description

Reference

UICEUR

Valid from

01.01.2001

Int.Rate 4.

Interest Rate

Note

7,0000000

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field name

Description

User action and values

Reference

UIDEUR

Valid from

01.01.2001

Int.Rate 5.

User action and values

Interest Rate

Note

10,0000000

Save your entries.

Closing Count Define Reply Addresses for Balance Confirmation Use In this step, you define the address to which the customers or vendors are to send their reply for the balance confirmation. Since this address is different from the company code address, this specification is important. You can define several addresses under one ID for every company code. Specify the required identification for every program run. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable  Business Transaction  Closing  Count  Balance Confirmation Correspondence  Define Reply Addresses for Balance Confirmation

Transaction code

OBV1

2.

On the Change View "Company Code-Dependent Address Data": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 117

4.

5.

Field name

Description

User action and values

CoCd

Company Code

3710

AdrID

Address-Identification

100

Note

On the Edit address: 37100100 screen, make the following entries: Field name

User action and values

Name

Company Code 3710 (NL)

Street/House number

Amerikastraat

Postal code/City

5232 BE/ 's-Hertogenbosch

Country

NL

Time zone

CET

Language

NL

Save your entries.

CUSTOMER 118

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.3.3.1.5 Bank Accounting Bank Accounts Update House Bank Account with House Bank ID Use If you want to run the automatic payment run program, or if you want to post a bank statement automatically, you must set up the bank identification in your corresponding general ledger master data. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP menu

Accounting  Financial Accounting  General Ledger  Master Records  G/L Accounts Individual Processing  In Company Code

Transaction code

FS00

On the Edit G/L Account Company code data screen, make the following entries: Field name

Description

User action and values

G/L Account

11001000

Company Code

3710

3.

Choose the Change button (next to the Company Code field).

4.

Choose the Create/bank/interest tab.

5.

Make the following entries: Field name

Description

Note

User action and values

House bank

BANK1

Account ID

GIRO

Note

6.

Save your entries.

7.

Repeat the previous steps for the following accounts, and enter House bank and Account ID as stated in the following table. G/L Account

Company Code

House bank

Account ID

11002000

3710

BANK2

GIRO

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 119

8.

Save your entries.

Business Transactions Payment Transactions Bank Statement Make Global Settings for Electronic Bank Statement Use In this activity you make the settings for the account statement. You create a transaction type, and assign bank details, for which the account statements must be imported, to a transaction type. All the house bank accounts at a particular bank are assigned to the same transaction type. For the following entries you have one customizing topic. If you have entered the customizing topic, you find all other settings in the Dialog Structure on the lefthand side of the screen. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Bank Accounting  Business Transactions  Payment Transactions  Electronic Bank Statement  Make Global Settings for Electronic Bank Statement

Transaction code

S_P00_07000249

2.

In the Chart of Accounts field, enter YCOA and choose Continue.

3.

On the Change View "Create Transaction Type": Overview screen, make the following entry:

4.

Trans. Type

Name

37MT

MultiCash Netherlands

Save your entry.

CUSTOMER 120

Localization objects - per Business Priority

5.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen select Transaction Type 37MT, and double click Assign External Transaction Types to Posting Rules in the left-hand pane. In this step, you assign (external) business transaction codes to a posting rule (internal), which enables you to use the same posting specifications for different business transaction codes.

6.

On the Change View "Assign External Transaction Types to Posting Rules": Overview screen, make the following entries: Ext Trans

+/- Post. Rule

Int. Algthm.

Notes

001

-

F003

012

Outgoing check: check number same as payment doc. no.

002

-

F003

012

Outgoing check: check number same as payment doc. no.

004

-

F010

021

Reference document number search

005

-

F010

021

Reference document number search

009

-

F015

000

No interpretation

020

-

F004

019

Reference no. (DME management)

051

+

F001

021

Reference document number search

070

+

F002

000

No interpretation

071

+

F009

019

Reference no. (DME management)

082

+

F008

001

Standard algorithm

083

-

F007

001

Standard algorithm

104

-

F010

021

Reference document No search

105

-

F010

021

Reference document No search

108

-

F015

000

No interpretation

109

F015

000

No interpretation

116

F004

000

No interpretation

159

F001

000

No interpretation

166

F001

021

Reference document No search

171

F009

019

Reference no. (DME management)

174

F009

019

Reference no. (DME management)

191

F004

019

Reference no. (DME management)

192

F009

019

Reference no. (DME management)

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 121

Ext Trans

+/- Post. Rule

196

7.

Int. Algthm.

Notes

F009

019

Reference no. (DME management)

201

-

F004

019

Reference no. (DME management)

202

+

F001

021

Reference document number search

206

-

F004

019

Reference no. (DME management)

808

-

F011

000

No interpretation

814

+

F012

000

No interpretation

814

-

F013

000

No interpretation

UNALLOCATED +

F006

000

UNALLOCATED -

F005

000

Save your entries. To enable the bank statement to find the item to be cleared in the vendor direct debit transaction, the bank details must be maintained in the vendor master record. The bank statement finds the vendor using the bank details and the item using the value (if unique). For algorithm 012, the number interval of the document numbers must be entered in the import report. For algorithm 026, the number interval of the reference document numbers must be entered (SD number assignment = XBLNR in the FI document). For more information about searching for the reference document number, see SAP Note 0107592. The UNALLOCATED transaction results in the bank statement being imported, even if the external transaction code has not been created in Customizing. The transaction is posted to the interim account (bank subaccount, depending on bank). Review this interim account after the bank statement is imported and post the items to the correct accounts where necessary. To ensure that the transaction is contained in the system the next time the statement is imported, define the new external transaction code in Customizing, and assign an appropriate posting rule.

Reprocessing Analysis, Define Average Cost of Reprocessing Use In order to make the efforts for reprocessing more visible, they will also be displayed as costs. Therefore, there is a configuration to maintain average cost of manually reprocessing bank statement items per company code.

CUSTOMER 122

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (NEW)  Bank Accounting  Business Transactions  Payment Transactions  Electronic Bank Statement  Reprocessing Analysis → Define Average Cost of Reprocessing

Transaction code

SPRO

On the Change View " Average Cost of Reprocessing an Incoming Payment": Overview screen, make the following entry: Co.Cd.

Average Cost of Reprocess

Crcy

3710

27.50

EUR

Save your entries.

Import and assign Reporting Variants Reporting Variants Use The reporting variants needed for classic payment medium programs are created.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP system menu

SAP Menu  Tools  ABAP Workbench  Development  ABAP Editor

Transaction code

SE38

2.

On the ABAP Editor Initial Screen, provide the program.

3.

Choose Variants.

4.

Choose Change.

5.

On the ABAP: Variants - Initial Screen, provide the variant, select Values, and choose Create.

6.

On the Maintain Variant: Report xxxx, variant yyyy screen, provide the necessary data, and choose Attributes.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 123

7.

On the Variant Attributes screen, enter the description in Meaning field, and save your entries.

8.

Perform the steps for the following program RFKORD30:

9.

Program

Variant

Description

RFKORD30

BPFINL/RFKORD3

Variant RFKORD30

Repeat the steps for following program: RFFOD__S.

Program

Paym. Meth.

Print checks

Print checks: Printer

Print Payment Summary

Print Payment Summary: Printer

RFFOD__S BPFINL_S_10 Variant Payment Method O

O

Select



Select



RFFOD__S BPFINL_S_20 Variant Payment Method S

S

Select



Select



10.

Variant

Description

Repeat the steps for the following program: RFFOD__U Program

Variant

Descr.

Paym. Print Data Data Medium Meth. Paym. Medium Med. Exchange Exch.: Printer

RFFOD__U BPFINL_U Variant U, A, Payment E Method UAE

Program

Variant

Select

Descr.

RFFOD__U BPFINL_U Variant Payment Method UAE 11.



Print paym, Advice Notes

Print paym, Advice Notes: Printer

Select



Print Paym. Sum.

Print Paym. Sum Printer

Select



Repeat the steps for following program: RFFOD__L.

CUSTOMER 124

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Program

Variant

Descr.

Paym. Data Meth. Med. Exch.

RFFOD__L BPFINL_L Variant L RFFOD__L

Data Med. Exch: Printer

Print paym, Advice Notes

Select

Print Print paym, Paym. Advice Sum. Notes: Printer

Print Paym. Sum Printer





Define Posting Parameters Use For the Post Incoming Payments Fiori app, this configuration task uses the parsing service of the electronic bank statement to enable the search functionality to find open invoices in Accounts Receivable. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (NEW)  Bank Accounting  Business Transactions  Payment Transactions  Electronic Bank Statement  Settings for the Data Import → Define Posting Parameters

Transaction code

SM31: FEBV_IMP_POST and FEBV_IMP_SELOPT

2.

Choose the New Entries button.

3.

Make the following entries: Co.Cd.

Posting Mode

Ass.val.dte to acct

Bundling Type

3710

1 Import and Post

Selected

No bundling

4.

In the Dialog Structure pane, double click Number ranges.

5.

Make the following entries:

6.

No.

Field Name

Lower Limit

Upper Limit

001

BELNR Document Number

90000000

90000000

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 125

4.3.3.1.6 Period End Activities Tax Reporting Make Settings for Electronic Bank Communication with Authorities Use You define the settings that are required for electronic communication with the authorities in this IMG activity. The settings depend on the:  Return type, for example, electronic advance return for tax on sales/purchases.  Company code or dominant enterprise.  Country in which the tax authority is located, to which you want to send your tax returns. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New)  Periodic Processing  Report  Electronic Communication with Authorities  Make Settings for Electronic Communication with Authorities

Transaction code

SPRO

2.

On the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box screen, enter 0001 for Electronic Advance Return for Tax on Sales/Purchases or 0002 for Electronic EC Sales List in the Return Type field, and click Enter.

3.

On the Change View “Settings Electronic Data Transmission”: Details screen, choose the month field, if you want to report on a monthly basis.

4.

Save your entries.

CUSTOMER 126

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Define Parameters for Electronic Communication with Authorities Use In this Customizing activity, you define the parameters that are required for electronic communication with the authorities. The parameters depend on the: 1. Return type, for example, electronic advance return for tax on sales/purchases. 2. Company code or dominant enterprise. 3. Country in which the tax authority is located to which you want to send your tax returns. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New)  Periodic Processing  Report  Electronic Communication with Authorities  Make Settings for Electronic Communication with Authorities

Transaction code

SPRO

2.

On the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box screen, enter 0001 in the Return field, and enter 3710 for the Dominant Enterprise/Company Code field.

3.

Enter NL for the Country of Reporting Authority field, and choose Enter.

4.

On the Change View “Parameter Values Electronic Data Transmission”: Overview screen, enter optional entries for the available fields.

5.

Save your entries.

Define Tax on Sales/Purchases Groups Use In this activity you define taxes on sales/purchases groups . You can group taxes on sales/purchases groups, for example, for creating the advance return for tax on sales/purchases for your country, or for grouping different company codes with the same VAT registration number in the EC sales list.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 127

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New)  Periodic Processing  Report  Sales/Purchases Tax Returns  Define Tax on Sales/Purchases Groups

Transaction code

OBCF

On the Change View “Taxes on Sales/Purchases Groups”: Overview, choose the New Entries button and enter the following:

2.

Tax Group

Adv.ret.tax no.

Dom.Ent./CoCode

NL01

NL123456789

3710

Save your entries.

Assign Company Codes to Tax on Sales/Purchases Groups Use In this activity, you can group several company codes together in a taxes on sales/purchases group. To do this, you must assign the same taxes on the sales/purchases group to the company codes concerned. The data for the company codes in question are grouped together and printed with the taxes on sales/purchases group with the automatic printout of the advance return for taxes on sales/purchases. Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New)  Periodic Processing  Report  Sales/Purchases Tax Returns  Assign Company Codes to Tax on Sales/Purchases Groups

Transaction code

OBC6

On the Change View “Assign Comp.Code -> Taxes on Sls/Purch. Group”: Overview make the following assignment: CoCd

Tx grp

3710

NL01

Save your entries. CUSTOMER

128

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Assign Tax Group Version Time-Dependent Use For the electronic tax return, if you change the tax code you can assign a time-dependent tax group version for the new assignment of the tax codes to the key figures. The tax group version is determined in report RFUMSV00 with the last valid-from date based on the reporting period of the Electronic Tax Return. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New)  Periodic Processing  Report  Sales/Purchases Tax Returns  Assign Tax Group Version Time-Dependent

Transaction code

OBDI

2.

On the Change View “Assign Time-Dependent Tax Group Version”: Overview make the following entries:

3.

Assign to CoCd 3710:

4.

Country

From Date

Version

NL

01.01.2011

EDCL

Save your entries.

Group Tax Base Balances Use In this activity, you group the combinations of taxes on sales/purchases codes, transaction keys, and indicators for total/debit/credit balances relevant for filling out the advance return for tax on sales/purchases form together in a base amount group. Each tax base amount group represents an item on the advance return for tax on the sales/purchases form. The balance of the tax base amounts are entered in this item. If the amount for a particular combination is also needed in subtotals, amounts carried forward, and totals, then you also enter the other groups involved. You do the same for the tax amounts. Read the documentation for the activity Group Tax Balances for more information.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 129

In addition, you assign your tax base amount indicators for the electronic advance tax return to the tax codes. These are on the official form before the column for the base for tax contributions without tax on sales and purchases. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New)  Periodic Processing  Report  Sales/Purchases Tax Returns  Group Tax Base Balances

Transaction code

OBCG

2.

On the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box screen, enter NL in the Country Key field.

3.

Enter EDCL in the Tax grouping version field, and click Enter.

4.

On the Change View “Grouping of Tax Base Balances”: Overview screen, enter the values mentioned in the following table: Tx

Description

Trs

A0

Domestic sale of goods, Zero rate (0%)

MWAS

5

A1

Domestic sale of goods, Reduced rate (6%)

MWAS

2

A2

Domestic sale of goods, Standard rate (21%)

MWAS

1

7A

Domestic sale of services, Zero rate (0%)

MWAS

5

8A

Domestic sale of services, Reduced rate (6%)

MWAS

2

9A

Domestic sale of services, Standard rate (21%)

MWAS

1

AG

Domestic Sale, Reverse charge

MWAS

5

AH

Domestic purchase of goods reverse charge, Reduced rate (6%)

NLXA

6

AI

Domestic purchase of goods reverse charge, Standard rate (21%)

NLXA

6

AJ

Domestic purchase of service reverse charge, Reduced rate (6%)

NLXA

6

AK

Domestic purchase of service reverse charge, Standard rate (21%)

NLXA

6

NLXA

10

I1

Article 23 import reverse charge, Reduced rate (6%)

Ba l.

Tx.bs

Arithm Oper

CUSTOMER 130

Localization objects - per Business Priority

5.

Tx

Description

Trs

Ba l.

Tx.bs

I2

Article 23 import reverse charge, Standard rate (21%)

NLXA

10

E5

EU sale of service reverse charge

MWAS

8

E7

EU sale of goods

MWAS

8

9E

EU sale of goods distance selling

MWAS

9

Y1

Export of goods

MWAS

7

N1

NonEU purchase of service reverse charge reduced rate (6%)

NLXA

10

N2

NonEU purchase of service reverse charge standard rate (21%)

NLXA

10

C1

Import VAT reduced rate (6% customs invoice)

NLXA

10

C2

Import VAT standard rate (21% customs invoice)

NLXA

10

Arithm Oper

Save your entries.

Group Tax Balances Use In this activity, you group the combinations of taxes on sales/purchases codes, transaction keys, and indicators for total/debit/credit balances relevant for filling out the German, Belgian, and Portuguese advance return for tax on sales/purchases form together in tax groups. Each tax group represents an item on the advance return for tax on the sales/purchases form. The balances of the tax amounts are entered in this item. If the amount for a particular combination is also needed in subtotals, amount carried forward, and totals, then you also enter the other groups involved. In addition, you assign your tax base amount indicators for the electronic advance tax return to the tax codes. These are on the official form before the column for tax. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New)  Periodic Processing  Report  Sales/Purchases Tax Return  Group Tax Balances

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 131

Transaction code

OBCH

2.

On the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box screen, enter NL in the Country Key field, and EDCL in the Tax grouping version field, and click Enter.

3.

On the Change View “Grouping of Tax Balances”: Overview screen, enter the values mentioned in the following table:

CUSTOMER 132

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Tx

Description

Trs

A1

Domestic sale of goods, Reduced rate (6%)

MWS

52

A2

Domestic sale of goods, Standard rate (21%)

MWS

51

8A

Domestic sale of services, Reduced rate (6%)

MWS

52

9A

Domestic sale of services, Standard rate (21%)

MWS

51

A9

Domestic purchase of goods, Reduced rate (6%)

VST

62

Domestic purchase of goods, Standard AA rate (21%)

VST

62

Domestic purchase of services, Reduced AD rate (6%)

VST

62

Domestic purchase of services, Standard rate (21%)

VST

62

Domestic purchase of goods reverse AH charge, Reduced rate (6%)

ESA

56

Domestic purchase of goods reverse AH charge, Reduced rate (6%)

ESE

62

AI

Domestic purchase of goods reverse charge, Standard rate (21%)

ESA

56

AI

Domestic purchase of goods reverse charge, Standard rate (21%)

ESE

62

AJ

Domestic purchase of service reverse charge, Reduced rate (6%)

ESA

56

AJ

Domestic purchase of service reverse charge, Reduced rate (6%)

ESE

62

Domestic purchase of service reverse AK charge, Standard rate (21%)

ESA

56

Domestic purchase of service reverse AK charge, Standard rate (21%)

ESE

62

Article 23 import reverse charge, Reduced rate (6%)

ESA

60

AE

I1

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

Bal. Gp no

ArithmOper Comment

CUSTOMER 133

I1

Article 23 import reverse charge, Reduced rate (6%)

ESE

62

I2

Article 23 import reverse charge, Standard rate (21%)

ESA

60

I2

Article 23 import reverse charge, Standard rate (21%)

ESE

62

E0

EU purchase of goods reverse charge reduced rate (6%)

ESA

61

E0

EU purchase of goods reverse charge reduced rate (6%)

ESE

62

E1

EU purchase of goods reverse charge standard rate (21%)

ESA

61

E1

EU purchase of goods reverse charge standard rate (21%)

ESE

62

E2

EU purchase of service reverse charge reduced rate (6%)

ESA

61

E2

EU purchase of service reverse charge reduced rate (6%)

ESE

62

E3

EU purchase of service reverse charge standard rate (21%)

ESA

61

E3

EU purchase of service reverse charge standard rate (21%)

ESE

62

N1

NonEU purchase of service reverse charge reduced rate (6%)

ESA

60

N1

NonEU purchase of service reverse charge reduced rate (6%)

ESE

62

N2

NonEU purchase of service reverse charge standard rate (21%)

ESA

60

N2

NonEU purchase of service reverse charge standard rate (21%)

ESE

62

C1

Import VAT reduced rate (6% customs invoice)

ESA

60

C1

Import VAT reduced rate (6% customs invoice)

ESE

62

C2

Import VAT standard rate (21% customs invoice)

ESA

60

CUSTOMER 134

Localization objects - per Business Priority

C2 4.

Import VAT standard rate (21% customs invoice)

ESE

62

Save your entries.

Define SCB Indicator for Foreign Trade Regulations Use In this activity, you define information using an indicator which is needed for reporting according to foreign trade regulations for foreign payment transactions and which shows the reason for payment. You must enter the indicator in the line item. The reasons for payment stored for the indicator are transferred when you print the form or in the corresponding data medium exchange.

Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  General Ledger Accounting (New)  Periodic Processing  Report  Foreign Trade Regulations  Define SCB Indicator for Foreign Trade Regulations

Transaction code

SPRO

On the Change View “SCB Indicators”: Overview screen, enter the following values the Netherlands: SCB Indicator

Document type for the report record

Indicator acc. to service specifications

Reason for pmnt (2 lines)

N01

1

1

Voeding en levende dieren

N17

1

15

Overige

N18

1

16

Storno-uitvoer 1

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 135

Discounting of Long-Term Receivables, Payables, and Provisions Use Long-Term-Receivables, Payables, and Provisions with a residual maturity >1 year must be discounted. The interest rates can be differently assigned for each year.

Define Valuation Areas Use In this IMG activity, you define your valuation areas for your closing operations. With the valuation areas, you can report different valuation approaches and post to different accounts. You can save the valuation results separately for each document item and use them for other closing operations (such as sorted lists). Note In foreign currency valuation, the saved valuation differences are not used to calculate the realized exchange rate differences. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New)  Periodic Processing  Valuate  Define Valuation Areas

Transaction code

SPRO

2.

On the Change View "Valuation Area”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:

4.

Valuation area

Valuation method

Currency type

Long text

NL

BILM

10

Valuation area Netherlands

Save your entries.

CUSTOMER 136

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Assign Valuation Areas and Accounting Principles Use In this IMG activity, you assign the desired accounting principles to your valuation areas. You can use the valuation area for the reclassification or sorted list of payables and receivables and for foreign currency valuation. You can use the valuation area to apply in these reports the different valuation requirements of the accounting principles.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New)  Periodic Processing  Valuate  Assign Valuation Areas and Accounting Principles

Transaction code

S_PL0_86000071

2.

On the Change View "Assignment of Valuation Area to Accounting Principles": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:

4.

Valuation area

Acc. Princ.

NL

LG

Save your entries.

Define Calculation Methods Use In this activity, you define your calculation methods for discounting long-term receivables/payables as well as provisions.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New)  Periodic Processing  Valuate  Discounting of Long-Term Receivables, Payables, and Provisions  Define Calculation Methods

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 137

Transaction code

F107_PROVMETH

2.

On the Change View "Calculation Methods": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Method

Description

YBNL

Long-Term Provisions

4.

Select line method YBNL, and choose Details.

5.

On the Change View "Details Overview" screen, choose New Entries.

6.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:

7.

Remaining Maturity from (Exclud)

Until (including)

Time Unit

Interest indicator

Name

0

11

Month

Y0

Provisions < 1 Year

11

23

Month

Y1

Provisions >1 Years

23

35

Month

Y2

Provisions >2 Years

35

47

Month

Y3

Provisions >3 Years

47

59

Month

Y4

Provisions > 4 Years

59

71

Month

Y5

Provisions > 5 Years

71

83

Month

Y6

Provisions > 6 Years

83

95

Month

Y7

Provisions > 7 Years

95

107

Month

Y8

Provisions > 8 Years

Save your entries.

Define Interest Rates Use In this activity, you define the interest rates for discounting long-term receivables/payables as well as provisions. CUSTOMER 138

Localization objects - per Business Priority

The interest rates in this document are examples only. They must be adapted to your business requirements. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New)  Periodic Processing  Valuate  Discounting of Long-Term Receivables, Payables, and Provisions  Define Calculation Methods

Transaction code

F107_PROVMETH

2.

On the Change View "Calculation Methods": Overview screen, select the YBNL method, and choose Details.

3.

On the Change View "Details Overview:" screen, select Interest Indicator.

4.

On the Display View "Interest Rates": Overview screen, select the Display -> Change button.

5.

On the Change View "Interest Rates": Overview screen, make the following entries:

6.

Int ID

Crcy

Valid from

Debit %

Cred. %

Y0

EUR

current date

5,000

5,000

Y1

EUR

current date

5,100

5,100

Y2

EUR

current date

5,200

5,200

Y3

EUR

current date

5,300

5,300

Y4

EUR

current date

5,400

5,400

Y5

EUR

current date

5,500

5,500

Y6

EUR

current date

5,600

5,600

Y7

EUR

current date

5,700

5,700

Y8

EUR

current date

5,800

5,800

Save your entries.

Define Accounts for Value Adjustments 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New)  Periodic Processing  Valuate  Discounting of

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 139

Long-Term Receivables, Payables, and Provisions  Define Accounts Transaction code

OBB0

2.

On the Maintain FI Configuration: Automatic Posting Procedures screen, choose Provisions/Recs/Payables: Adjust. Acct (transaction RKK).

3.

On the Enter Chart of Accounts dialog box, select YCOA and choose the Change Value area F 7

4.

On the Change valuation area dialog box, select NL.

5.

On the Maintain FI Configuration: Automatic Posting-Accounts screen, select posting key.

6.

On the Maintain FI Configuration: Automatic Posting-Posting Keys screen, make the following entries: Posting Key

Transaction Type

Debit

40

Credit

50

7.

Save your entries.

8.

Choose Accounts.

9.

On the Maintain FI Configuration: Automatic Posting-Accounts screen, make the following entries: In the following maintenance views, the term Reconciliation account is not meant in the sense of a reconciliation account (SKB1-MITKZ is not empty) to which cannot be directly posted (as for example a vendor reconciliation account), but in the sense account to be adjusted by valuation postings. Chart of Accounts

YCOA

Transaction

RKK

Valuation Area

NL

Reconciliation account

Adjustment Account

24031000

24099900

24032000

24099900

24033000

24099900

24034000

24099900

24035000

24099900

24036000

24099900

24037000

24099900

CUSTOMER 140

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Chart of Accounts

YCOA

Transaction

RKK

Valuation Area

NL

Reconciliation account

Adjustment Account

24090000

24099900

24091000

24099900

24093000

24099900

24097000

24099900

24030000

24099900

10.

Save your entries.

11.

Go back to the Maintain FI Configuration: Automatic Posting Procedures screen.

12.

On the Maintain FI Configuration: Automatic Posting Procedures screen, choose Provisions/Recs/Payables: Discount Exp. (transaction ZKB).

13.

On the Enter Chart of Accounts dialog box, select YCOA and choose Change Value area F 7

14.

On the Change valuation area dialog box, select NL.

15.

On the Maintain FI Configuration: Automatic Posting-Accounts screen, select posting key.

16.

On the Maintain FI Configuration: Automatic Posting-Posting Keys screen, make the following entries: Posting Key

Transaction Type

Debit

40

Credit

50

17.

Save your entries.

18.

Choose Accounts.

19.

On the Maintain FI Configuration: Automatic Posting-Accounts screen, make the following entries: Chart of Accounts

YCOA

Transaction

ZKB

Valuation Area

NL

Reconciliation account

Adjustment Account

24031000

66010000

24032000

66010000

24033000

66010000

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 141

Chart of Accounts

YCOA

Transaction

ZKB

Valuation Area

NL

Reconciliation account

Adjustment Account

24034000

66010000

24035000

66010000

24036000

66010000

24037000

66010000

24090000

66010000

24091000

66010000

24093000

66010000

24097000

66010000

24030000

66010000

20.

Save your entries.

21.

Choose Back.

22.

On the Maintain FI Configuration: Automatic Posting Procedures screen, choose Provisions/Recs/Payables: Discount Tfr (transaction ZKK).

23.

On the Enter Chart of Accounts dialog box, select YCOA and choose Change Value area F 7

24.

On the Change valuation area dialog box, select NL.

25.

On the Maintain FI Configuration: Automatic Posting-Accounts screen, select posting key.

26.

On the Maintain FI Configuration: Automatic Posting-Posting Key screen, make the following entries: Posting Key

Transaction Type

Debit

40

Credit

50

27.

Save your entries.

28.

Choose Accounts.

29.

On the Maintain FI Configuration: Automatic Posting-Accounts screen, make the following entries:

CUSTOMER 142

Localization objects - per Business Priority

30.

Chart of Accounts

YCOA

Transaction

ZKK

Valuation Area

NL

Reconciliation account

Adjustment Account

24031000

66019900

24032000

66019900

24033000

66019900

24034000

66019900

24035000

66019900

24036000

66019900

24037000

66019900

24090000

66019900

24091000

66019900

24093000

66019900

24097000

66019900

24030000

66019900

Save your entries.

Period End Reporting Creating Financial Statement Version Use In this activity: You define the versions you must create a balance sheet, and profit and loss statement. You can define versions for a specific chart of accounts, for a group chart of accounts, or without any specific assignment. You then determine the financial statement items for your version. You assign groups of accounts to the items at the lowest levels of the hierarchy. You can select the criteria that determine which items the accounts are displayed in. For example, accounts or groups of accounts can be assigned to particular items based on their balance. Alternatively, you can also assign functional area intervals at the lowest level of the structure, instead of account intervals. Either account intervals or functional area How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 143

intervals can be assigned to a financial statement item. You must explicitly define financial statement versions to which functional areas are assigned as such. You do this by setting the Fun.area allowed indicator. This financial statement version can then also be used by the notes to financial statement in the G/L account information system. A financial statement version would be created for each operative and country CoA used. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  General Ledger Accounting (New)  Master Data  GL Accounts  Define Financial Statement Versions

Transaction Code

OB58

2.

On the Change View "Financial Statement Versions": Overview screen, choose New Entries F 5 .

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field name

User action and values

Fin.Stmt.version

3730

Name

Acc Balance Sheet (#266) & P&L (new BilMoG) operative

Maint. language

EN

Chart of Accounts

YCOA

4.

Create the hierarchy, and assign the accounts from operational CoA YCOA .

5.

Save your entries.

4.3.3.2

Manual Rework

If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure, additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity

Manual transport possible

Manual action in target system / client required

Define Document Number Ranges for Entry View

No

Yes

Remarks

CUSTOMER 144

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Configuration activity

Manual transport possible

Manual action in target system / client required

Remarks

Import /Create Tax Codes

Yes

Yes

Import with report RFTAXIMP

Define Number Ranges for Local Documents

No

Yes

Define Reply Addresses for Balance Confirmation

Yes

No

Reporting Variants

Yes

No

If manual transport is possible, follow these steps: 1. Logon to the source system / client. 2. Go to the customizing activity as described in the respective section. 3. Select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request. Most likely this can be done by choosing Table View -> Transport. If this is not possible please refer to the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity. 4. The newly created transport request needs to be released and imported in the target system / client. Check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information. In case manual action in the target system / client is required, follow these steps: 1. Logon to the target system / client. 2. Go to the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 145

4.3.4

External Financial Accounting [local] (J16_OP)

4.3.4.1

Configuration – On-Premise Edition

4.3.4.1.1 Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Automatic Outgoing Payments Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program Set Up All Company Codes for Payment Transactions Use Specify paying company code for payment advice. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (NEW)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable  Business Transactions  Outgoing Payments  Automatic Outgoing Payments  Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program  Set Up Paying Company Codes for Payment Transactions

Transaction code

SM30 (Customizing Object V_T042B)

2.

On the Change View “Paying Company Codes”: Overview screen, double click the Company Code to update.

3.

On the Change View “Paying Company Codes”. Details screen, on the Forms section, make the following entries: Field Form for the Payment Advice

4.

Value SAPscript

F110_NL_ADVIES

Save your entries. CUSTOMER

146

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Set Up Paying Company Codes for Payment Transactions Use Minimum amount for which an incoming (€ 1,-) or outgoing payment (€ 5,-) is created. (SAP standard is used with minor changes.) Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable  Business Transactions  Outgoing Payments  Automatic Outgoing Payments  Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program  Set Up Paying Company Codes for Payment Transactions

Transaction code

S_ALR_87100688 or FBZP, select button Paying Company codes

2.

On the Change View "Paying Company Codes": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field

Value

Company Code

3710

Min. Amount for incoming payment Min. Amount for outgoing payment

4.

no exchange rate differences



No Exchange Rate Differences for Partial Payments



Separate Payment for each Payment Reference



Bill of Exchange Payments



Direct Debit Pre-notifications



Creditor Identification Number

NL42ZZZ123456780001

Form for the Payment Advise

F110_NL_ADVIES

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 147

Set Up Payment Methods per Country for Payment Transactions Use In this activity, you specify which payment methods are to be used in each country. The following payment methods are used: Pmt Method Description (local language) Description (English) E

Direct Debit

F

Auslandsüberweisung

Foreign bank transfer (DTAZV)

T

SEPA Überweisung

SEPA Credit Transfer

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable  Business Transactions  Outgoing Payments  Automatic Outgoing Payments  Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program  Set Up Payment Methods per Country for Payment Transactions

Transaction code

S_ALR_87100689 or FBZP, select button Pmnt methods in country

2.

On the Change View "Payment Method/Country": Overview screen, select country DE, and choose New Entries if additional payment methods are required.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field name

Description

Country Pymt Method

User action and values

Note

NL Payment Method

E

Description

Direct Debit

Incoming Payments



Debit Memo



Bank details



Account number required



IBAN Required



CUSTOMER 148

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field name

Description

User action and values

SWIFT Code Required



SEPA Mandate required



Document type for payment

ZP

Clearing document type

ZV

Use payment medium workbench



Format

SEPA_DD

Note

Format supplement 4.

Choose Back.

5.

On the Change View "Payment Method/Country": Overview screen, select Pynt.Methd E.

6.

In the left-hand frame, double click Currencies Allowed.

7.

Enter EUR as the allowed currency.

8.

Choose Back.

9.

On the Change View "Payment Method/Country": Overview screen, select Pynt.Methd E.

10.

In the left-hand frame, double click Permitted Destination Countries.

11.

Enter the following country keys: Country Key AU BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 149

GR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MT NL NO PL PT RO SE SK SL 12.

Choose Back.

13.

On the Change View "Payment Method/Country": Overview screen, select Pynt.Methd E.

14.

In the left-hand frame, double click Note to Payee by Origin.

15.

Enter SAP

16.

Save your entries.

17.

Choose Back.

SEPA

as the Note to Payee.

Set Up Payment Methods per Country for Payment Transactions for the OP solution Use In this activity, you specify which payment methods are to be used in each country for the OP solution. Following payment methods need to be updated to be used in OP, the OP solution uses BANK2: CUSTOMER 150

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Pmt Method

Description

F T E

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (NEW)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable  Business Transactions  Outgoing Payments  Automatic Outgoing Payments  Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program  Set Up Payment Methods per Country for Payment Transactions

Transaction code

SM34 (Customizing Object VC_T024ZL)

2.

On the Change View “Payment Method/Country”: Overview screen, double click Payment Method/Country to update.

3.

On the Change View Payment Method/Country”: Details screen, in the Payment Medium section, choose the Format im Buchungskreis button and make the following entry:

4.

5.

6.

CoCd

PM

House Bk

Pmnt medium format

3710

F

BANK1

FSN_CT_00100103

3710

F

BANK2

FSN_CT_00100103

Addit.

Select the row of the created entry, double click the last folder in the Dialog Structure, choose New Entries and make the following entry: Origin

Note to payee

Leave blank

SAMPLE 01

Save your entries and repeat the steps for payment method E and T with the following values: CoCd

PM House Bk

Pmnt medium format

Addit. Note to payee

3710

T

BANK1

SEPA_CT

SAP SEPA

3710

E

BANK1

SEPA_DD

SAP SEPA

3710

T

BANK2

SEPA_CT

SAP SEPA

3710

E

BANK2

SEPA_DD

SAP SEPA

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 151

Set Up Payment Methods per Company Code for Payment Transactions Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable  Business Transactions  Outgoing Payments  Automatic Outgoing Payments  Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program  Set Up Payment Methods per Company Code for Payment Transactions

Transaction code

S_ALR_87100690

2.

On the Change View "Maintenance of Company Code Data for a Payment Method" screen, select company code 1010 and the payment method (see following table).

3.

On the Change View "Maintenance of Company Code Data for a Payment Method" screen, make your entries as listed in the following table (note that the table is continued on the next page as it is too wide for one page): Amount Limits and Foreign payments/foreign currency payments/Bank selection Control Pmt Metho d

E

Minimu m amount

1,00

Maximum amount

Foreign busines s partner allowed

99999.999.999, 00

Foreign currenc y allowed

X

Cust./ vendor bank abroad allowed ?

No optimizatio n

X

X

Pyt adv.ctrl.

4.

Pmt Method

Restricted to

Rows Pymt adv. After … lines

E

X

4

Always pyt adv

NoPYtAdv

X

Save your entries.

CUSTOMER 152

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions: Ranking Order Use The program selects banks or bank accounts from which payment is to be made. Therefore the following specifications are made: 1. Ranking order of banks: specify which house banks are permitted and rank them in a list. 2. Bank accounts: specify which bank account is to be used for payments for each house bank, and payment method (and currency, if required), and to which G/L account the payment is posted. 3. Available amounts: for each account at a house bank, the amount (incoming, and outgoing payments) that is available must be specified. 4. Value date: specify how many days elapse between the posting date of the payment run and the value date at the bank, dependent on the payment method, bank account, payment amount, and currency. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable  Business Transactions  Outgoing Payments  Automatic Outgoing Payments  Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program  Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions

Transaction code

S_ALR_87100691 or FBZP

2.

On the Display View "Bank Selection": Overview screen, choose Paying Company Code 1010.

3.

Choose Ranking Order.

4.

Choose New Entries.

5.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:

6.

PM

Crcy

Rank Order

House Bk

E

EUR

1

BANK1

E

EUR

2

BANK2

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 153

Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions: Available Amounts Use In this section you determine the available amounts of each bank.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable  Business Transactions  Outgoing Payments  Automatic Outgoing Payments  Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program  Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions

Transaction code

S_ALR_87100691 or FBZP

2.

On the Display View "Bank Selection": Overview screen, choose Paying Company Code 1010.

3.

Choose Available Amounts.

4.

Choose New Entries.

5.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:

6.

House Bank

Account ID

Days Currency Available for outgoing payment

Scheduled incoming payment

BANK1

GIRO

999

EUR

10.000,00

10.000,00

BANK2

GIRO

999

EUR

1.000.000.000,00

1.000.000.000,00

Save your entries.

Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions: Bank Accounts Use In this section you determine the available bank accounts.

CUSTOMER 154

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable  Business Transactions  Outgoing Payments  Automatic Outgoing Payments  Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program  Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions

Transaction code

S_ALR_87100691 or FBZP

2.

On the Display View "Bank Selection": Overview screen, choose Paying Company Code 1010.

3.

Choose Bank Accounts.

4.

Choose New Entries.

5.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:

6.

House Bank

Payment Method

Currency

Account ID

Bank subaccount

BANK1

E

EUR

GIRO

11001040

BANK2

E

EUR

GIRO

11002040

Save your entries.

Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions: Value Date Use In this section you determine the value date. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable  Business Transactions  Outgoing Payments  Automatic Outgoing Payments  Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program  Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions

Transaction code

S_ALR_87100691 or FBZP

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 155

2.

On the Display View "Bank Selection": Overview screen, choose Paying Company Code 1010.

3.

Choose Value Date.

4.

Choose New Entries.

5.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:

6.

Prnt. Methd.

House Bank

Account

Amount Limit

Currency

Days

E

BANK1

GIRO

0,00

EUR

1

E

BANK2

GIRO

0,00

EUR

1

Save your entries.

Assign Payment Medium Format and Note to Payee to Payment Method Use In this activity you assign the payment medium format to a combination of payment method and country. You also determine the Note to Payee to be used, depending on the country and origin. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable  Business Transactions  Outgoing Payments  Automatic Outgoing Payments  Payment Media  Make Settings for Payment Medium Formats from Payment Medium Workbench  Assign Payment Medium Format and Note to Payee to Payment Method

Transaction code

S_ALR_87100701 or FBZP

On the Change View "Payment Method/Country". Overview screen, make the following entries (double click the payment method): Payment Format Method

Format Payment Print Key Print dataset supplement medium dataset program b/exch.

E

SEPA_DD

F

FSN_CT_00100103 BTL91

CUSTOMER 156

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Payment Format Method T 3.

Format Payment Print Key Print dataset supplement medium dataset program b/exch.

FSN_CT_00100103 EUSEPA

Save your entries.

Payment Medium Variant Creation Use Creation of payment medium variants. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (NEW)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions  Outgoing Payments  Automatic Outgoing Payments  Payment Media  Make Settings for Payment Medium Formats from Payment Medium Workbench  Create/Assign Selection Variants

Transaction code

OBPM4

2.

On the Payment medium: Selection Variants screen, double click on Payment medium Format FSN_CT_00100103 (Foreign Transfer), and for BANK2 enter Sel. Variant: FSN.

3.

On the Edit Variants: Report SAPFPAYM, Variant FSN screen, in the Format section enter: Payment medium Format

Choose Format Parameters, and in field ACH batch hdr. Company entry description

FSN_CT_00100103 4.

Choose Format Parameters: Description

Checkbox

Reporting Data in Order Currency Indicator: Transfer Bank Address too

X

Transfer IBAN

X

Report Using Z4

X

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 157

Description

Checkbox

EU Standard Bank Transfer with Reporting Data Foreign Bank Transfer instead of EU Standard Bank Transfer 5.

X

On the Print Control section: Description

Checkbox

Data Medium Exchange

X

FTR list

X

Payment Summary

X

Error Log

X

Choose Print Parameters, and in field Output Device

6.

Choose OK.

7.

Save your entries.

8.

Go Back.

9.

On the Payment medium: Selection Variants screen, double click on Payment medium Format SEPA_CT (SEPA Transfer) and for BANK2 enter Sel. Variant: SEPA_CT_VAR.

10.

On the Edit Variants: Report SAPFPAYM, Variant SEPA_CT_VAR screen, in the Format section enter: Payment medium Format

Choose Format Parameters, and in field ACH batch hdr. Company entry description

SEPA_CT 11.

12.

13.

Choose Format Parameters and make the following entries: Payment medium Format

SEPA_CT

XML Namespace of Data Medium

urn:iso:std:iso:20022:tech:xsd:pain.001.002.03

XML Location of Schema

urn:iso:std:iso:20022:tech:xsd:pain.001.002.03 pain.001.002.03.xsd

In the Print Control section, make the following entries: Description

Checkbox

Data Medium Exchange

X

Payment Summary

X

Error Log

X

Choose Print Parameters, and in field Output Device

Choose OK. CUSTOMER

158

Localization objects - per Business Priority

14.

Save your entries.

15.

Go Back.

16.

On the Payment medium: Selection Variants screen, double click on Payment medium Format SEPA_DD (SEPA Direct Debit (Bank Collection)) and for BANK2 enter Sel. Variant: SEPA_DD_VAR.

17.

On the Edit Variants: Report SAPFPAYM, Variant SEPA_DD_VAR screen, in the Format section enter: Payment medium Format

Choose Format Parameters, and in field ACH batch hdr. Company entry description

SEPA_DD 18.

19.

20.

Choose Format Parameters: Payment medium Format

SEPA_DD

XML Namespace of Data Medium

urn:iso:std:iso:20022:tech:xsd:pain.008.002.02

XML Location of Schema

urn:iso:std:iso:20022:tech:xsd:pain.008.002.02 pain.008.002.02.xsd

In the Print Control section, make the following entries: Description

Checkbox

Data Medium Exchange

X

Payment Summary

X

Error Log

X

Choose Print Parameters, and in field Output Device

Choose OK.

4.3.4.2

Manual Rework

If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure, additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity

Manual transport possible

Manual action in target system / client required

Define Document Number Ranges for Entry View

No

Yes

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

Remarks

CUSTOMER 159

Configuration activity

Manual transport possible

Manual action in target system / client required

Remarks

Import /Create Tax Codes

Yes

Yes

Import with report RFTAXIMP

Define Number Ranges for Local Documents

No

Yes

Define Reply Addresses for Balance Confirmation

Yes

No

Reporting Variants

Yes

No

If manual transport is possible, follow these steps: 1. Logon to the source system / client. 2. Go to the respective customizing activity as described in the respective section. 3. Select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request. Most likely this can be done by choosing Table View -> Transport. If this is not possible please refer to the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity. 4. The newly created transport request needs to be released and imported in the target system / client. Check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information. In case manual action in the target system / client is required, follow these steps: 1. Logon to the target system / client. 2. Go to the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.

CUSTOMER 160

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.3.5 SEPA for External Financial Accounting [local] (BFS) 4.3.5.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.3.5.1.1 Accounts Receivable Business Transactions Define Number Range Intervals Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable  Business Transactions  Incoming Payments  Management of SEPA Mandates Number Ranges of Mandates Define Number Ranges Intervals

Transaction code

SEPA_NR_MT

2.

On the Range Maintenance: SEPA Mandate Refer screen, enter in the Company Code field the value 3710 and choose the Change Intervals button.

3.

On the Maintain Intervals: Customer screen, choose the Insert Line button to maintain number range intervals:

4.

No

From number

To number

1

000000000001

000099999999

Ext

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 161

4.3.6

Cash Daily Operation [local] (J76)

4.3.6.1

Configuration – Cloud Edition

4.3.6.1.1 Enter GL Account for Bank Account Use Enter the G/L account for the existing bank accounts which were created in building block J74. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: Fiori Launchpad

Please contact system administrator to get the url of Fiori Launchpad, the user and password. The user must be assigned with role: SAP_BR_CASH_SPECIALIST (for On-premise Edition) SAP_BCR_FIN_CM_BAM_MC (for Cloud Enterprise Edition) SAP_BCR_FIN_CM_BANK_ACC_MGM (for Cloud Project Services Edition)

Fiori app

Manage Bank Accounts

2.

On the Bank Hierarchy: Active Accounts (XX Accounts) screen, choose the bank account 1133698 in bank key ABN of Country NL to be changed from the bank Hierarchy View or Account List View.

3.

The Bank Account screen displays, choose Edit.

4.

Choose the Connectivity Path tab, enter the following data: Field Name

Entry Value

G/L Account

0011001000

5.

Choose Save and Submit.

6.

Repeat the steps above using the following data: Field Name

Entry Value

Account Number

2580061

Bank Key

82080000

G/L Account

0011002000

Country

NL

CUSTOMER 162

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.3.6.1.2 Activate Individual Source Application Use You use this Customizing activity to activate source applications for cash management. Once a source application is activated, the transactions from the application are included in reporting for cash management. Applications are activated per company code. With this activity, you enter each application/company code combination individually. To activate multiple company codes for an application simultaneously, you can use the mass activation report Activate Multiple Source Applications.

Procedure 1.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: Transaction Code

SPRO

IMG Menu

Financial Supply Chain Management  Cash and Liquidity Management  Cash Management  Tools  Activate Individual Source Applications

2.

On the Change View "Activate Source Applications": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, create the following settings:

4.

Field Name

Entry Value

Src. Appl.

FI General Ledger

CoCd.

3710

Company Name

Company Code 3710

Active

1 Active

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 163

4.3.6.1.3 Define Clearing Accts for Receiving Bank for Acct. Transfer Use In this activity, you define the offsetting accounts for the receiving bank accounts for bank account transfers (payments between house bank accounts), which should be posted to when payment is made. The entries are necessary when payment requests are created for cash management payment advice notes that result from cash concentration, for example. The offsetting accounts for the paying house bank are determined by the payment program specifications and the payment methods used. The offsetting accounts for the receiving house bank cannot be determined from these specifications, however, but can be defined in this section. Procedure 1.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: Transaction Code

SPRO

IMG Menu

Financial Accounting(New)  Bank Accounting  Business Transactions  Payment Transactions  Payment Request  Define Clearing Accts for Receiving Bank for Acct. Transfer

2.

On the Change View "Acct Transfer: Determine Receiving Bank's Clearing Account screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen and create the following settings: CoCode House Bk

4.

Country Pmt Method

Currency Account ID

Clrg acct

3710

BANK1

11001080

3710

BANK2

11002080

Save your entries.

CUSTOMER 164

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.3.6.1.4 Define Clearing Accts for Paying Bank for Acct. Transfer Use In this activity, you can define the bank sub-accounts to be posted to in the general ledger for payment transactions with bank accounts. The accounts are specified by house bank account, payment method, and currency. If a currency is not specified, the account applies to all currencies.

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: Transaction Code

SPRO

IMG Menu

Financial Accounting(New)  Bank Accounting  Business Transactions  Payment Transactions  Payment Handling  Bank Clearing Account Determination  Define Account Determination

On the Determine Work Area: Entry screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Paying company code

3710

3.

On the Change View "Account Determination for GL Account Payments": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

4.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, create the following settings:

5.

House Bk

PM

BANK1

Crcy

Acct ID

Bank subacct

T

GIRO

11001020

BANK1

F

GIRO

11001020

BANK2

T

GIRO

11002020

BANK2

F

GIRO

11002020

Charge ind

BusA

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 165

4.3.6.1.5 Settings for Bank Statement Monitor Use In this IMG activity, you make the required settings for the house bank accounts that you want to view using the bank statement monitor.

Procedure 1.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: Transaction Code

SPRO

IMG Menu

Financial Supply Chain Management  Bank Communication Management  Bank Statement Monitor Settings for Bank Statement Monitor

2.

On the Change View "FTE-BSM: Settings for Bank Statement Monitor": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Company code

3710

House Bank

BANK1

Account ID

GIRO

Process Status

Choose checkbox

Difference Sts

Blank

Serial No. Sts

Blank

Reconcil. Sts

Blank

Interval

1

Interval Unit

0 Months

Fac.Calendar ID

01

Position

Blank

Difference Amount

Blank

Currency

EUR

Field Name

Entry Value

Company code

3710

CUSTOMER 166

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.

Field Name

Entry Value

House Bank

BANK2

Account ID

GIRO

Process Status

Choose checkbox

Difference Sts

Blank

Serial No. Sts

Blank

Reconcil. Sts

Blank

Interval

1

Interval Unit

0 Months

Fac.Calendar ID

01

Position

Blank

Difference Amount

Blank

Currency

EUR

Save your entries.

4.3.6.2

Manual Rework

If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity

Manual transport possible

Manual action in target system / client required

Enter GL Account for Bank Account

No

Yes

Remarks

In case a manual transport is possible please proceed as follows: 1. Logon to the source system / client. 2. Go to the customizing activity as described in the respective section. 3. Select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request. Most likely this can be done by choosing Table View -> Transport. If this is not possible please refer to the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity. 4. The newly created transport request needs to be released and imported in the target system / client. How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 167

5. Remark: Check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information. In case manual action in the target system / client is required please proceed as follows: 6. Logon to the target system / client. 7. Go to the customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.

4.3.7

Delta Cash Daily Operation [local] (BF3)

4.3.7.1

Configuration – On-Premise Edition

4.3.7.1.1 Define Clearing Accts for Paying Bank for Acct. Transfer Use In this activity, you can define the bank sub-accounts to be posted to in the general ledger for payment transactions with bank accounts. The accounts are specified by house bank account, payment method, and currency. If a currency is not specified, the account applies to all currencies. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: Transaction Code

SPRO

IMG Menu

Financial Accounting(New)  Bank Accounting  Business Transactions  Payment Transactions  Payment Handling  Bank Clearing Account Determination  Define Account Determination

On the Determine Work Area: Entry screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Paying company code

3710

CUSTOMER 168

Localization objects - per Business Priority

3.

On the Change View "Account Determination for GL Account Payments": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

4.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, create the following settings:

5.

House Bk

PM

Crcy

Acct ID

Bank subacct

BANK1

E

EUR

GIRO

11001020

BANK2

E

EUR

GIRO

11002020

Charge ind

BusA

Save your entries.

4.3.8 Financial Master Data (Manufacturing) [local] (BF2) 4.3.8.1

Configuration - On Premise

The following section describes the complete settings for this building block. These settings can be divided into three main groups: 1. Prerequisite settings that have to be checked and which were delivered by SAP (as part of the standard delivery) The term Check refers to these prerequisite settings. 2. Settings defined by the customer (in the customer namespace and customerspecific): The system uses automation to request individual customer settings during the personalization process. These settings can be initial or reused from existing SAP ERP layers and are indicated in the text by . 3. Additional settings that must be made, covered either by automation or manual configuration (in the customer namespace). The term Create refers to these additional settings in the text.

4.3.8.1.1 FI Master Data Manufacturing Create G/L Account Manually 1.

Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 169

Transaction Code

FS00

IMG Menu

SAP Menu  Accounting  Financial Accounting  General Ledger  Master Records  G/L Accounts  Individual Processing  Centrally

2.

To maintain account data, on the Edit G/L Account Centrally screen, enter the account number and the company code you want to update. Choose Create (the button to the right of the Company Code field).

3.

Make the following entries: G/L Account

Description

Accoun Account Group t type

Functi onal Area

0013100000 Inventory - Raw Material

X

Materials management accounts

0013200000 Inventory - Work In Progress

X

Materials management accounts

0013300000 Inventory - Semi Finished Goods

X

Materials management accounts

0013400000 Inventory - Finished Goods

X

Materials management accounts

0050100000 Cost of Goods Sold (Raw w/o Cost Element)

N

Income statement accounts

YB20

0050300000 Cost of Goods Sold (SF & Finish Goods w/o Cost El)

N

Income statement accounts

YB20

0050301000 COGS Direct Material

P

Income statement accounts

YB20

0050302000 COGS Third Party

P

Income statement accounts

YB20

0050303000 COGS Material Overhead

P

Income statement accounts

YB20

CUSTOMER 170

Localization objects - per Business Priority

G/L Account

Description

Accoun Account Group t type

Functi onal Area

0050304000 COGS Personnel Time

P

Income statement accounts

YB20

0050305000 COGS Machine Time

P

Income statement accounts

YB20

0050306000 COGS Setup Time

P

Income statement accounts

YB20

0050307000 COGS Production Overhead

P

Income statement accounts

YB20

0050308000 COGS Credits (Co/By-Pr)

P

Income statement accounts

YB20

0051100000 Consumption - Raw Material

P

Income statement accounts

0052001000 Loss Inventory Variance (Raw & Trade)

P

Income statement accounts

0052003000 Loss Inventory Variance (SF & Finish Goods)

P

Income statement accounts

0052011000 Loss Inventory Transfer (Raw & Trade)

P

Income statement accounts

0052013000 Loss Inventory Transfer (SF & Finish Goods)

P

Income statement accounts

YB20

0052021000 Loss Consumption for Quality Control (Raw & Trade)

P

Income statement accounts

YB20

0052023000 Loss Consumption for Quality Control (SF&Fin Gds)

P

Income statement accounts

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 171

G/L Account

Description

Accoun Account Group t type

Functi onal Area

0052033000 Loss from Valuation of own Products

P

Income statement accounts

0052042000 Loss Price Differences (PRV)

P

Income statement accounts

0052043000 Loss Price Differences (PRY)

P

Income statement accounts

0052044000 Loss Price Differences Material Ledger (LKW)

P

Income statement accounts

0052045000 Loss Price Differences own Products (PRK)

P

Income statement accounts

0052046000 Loss Price Diff fm Lower Lev.own Mats ML (PRC)

P

Income statement accounts

0052051000 Loss Consumption of Consign. Mat (Raw & Trade)

P

Income statement accounts

0052053000 Loss Consumption of Consign. Mat (SF & F.Goods)

P

Income statement accounts

YB20

0052070000 Loss from Production Variances

P

Income statement accounts

YB75

0052071000 Price Difference PRIV

P

Income statement accounts

YB75

0052072000 Price Difference QTYV

P

Income statement accounts

YB75

0052073000 Price Difference RSUV

P

Income statement accounts

YB75

YB20

CUSTOMER 172

Localization objects - per Business Priority

G/L Account

Description

Accoun Account Group t type

Functi onal Area

0052074000 Price Difference INPV

P

Income statement accounts

YB75

0052075000 Price Difference MXPV

P

Income statement accounts

YB75

0052076000 Price Difference OPPV

P

Income statement accounts

YB75

0052077000 Price Difference LSFV

P

Income statement accounts

YB75

0052078000 Price Difference REMV

P

Income statement accounts

YB75

0052079000 Price Difference SCRP

P

Income statement accounts

YB75

0052501000 Gain Inventory Variance (Raw & Trade)

P

Income statement accounts

0052503000 Gain Inventory Variance (SF & Finish Goods)

P

Income statement accounts

0052511000 Gain Inventory Transfer (Raw & Trade)

P

Income statement accounts

0052513000 Gain Inventory Transfer (SF & Finish Goods)

P

Income statement accounts

0052521000 Gain Consumption for Quality Control (Raw & Trade)

P

Income statement accounts

YB20

0052523000 Gain Consumption for QM (SF & Finish Goods)

P

Income statement accounts

YB20

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 173

G/L Account

Description

Accoun Account Group t type

Functi onal Area

0052532000 Gain from Valuation own Products

P

Income statement accounts

0052542000 Gain Price Differences (PRV)

P

Income statement accounts

0052543000 Gain Price Differences (PRY)

P

Income statement accounts

0052544000 Gain Price Differences Material Ledger (LKW)

P

Income statement accounts

0052545000 Posterior Real Rate Activity Allocation (AUI)

P

Income statement accounts

0052551000 Gain Consumption of Consign. Mat (Raw & Trade)

P

Income statement accounts

YB20

0052552000 Gain Consumption of Consign. Mat (SF & F.Goods)

P

Income statement accounts

YB20

0052570000 Gain from Production Variances

P

Income statement accounts

YB20

0054011000 Inventory Change Purch.Offset.Acct (Raw & Trade)

N

Income statement accounts

YB20

0054013000 Inventory change Purch.Offset.Acct (SF & F.Good)

N

Income statement accounts

YB20

0054053000 Inventory Change - Scrap own Products

P

Income statement accounts

0054083000 Inventory change - Cost of own Goods sold w/C.Elem

P

Income statement accounts

YB20

CUSTOMER 174

Localization objects - per Business Priority

G/L Account

4.

Description

Accoun Account Group t type

Functi onal Area

0054093000 Inventory Change - QM cons.own prod. w/ cst elem.

P

Income statement accounts

YB20

0054200000 Inventory Change - Work in Progress

N

Income statement accounts

YB20

0054300000 Inventory change - Semi Finished goods

P

Income statement accounts

YB20

0054400000 Inventory Change Finished Goods

P

Income statement accounts

YB20

0055100000 Plant Activity Production Order

P

Income statement accounts

0092101000 Settl.Material

S

Secondary costs / revenues

0092101500 Settl. Rework

S

Secondary costs / revenues

0094111000 Overhead Material

S

Secondary costs / revenues

0094112000 Overhead production

S

Secondary costs / revenues

0094301000 Machine hours 1

S

Secondary costs / revenues

0094302000 Machine hours 2

S

Secondary costs / revenues

094303000

S

Secondary costs / revenues

Setup Production

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 175

4.3.9 Extended Accounting for Trading/Manufacturing [local] (J67) 4.3.9.1

Configuration - On Premise

The following section describes the complete settings for this building block. These settings can be divided into three main groups: 1. Prerequisite settings that have to be checked and which were delivered by SAP (as part of the standard delivery) The term Check refers to these prerequisite settings. 2. Settings defined by the customer (in the customer namespace and customerspecific): The system uses automation to request individual customer settings during the personalization process. These settings can be initial or reused from existing SAP ERP layers and are indicated in the text by . 3. Additional settings that must be made, covered either by automation or manual configuration (in the customer namespace). The term Create refers to these additional settings in the text.

4.3.9.1.1 Cost Centers and Groups Cost Centers Use In this activity, the cost centers for manufacturing are created.

Prerequisites Cost center categories must be defined. The cost center standard hierarchy must be created. All Cost centers are assigned to controlling area A000.

CUSTOMER 176

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP System Menu

Accounting → Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Master Data → Cost Center → Individual Processing → Create

Transaction Code

KS01

2.

On the Create Cost Center: Initial screen, provide the necessary data, and choose Master Data.

3.

On the Create Cost Center: Basic screen, provide the necessary data, and Save.

4.

Make the following sets of entries: All Cost Centers are valid from 01.01.2006 to 31.12.9999. Person CC- Hier. Responsi Cat. Area ble

Comp Code

Manufacturing 37101301 1 Manufacturing – 1

SAP

F

0001

3710

Manufacturing 37101302 2 Manufacturing – 2

SAP

F

0001

3710

37101401 QM

Quality management

SAP

H

0001

3710

37101501 R&D

Research and development

Cost Center

Name

Description

Purch & Store 1 Purch & Store 1 (NL) 37101201 (NL) Purch & Store 2 Purch & Store 2 (NL) 37101202 (NL) Plant & Maint 37101701 (NL)

0001 SAP

E

SAP

G

3710 0001 3710 0001

SAP

G

Plant & Maint (NL)

3710 0001

SAP

H

3710

Result You have created cost centers.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 177

Change Cost Center Groups - Assign CCs to AltH Use The new created cost centers are assigned to the cost center alternative hierarchies.

Prerequisites The cost center groups are already created with layer 0 activation (see building block J18: Basic Overhead Cost Controlling). Cost center group

Description

3710120

Stores

3710130

Operations

3710140

Quality Management

3710150

Research and Development

3710300

CCA Receiver Building and Maintenance Cost-Manuf

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP System Menu

Accounting → Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Master Data → Cost Center Group → Change

Transaction Code

KSH2

2.

On the Change Cost Center Group: Initial screen, provide cost center group, and choose Hierarchy.

3.

On the Change Cost Center Group: Structure screen, choose Insert Cost Center.

4.

Provide the minimum and maximum values of the cost center range to be assigned.

5.

Make the following sets of entries: Cost Center Group

From Value

To Value

3710120

37101201

37101201

3710120

37101202

37101202

3710110

37101701

37101701

3710180

37101801

37101801

CUSTOMER 178

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Cost Center Group

From Value

To Value

3710130

37101301

37101301

3710130

37101302

37101302

3710140

37101401

37101401

3710150

37101501

37101501

3710300

37101201

37101201

3710300

37101202

37101202

3710300

37101701

37101701

3710300

37101301

37101301

3710300

37101302

37101302

3710300

37101401

37101401

3710300

37101501

37101501

3710300

37101101

37101101

3710300

37101601

37101601

3710300

37101602

37101602

Result The industry-specific cost centers are assigned to the cost center groups.

Assignment Functional Areas to Cost Centers Use In this step, you make additional settings for a functional area in cost centers. If you change the functional area, future postings are made using the new functional area. The change made to the functional area has no effect on postings that have already been made. You have to repost any documents that have already been posted. Changes to the functional area can lead to inconsistencies if documents are reversed. If subsequent to the functional area being changed, documents posted before this change are then reversed. The reversal document may in some cases be posted under the new functional area. How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 179

You should only carry out this procedure when testing the configuration. If you decide to carry it out in a productive system, do so with special care! Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP system Menu

Accounting  Controlling  Cost Center Accounting  Master Data  Cost Centers  Individual Processing  Change

Transaction Code

KS02

2.

If required, enter controlling area A000.

3.

On the Change Cost Center Initial screen, provide the cost center, and choose Enter.

4.

On the Change Cost Center: Basic screen, select the Basic Data tab, and enter the functional area in the Functional Area field.

5.

Save your entries.

6.

Provide the following data for SAP Best Practices cost center master data: Cost Center

Functional Area

37101301

YB20

37101302

YB20

37101401

YB40

37101501

YB50

37101201

YB20

37101202

YB20

37101701

YB40

Assign Profit Centers to Cost Centers Use Profit Centers must be assigned to all cost centers that exist in the client. Because of different scope selections, it is possible that some of the following listed cost centers do not exist or alternatively that cost centers exist that are not maintained in the list. If the listed cost center does not exist: no further action is necessary. If a cost center exists in the client, but is not listed below: add profit center depending on the scope. CUSTOMER 180

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP System Menu

Accounting  Controlling  Cost Center Accounting  Master Data  Cost Center  Single Processing  Change

Transaction Code

KS02

2.

On the Cost Center Change: Entry View screen, provide the necessary data, and choose Master Data.

3.

On the Change Cost Center: Basic screen, provide the necessary data, and save your entries. Key

Profit Center

37101301

YB110

37101302

YB111

37101401

YB600

37101501

YB600

37101201

YB110

37101202

YB111

37101701

YB700

Result Profit centers are assigned to all cost centers. CO Configuration with use of CO Master Data

Transfer Scheduled Activities from PP Use This activity must allow the transfer of scheduled activities planned in PP to cost center controlling. This step is only needed if production is in scope.

Prerequisites The planning scenario must be maintained by annual operations planning process (see 173 - SOP through Long Term Planning Transfer to LIS/PIS/Capacity). How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 181

If the annual operations planning process is not in scope, this step must be omitted. If the annual operations planning process is in scope, it is only possible to perform this step after the execution of the planning scenario. Because of the activation sequence, it could be the case that this building block has to be activated before. In this case, this step has to be done later (as soon as the longterm planning scenario is created).

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Planning → Plan Data Transfer → Transfer Scheduled Activities from PP

Transaction Code

OMIK

2.

On the Change View Control: Transferring Activity Reqs. To Cost Center Planning screen, select New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, provide following data, and choose Save. CO Area

Version Fi Fiscal Year

SOP MRP Longterm plng,

Version Plnng scenario

A000 2



Select

2

A000 2

+1

Select

2

A000 2

+2

Select

2

A000 2

+3

Select

2

A000 2

+4

Select

2

CUSTOMER 182

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Assessments Use Assessment is used to allocate primary and secondary costs. The original cost elements are combined, and allocated to the receiver cost center in an assessment cost element.

Define Assessment Actual Use The following cycles have been defined for the actual assessment: Cycle

Segment

Sender

Tracing Factor

Receiver

A37300 Manuf Ass. shared facility (ac

100

Cost Center

Cost center

Buildings & maintenance cost-M

37101750

Actual Statistical Key Figures

Cost Element 10_CE

group 3710300 (CCA Receiver Building and Maintenance Co)

Prerequisites Assessment cost elements (cost element type ‘42’) must be defined (see section “Create Secondary Cost Elements” in this document). Cost Element

Description

94201000

Build&Maint

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Actual Postings → Period-End Closing → Assessment → Maintain Assessment → Create Actual Assessment

Transaction Code

KSU1

On the Create Plan Assessment Cycle: Initial screen, make the following entries:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 183

Field name

3.

Description

User actions and values

Cycle

A37300

Start Date

01.01. current year

Comment

Example

On the Create Plan Assessment Cycle: Header Data screen, enter the following data: Field name

Description User actions and values

Comment

Controlling Area

A000

Cycle

A37300

Start Date From

01.01. current year

Example

Start Date To

31.12. current year

Example

Text

Buildings & maintenance costM

Indicator: Iterative

Not Set

Object Currency

Set

4.

Choose Attach Segment.

5.

On the Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, under Segment Header Data, make the following entries:

6.

7.

Segment Name

Text

100

Buildings & maintenance cost-M

On the Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, on the Segment header tab page, make the following entries: Segmen t

Assessment CEle

Sender rule

Share %

Actual value origin

100

94201000

Posted amounts

100

set

Segmen t

Receiver rule

var.portion type

scale neg. tracing fact.

100

Variable portions

Actual Statistical key figure

No scaling

On the Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, on the Senders/Receivers tab page, make the following entries:

CUSTOMER 184

Localization objects - per Business Priority

8.

9.

10.

Segmen t

Sender Cost Center from

Sender Cost Element Group

Receiver Cost Center Group

100

37101750

10_CE

3710300

On the Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, on the Sender Values tab page, make the following entries: Segmen t

Share %

Actual value origin

Version From

100

100,00

Set

0

On the Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, on Receiver Tracing factor tab page, make the following entries Segmen t

Var.portion type Scale Neg. Tracing Factor

Stat. key. Fig.From - to

100

Actual Statistical key figure

1002

No scaling

On the Create Plan Assessment: Segment screen, on the Receiver Tracing Factor tab page, make the following entries: Segmen t

Receivers

100

37101101

100

Percent example only

100

37101201

100

Percent example only

100

37101202

100

Percent example only

100

37101301

100

Percent example only

100

37101302

100

Percent example only

100

37101401

100

Percent example only

100

37101501

100

Percent example only

100

37101601

100

Percent example only

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

Portion/percent

Comment

CUSTOMER 185

11.

Segmen t

Receivers

Portion/percent

Comment

100

37101602

100

Percent example only

100

37101701

100

Percent example only

Save your entries.

Result You have defined the actual assessment cycle A37300.

4.3.9.1.2 Maintain Required Planning Data Set Planner Profile Use The following profile must be performed for activity type planning. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP System Menu

Accounting  Controlling  Planning  Set Planner Profile

Transaction Code

KP04

On the Set Planner Profile screen, enter SAPALL and choose Enter.

Change Activity Type/Price Planning Actual Year Use The purpose of this activity is to plan the output of cost centers, and the prices.

Prerequisites Cost centers and activity types must have been created. CUSTOMER 186

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP System Menu

Accounting → Controlling  Cost Center Accounting → Planning → Activity Output/Prices → Change

Transaction Code

KP26

On the Change Activity Type/Price Planning: Initial screen, enter the necessary data, and choose Overview Screen. Field name

Description User actions and values

Comment

Version



See following table

From Period

1

To Period

12

Fiscal year



Cost center



See following table



See following table

To Or group Activity Type (AT) To Or group Entry: Form-based 3.

Select

On the Change Activity Type/Price Planning: Overview screen, make the following entries, and save your entries.

For changing cost centers use drop down menu F2). Cost Center

AT Plan Distr Act . Key

37101301 1 How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

Cap. Distr . Key

Price (fixed ) 20

(next combination or STRG + Price (Var ) 10

Price Unit

PP Versio Ind n

0000 1

1 0 CUSTOMER 187

Cost Center

AT Plan Distr Act . Key

Cap. Distr . Key

37101301 2

Price (fixed ) 60

37101301 3 37101301 11 37101301 1

20

37101301 2

60

37101301 3 37101301 11

Price (Var )

Price Unit

PP Versio Ind n 1

10

0000 1

1

30

0000 1

1

35

0000 1 0000 1

1

10

1

10

0000 1

1

30

0000 1

1

35

0000 1

0 0 0 2 2 2 2

The headings in the previous table have been abbreviated. The following table shows the technical names, and their descriptions: Heading

Description

Statement

CC

Cost Center

AT

Activity Type

Plan Act

Plan Activity

Distr. Key

Distribution Documentation for Application-specific Key Distribution Key

Cap.

Capacity

Price (fixed

Price (fixed

Fixed Price Per Unit of Measure in CO Area Currency

Price (var

Variable price

Variable Price Per Unit of Measure in CO Area Currency

Price Unit

Price Unit

Price Unit in Controlling Area Currency

PP Ind.

Plan Price Indicator

Indicator showing how the SAP system calculates the price of a business process or activity type for a cost center

CUSTOMER 188

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.

Save your entries.

Result You have now planned the activity outputs of the cost centers as well as the prices for this activity.

Change Activity Type / Price Planning Next (Budget) Year Use The purpose of this activity is to plan the activity output of cost centers, and the prices of those activities for the following year (budget year). Prerequisites Cost centers, and activity types must have been created.

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP System Menu

Accounting → Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Planning → Activity Output/Prices → Change

Transaction Code

KP26

On the Change Activity Type/Price Planning: Initial screen, enter the necessary data, and choose Overview Screen. Field name

Description User actions and values Comment

Version



See following table

From Period

1

To Period

12

Fiscal year

+ 1

Cost center



See following table



See following table

To Or group Activity Type (AT To How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 189

Field name

Description User actions and values Comment

Or group Entry: Form-based

Select

3.

On the Change Activity Type/Price Planning: Overview screen, enter the necessary data.

4.

Save your entries. You can use the example data from section Change Activity Type/Price Planning Actual Year. To copy the plan data from year to year you could also use transaction KP97 (Copy Planning).

4.3.9.1.3 Cost Centers and Groups Cost Centers Use In this activity, the cost centers for manufacturing are created. Prerequisites Cost center categories must be defined. The cost center standard hierarchy must be created. All Cost centers are assigned to controlling area A000. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP System Menu

Accounting → Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Master Data → Cost Center → Individual Processing → Create

Transaction Code

KS01

On the Create Cost Center: Initial screen, make the following entries and choose Master Data: CUSTOMER

190

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field

User Action or Values

Controlling Area

A000

Cost Center

37101321

3.

On the Create Cost Center: Basic screen, choose the Basic data tab.

4.

Make the following sets of entries: All Cost Centers are valid from 01.01.2006 to 31.12.9999. Cost Center

Name

37101321 Services/ Consulting 5.

Description

Person CCResponsible Cat.

Hier. Area

Comp Code

Services/ Consulting

SAP

0001

3710

F

Save your entries.

Result You created cost centers.

Assigning Functional Areas and Profit Centers to Cost Centers Use In this step, you make additional settings for a functional area in cost centers. If you change the functional area, future postings are made using the new functional area. The change made to the functional area has no effect on postings that have already been made. You have to repost any documents that have already been posted. Changes to the functional area can lead to inconsistencies if documents are reversed. If subsequent to the functional area being changed, documents posted before this change are then reversed. The reversal document may in some cases be posted under the new functional area. You should only carry out this procedure when testing the configuration. If you decide to carry it out in a productive system, do so with special care! Profit Centers must be assigned to all cost centers, which exist in the client. Because of different scope selections, it is possible that some of the following listed cost centers do not exist or alternatively that cost centers exist which are not maintained in the list. If the listed cost center does not exist: no further actions necessary. How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 191

Cost centers exist in the client, but are not listed below: add profit center depending from the scope. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP system Menu

Accounting  Controlling  Cost Center Accounting  Master Data  Cost Centers  Individual Processing  Change

Transaction Code

KS02

2.

If required, in the Controlling Area field, enter A000 and choose Continue.

3.

On the Change Cost Center Initial screen, in the Cost center field, enter 37101321 and Enter.

4.

On the Change Cost Center: Basic screen, choose the Basic Data tab.

5.

Make the following entries: Field

User Action or Values

Functional Area

YB20

Profit Center

YB111

6.

In the field, enter YB20 and Enter.

7.

Save your entries.

Cost Center Groups: Values (Cost Centers) Use The purpose of this activity is to assign cost centers to the alternative cost center groups. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Accounting  Controlling  Cost Center Accounting  Master Data  Cost Center Group  Change

Transaction Code

KSH2

On the Change Cost Center Group: Initial Screen, make the following entries and choose the Hierarchy button: CUSTOMER

192

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field

User Action or Values

Controlling Area

A000

Cost Center Group

3710130

3.

On the Change Cost Center Group: Structure screen, choose the Insert Cost Center button.

4.

In the left field, enter 37101321 and Enter.

5.

Save your entries.

4.3.9.1.4 Maintaining Required Planning Data Setting Planner Profile Use The following profile must be performed for activity type planning. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP System Menu

Accounting  Controlling  Planning  Set Planner Profile

Transaction Code

KP04

On the Set Planner Profile dialog box, in the Planner profile field, enter SAPALL and choose Confirm Profile.

Changing Activity Type/Price Planning Actual Year Use The purpose of this activity is to plan the output of cost centers, and the prices.

Prerequisites Cost centers and activity types must exist.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 193

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP System Menu

Accounting → Controlling  Cost Center Accounting → Planning → Activity Output/Prices → Change

Transaction Code

KP26

On the Change Activity Type/Price Planning: Initial screen, make the following entries and choose Overview Screen. Field name

3.

Description

User actions and values

Version

0

From Period

1

To Period

12

Fiscal year



Cost center

37101321

Activity Type (AT)

101

Entry: Form-based

Select

Comment

On the Change Activity Type/Price Planning: Overview screen, make the following entries: Field name

Description

User actions and values

Distr. Key

1

Capacity

12000

Distr. Key

1

Price (Fixed)

50,00

Variable price

10,00

Price Unit

00001

Plan Price Indicator

1

4.

Save your entries.

5.

Repeat the above steps for the following data:

Comment

CUSTOMER 194

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Versi on

Cost Center

0

37101321

0

37101321

2 2 2

Activit y Type

Distr . Key

Cap.

Price (fixed )

Variabl e price

Price Unit

Plan Price Indicato r

102

1

1200 0

40

20

0000 1

1

8

1

1200 0

60

20

0000 1

1

101

1

1200 0

50

10

0000 1

1

102

1

1200 0

40

20

0000 1

1

8

1

1200 0

60

20

0000 1

1

37101321 37101321 37101321

Result You have now planned the activity outputs of the cost centers as well as the prices for this activity.

Changing Activity Type / Price Planning Next (Budget) Year Use The purpose of this activity is to plan the activity output of cost centers, and the prices of those activities for the following year (budget year). Prerequisites Cost centers, and activity types must have been created. Procedure Repeat the steps in the task, increasing the value in the Fiscal Year field by 1 (for example, change 2015 to 2016).

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 195

4.3.9.1.5 Assessments Use Assessment is used to allocate primary and secondary costs. The original cost elements are combined and allocated to the receiver cost center in an assessment cost element.

Defining Assessment Plan Use The following cycles have been defined for the plan assessment: Cycle

Segment

Sender

Tracing Factor

YP3710 Assessment Quality cost (plan)

NL- Quality costs for operations

37101401 Fixed Percentages

Receiver Cost center group 130 (manufacturing cost centers)

Prerequisites Assessment cost elements (cost element type 42) must be defined. Cost Element

Description

94202000

Quality Costs

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Planning → Allocations → Assessment → Define Assessment

Transaction Code

KSU7

On the Create Plan Assessment Cycle: Initial screen, make the following entries: Field name

Description

User actions and values

Cycle

YP3710

Start Date

01.01. current year

Comment

CUSTOMER 196

Localization objects - per Business Priority

3.

On the Create Plan Assessment Cycle: Header Data screen, enter the following data: Field name

Description User actions and values

Comment

Controlling Area

A000

Cycle

YP3710

Start Date From

01.01. current year

Start Date To

31.12. current year

Text

Assessment quality cost (plan)

Indicator: Iterative

Not Set

Object Currency

Not Set

Version

Version

2

4.

Choose Attach Segment.

5.

On the Create Plan Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, under Segment Header Data, make the following entries:

6.

7.

8.

9.

Segment Name

Text

100

Quality costs for operations

On the Create Plan Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, on the Segment header tab, make the following entries: Segment

Assessment CEle

Sender rule

Share %

Plan value origin

100

94202000

Posted amounts

50,00

set

Segment

Receiver rule

100

Fixed Percentages

var.portion type

Scale neg. tracing fact.

On the Create Plan Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, on the Senders/Receivers tab, make the following entries: Segment Sender Cost Center from

Sender Cost Element Group

Receiver Cost Center Group

100

10_CE

3710130

37101401

On the Create Plan Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, on the Sender Values tab, make the following entries: Segment

Share %

Plan value origin

Version From

100

50,00

Set

2

On the Create Plan Assessment: Segment screen, on the Receiver Tracing Factor tab, make the following entries:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 197

10.

Segment

Receivers

Portion/percent

Comment

100

37101301

50

Percent example only

100

37101302

50

Percent example only

Save your entries.

Result You defined the plan assessment cycle YP3710.

Defining Assessment Actual Use The following cycles have been defined for the actual assessment: Cycle

Segment

Sender

Tracing Factor

YA3710

100

Assessment Quality cost (actual)

Quality costs for operations

37101401 Fixed Percentages

Receiver Cost center group 130 (manufacturing cost centers)

Prerequisites Assessment cost elements (cost element type 42) must be defined. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Controlling → Cost Center Accounting → Actual Postings → Period-End Closing → Assessment → Maintain Assessment → Create Actual Assessment

Transaction Code

KSU1

On the Create Plan Assessment Cycle: Initial screen, make the following entries: Field name Cycle

Description

User actions and values

Comment

YA3710

CUSTOMER 198

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field name

Description

Start Date 3.

User actions and values

Comment

01.01. current year

Example

On the Create Plan Assessment Cycle: Header Data screen, enter the following data: Field name

Description

User actions and values

Comment

Controlling Area

A000

Cycle

YA3710

Start Date From

01.01. current year

Example

Start Date To

31.12. current year

Example

Text

Ass. quality cost (actual)

Indicator: Iterative

Not Set

Object Currency

Set

4.

Choose Attach Segment.

5.

On the Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, under segment header data, make the following entries:

6.

7.

8.

Segment Name

Text

100

Quality costs for operations

On the Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, on the Segment header tab, make the following entries: Segment

Assessment CEle

Sender rule

Share %

Actual value origin

100

94202000

Posted amounts

50,00

set

Segment

Receiver rule

100

Fixed Percentages

var.portion type

Scale neg. tracing fact.

On the Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, on the Senders/Receivers tab, make the following entries: Segment Sender Cost Center From

Sender Cost Element Group

Receiver Cost Center Group

100

10_CE

3710130

37101401

On the Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, on the Sender Values tab, make the following entries: Segment

Share %

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

Actual value origin

Version From CUSTOMER 199

100 9.

10.

50,00

Set

0

On the Create Actual Assessment: Segment screen, on the Receiver Tracing Factor tab, make the following entries: Segment

Receivers

Portion/percent

Comment

100

37101301

50

Percent example only

100

37101302

50

Percent example only

Save your entries.

Result You have defined the actual assessment cycle YA3710.

4.3.9.1.6 Manual Rework If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity

Manual transport possible

Manual action in target system / client required

Remarks

Add Cost element category to GL account

Yes

No

Follow step below in transaction OKE7 to capture data in Transport. Select Cost Elements (COAr dependent) Select Cost Elements(CoAdependent) on Mast.data 1

Create Centers and Cost centers groups

Yes

No

Follow step below in transaction OKE7 to capture data in Transport. Select Cost centers and Cost centers group

CUSTOMER 200

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Configuration activity

Manual transport possible

Change Activity Yes Type/Price Planning actual year

Manual action in target system / client required

Remarks

No

Follow step below in transaction OKE7 to capture data in Transport. Select Cost center/activity type

CO planner profile: Delete/change profile items

Yes

No

Follow step below in transaction OKE7 to capture data in Transport. Planner Profiles on Planning layouts

In case a manual transport is possible please proceed as follows: 1. Logon to the source system / client. 2. Go to the respective customizing activity as described in the respective section. 3. Select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request. Most likely this can be done by choosing Table View -> Transport. If this is not possible please refer to the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity. 4. The newly created transport request needs to be released and imported in the target system / client. Remark: Check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information. In case manual action in the target system / client is required please proceed as follows: 1. Logon to the target system / client. 2. Go to the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.

4.3.9.1.7 Manual Transport of Controlling Data OKE7 Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 201

Transaction Code

OKE7

2.

On the Transport Controlling settings.

3.

Select Objects as per table given above and click Include in Request.

4.

On pop-up window Prompt for Workbench Request, select the request then choose Continue E n t e r .

5.

Settings are included into the transport requests.

4.3.10

Activate Material Ledger (J72)

4.3.10.1

Configuration - On Premise

The following section describes the complete settings for this building block. These settings can be divided into three main groups: 1. Prerequisite settings that have to be checked and which were delivered by SAP (as part of the standard delivery) The term Check refers to these prerequisite settings. 2. Settings defined by the customer (in the customer namespace, and customerspecific): The system uses automation to request individual customer settings during the personalization process. These settings can be initial or reused from existing SAP ERP layers and are indicated in the text by . 3. Additional settings that must be made covered either by automation, or manual configuration (in the customer namespace). The term Create refers to these additional settings in the text.

4.3.10.1.1 Enterprise Structure: Define Valuation Level 1.

2.

Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code

SPRO

IMG Menu

SAP Customizing Implementation Guide  Enterprise Structure  Definition  Logistics - General  Define Valuation Level

Make sure that Valuation level is a plant.

CUSTOMER 202

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.3.10.1.2 Controlling Activate Valuation Areas for Material Ledger 1.

2.

3.

Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code

OMX1

IMG Menu

SAP Customizing Implementation Guide  Controlling  General Controlling  Multiple Valuation Approaches/Transfer Prices  Basic Settings -> Check Material Ledger Settings ->Activate Valuation Areas for Material Ledger  Activate Material Ledger

On the Change View "Activation of Material Ledger": Overview screen, make the following settings: Valuation Area

Company Code

ML Act.

Price Deter.

Price Det. Binding in Val Area

3710

3710

Select

2

Select

Save your settings

Assign Currency Types to Material Ledger Type 1.

Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code

OMX2

IMG Menu*

SAP Customizing Implementation Guide  Controlling  General Controlling -> Multiple Valuation Approaches/Transfer Prices -> Basic Settings -> Check Material Ledger Settings  Assign Currency Types to Material Ledger Type

2.

On the Change View "Define material ledger type": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following settings:

4.

ML Type

CT from FI

CO Crcy Typ

Manual

Description

0000

Select

Select

Blank

Standard: CT from FI & Co.

Save your settings. Use the transaction code if the IMG path is not available.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 203

Assign Material Ledger Type 0000 to Valuation Area 1.

Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code

OMX3

IMG Menu*

SAP Customizing Implementation Guide  Controlling  General Controlling -> Multiple Valuation Approaches/Transfer Prices  Basic Settings  Check Material Ledger Settings  Assign Material Ledger Types to Valuation Area

2.

On the Change View "Assignment of Material Ledger Types to Valuation Areas": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following settings:

4.

Valuation Area

Mat. ledger type

3710

0000

Save your settings. Use the transaction code if the IMG path is not available.

Define Material Update Structure 1.

Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code

SPRO

IMG Menu

SAP Customizing Implementation Guide  Controlling  Product Cost Controlling  Actual Costing / Material Ledger  Material Update  Define Material Update Structure

2.

On the Change View "Define material update structure": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following settings: MUS

Name

0001

Standard

4.

Save your settings.

5.

Select the new entry and in the left pane, double click Material update structure.

6.

On the Change View "Maintain material update structure": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

7.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following settings: CUSTOMER

204

Localization objects - per Business Priority

8.

PCat

MTG

Cat

B+

Blank

ZU

V+

Blank

VN

Save your settings

Assign Material Update Structure 0001 to a Valuation Area 1.

Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code

SPRO

IMG Menu

SAP Customizing Implementation Guide  Controlling  Product Cost Controlling  Actual Costing / Material Ledger  Material Update  Assign Material Update Structure to a Valuation Area

2.

On the Change View "Assign material update structure to a valuation area": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following settings:

4.

ValA

Matl Update Struct.

3710

0001

Save your settings.

4.3.10.1.3 Materials Management: Maintain Number Ranges for Material Ledger Documents 1.

Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code

SPRO

IMG Menu

SAP Customizing Implementation Guide  Materials Management  Valuation and Account Assignment  Maintain Number Ranges for Material Ledger Documents

2.

On the Range Maintenance: Material ledger doc screen, choose Change Intervals.

3.

On the Maintain Intervals: Material ledger doc screen, make the following entries: Number Range

From No.

To No.

Extern

01

1000000000

1999999999

no

03

3000000000

3999999999

no

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 205

06

6000000000

6999999999

no

4.

Save your entries.

5.

Choose Back F 3 .

6.

Choose Change NR Status.

7.

On the Maintain Intervals: Material ledger doc screen, create the following entries:

8.

No

NR Status

01

0

03

0

06

0

Save your entries.

4.3.10.1.4 Run Report SAPRCKM_OBLIGATORY_SETTINGS 1.

Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code

2.

SE38

On the ABAP Editor: Initial Screen, in the Program field, enter SAPRCKM_OBLIGATORY_SETTINGS and choose Execute.

4.3.10.1.5 Production Startup of Material Ledger Use In this activity, you execute production startup for the material ledger. Prerequisites Finalize the currency settings for CO and FI before executing this step. Procedure 1.

Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code

2.

CKMSTART

On the Production Startup of Mat. Ledger screen, make the following entries: Field

User Action or Values

Plant

3710

Comments

CUSTOMER 206

Localization objects - per Business Priority

3.

Background processing

Deselect

Test run

Deselect

Choose Execute.

4.3.10.2 Manual Rework If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure, additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below: Configuration activity

Manual transport possible

Manual action in target system / client required

Run Report SAPRCKM_OBLIGATORY_SETTINGS

No

Yes

Production Start of Material Ledger

No

Yes

Remarks

In case a manual transport is possible please proceed as follows: 1. Logon to the source system / client. 2. Go to the respective customizing activity as described in the respective section. 3. Select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request. Most likely this can be done by choosing Table View  Transport. If this is not possible please refer to the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity. 4. The newly created transport request needs to be released and imported in the target system / client. 5. Remark: Check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information. In case manual action in the target system / client is required please proceed as follows: 1. Logon to the target system / client. 2. Go to the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 207

4.3.11

Credit Management [local] (BD8)

4.3.11.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.3.11.1.1 Maintain Pricing Procedures Use This activity checks the control data settings for update and automatic credit check. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Sales and Distribution  Basic Functions  Pricing  Pricing Control  Define and Assign Pricing Procedures  Maintain pricing procedures

Transaction Code

V/08

2.

Choose Procedures row Y37101.

3.

Double click Control Data in Dialog Structure.

4.

In Change View “Control Data“: Overview screen. Change the following entry: Step

Step SuTot Descri ption

CalTy Description SuTot pe

900

Total Amou nt

4

5.

Save your entries.

6.

Choose

A

Carry over price to KOMP-CMPRE (credit price)

Back.

CUSTOMER 208

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Result Usually, the net value plus taxes is used. This way the system is determined to use subtotal for credit pricing. The credit price is stored in field VBAP-CMPRE and used for update and credit check.

4.3.11.1.2 Integration with Accounts Receivable Accounting Assigning Permitted Credit Control Areas to Company Code Use In this activity, you assign a credit control area to a company code. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Supply Chain Management → Credit Management → Integration with Accounts Receivable Accounting and Sales and Distribution  Integration with Accounts Receivables Accounting  Assign Permitted Credit Control Areas to Company Code

Transaction Code

SM30 (Customizing Object T001CM)

2.

On the Change View “Permitted Credit Control Areas per Company Code”: Overview screen choose New Entries.

3.

Make the following entries: Company Code

Cred.contr.area

3710

A000

4.

Save your entries.

5.

Choose Back.

Result The credit control area is assigned to the company code.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 209

4.3.12 Sample Master Data for SAP Credit Management Processing [local] (BN8) 4.3.12.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.3.12.1.1 Create Domestic Customers 1.

2.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: SAP ECC menu

Logistics  Settlement Management  Environment  Master Data  Maintain Business Partner

Transaction code

BP

On the Customer Master Data screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Business Partner Number

37100005

Business partner category

2

Business Partner Grouping

BP03

Search term 1 for business partner

KUNDE5

Form-of-Address Key

0003

Name 1 of organization

Inlandskunde NL 5

BP: Legal form of organization

1

BP role

UKM000

BP role

FLCU01

BP role

UDM000

BP role

FLCU00

BP Role Category

UKM000

BP Role Category

FLCU01

BP Role Category

UDM000

BP Role Category

FLCU00

Bank country key

NL

Bank Keys

ING

IBAN (International Bank Account Number) Bank account

0005544999

CUSTOMER 210

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Entry Value

Industry System

0001

Industry sector

91

Tax Number Category

NL0

Business Partner Tax Number

NL001234560B01

City

Apeldoorn

City postal code

7322 HR

Street

Korfstraat

House Number

2

Country Key

NL

Region (State, Province, County)

GE

Address time zone

CET

Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered

0000000002

Language Key

NL

2-Character SAP Language Code

NL

City file test status

C

Country for telephone/fax number

NL

Country ISO code

NL

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

Telephone no.: dialing code + number

09990 4513-0

Complete number: dialing code + number + extension

09990 25420-0

Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone

1

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

19000101

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

E-Mail Address

[email protected]

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

19000101

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 211

Field Name

Entry Value

Address Type

XXDEFAULT

Purchasing Organization

3710

Purchase order currency

EUR

External Interface: Tax Indicators

I

Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)

DE

Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)

TTX1

Tax classification for customer

1

Company Code

3710

Key for sorting according to assignment numbers

009

Reconciliation Account in General Ledger

12100000

List of the Payment Methods to be Considered

T

Terms of Payment Key

0001

Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor

1010-CUST5

Accounting clerk

01

Sales Organization

3710

Distribution Channel

10

Division

00

Customer group

01

Incoterms (Part 1)

EXW

Incoterms (Part 2)

Amsterdam

Delivery Priority

02

Shipping Conditions

01

Currency

EUR

Account assignment group for this customer

01

Terms of Payment Key

0004

Delivering Plant (Own or External)

3710

Partner Function

AG

Partner counter

000

Default Partner

X

CUSTOMER 212

Localization objects - per Business Priority

3.

Save your entries.

4.3.12.1.2 Adding Credit Management Data in BP 1.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: SAP ECC menu

Logistics  Settlement Management  Environment  Master Data  Maintain Business Partner

Transaction code

BP

2.

On the Customer Master Data screen, select Business Partner is 37100005 and select the business role is UKM0000 SAP Credit Management.

3.

Choose Display Change F 6 to change the BP.

4.

Choose the Credit Profile tab.

5.

Create the following settings. Field Name

Entry Value

Rules

STANDARD

Check Rule

01

6.

Choose Credit Segment Data.

7.

Create the following settings.

8.

Field Name

Entry Value

Credit Segment

1000

Limit Defined

6

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 213

4.3.13

Asset Accounting [local] (J49)

4.3.13.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.3.13.1.1 Organizational Structures Basic Settings Check Country-Specific Settings Use The system uses the country-specific data in each company code that agrees with the country in the definition of the FI company code (FI Customizing). SAP provides the appropriate default settings for most countries. The standard defaults must be checked for the selected country. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  Organizational Structures  Check Country-Specific Settings

Transaction Code

OA08

2.

On the Change View: Asset Accounting: Country Information: Overview screen, select the relevant country NL and choose Details.

3.

On the Change View: Asset Accounting: Country Information: Details screen, check the following entries for your country (country key NL in this example). Field Name

Description User action and values

Country currency

EUR

Max. LVA amount: for posting

1.000,00

Net book value for dep. change

Comment

No entry

CUSTOMER 214

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

4.

Description User action and values

Comment

Post net book value

No selection

Capitalize AuC w/o down payment

No selection

Save your entries.

Result The country-specific settings are verified.

Chart of Depreciation Use A chart of depreciation is a directory of depreciation areas arranged according to business requirements. Each chart of depreciation contains the rules for the evaluation of assets that are valid in a specific country or economic area. Each company code defined in Asset Accounting must refer to a chart of depreciation.

Copy Reference Chart of Depreciation (Define Chart of Depreciation) Use SAP provides country-specific charts of depreciation with predefined depreciation areas (for example, 0DE for Germany). These charts of depreciation are only references for customer charts of depreciation and therefore cannot be used directly. When you create your own chart of depreciation, you must copy a reference chart of depreciation. When you create a chart of depreciation, the system copies all the depreciation areas from the standard chart of depreciation that you use as a reference. You must delete any depreciation areas you do not need from your chart of depreciation. The chart of depreciation 3710 has been created as a copy of the chart of depreciation 0DE.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 215

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  Organizational Structures  Copy Reference Chart of Depreciation/Depreciation Areas

Transaction Code

EC08

2.

If you access this transaction via the IMG Menu, in the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Copy Reference Chart of Depreciation.

3.

On the Organizational object Chart of depreciation screen, choose copy org. object F6 .

4.

In the Copy dialog box, make the following entries, and choose Enter: Field Name

5.

Description

User action and values

From Chart of dep.

1010

To Chart of dep.

3710

Comment

Save your entries.

Result The chart of depreciation has been created.

Copy Reference Chart of Depreciation (Copy/Delete Depreciation Areas) Use You adjust scope and descriptions of the depreciation areas that were copied from the standard depreciation plan. The following depreciation areas are defined for chart of depreciation 3710: Depreciation Area

Description

01

Local GAAP

15

Local Tax

31

Local GAAP in Group Currency

32

IFRS in local currency

33

IFRS in group currency

CUSTOMER 216

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Use this procedure only if you are required to create depreciation areas or delete any depreciation area that is not relevant for your business. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  Organizational Structures  Copy Reference Chart of Depreciation/Depreciation Areas

Transaction Code

OADB

2.

If you access this transaction via the IMG Menu, in the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Copy/Delete Depreciation Areas.

3.

In the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box, make the following entries and choose Enter: Field Name

Description

Chart of Depreciation

User action and values

Comment

3710

4.

To copy a depreciation area as a new one, in the Change View: Define Depreciation Areas: Overview dialog box, select the depreciation area entries, and choose Copy As… (F6).

5.

On the Change View Define Depreciation Areas: Details of Selected Set screen, change the Depre. area as needed, and choose Enter.

6.

To delete depreciation areas, in the Change View: Define Depreciation Areas: Overview dialog box, select the depreciation area entries, and choose Delete (Shift + F2).

7.

Save your entries.

Result The desired depreciation areas exist.

Define Depreciation Areas Use In this step, you define your depreciation areas. The depreciation areas used in the chart of depreciation 3710 have the following functions: How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 217

Local GAAP (01) This area is the master area. Transactions for this depreciation area are posted directly to the general ledger. Local Tax (15) This area manages the special tax balance at the period end for the inventory valuation, and price planning. Local GAAP in Group Currency (31) This area is required to manage the parallel (group) currency set up at the general ledger level in financial accounting from the point of view of asset accounting. All values, and parameters have to be adapted from area 01 without changes. IFRS in Local Currency (32) IFRS in Group Currency (33)

Depreciation areas that are not needed should already have been deleted from the chart of depreciation, and new depreciation areas should have been defined, see section Copy Reference Chart of Depreciation (Define Depreciation Areas) above.

Prerequisites Set chart of depreciation 3710 with transaction OAPL.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  General Valuation  Depreciation Areas  Define Depreciation Areas

Transaction Code

OADB

2.

If you access this transaction via the IMG Menu, in the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Define Depreciation Areas.

3.

If the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box appears, in the Work Area field, enter 3710 and choose Enter.

4.

On the Change View: "Define Depreciation Areas": Overview screen, select the depreciation area and choose Details. The required depreciation areas should already exist. If a depreciation area is missing, add the new depreciation area by copying it from an existing area. CUSTOMER

218

Localization objects - per Business Priority

5.

On the Change View: Define Depreciation Areas: Details screen, make the following entries: Depr . area

Real Depr. Area

Post to G/L

Acc.

Target Princ. Ledge r Group

1



1

LG

15



0

31



32 33

Diff. depr . Area

Cross Syst, Depr: Area

Acq. Net Value Book Value

Inv. Reval Grant .

2L

+

+

0

*

LG

2L

+

+

0

*

0

LG

2L

+

+

0

*



1

LG

0L

+

+

0

0



0

LG

0L

+

+

0

0

Complete assignment to accounting principle and target ledger group is required for all depreciation areas. Depr. area

Ord. Depr.

Special Depr.

Unpl. Depr.

Transf. Reserv.

Interest

Reval. ord. Depr.

1

-

0

-

0

0

*

15

-

0

-

0

0

*

31

-

0

-

0

0

*

32

-

0

-

0

0

0

33

-

0

-

0

0

0

Posting in G/L: 0 = Area Does Not Post 1 = Area Posts in Real Time 3 = Area Posts Depreciation Only 4 = Area Posts APC in Real Time, Depreciation Periodically Signs for Value Maintenance: + = Only Positive Values or Zero Allowed - = Only Negative Values or Zero Allowed 0 = No Values Allowed * = All Values Allowed 6.

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 219

Copy Reference Chart of Depreciation (Specify Description of Chart of Depreciation) Use In this activity, you specify the description for the chart of depreciation.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using the following navigation option: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  Organizational Structures  Copy Reference Chart of Depreciation/Depreciation Areas

Transaction Code

OAP4

2.

If you access this transaction via the IMG Menu, in the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Specify Description of Chart of Depreciation.

3.

On the Change View Chart of depreciation: Specify name: Overview screen, make the following entries and choose Enter. Field Name

Description

ChDep

Chart of 3710 depreciation

Description 4.

User action and values

Comment

Chart of Depreciation 3710

Example

Save your entries.

Result The description of the new chart of depreciation is defined.

Assign Chart of Depreciation to Company Code Use When you assign a chart of depreciation, you define a company code for Asset Accounting. The chart of depreciation 3710 has been assigned to the company code 3710.

CUSTOMER 220

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Prerequisites The company code must have been defined in Financial Accounting. Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  Organizational Structures  Assign Chart of Depreciation to Company Code

Transaction Code

OAOB

On the Change View "Maintain company code in Asset Accounting": Overview screen, make the following entries: Field Name

Description

User action and values

CoCd

Company Code

3710

Chrt dep

Chart of Depreciation

3710

Comment

Save your entries.

Result The chart of depreciation 3710 has been assigned to company code 3710.

Specify Number Assignment across Company Codes Use In this step, you define the company code for the assignment of the main asset number. In the FI-AA application, you can assign the main asset number also across company codes. Therefore, for every company code, you can determine from which (other) company code the number assignment is to be carried out. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 221

2.

3.

IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  Organizational Structures  Specify Number Assignment Across Company Codes

Transaction Code

AO11

On the Change View “FI-AA: "Assignmt. to company code providing number range" screen, make the following entries: Field Name

Description

User action and values

CoCd

Company Code

3710

No.CoCd

Company Code for Number Assignment

3710

Comment

Save your entries.

Result You have determined your own company code to be used for company code number assignment

Asset Classes Use Asset classes are the most important structuring elements for fixed assets. You can define any number of asset classes in the system. You can use them to structure your fixed assets according to different criteria. Asset classes are defined on client level. For further details see Configuration Guide for Building Block J48 (NL).

Define Number Range Interval (Asset Classes) Use An asset number uniquely identifies an asset. It always consists of a main asset number, and an asset sub number. Numbers can be assigned in the system externally or internally. With external number assignment, the user is responsible for assigning the numbers. The system displays only the defined number range interval, and issues an error CUSTOMER 222

Localization objects - per Business Priority

message if a number has already been assigned. With internal number assignment, the system assigns numbers sequentially. Most asset classes are defined to use internal number assignment as listed below. If required, the asset classes could be changed to use number ranges 01-09 with external number assignment for creation of legacy assets. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  Organizational Structures  Asset Classes  Define Number Range Interval

Transaction Code

AS08

2.

On the Range Maintenance: Asset Number screen, in the Company code field, enter 3710.

3.

Choose the Change intervals button.

4.

On the Interval Maintenance: Number Range Object Asset Number, Subobject 3710 screen, make the following entries:

5.

No

From No.

To Number

Ext.

01

000000100000

000000199999

02

000000200000

000000299999

03

000000300000

000000399999

04

000000400000

000000499999

05

000000500000

000000599999

06

000000600000

000000699999

07

000000700000

000000799999

08

000000800000

000000899999

09

000000900000

000000999999

90

A

D

X

99

000000000001

000000099999

X

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 223

Depreciation Area Configure Asset Value Display Use In this step, you specify the short texts the system displays for the value fields in the asset value display transaction. You can specify particular value field texts for particular depreciation areas. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  Information System  Configure Asset Value Display

Transaction Code

OAWT

2.

In the Choose Activity dialog box, select Change short texts of value fields.

3.

On the Display View Depreciation areas: Overview screen, select the depreciation area 1.

4.

Choose Value field texts in the dialog structure.

5.

Make the following entries on the Change View Value field texts: Overview screen. No

Short Name

Description

0

APC

Acquisition value

1

APC

Acquisition value

2

Inv.supprt

Investment support

3

Revaluat.

Revaluation

11

Transf.res

Transfer reserve

12

Ord. dep.

Ordinary deprec.

13

Spec.dep.

Special depreciation

14

Unplnd.dep

Unplanned dep.

20

Revaluat.

Revaluation ord.dep.

21

Write-up

Write-up

30

Interest

Interest

31

Reserves

Trsfr cum.reserves

CUSTOMER 224

Localization objects - per Business Priority

No

Short Name

Description

32

Ord. dep.

Accum. ord. depr.

33

Spec.dep.

Cum.special dep.

34

Unplnd.dep

Cum.unplanned dep.

90

Net bk.val

Net book value

6.

Repeat the steps in the previous table for all depreciation areas.

7.

Save your entries.

Define Depreciation Area for Quantity Update Use In this activity, you specify which depreciation area you want to use for updating quantities. This setting is especially relevant if you are using collective low-value assets. In the standard system (that is, as long as you do not make any settings to the contrary), the system uses depreciation area 01 for the quantity update. This step ensures that the default setting is available. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  General Valuation  Depreciation Areas  Define Depreciation Area for Quantity Update

Transaction Code

S_EEI_69000025

2.

On the Determine Work Area: Entry screen, select Chart of Depreciation 3710.

3.

On the Change View "Setting Depreciation Area for Quantity Update": Overview screen, make sure that the Update Quantity indicator is active for Depreciation Area 1 Local GAAP.

4.

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 225

Define Depreciation Areas (Specify Area Type) Use Depreciation areas are assigned to a type, which describes the primary purpose of the depreciation area. When you create a chart of depreciation, the system copies this typing from the reference chart of depreciation.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  General Valuation  Depreciation Areas  Define Depreciation Areas

Transaction Code

OADC

2.

If you access this transaction via the IMG Menu, in the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Specify Area Type.

3.

On the Change View "Actual depreciation areas: area type": Overview screen, make the following entries:

4.

Area Name of Depreciation Area

Type Description

01

Local GAAP

01

Valuation for trade bal. sheet

15

Local Tax

03

Valuation for tax bal. sheet (diff. from trade bal. sheet)

31

Local GAAP in Group Currency

01

Valuation for trade bal.sheet

32

IFRS in Local Currency

06

Group valuation

33

IFRS in Group Currency

06

Group valuation

Save your entries.

4.3.13.1.2 Integration with the General Ledger Use The system settings and entries you make in this section are required for the integration of Asset Accounting with the General Ledger:

CUSTOMER 226

Localization objects - per Business Priority

1. Depreciation areas that post depreciation/APC automatically to the General Ledger 2. G/L accounts that are relevant for Asset Accounting (reconciliation accounts and other accounts that are posted to automatically) 3. Screen layout controls for G/L accounts 4. Default input tax indicator for transactions not subject to tax 5. Specifications for periodic posting of depreciation to the General Ledger. Prerequisites The depreciation areas that post their APC transactions and/or depreciation to the general ledger are specified as described in the previous sections.

Specify Financial Statement Version for Asset Reports Use In this step, you determine for each depreciation area which financial statement version the system is to use as a default. This default applies when the financial statement version is contained in the sort version used for a given report. In company code 3710, financial statement version 3730 has been assigned to all depreciation areas.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  Integration with General Ledger Accounting  Specify Financial Statement Version for Asset Reports

Transaction Code

OAYN

2.

On the Change View: "Company code selection": Overview screen, select Company Code 3710.

3.

In the Dialog Structure, double click Assign financial statement version.

4.

On the Change View: "Assign financial statement version": Overview screen, make the following entries: Company Code

Area

Financial Statement Version

3710

01

3730

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 227

5.

3710

15

3730

3710

31

3730

3710

32

3730

3710

33

3730

Save your entries.

Specify Document Type for Posting of Depreciation Use To post the depreciation with the depreciation posting run, you have to specify a document type and assign it to the company code. This document type must use internal number assignment and be used exclusively by the depreciation posting run. Document type AF is assigned to company code 3710. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  Integration with General Ledger Accounting  Post Depreciation to General Ledger Accounting  Specify Document Type for Posting of Depreciation

Transaction Code

AO71

2.

If you access this transaction via the IMG Menu, in the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Specify Document Type for Posting of Depreciation.

3.

On the Change View “FI-AA: “Document Type for posting depreciation”: Overview screen, make the following entries:

4.

Field Name

Description

User action and values

CoCode

Company Code

3710

Doc.type

Document Type

AF

Comment

Save your entries.

CUSTOMER 228

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Specify Intervals and Posting Rules Use In this step, you define the posting rules for the depreciation areas that post depreciation values to Financial Accounting.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  Integration with General Ledger Accounting  Post Depreciation to General Ledger Accounting  Specify Intervals and Posting Rules

Transaction Code

OAYR

2.

On the Change View "Company code selection": Overview screen, select the Company Code 3710.

3.

In the Dialog Structure, double click Posting rules.

4.

On the Change View “Posting rules”: Overview screen, select the depreciation area, and choose Details.

5.

On the Change View "Posting rules": Details screen, make the following entries: Field Name

6.

User action and values

Comment

Depreciation area

01

Select

Monthly posting

X

Activate

Post revaluation

X

Select

User action and values

Comment

Depreciation area

32

Select

Monthly posting

X

Activate

Make the following entries: Field Name

7.

Description

Description

Save your entries.

Result The following settings have been made for company code 3710:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 229

Deprec. Area

Monthly Posting

01 32

Annual Posting

Period Interval

Post revaluation

X

001 (monthly)

X

X

001 (monthly)

Specify Account Assignment Types for Account Assignment Objects Use In this step, you assign account assignment types to the account assignment objects.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  Additional Account Assignment Objects  Specify Account Assignment Types for Account Assignment Objects

Transaction Code

ACSET

2.

On the Company Code: Overview screen, select the Company Code 3710.

3.

In the Dialog Structure, double click the Depreciation Area.

4.

On the Display View “Depreciation Area” Overview screen, select the depreciation area listed in the following table.

5.

In the Dialog Structure, double click Account Assignment Objects.

6.

On the Account Assignment Objects Overview screen, make the following entries for account assignment type:

7.

Company Code

Depr. Area

Acct.Asgn . Object

Trans. Type

Acct Assignmnt Type

Acc.Assgnt

3710

01

KOSTL

*

01 APC Value Posting

X

3710

01

KOSTL

*

02 Depreciation Run

X

3710

32

KOSTL

*

X

3710

32

KOSTL

*

X

Save your entries.

CUSTOMER 230

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Result In chart of depreciation 3710, it is possible to post stock value with Cost Center in Area 01.

4.3.13.1.3 General Valuation Use In this section, you make all configurations that concern the valuation of fixed assets.

Depreciation Areas Specify Transfer of APC Values Use In this step, you specify the reference depreciation area that provides values to another depreciation area. The system transfers the posting amounts of any transactions that affect acquisition and production costs (APC) from this area to the dependent area. You can determine whether this transfer is mandatory or optional. If you only define optional transfer, then you can enter the posting values for that dependent depreciation area during posting. These transfer rules ensure that certain depreciation areas manage identical APC values. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  General Valuation  Depreciation Areas  Specify Transfer of APC Values

Transaction Code

OABC

On the Change View "Depreciation areas: Rules for value takeover": Overview screen, make the following entries: Chart of Depreciation

Depreciation Area

ValAd

3710

01

00

3710

15

01

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

Ident.

CUSTOMER 231

3.

Chart of Depreciation

Depreciation Area

ValAd

Ident.

3710

31

01

X

3710

32

00

3710

33

32

x

Save your entries.

Specify Transfer of Depreciation Terms Use In this step, you specify how the depreciation terms for a depreciation area are adopted from another depreciation area. You can specify if the adoption of depreciation terms is optional or mandatory. If you specify an optional transfer, then you can change the proposed depreciation terms of the dependent depreciation area in the asset master record. In case of a mandatory transfer, you cannot maintain any depreciation terms of the dependent depreciation area in the asset master record. In this way, you can ensure that depreciation is uniform in certain depreciation areas. Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  General Valuation  Depreciation Areas  Specify Transfer of Depreciation Terms

Transaction Code

OABD

On the Change View "Depreciation areas: Rules for takeover of deprec. terms": screen, make the following entries: Chart of Depreciation

Depreciation Area

TTr (Terms Transfer)

3710

01

00

3710

15

3710

31

01

3710

32

00

3710

33

32

Identical

X

x

Save your entries. CUSTOMER

232

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Determine Depreciation Areas in the Asset Class Use In this step, you define asset classes per chart of depreciation. You can also determine default depreciation terms (depreciation key and useful life) for each depreciation area used in your asset classes. Depending on the definition in the screen layout control determined here as well, these depreciation terms are offered either as optional or mandatory defaults when you create an asset master record. The following list only shows the default values for the depreciation key and useful life in depreciation areas 01 and 20. The default values for the remaining depreciation areas are not listed, since they are the same as the default values for depreciation area 01. Some asset classes might have been set up without default values. When you create a fixed asset for one of those asset classes, you have to enter the depreciation key and useful life. The asset class defaults always have to be revised when the system is set up. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  General Valuation  Determine Depreciation Areas in the Asset Class

Transaction Code

OAYZ

2.

On the Change View "Asset class": Overview screen, select an asset class.

3.

In the Dialog Structure, double click Depreciation areas.

4.

On the Change View "Depreciation areas": Overview screen, enter the following data for the asset classes: Chart of Depreciatio n

Asset Class

Depreciat Depreciatio ion Area n Key

3710

1000

01

0000

2000

3710

1000

15

0000

2000

3710

1000

31

0000

2000

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

Planned Useful Life in Years (Use)

Planned Useful Life in Periods (Per)

Layout

CUSTOMER 233

Chart of Depreciatio n

Asset Class

Depreciat Depreciatio ion Area n Key

Planned Useful Life in Years (Use)

3710

1000

32

0000

2000

3710

1000

33

0000

2000

3710

1100

01

LINS

025

2000

3710

1100

15

LINS

025

2000

3710

1100

31

LINS

025

2000

3710

1100

32

LINS

025

2000

3710

1100

33

LINS

025

2000

3710

1200

01

3710

1200

15

3710

1200

31

3710

1200

32

3710

1200

33

3710

1500

01

3710

1500

15

3710

1500

31

3710

1500

32

3710

1500

33

3710

2000

01

LINS

008

2000

3710

2000

15

LINS

008

2000

3710

2000

31

LINS

008

2000

3710

2000

32

LINS

008

2000

3710

2000

33

LINS

008

2000

3710

3000

01

LINS

2000

3710

3000

15

LINS

2000

3710

3000

31

LINS

2000

3710

3000

32

LINS

2000

3710

3000

33

LINS

2000

3710

3100

01

LINS

006

Planned Useful Life in Periods (Per)

Layout

2000

CUSTOMER 234

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Chart of Depreciatio n

Asset Class

Depreciat Depreciatio ion Area n Key

Planned Useful Life in Years (Use)

3710

3100

15

LINS

006

2000

3710

3100

31

LINS

006

2000

3710

3100

32

LINS

006

2000

3710

3100

33

LINS

006

2000

3710

3200

01

LINS

003

2000

3710

3200

15

LINS

003

2000

3710

3200

31

LINS

003

2000

3710

3200

32

LINS

003

2000

3710

3200

33

LINS

003

2000

3710

3210

01

LINS

003

2000

3710

3210

15

LINS

003

2000

3710

3210

31

LINS

003

2000

3710

3210

32

LINS

003

2000

3710

3210

33

LINS

003

2000

3710

4000

01

0000

2000

3710

4000

15

0000

2000

3710

4000

31

0000

2000

3710

4000

32

0000

2000

3710

4000

33

0000

2000

3710

4001

01

0000

2000

3710

4001

15

0000

2000

3710

4001

31

0000

2000

3710

4001

32

0000

2000

3710

4001

33

0000

2000

3710

5000

01

GWG

1

2000

3710

5000

15

GWG

1

2000

3710

5000

31

GWG

1

2000

3710

5000

32

GWG

1

2000

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

Planned Useful Life in Periods (Per)

Layout

CUSTOMER 235

5.

Chart of Depreciatio n

Asset Class

Depreciat Depreciatio ion Area n Key

Planned Useful Life in Years (Use)

3710

5000

33

GWG

3710

6000

01

LINS

2000

3710

6000

15

LINS

2000

3710

6000

31

LINS

2000

3710

6000

32

LINS

2000

3710

6000

33

LINS

2000

3710

6100

01

LINS

2000

3710

6100

15

LINS

2000

3710

6100

31

LINS

2000

3710

6100

32

LINS

2000

3710

6100

33

LINS

2000

3710

8200

01

LINS

005

2000

3710

8200

15

LINS

015

2000

3710

8200

31

LINS

005

2000

3710

8200

32

0000

2000

3710

8200

33

0000

2000

3710

8300

01

LINS

2000

3710

8300

15

LINS

2000

3710

8300

31

LINS

3710

8300

32

LINS

3710

8300

33

LINS

3710

9000

01

3710

9000

15

3710

9000

31

3710

9000

32

3710

9000

33

000

Planned Useful Life in Periods (Per)

Layout

1

2000

2000 2000

000

2000

Save your entries.

CUSTOMER 236

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Specify Low-Value Asset Class Use During every acquisition posting, the system checks the maximum low-value asset (LVA) amount, providing that the appropriate LVA indicator is set in the asset class concerned.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  General Valuation  Amount Specifications (Company Code/Depreciation Area)  Specify Max. Amount for LowValue Assets + Asset Classes

Transaction Code

OAY2

2.

If you access this transaction via the IMG Menu, in the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Specify LVA Asset Classes.

3.

On the Change View "Asset class": Overview screen, select the asset class listed below (one after the other).

4.

In the Dialog Structure, double click Low-val. asset check.

5.

On the Change View: "Low-val. asset check": Overview screen, make the following entries:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 237

Asset Class

Chart of Depreciation

Depreciation Area

LVA Indicator

1000

3710

01

0

1000

3710

15

0

1000

3710

31

0

1000

3710

32

0

1000

3710

33

0

1100

3710

01

0

1100

3710

15

0

1100

3710

31

0

1100

3710

32

0

1100

3710

33

0

1200

3710

01

0

1200

3710

15

0

1200

3710

31

0

1200

3710

32

0

1200

3710

33

0

1500

3710

01

0

1500

3710

15

0

1500

3710

31

0

1500

3710

32

0

1500

3710

33

0

2000

3710

01

0

2000

3710

15

0

2000

3710

31

0

2000

3710

32

0

2000

3710

33

0

3000

3710

01

0

3000

3710

15

0

3000

3710

31

0

3000

3710

32

0

3000

3710

33

0

3100

3710

01

0

CUSTOMER 238

Localization objects - per Business Priority

3100

3710

15

0

3100

3710

31

0

3100

3710

32

0

3100

3710

33

0

3200

3710

01

0

3200

3710

15

0

3200

3710

31

0

3200

3710

32

0

3200

3710

33

0

3210

3710

01

0

3210

3710

15

0

3210

3710

31

0

3210

3710

32

0

3210

3710

33

0

4000

3710

01

0

4000

3710

15

0

4000

3710

31

0

4000

3710

32

0

4000

3710

33

0

4001

3710

01

0

4001

3710

15

0

4001

3710

31

0

4001

3710

32

0

4001

3710

33

0

5000

3710

01

2

5000

3710

15

2

5000

3710

31

0

5000

3710

32

0

5000

3710

33

0

6000

3710

01

0

6000

3710

15

0

6000

3710

31

0

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 239

6000

3710

32

0

6000

3710

33

0

6100

3710

01

0

6100

3710

15

0

6100

3710

31

0

6100

3710

32

0

6100

3710

33

0

8200

3710

01

0

8200

3710

15

0

8200

3710

31

0

8200

3710

32

0

8200

3710

33

0

8300

3710

01

0

8300

3710

15

0

8300

3710

31

0

8300

3710

32

0

8300

3710

33

0

9000

3710

01

0

9000

3710

15

0

9000

3710

31

0

9000

3710

32

0

9000

3710

33

0

CUSTOMER 240

Localization objects - per Business Priority

6.

Save your entries.

Specify Max. Amount for Low-Value Assets Use In this step, you define the maximum amount for low-value assets (LVAs) for each company code and depreciation area. The system checks the maximum amount during each acquisition posting, provided that the corresponding LVA indicator is set in the relevant asset class. The following amounts have been defined for low-value assets for the depreciation areas 01 and 15 in company code 3710: Maximum LVA amount

1.000,00 EUR

Maximum LVA amount for purchase orders for assets

1.190,00 EUR

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  General Valuation  Amount Specifications (Company Code/Depreciation Area)  Specify Max. Amount for LowValue Assets + Asset Classes

Transaction Code

OAYK

2.

If you access this transaction via the IMG Menu, in the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Specify amount for low value assets.

3.

On the Change View "Company code selection": Overview screen, select Company Code 3710.

4.

In the Dialog Structure, double click Amount for low-value assets.

5.

On the Change View "Amount for low-value assets": Overview screen, make the following entries: Company Code

Area LVA Amount

Maximum LVA Amount for Purchase Order

3710

01

1.000,00

1.190,00

3710

15

1.000,00

1.190,00

3710

31

0,00

0,00

3710

32

0,00

0,00

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 241

3710 6.

33

0,00

0,00

Save your entries.

Specify Rounding of Net Book Value and/or Depreciation Use You can specify how net book values at year end, depreciation and replacement values are to be rounded. You make the specifications for each depreciation area and company code. Net book value at year end and arithmetic rounding has been set for all real depreciation areas of company code 3710. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  General Valuation  Amount Specifications (Company Code/Depreciation Area)  Specify Rounding of Net Book Value and/or Depreciation

Transaction Code

OAYO

2.

On the Change View "Company code selection:" Overview screen select Company Code 3710.

3.

In the Dialog Structure, double click Rounding specifications.

4.

On the Change View "Rounding specifications": Overview screen, select the depreciation area (see following table) and choose Details.

5.

On the Change View "Rounding specifications": Details screen, make the following entries for each depreciation area: Are a

Net book value at year end

Autom. Calcul. Depr.

Replacemen Arithm. Round. t value

01

X



15

X



31

X



32

X



33

X



Round Round up down

CUSTOMER 242

Localization objects - per Business Priority

6.

Save your entries.

Define Depreciation Areas for Foreign Currencies Use In Asset Accounting, you can manage depreciation areas in any currency. You can use the values from these areas for consolidation and other evaluation purposes. Depreciation areas representing valuation in group currency must be managed in the group currency of the company code.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  General Valuation  Currencies  Define Depreciation Areas for Foreign Currencies

Transaction Code

OAYH

2.

On the Change View "Company code selection:" Overview screen, select Company Code 3710.

3.

In the Dialog Structure, double click Depreciation area currency.

4.

On the Change View "Depreciation area currency": Overview screen, make the following entries: Area Name of depreciation area

Crcy

01

Local GAAP

EUR

15

Local Tax

EUR

31

Local GAAP in Group Currency



Comment

2nd local currency of your Company Code, see transaction OB22 Example: USD

32

IFRS in local currency

33

IFRS Group Currency



2nd local currency of your Company Code, see transaction OB22 Example: USD

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 243

5.

Save your entries.

Specify the Use of Parallel Currencies Use If you use parallel currencies for your company code, you can also assign the same currency type to the relevant depreciation areas in asset accounting. You can use the values from these areas for consolidation and other evaluation purposes. Depreciation areas representing valuation in a parallel currency should be managed in the currency type of the parallel currency.

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  General Valuation  Currencies  Specify the Use of Parallel Currencies

Transaction Code

S_EEI_69000068

On the Change View "Set Up Paralel Currencies": Overview screen make the following entries: Area Name of depreciation area 01

Local GAAP

15

Local Tax

31

Local GAAP in Group Currency

Crcy type/val.view

Comment



Currency type of your parallel currency, see transaction OB22 Example: 30 Group Currency

32

IFRS in local currency

33

IFRS Group Currency



Currency type of your parallel currency, see transaction OB22 Example: 30 Group Currency

CUSTOMER 244

Localization objects - per Business Priority

3.

Save your entries.

4.3.13.1.4 Depreciation Use In the following section, you make system settings for fixed asset depreciation. You can set your chart of accounts using transaction OAPL

Calculation Methods Use In this step, you define calculation methods that are assigned to a depreciation key.

Define Declining-Balance Methods Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  Depreciation  Valuation Methods  Depreciation Key  Calculation Methods  Define Declining-Balance Methods

Transaction Code

AFAMD

On the Change View “Declining-Balance Method”: Overview screen, make the following entries for chart of depreciation 3710: Decl.-bal.

Description of the method

Dec. factor

Max.perc.

001

0.00x / 0.0000% / 0.0000%

0,00

0,00

002

2.00x /20.0000% / 0.0000%

2,00

20,0000

003

2.50x /25.0000% / 0.0000%

2,50

25,0000

004

3.00x /30.0000% / 0.0000%

3,00

35,0000

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 245

Maintain Period Control Methods Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code

AFAMP

IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  Depreciation  Valuation Methods  Depreciation Key  Calculation Methods  Maintain Period Control Methods

On the Change View “Period Control”: Overview screen, make the following entries for chart of depreciation 3710: Prd.c.met h

Description

Acq

Add

Ret

Tm

001

01/01/02/02

01

01

02

02

002

04/06/02/02

04

06

02

02

003

01/06/02/02

01

06

02

02

004

06/06/02/02

06

06

02

02

005

06/06/08/08

06

06

08

08

Save your entries.

Define Multi-Level Methods Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code

AFAMS

IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  Depreciation  Valuation Methods  Depreciation Key  Calculation Methods  Define Multi-Level Methods

On the Change View “Multilevel Method”: Overview screen, make the following entries for chart of depreciations 3710:

CUSTOMER 246

Localization objects - per Business Priority

M-lev. Description of the method meth

Vali Dpe.by dity fisc.year start

001

0.0000%

2

Not selected

002

0.0000%

2

Not selected

003

10.0000%/ 5.0000%/ 2.5000%

2

Not selected

004

3.5000%/ 2.0000%/ 1.0000%

2

Not selected

005

5.0000%/ 2.5000%/ 1.2500%

2

Not selected

006

7.0000%/ 5.0000%/ 2.0000%/ 1.2500%

2

Not selected

007

2.0000%

2

Not selected

008

2.5000%

2

Not selected

009

4.0000%

2

Not selected

010

0.0000%

2

Not selected

011

10.0000%

1

Not selected

012

10.0000%

1

Not selected

013

0.0000%

2

Not selected

014

60.0000%/70.0000%/80.0000%/90.0000%/1 00.0000%

3

Not selected

015

60.0000%

3

Not selected

016

100.0000%

3

Not selected

017

20.0000%

3

Not selected

018

0.0000%

2

Not selected

019

75.0000%/ 0.0000%

3

Not selected

020

0.0000%/ 0.0000%

3

Not selected

021

15.0000%

1

Not selected

022

40.0000%

1

Not selected

023

---

3

Not selected

024

---

3

Not selected

025

2.0000%

3

Not selected

026

0.0000%

3

Not selected

027

2.0000%/ 2.0000%

3

Not selected

028

50.0000%

3

Not selected

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 247

M-lev. Description of the method meth

Vali Dpe.by dity fisc.year start

029

40.0000%

3

Not selected

030

20.0000%

3

Not selected

031

25.0000%

3

Not selected

032

---

3

Not selected

033

50.0000%

3

Not selected

034

60.0000%/ 0.0000%/100.0000%

2

Not selected

3.

In the Dialog Structure, double click Levels.

4.

Check that the values for current year are maintained according to the description of the methods.

5.

Save your entries.

Maintain Depreciation Keys Use In this step, you maintain depreciation keys by assigning calculation methods to them. When your chart of depreciation was created as a copy of the country reference chart of depreciation, the depreciation keys were also copied from the reference chart of depreciation. Only active depreciation keys can be assigned to the fixed assets. Check that all the required depreciation keys are activated. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  Depreciation  Valuation Methods  Depreciation Key  Maintain Depreciation Key

Transaction Code

AFAMA

On the Change View “Depreciation Key”: Overview screen, check that the following depreciation keys exist and their status is set to X Active: CUSTOMER

248

Localization objects - per Business Priority

DepKy

Name for whole Depreciation

Status

0000

No depreciation and no interest

X Active

DG20

Declining balance 2 x

X Active

DG25

Declining balance 2.5 x

X Active

DG30

Declining balance 3 x

X Active

GD10

Buildings decl.bal.10.0/ 5.0 / 2.5 %

X Active

GD35

Buildings decl.bal.3.5/ 2.0 / 1.0 %

X Active

GD50

Buildings decl.bal. 5.0 / 2.5 / 1.25 %

X Active

GD70

Buildings decl.bal. 7.0 / 5.0 / 2.0 / 1.25 %

X Active

GL20

Buildings straight-line 2%

X Active

GL25

Buildings straight-line 2.5%

X Active

GL40

Buildings straight-line 4%

X Active

GWG

LVA 100 % Complete write off

X Active

GWGS

Low value asset tax depreciation

X Active

LINA

Str.-line frm acq.value pro rata w/curb + intrst

X Active

LINB

Straight-line acq.value pro rata to zero, with int

X Active

LINC

Str.-line acq. val. pro rata w/o curb w/ inter.

X Active

LINI

Str.-line/Acquis. val./pro rata/to 0/no interest

X Active

LINJ

Str.-line/Acquis. val./annual rule/to 0/no int.

X Active

LINK

Str.-line frm acq.value to zero without interest

X Active

LINR

Str.-line frm rem.life to book value zero

X Active

LINS

Str.-line over rem.life pro rata to zero

X Active

LINU

Str.-line over rem useful life/annual rule/to 0

X Active

MANU

Manual depreciation only

X Active

S7DA

Spec.dep §7d Environ.protection (60/10/10/10/10%)

X Active

S7DB

Spec.dep. §7d Environ.protection AuC (60%)

X Active

S7DC

Spec.dep §7d Environ.prot. supp.entries after 1992

X Active

S7GD

Spec.dep. §7g and decl.bal.ordinary dep. 3 x

X Active

S7GL

Spec.dep. §7g and str.-line ord.dep. First-yr.conv

X Active

SFE1

Spec.dep. §82 R&D immobile goods (15%)

X Active

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 249

DepKy

Name for whole Depreciation

Status

SFE4

Spec. dep. §82 R&D moveable goods (40%)

X Active

SFEB

Spec.dep. §82 R&D immobile goods (15%)

X Active

SFG4

Spec.dep. §4 SSAL (50%) moveable goods

X Active

SFGN

Spec.dep. §4 SSAL (50&) subsequent APC buildings

X Active

SMAN

Manual special deprec. and str-line ord. deprec.

X Active

SNFB

Spec.dep.§4 SSL (50%) immovable assets (new)

X Active

SNFG

Spec.dep. §4 SSAL (40%) movable assets (new)

X Active

SNFU

Spec.dep. §4 SSAL (40%) movable assets (1996)

X Active

SNFV

Spec.dep. §4 SSAL (20%) imov.asts under 5 yr(1996)

X Active

SNFW

Spec.dep. §4 SSAL (25%) residential bldgs (1996)

X Active

STCK

Unit-of-production deprec. (seasonal activity)

X Active

4.3.13.1.5 Transactions Use In this step, you define the transaction types for asset transactions. You can also specify that only certain depreciation areas will be proposed for posting for certain transaction types. The standard transaction types are used, which means that no new transaction types have to be created

Allow Down Payment/Transfer Transaction Types in Asset Classes Use In this step, you determine the asset classes for which postings are to be allowed with the transaction type groups for down payments and transfers.

CUSTOMER 250

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  Transactions  Acquisitions  Allow Down Payment Transaction Types in Asset Classes

Transaction Code

OAYB

2.

On the Display View "Transaction type group selection": Overview screen, select transaction type group 15 (and later 16).

3.

In the Dialog Structure, double click Specification of asset classes.

4.

On the Change View "Specification of asset classes": Overview screen, enter the relevant asset classes.

5.

Save your entries.

Result The following entries should be made for chart of depreciation 3710: TT G

Name for the Transaction Type Group

Class

Asset Class Description

15

Down payment

4000

Assets under Construction

4001

AuC as Investment Measure

4000

AuC as Investment Measure

4001

Assets under Construction

16

Down Paymt Bal. frm Prev. Years

Assign Settlement Profile to Company Code Use In this step, you assign settlement profiles for settling assets under construction. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  Transactions  Capitalization of Assets under Construction  Define/Assign Settlement Profiles

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 251

Transaction Code

OAAZ

2.

If you access this transaction via the IMG Menu, in the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Assign Settlement Profile to Company Code.

3.

Assign Company Code 3710 to settlement profile YB00AI.

4.

Save your entries.

4.3.13.1.6 Asset Data Transfer Set Company Code Status Use Status 2 (test company code with data transfer always allowed) has been assigned to company code 3710. After the go live, status 0 (Asset Data Transfer Completed) should be set. The productive indicator prevents data in the company code being deleted by programs for deleting test data.

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  Asset Data Transfer  Set Company Code Status

Transaction Code

S_ALR_87009070

On the Change View "FI-AA: Set status of the company code": Overview screen, make the following entries: Field Name

Description

User action and values

CoCd

Company code

3710

Status

3.

2

Comment

Test company code with data transfer always allowed

Save your entries.

CUSTOMER 252

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Result Test status is set for asset accounting. You can still delete your test data.

Specify Sequence of Depreciation Areas Use In this step, you determine the sequence in which the system presents the depreciation areas for the asset data transfer transaction.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  Asset Data Transfer  Specify Sequence of Depreciation Areas

Transaction Code

OAYE

2.

On the Change View "Company code selection": Overview screen, select Company Code 3710.

3.

In the Dialog Structure, double click Determine sequence.

4.

On the Change View "Determine Sequence": Overview screen, enter the sequence for depreciation areas in ascending order:

5.

Company Code

Seq. Number for Legacy Data Transfer

Depreciation Area

Name of depreciation area

3710

01

01

Local GAAP

3710

02

15

Local Tax

3710

03

31

Local GAAP in Group Currency

3710

04

32

IFRS in Local Currency

3710

05

33

IFRS in Group Currency

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 253

Specify Transfer Date/Last Closed Fiscal Year Use In this step, you determine the transfer date for the legacy data transfer. This date determines the posting status to be used for the transfer (postings up to this date are included in the transfer), not the actual date the data transfer is carried out. This setting also determines whether you want to perform the transfer during the fiscal year (with transfer of posted transactions/depreciation in the current fiscal year) or at the end of the fiscal year (without transactions). The system automatically derives the last closed fiscal year from the transfer date. The transfer date 12/31/ is proposed for company code 3710, in other words, the values are transferred for fiscal year . If no data transfer is carried out during the fiscal year, the current fiscal year first has to be opened using the Fiscal Year Change function before the data transfer is carried out. If no fiscal year change is carried out, the system outputs the error message AY 252 Current fiscal year xxxx has to be after transfer date xx/xx/xxxx when the legacy data is created.

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  Asset Data Transfer  Parameters for Data Transfer  Date Information  Specify Transfer Date/Last Closed Fiscal Year

Transaction Code

S_ALR_87009072

On the Change View "FI-AA: Date of Legacy Data Transfer": Overview screen, make the following entries: Field Name

3.

Descriptio n

User action and values

Company Code

3710

Take-Over Date

31.12./

Comment

Select current year -1

Save your entries.

CUSTOMER 254

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Recalculate Depreciation for Previous Years Use You can recalculate the accumulated depreciation from the past if a new depreciation area is to be created or if the values from a depreciation area are to be recalculated in the system. This indicator has not been set in any depreciation areas. Before starting the asset data transfer, you should decide if you want the system to recalculate the accumulated depreciation. You may want to choose this option if the values are either not available or not accurate in the legacy system.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  Asset Data Transfer  Parameters for Data Transfer  Options  Recalculate Depreciation for Previous Years

Transaction Code

OAYF

2.

On the Change View "Company code selection": Overview screen, select Company Code 3710.

3.

In the Dialog Structure, double click Calculate accumulated depreciation and make the required settings:

4.

Ar.

Name of depreciation area

01

Local GAAP

15

Local Tax

31

Local GAAP in Group Currency

32

IFRS in Local Currency

33

IFRS in Group Currency

Calcul.

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 255

4.3.13.1.7 Preparations for Going Live Process Asset Views Use In addition to the standard SAP ERP authorization functions, the Asset Accounting component provides the asset view, which offers additional authorization protection. The asset view authorization object (A_A_VIEW) controls master data maintenance to a certain extent. You can use this object to assign users limited views of asset data and asset values. To create asset master records you need at least one asset view. You have to use standard view 1 (asset accounting) to be able to create complete asset master records. All depreciation areas can be maintained with asset view 1 (= Asset Accounting). Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Asset Accounting (New)  Preparations for Going Live  Authorization Management  Process Asset Views

Transaction Code

ANSICHT

2.

On the Change View "Asset View": Overview screen, select the entry for asset view 1 (Asset Accounting).

3.

In the Dialog Structure, double click Authorization for Depreciation Areas.

4.

On the Change View "Authorization for Depreciation Areas": Overview screen, mark the Authorization Maintenance for all depreciation areas.

5.

View

Chart of Depr.

Depr. Area

Maintenance

1

3710

01

select

1

3710

15

select

1

3710

31

select

1

3710

32

select

1

3710

33

select

Save your entries.

CUSTOMER 256

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.3.13.1.8 Period End Closing In the following section you check the fiscal year control (open and close FY) for asset accounting. The actual fiscal year change is performed via balance carry forward in FI transaction FAGLGVTR.

Year End Closing of Previous Year Use You use the year-end closing program to close the fiscal year for one or more company codes from an asset accounting perspective. Once the fiscal year is closed, you can no longer post or change values within asset accounting (for example, by recalculating depreciation). The fiscal year to be closed is always the year following the last closed fiscal year. You cannot close the current fiscal year.

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Accounting  Financial Accounting  Fixed Assets  Periodic Processing  Year-End Closing  Execute

Transaction Code

AJAB

On the Year-end closing Asset Accounting screen, make the following entries: Field Name

Description User Action and Values

Company Code

Company Code

Fiscal year to be closed Test run

Comment

3710

One of the past years, like last year. If you set this indicator, the program is started in test mode.

3.

From the application menu, choose Program  Execute in background.

4.

In the view Background Print Parameters screen, make the following entries:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 257

Field Name

Description

Output Device

User action and values

Comment



For example LODE

5.

Choose Continue E n t e r .

6.

In the Start Time box, choose Immediate, and save your entries.

7.

The message Background

job was scheduled for program RAJABS00 is displayed.

You can monitor the job and spool separately via transaction codes SMX (job) and SP01 or SP02 (spool) or collectively via the Schedule Manager Monitor, transaction code SCMO (select Application Financial Accounting) or ARAL (select Object FIAA).

4.4 Localization objects for Controlling 4.4.1Basic Overhead Cost Controlling [local] (J18) 4.4.1.1

Configuration - On Premise

The following section describes the complete settings for this building block. These settings can be divided into three main groups: 1. Prerequisite settings that have to be checked and which were delivered by SAP (as part of the standard delivery) The term Check refers to these prerequisite settings. 2. Settings defined by the customer (in the customer namespace and customerspecific): The system uses automation to request individual customer settings during the personalization process. These settings can be initial or reused from existing SAP ERP layers and are indicated in the text by . 3. Additional settings that must be made, covered either by automation or manual configuration (in the customer namespace). The term Create refers to these additional settings in the text.

4.4.1.1.1 Overhead Controlling Use In this step, all the Customizing settings from the Central Cost Center Accounting building block are copied to the development client. CUSTOMER 258

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Procedure Access the Customizing activity as described and make the settings according to the table values listed in this documentation.

Organizational Elements Maintaining the Controlling Area Use Activate the following Controlling components:  Cost Centers  Order Management  Commitments Management  Projects  Sales Orders with Commitments Management  Cost Objects

Maintaining Controlling Area - Activate Components/Control Indicator Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Controlling  General Controlling  Organization  Maintain Controlling Area  Maintain Controlling Area (Choose Activity Screen)

Transaction Code

OKKP

2.

On the Change View: “Basic Data” Overview screen, select controlling area A000. Do not double click.

3.

On the Change View: “Basic Data” Details screen, double click Activate Components/Control Indicators.

4.

If several fiscal year intervals exist, double click the latest year in this list.

5.

On the Change View: “Activate Components/Control Indicators”: Details screen, make the following entries:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 259

Field name

6.

Description User action and values

Comment

Cost centers

Component active

Order management

Component active

Commit. Management

Component active

Profit Analysis

Component not active

Acty-Based Costing

Component not active

Profit center Acctg.

No selection

Projects

Set

Sales Orders

Set

Cost Objects

Set

Real Estate Mgmt.

No selection

Not active

W. Commitment Mgt

Set

Ind. Commitment Management with Sales Orders is Active

All currencies

Set

Variances

Set

Company Code validation

Set

Building block J53 activates profitability analysis

Not active

SD Order Processing is Active

Applies only if several company codes are assigned to the controlling area

Save your entries.

Result You have created and maintained the controlling area A000.

CUSTOMER 260

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Maintaining Controlling Area - Assign Company Code Use All company codes used are to be assigned to the controlling area. If the company code 3710 is already assigned to controlling area A000, the following step can be skipped. These entries are assigned in building block J47. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Controlling  General Controlling  Organization  Maintain Controlling Area  Maintain Controlling Area

Transaction Code

OKKP

2.

On the Change View: “Basic Data” Overview screen, select controlling area A000. Do not double click.

3.

On the Change View: “Basic Data” Overview screen, in the Controlling Area pane, double click Assignment of company codes (right-hand side of the screen).

4.

On the Change View: “Assignment of Company Codes”: Overview screen, from the application toolbar, choose New Entries.

5.

On the New Entries: Overview of added entries screen, make the following entries:

6.

Field name

Description

User action and values

Comment

CoCd

Company Code

3710

Enter your company code

Save your entries.

Assign Document Type Mapping Variants to Company Codes

1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)  Ledgers  Integration of Controlling with Financial Accounting  Check and Define Default Values for Postings in Controlling

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 261

Transaction Code 2.

SPRO

On the “Change View “ Default Values for Posting in Controlling”: Overview screen, assign Doc Type Mapping Var to company code Company Code

DocType Mapping Var.

3710

000000A000

Define Ledger for CO-Version

1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Ledgers  Integration of Controlling with Financial Accounting  Define Ledger for CO Version

Transaction Code

SPRO

On the “Change View “ Ledger From Which CO Reads Actual Data”: Overview screen assign Doc Type Mapping Var to company code Company Code

Ledger

Version

3710

0L (already mapped from FI setting)

0

Add Cost element category to GL account Use In this step, you create the cost elements via G/L account. You can create a secondary cost element of either an assessment or activity allocation type. In the Simple Finance approach, the Chart of Accounts now covers all balance sheet accounts, P&L accounts and related cost elements. Therefore, the maintenance to create or change a G/L account (FI) or cost element (CO) is provided in single activity. This step covers assignment of primary and secondary cost element category. Procedure

1.

Access the activity using the following navigation options:

CUSTOMER 262

Localization objects - per Business Priority

IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  General Ledger Accounting (New)  Master Data  G/L Accounts G/L Account Creation and Processing Edit G/L Account (Individual Processing)  Edit G/L Account Centrally

Transaction Code

FS00

2.

On the Edit G/L Account Centrally screen, enter GL account and company code from the table below and choose Change.

3.

On the Control Data tab maintain cost element category (CElem category) as given in table below

4.

Save your entries. G/L Account

Company code

CElem cat.

75002200

3710

01

75002300

3710

01

75008000

3710

01

75009000

3710

01

75009900

3710

01

Cost Element Groups: Values (Cost Elements) Use The purpose of this activity is to assign all cost elements to one of the cost element groups. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Accounting  Controlling  Cost Center Accounting  Master Data  Cost Element Group  Change

Transaction Code

KAH2

2.

On the Change Cost Element Group: Initial Screen, enter the cost element group and choose Hierarchy.

3.

On the Change Cost Element Group: Structure screen, choose Insert Cost Element.

4.

Enter the minimum and the maximum value of cost element range to be assigned.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 263

5.

Save your entries.

6.

Make the following sets of entries: Cost Element Group

From Value

To Value

6300_CE

75002200

75002200

6300_CE

75002300

75002300

6300_CE

75008000

75008000

6300_CE

75009000

75009000

6300_CE

75009900

75009900

Basic Master Data Use Master data is imported using application transactions or eCATTs (extended Computer Aided Test Tools). Some of the master data is required for configuration, a description of the data used appears in the following example.

Prerequisites If a Set Controlling Area dialog box displays, enter the following data: Field Name

User actions and values

Controlling Area

A000

Cost Elements and Groups Creating Cost Centers Use A cost center is the smallest responsibility area in an enterprise for which costs are planned and accrual of costs is tracked separately. Prerequisites Cost center categories must be defined. The cost center standard hierarchy must be created. CUSTOMER 264

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Accounting  Controlling  Cost Center Accounting  Master Data  Cost Center  Individual Processing  Create

Transaction Code

KS01

2.

On the Create Cost Center: Initial screen, enter the necessary data, and choose Master Data.

3.

On the Create Cost Center: Basic creen, enter the necessary data, and save your entries. All Cost Centers are valid from 01.01.2006 to 31.12.9999. Cost Center

Name

Description

Person CC Hier. Comp Responsible Cat. Area Code

Financials & Financials and 37101101 Admin Administration SAP

W 0001

37101601 Marketing

Marketing

SAP

9

0001 3710

37101602 Sales

Sales

SAP

V

0001 3710

3710

Build. & Buildings and 37101750 Maintenance Maintenance SAP

H 0001 3710

Other Other Income 37101801 Inc.&Expense & Expenses SAP

W 0001 3710

Result You have created cost centers.

Creating Alternative Groups: Cost Centers Cost center groups enable the controller to address cost centers by providing the group name instead of single cost center names, for example, in Customizing or reporting. In reporting, this step allows an analysis of controlling key figures on an aggregate level.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 265

Cost Center Groups: Header and Texts Use Cost center groups are created, and texts are maintained.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Accounting  Controlling  Cost Center Accounting  Master Data  Cost Center Group  Create

Transaction Code

KSH1

2.

On the Create Cost Center Group: Initial screen, provide Cost Center Group, and choose Enter.

3.

On the Create Cost Center Group: Structure screen, enter the description field that is ready for input, and save your entries.

4.

Repeat this step for the following entries: Cost Center Group

Description

3710000

Netherlands

3710110

Shared Services

3710160

Marketing

3710170

Sales

3710180

Other Income & Expense

Result You have created the cost center groups.

Cost Center Groups: Values (Cost Centers) Use The purpose of this activity is to assign cost centers to the alternative cost center groups.

CUSTOMER 266

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Accounting  Controlling  Cost Center Accounting  Master Data  Cost Center Group  Change

Transaction Code

KSH2

2.

On the Change Cost Center Group: Initial screen, provide a cost center group, and from the application toolbar, choose Hierarchy.

3.

On the Change Cost Center Group: Structure screen, and from the application toolbar, choose the Insert Cost Center button.

4.

Provide the minimum and maximum values of the cost center range to be assigned.

5.

Make the following sets of entries:

6.

Cost Center Group

From Value

To Value

3710110

37101101

37101101

3710110

37101750

37101750

3710160

37101601

37101601

3710170

37101602

37101602

3710180

37101801

37101801

Save your entries.

Result You assigned cost centers to the alternative cost center groups.

Cost Center Groups: Lower Level Sets (Cost Center Groups) Use The purpose of this activity is to assign the cost center groups one to another to build up an alternative cost center hierarchy. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using the following navigation options:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 267

SAP Menu

Accounting  Controlling  Cost Center Accounting  Master Data  Cost Center Group  Create

Transaction Code

KSH1

2.

On the Create Cost Center Group: Initial screen, enter the upper level node of the cost center hierarchy (father node), and choose Hierarchy.

3.

On the Create Cost Center Group: Structure screen, from the application toolbar, choose the Lower Level button.

4.

Enter the key of the lower level cost center group, and save your entries.

5.

Make the following entries: Group Upper level

Group Lower level

3710

3710110

3710

3710160

3710

3710170

3710

3710180

Result You created the alternative cost center hierarchy.

Cost Center Groups: Company Group to Controlling Area Group Use The purpose of this activity is to assign the cost center groups one to another to build up an alternative cost center hierarchy.

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Accounting  Controlling  Cost Center Accounting  Master Data  Cost Center Group  Change

Transaction Code

KSH2

On the Change Cost Center Group: Initial screen, enter the upper level node of the cost center hierarchy (father node), and choose Hierarchy. CUSTOMER

268

Localization objects - per Business Priority

3.

On the Change Cost Center Group: Structure screen, from the application toolbar, choose the Lower Level button.

4.

Enter the key of the lower level cost center group, and save your entries.

5.

Make the following entries:

6.

Group Upper level

Group Lower level

A000

3710

Save your entries.

Result You assigned the company level cost center group to controlling are group.

Assignment Functional Areas to Cost Centers Use In this step, you make additional settings for a functional area in cost centers. If you change the functional area, future postings are made using the new functional area. The change made to the functional area has no effect on postings that have already been made. You have to repost any documents that have already been posted. Changes to the functional area can lead to inconsistencies if documents are reversed. If subsequent to the functional area being changed, documents posted before this change are then reversed. The reversal document may in some cases be posted under the new functional area. You should only carry out this procedure when testing the configuration. If you decide to carry it out in a productive system, do so with special care! Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP system Menu

Accounting  Controlling  Cost Center Accounting  Master Data  Cost Centers  Individual Processing  Change

Transaction Code

KS02

2.

If required, enter Controlling Area A000.

3.

On the Change Cost Center Initial screen, provide the cost center, and choose Enter.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 269

4.

On the Change Cost Center: Basic screen, select the Basic Data tab, and enter the functional area in the Functional Area field.

5.

Save your entries. Provide the following data for SAP Best Practices cost center master data: Cost Center

Functional Area

37101101

YB40

37101601

YB35

37101602

YB30

37101750

YB40

37101801

YB40

Assign Profit Centers to Cost Centers Use Profit Centers are to be assigned to all cost centers, which exist in the client. Because of different scope selections, it is possible that some of the following listed cost centers do not exist, or alternatively, that cost centers exist which are not maintained in the list. If the listed cost center does not exist: no further actions are necessary. If cost centers exist in the client, but are not listed below: add profit center depending on the scope.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP System Menu

Accounting  Controlling  Cost Center Accounting  Master Data  Cost Center  Single Processing  Change

Transaction Code

KS02

2.

On the Cost Center Change: Entry View screen, provide the necessary data, and choose Master Data.

3.

On the Change Cost Center: Basic screen, provide the necessary data. Key

Profit Center

37101101

YB600

CUSTOMER 270

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.

Key

Profit Center

37101601

YB600

37101602

YB600

37101750

YB700

37101801

YB900

Save your entries.

Result Profit centers are assigned to all cost centers.

4.4.1.1.2 Configuration with Use of CO Master Data Actual Postings Editing Automatic Account Assignment - Defining Account Assignment Use When you create accounting postings, the system proposes a corresponding cost accounting-relevant object if a default account assignment is configured for the account involved. You could use, for example, the default account assignment for the following business transactions:  Transferring price differences posted in Purchasing as the result of different prices during invoice receipt.  Revaluating material stocks.  Transferring inventory differences. If you use the Logistics components, it makes sense to use the default account assignment for those cost elements that are automatically posted to from the Logistics modules (logistical income statement accounts). Procedure 1.

Access the activity using the following navigation options:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 271

IMG Menu

Controlling  Cost Center Accounting  Actual Postings  Manual Actual Postings  Edit Automatic Account Assignment

Transaction Code

OKB9

2.

On the Change View “Default account assignment”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: CoCd Company Code

Cost Elem. Cost Element

Cost Ctr Cost Center

Acct. assignment detail

3710

44000000

37101602

3710

44001000

37101602

3710

52001000

1

3710

52003000

1

3710

52011000

1

3710

52013000

1

3710

52030000

1

3710

52031000

1

3710

52033000

1

3710

52041000

1

3710

52042000

1

3710

52043000

1

3710

52044000

1

3710

52045000

1

3710

52046000

1

3710

52060000

3710

52501000

1

3710

52503000

1

3710

52511000

1

3710

52513000

1

3710

52530000

1

3710

52531000

1

3710

52532000

1

37101101

CUSTOMER 272

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.

CoCd Company Code

Cost Elem. Cost Element

Cost Ctr Cost Center

Acct. assignment detail

3710

52541000

1

3710

52542000

1

3710

52543000

1

3710

52580000

37101801

3710

52080000

37101801

3710

52544000

1

3710

54051000

1

3710

54053000

1

3710

62000000

3710

65008500

1

3710

65400000

1

3710

70040000

37101101

3710

71000000

37101101

3710

71100000

37101101

3710

72010000

37101101

3710

72020000

37101101

3710

72040000

37101101

3710

72510000

37101101

3710

72520000

37101101

3710

72540000

37101101

3710

71050000

37101101

37101101

Save your entries.

Result You have defined automatic account assignment for reasonable accounts.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 273

Editing Automatic Account Assignment- Details per Valuation Area Use If valuation area is set to mandatory in a previous step, cost centers are to be assigned on valuation area level.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Controlling  Cost Center Accounting  Actual Postings  Manual Actual Postings  Edit Automatic Account Assignment

Transaction Code

OKB9

2.

On the Change View “Default account assignment”: Overview screen, select the cost element, and choose Detail per business area/valuation area.

3.

On the Change View: “Detail per business area/valuation area”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

4.

Make the following entries: CoCd Company Code

Cost Elem. Cost Element

ValA Valuation Area

Cost Ctr Cost Center

3710

52001000

3710

37101201

3710

52003000

3710

37101201

3710

52011000

3710

37101201

3710

52013000

3710

37101201

3710

52030000

3710

37101201

3710

52031000

3710

37101201

3710

52033000

3710

37101201

3710

52041000

3710

37101201

3710

52042000

3710

37101201

3710

52043000

3710

37101201

3710

52044000

3710

37101201

3710

52045000

3710

37101201

3710

52046000

3710

37101201

CUSTOMER 274

Localization objects - per Business Priority

5.

CoCd Company Code

Cost Elem. Cost Element

ValA Valuation Area

Cost Ctr Cost Center

3710

52501000

3710

37101201

3710

52503000

3710

37101201

3710

52511000

3710

37101201

3710

52513000

3710

37101201

3710

52530000

3710

37101201

3710

52531000

3710

37101201

3710

52532000

3710

37101201

3710

52541000

3710

37101201

3710

52542000

3710

37101201

3710

52543000

3710

37101201

3710

52544000

3710

37101201

3710

54051000

3710

37101201

3710

54053000

3710

37101201

3710

65008500

3710

37101201

3710

65400000

3710

37101201

Save your settings.

Define and Activate Substitution for Cost-of-Sales Accounting Use In this IMG activity, you must activate the substitution for the functional area in documents.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using the following navigation option: Transaction Code

SM30 (Customizing Object V_T001Q_FI_0006)

IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)  Tools  Validation/Substitution  Define and Activate Substitution for Cost–of-Sales Accounting

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 275

2.

3.

On the Change View “Substitution for Cost-of-Sales Accounting”: Overview screen, make the following entries: CoCd

CallPnt

Substitution

Activtn level

3710

Functional Area

DUMMY

1

Save your entries.

Result You have now activated the substitution for Cost of Sales Accounting.

4.4.1.2

Manual Rework

If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity

Manual transport possible

Manual action in target system / client required

Maintain Substitution for Cost of Sales Accounting

Yes

No

Add Cost element category to GL account

Yes

No

Remarks

Follow step below in transaction OKE7 to capture data in Transport. Select Cost Elements (COAr dependent) Select Cost Elements(CoAdependent) on Mast.data 1

Assign All Cost Elements to Cost element Group

Yes

No

Follow step below in transaction OKE7 to capture data in Transport.

CUSTOMER 276

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Configuration activity

Manual transport possible

Manual action in target system / client required

Remarks

Select Cost Elements Group on Mast.data 1 Create Cost Centers

Yes

No

Follow step below in transaction OKE7 to capture data in Transport. Select Cost Center Group on Mast.data 1

KSH2 Group names to Controlling area

Yes

No

Follow step below in transaction OKE7 to capture data in Transport. Select Cost Center Group on Mast.data 1

Assign Functional Areas to Cost Centers

Yes

No

Follow step below in transaction OKE7 to capture data in Transport. Select Cost Center Group on Mast.data 1

Assign Profit Center to Cost Centers

Yes

No

Follow step below in transaction OKE7 to capture data in Transport. Select Cost Centers Group on Mast.data 1

Define Cost Center Groups - Values in Sets

Yes

No

Follow step below in transaction OKE7 to capture data in Transport. Select Cost CenterGroup on Mast.data 1

If a manual transport is possible, proceed as follows: 1.

Logon to the source system / client.

2.

Go to the respective customizing activity as described in the respective section.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 277

3.

To select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request, choose Table View  Transport. If this is not possible, see the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity.

4.

The newly created transport request needs to be released and imported in the target system / client. Check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information.

If manual action in the target system / client is required, proceed as follows: 1.

Logon to the target system / client.

2.

Go to the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.

4.4.1.2.1 Manual Transport of Controlling Data OKE7 Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu Transaction Code

OKE7

2.

On the Transport Controlling settings select objects as per table given above and click include in Request.

3.

On Prompt for Workbench Request dialog box, select the request then choose Continue E n t e r .

4.

Settings are included into the transport requests.

CUSTOMER 278

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.4.2

Delta Basic Overhead Cost Controlling [local] (BE2)

4.4.2.1

Configuration – On Premise

4.4.2.1.1 Internal Orders and Groups Create Internal Order – New Use Internal orders are created for use in the CO area. Prerequisites Order type Y9A0 exists.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Accounting  Controlling  Internal Orders  Master Data  Special Functions  Order  Create

Transaction Code

KO01

2.

On the Create Internal Order: Initial screen, enter the Controling area A000 and the Order type Y9A0 and choose Master Data.

3.

On the Create Internal Order: Master Data screen, choose the Assignments tab, and enter the following data:

4.

Order

Description

Company Code

Object Class

9A0000003700

Accrual order

3710

Overhead

Save your entries.

Result You created the internal order.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 279

4.4.2.1.2 Accrual Calculation Maintaining Overhead Structure - Credit objects for overhead cost elements Use There are costs that occur only once a year, although they are incurred throughout all periods of a year. Accrual calculation provides for an even distribution of such costs over all periods. You must define accrual parameters. These parameters are usually identical for the plan accrual and the actual accrual. You define an overhead percentage rate for accruing the additional employee benefit costs. Reference cost elements are the costs for wages and salaries. The accrued costs are credited to an order with category Y9A0 (Internal orders: Accrual). Prerequisites Cost elements used for accrual by surcharge: Cost Element

Description

Cost Element Category

Valid from To

61061000

Payroll - Benefits

3

01.01.2006 31.12.9999

61020000

Payroll - Bonus

3

01.01.2006 31.12.9999

61010000

Payroll - Other Personnel Expenses

3

01.01.2006 31.12.9999

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Controlling  Cost Center Accounting  Planning  Planning Aids  Accrual Calculation  Percentage Method  Maintain Overhead Structure

Transaction Code

KSAZ

2.

On the Maintain CO-OM Accrual Calculation: Overhead Struc. Overview screen, choose the Create Overhead structure button F 7

3.

In the Create Overhead Structure dialog box, make the following entries: Field name

Description

User action and values

Comment

CUSTOMER 280

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Overhead Structure

YBL

Description

Sum wages and salaries

4.

Save your entries.

5.

On the Maintain CO-OM Accrual Calculation: Overhead Struc. Detail screen, double click Overhead Structure YBL and create the following entries: Row

Base

110 120 190 210 220 230

Y-B1 Y-B2

O/H rate

Description

From

To

Credit

Y-Z1 Y-Z2 Y-Z3

Wages Salaries Sum wages and salaries Vacation bonus paid Yearly bonus Misc. Personnel Costs

110 190 190 190

120 190 190 190

Y11 Y12 Y13

If you create the O/H rate, choose Dependency Controlling Area/Overhead Type 1010. 6.

Select the row and choose Goto  Calculation Base (or double click the selected Base entry).

7.

On the Maintain CO-OM Accrual Calculation: Calculation Base Detail screen, to define the details of the calculation base, double click the calculation base and make the following entries: Base

From Cost Element

To Cost Element

Y-B1

61051000

61051000

Y-B1

61103000

61103000

Y-B2

61052000

61052000

Y-B2

61100000

61100000

8.

Save your entries.

9.

From the menu, choose Goto  Overhead rate (or double click the selected O/H rate entry).

10.

On the Maintain CO-OM Accrual Calculation: Overhead Controlling Area/Overhead screen, make the following entries: CO Area

O/H rate

Dependency

Valid from

Valid to

Plan overhead

Act. Overhead*

A000

Y-Z1

01. 2010

12. 2030

3%

3%

A000

Y-Z2

Controlling area/overhead type Controlling area/overhead type

01. 2010

12. 2030

3%

3%

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 281

CO Area

O/H rate

Dependency

Valid from

Valid to

Plan overhead

Act. Overhead*

A000

Y-Z3

Controlling area/overhead type

01. 2010

12. 2030

3%

3%

The overhead rates have been selected at random and do not correspond to genuine requirements. Overhead rates cannot be transported and have to be maintained manually in Customizing. 11.

Save your entries.

12.

Choose Goto  Credit (or double click the selected Credit entry).

13.

On the Maintain CO-OM Accrual Calculation: Credit Detail screen, make the following entries:

14.

Controlling CoCode Credi t Area

Desc.

A000

3710

Y11

A000

3710

Y12

A000

3710

Y13

Cost Center

Valid to

Cost Element

Order

Vacation bonus paid Yearly bonus

12. 2027

610610 00

9A000000370 0

12. 2027

610200 00

9A000000370 0

Misc. Personn el Costs

12. 2027

610100 00

9A000000370 0

Save your entries.

Result The overhead structure has been defined.

4.4.2.1.3 Assessments Define Assessment - Allocations: Cycles Use Assessment is used to allocate primary and secondary costs. The original cost elements are combined and allocated to the receiver cost center in an assessment cost element. The following cycles have been defined for the plan assessment: CUSTOMER 282

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Cycle

Segment

Sender

Tracing Factor

Receiver

YP3720

100

37101750

Cost center

Ass. shared facility (plan)

buildings & maintenance cost

BUILD. & MAINTENANCE

Area in square meters Stat.key figure 1002

group 3710 (37101750 and 37101801 set to factor 0%)

Prerequisites Assessment cost elements (cost element type 42) must be defined. Cost Element

Description

94201000

Buildings & Maintenance

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Controlling  Cost Center Accounting  Planning  Allocations  Assessment  Define Assessment

Transaction Code

KSU7

On the Create Plan Assessment Cycle: Initial screen, make the following entries: Field name

3.

Description

User actions and values

Controlling Area

A000

Cycle

YP3720

Start Date

01.01.2015

Comment

On the Create Plan Assessment Cycle: Header Data screen, enter the following data: Field name

Description

User actions and values

Controlling Area

A000

Cycle

YP3720

Start Date From

01.01.2015

Start Date To

31.12.2099

Text

S17 Assess Quality cost (plan)

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

Comment

CUSTOMER 283

Field name

Description

User actions and values

Indicator: Iterative

Not Set

Object Currency

x

Version

2

Comment

4.

Choose the Attach Segment button.

5.

On the Create Plan Assessment Cycle: Segment screen, in the Segment header field, make the following entry:

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

Segment Name

Text

100

buildings & maintenance cost

On the Segment Header tab, make the following entries: Segment

Assessment CEle

Sender rule

Share %

Plan value origin

100

94201000

Posted amounts

100,00

set

Segment

Receiver rule

Var.portion type

scale neg. tracing fact.

100

Variable portions

Plan Stat key figures

No scaling

Choose the Senders/Receivers tab, and make the following entries: Segment Sender Cost Center from

Sender Cost Element from

Receiver Cost Center group

100

10_CE

3710

37101750

Choose the Sender Values tab, and make the following entry: Segment

Share %

Plan value origin

Version From

100

100,00

Set

2

Choose the Receiver Tracing Factor tab, and make the following entry: Segment

Var.portion type

Scale neg. tracing fact.

Stat. key figure from

100

Plan Stat Key Figures

No scaling

1002

Choose the Receiver Weighting Factors tab, and make the following entries: Cost Center

Factor Segment 100

37101101

100

37101201

100

37101202

100

Other segments

CUSTOMER 284

Localization objects - per Business Priority

11.

Cost Center

Factor Segment 100

37101301

100

37101302

100

37101401

100

37101501

100

37101601

100

37101602

100

37101701

100

37101750

0

37101801

0

37101901

100

Other segments

Save your entries.

Result You have defined the plan assessment cycles YP3720.

4.4.2.2

Manual Rework

If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity

Manual transport possible

Manual action in target system / client required

Remarks

KO01 Create Internal Order New

No

Yes

Follow step as per from this guide and create manually in target system

Maintain Overhead Structure - Maintain OH Rates

No

Yes

Follow step as per from this guide and create manually in target system

If manual transport is possible, proceed as follows: How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 285

1.

Logon to the source system / client.

2.

Go to the respective customizing activity as described in the respective section.

3.

To select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request, choose Table View  Transport. If this is not possible, see the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity.

4.

Release the created transport request and import it into the target system / client. Check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information.

If manual action in the target system / client is required, proceed as follows: 1.

Logon to the target system / client.

2.

Go to the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.

4.4.2.2.1 Manual Transport of Controlling Data OKE7 Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code

OKE7

2.

On the Transport Controlling settings screen, select objects per the table above and choose Include in Request.

3.

In the Prompt for Workbench Request dialog box, select the request and choose Continue E n t e r

4.

Settings are included into the transport requests.

4.4.3

Profitability Analysis [local] (J53)

4.4.3.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.4.3.1.1 Create Actual Assessments CCA to CO-PA Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Controlling  Profitability Analysis  Flows of Actual Values  Transfer of Overhead  Assess Cost Center Costs / Process

CUSTOMER 286

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Costs  Define Structure of Cost Center Assessment / Process Cost Assessment Transaction Code 2.

KEU1

On the CO-PA Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Initial screen view, make the following entries: Field Name Value Cycle

Comments

YA3710

Start Date 01.01. For example, if current year is 2016, enter 01.01.2015 3.

Choose Execute.

4.

On the CO-PA Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Header Data view, make the following entries: Field Name

Value

To

31.12.9999

Text

NL-Actual Assessment CO-PA

Sender Select. Type

2

CO-Area

A000 (or your CO Area)

TF basis

2 Account-based Profitability Analysis

5.

Choose Attach segment.

6.

On the CO-PA Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Segment view, make the following entries:

7.

Tab Segment Header:

8.

Field Name

Value

Segment Name

YA3710-1 Marketing

Assessment CElem

94222000

Sender values, Rule

Posted amounts

Sender values, Share in %

100

Receiving tracing factor, Rule

Fixed Percentage

Tab Senders/Receivers (if the product groups are not implemented, do this step later) Field Name

Value

Sender, Cost Center Group

3710160

Receiver, Company code

3710

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 287

9.

Tab Receiver Tracing Factor Field Name

Value

Portion/percent

100

10.

Save your entries.

11.

Repeat the steps above for the following values: Field

Value Segment 2

Value Segment 3

Segment Name

YA3710-2 Admin. Overhead

YA3710-3 Sales

Assessment CElem

94224000

94225000

Sender values, Rule

Posted amounts

Posted amounts

Sender values, Share in %

100

100

Receiving tracing factor, Rule

Fixed percentages

Fixed percentages

Sender, Cost Center Group

3710110

3710170

Receiver

Company Code; for example, 3710

Company Code; for example, 3710

Receiver Tracing Factor, Receivers Portion/Percent

100

100

Field

Value Segment 4

Value Segment 5

Segment Name

YA3710-4 NonOperating Expense

YA3710-5 NonOperating Income

Assessment CElem

94226000

94227000

Sender values, Rule

Posted amounts

Posted amounts

Sender values, Share in %

100

100

Receiving tracing factor, Rule

Fixed percentages

Fixed percentages

Sender, Cost Center Group

3710180

3710180

Sender, Cost Element Group

6200_CE

6100_CE

Receiver, Company Code

3710

3710

Receiver Tracing Factor, Receivers Portion/Percent

100

100

Field

Value Segment Value Segment 7 6

CUSTOMER 288

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Segment Name

YA3710-6 Taxes

YA3710-7 Other Income and Expenses

Assessment CElem

94228000

94229000

Sender values, Rule

Posted amounts

Posted amounts

Sender values, Share in %

100

100

Receiving tracing factor, Rule

Fixed percentages

Fixed percentages

Sender, Cost Center Group

3710180

37101801

Sender, Cost Element

6300_CE

10_CE

Sender, Company code

3710

3710

Receiver Tracing Factor, Receivers 100 Portion/Percent

100

4.4.3.1.2 Activate Profitability Analysis Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Controlling  Profitability Analysis  Flows of Actual Values  Activate Profitability Analysis

Transaction Code

KEKE

On the Change View “CO-PA: Active Flag for Profitability Analysis”: Overview screen, make the following entries: COAr Name

From FY

Op.Concern Active Status

A000 Best Practices A000 3.

3

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 289

4.4.4 Profitability Analysis for Manufacturing/Trading [local] (BEF) 4.4.4.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.4.4.1.1 Create additional assessment segments for Trading/manufacturing in Actual Assessments CCA to CO-PA Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Controlling  Profitability Analysis  Flows of Actual Values  Transfer of Overhead  Assess Cost Center Costs / Process Costs  Define Structure of Cost Center Assessment / Process Cost Assessment

Transaction Code

KEU2

2.

On dialog box choose Activity, choose Change Actual Assessment, and select Choose.

3.

On the CO-PA Change Actual Assessment Cycle: Initial screen view, make the following entries: Field Name Value Cycle

Comments

YA3710

Start Date 01.01. For example, if current year is 2015, enter 01.01.2014 4.

Choose Execute.

5.

On the CO-PA Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Header Data view, choose Attach segment.

6.

On the CO-PA Create Actual Assessment Cycle: Segment view, make the following entries:

7.

Tab Segment Header: Field Name

Value

Segment Name

YA3710-9 Stores

Assessment CElem

94221000

Sender values, Rule

Posted amounts

CUSTOMER 290

Localization objects - per Business Priority

8.

Sender values, Share in %

100

Receiving tracing factor, Rule

Fixed Percentage

Tab Senders/Receivers (if the product groups are not implemented, do this step later) Field Name

Value

Sender, Cost Center Group

3710120

Receiver, Company Code From

3710

Tab Receiver Tracing Factor Field Name

Value

Portion/percent

100

9.

Save your entries.

10.

Repeat the steps for the following values: Field

Value Segment Value Segment 11 10

Segment Name

YA3710-10 R&D

YA3710-11 Quality Management

Assessment CElem

94223000

94224000

Sender values, Rule

Posted amounts

Posted amounts

Sender values, Share in %

100

100

Receiving tracing factor, Rule

Fixed percentages

Fixed percentages

Sender, Cost Center Group

3710150

3710140

Receiver, Company Code From

3710

3710

Receiver Tracing Factor, Receivers Portion/Percent

100

100

Field

Value Segment 12

Segment Name

YA3710-12 Manufacturing OH

Assessment CElem

94221000

Sender values, Rule

Posted amounts

Sender values, Share in %

100

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 291

Receiving tracing factor, Rule

Fixed percentages

Sender, Cost Center Group

3710130

Receiver, Company Code From

3710

Receiver Tracing Factor, Receivers 100 Portion/Percent 11.

Save your entries.

4.4.5

Product Cost Planning [local] (BE5)

4.4.5.1

Configuration – On-Premise

4.4.5.1.1

Costing Sheet

Defining Credits Use Credits are used in the Costing Sheet and contain information about the credited sender and the cost element for the overhead posting.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Controlling  Product Cost Controlling  Product Cost Planning  Basic Settings for Material Costing  Overhead  Costing Sheet: Components  Define Credits

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

To create a credit, choose New Entries.

3.

Enter a three-character key and a name for the new credit as shown in the following table: Data records: Credit

Name

YN1

Credit Material 1-NL

CUSTOMER 292

Localization objects - per Business Priority

YN2

Credit Product. 1-NL

YN3

Credit Admin-NL

YN4

Credit Sales-NL

4.

Save your entries and go to detail for every Credit.

5.

Select the row and choose Detail.

6.

From the Dialog Structure on the left side of the screen, choose Credits  Details.

7.

In the Set Controlling Area dialog box, select the relevant controlling area (for example, A000) and choose Enter.

8.

On the Change View "Details": Overview screen, choose New Entries.

9.

Create details for every Credit according to the following data records: Credit

Co Area

Valid to

Cost Elem.

Fxd %

Cost Center

YN1

A000

12/31/9999

94111000

*

37101201

YN2

A000

12/31/9999

94112000

*

37101301

YN3

A000

12/31/9999

94113000

*

37101101

A

12/31/9999

YN4 10.

000

* 94114000

37101101

Save your entries.

Definition of Costing Sheets – Costing Sheets and Rows Use The Costing Sheet calculates Overhead surcharges to standard cost estimates and production orders. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Controlling  Product Cost Controlling  Product Cost Planning  Basic Settings for Material Costing  Overhead  Define Costing Sheet

Transaction Code

SPRO

Choose New Entries and create the following Costing Sheets: Costing Sheet

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

Description

CUSTOMER 293

3710PC

Costing Sheet Production-NL

3710PP

Costing Sheet Planning-NL

3.

Select the corresponding Costing Sheet and double click Costing sheet rows.

4.

Enter your costing sheet as shown in the table:

5.

Costing Sheet

Row Base

3710PC

100

3710PC

109

3710PC

200

3710PC

209

3710PC

300

3710PP

100

3710PP

109

3710PP

200

3710PP

209

Overhead rate

Y001

Description

From To

(enter manually)

Credit

Row

Material Y371

Y002

Material overhead

YN1 100

Production Y372

Production overhead

YN2 200

Production overhead

Y001

Material Y371

Y002

Material overhead

100

YN1

Production Y372

Production overhead

YN2 200

3710PP

300

Costs of goods manufactured

3710PP

305

Y373

Administration ovh

300

YN3

3710PP

306

Y374

Sales overhead

300

YN4

Save your entries.

Defining Percentage Overhead Use An overhead rate specifies the conditions under which overhead is applied to an object.

CUSTOMER 294

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Controlling  Product Cost Controlling  Product Cost Planning  Basic Settings for Material Costing  Overhead  Costing Sheet: Components  Define Percentage Overhead Rates

Transaction Code

KZZ2

2.

The following OH rates are already created in BB J50, in this step we maintain percentage for each plant.

3.

Overview of the new O/H rates: O/H rate

Name

Dependency

Description

Y371

Material overhead

D020

Overhead Type/Plant

Y372

Production overhead

D020

Overhead Type/Plant

Y373

Administration ovh

D020

Overhead Type/Plant

Y374

Sales overhead

D020

Overhead Type/Plant

4.

From the Dialog Structure on the left side of the screen, choose Overhead rate  Details.

5.

On the Change View "Details": Overview screen, choose New Entries and specify the individual overhead rates for every overhead rate.

6.

Each record consists of a validity period, a percentage rate and several condition fields that are taken from the condition tables.

7.

Create details for every Overhead Rate according to the following data records: O/H rate

Valid from

Valid to

Y371

01/01/2015 12/31/2015

Y371

CO Area

Ovrhd Plant Percentage type

A000

1

3710 50.00

A000

2

3710 50.00

01/01/2015 12/31/2015 Y371

01/01/2016 12/31/2016

A000

1

3710 50.00

Y371

01/01/2016 12/31/2016

A000

2

3710 50.00

Y371

01/01/2017 12/31/2017

A000

1

3710 70.00

Y371

01/01/2017 12/31/2017

A000

2

3710 70.00

Y371

01/01/2018 12/31/2018

A000

1

3710 70.00

Y371

01/01/2018 12/31/2018

A000

2

3710 70.00

Y371

01/01/2019 12/31/2019

A000

1

3710 70.00

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 295

O/H rate

Valid from

Y371

CO Area

Ovrhd Plant Percentage type

01/01/2019 12/31/2019

A000

2

3710 70.00

Y372

01/01/2015 12/31/2015

A000

1

3710 100.00

Y372

01/01/2015 12/31/2015

A000

2

3710 100.00

Y372

01/01/2016 12/31/2016

A000

1

3710 100.00

Y372

01/01/2016 12/31/2016

A000

2

3710 100.00

Y372

01/01/2017 12/31/2017

A000

1

3710 100.00

Y372

01/01/2017 12/31/2017

A000

2

3710 100.00

Y372

01/01/2018 12/31/2018

A000

1

3710 100.00

Y372

01/01/2018 12/31/2018

A000

2

3710 100.00

Y373

01/01/2015 12/31/2015

A000

1

3710 50.00

Y373

01/01/2015 12/31/2015

A000

2

3710 50.00

Y373

01/01/2016 12/31/2016

A000

1

3710 50.00

Y373

01/01/2016 12/31/2016

A000

2

3710 50.00

Y373

01/01/2017 12/31/2017

A000

1

3710 50.00

Y373

01/01/2017 12/31/2017

A000

2

3710 50.00

Y373

01/01/2018 12/31/2018

A000

1

3710 50.00

Y373

01/01/2018 12/31/2018

A000

2

3710 50.00

Y374

01/01/2015 12/31/2015

A000

1

3710 65.00

Y374

01/01/2015 12/31/2015

A000

2

3710 65.00

Y374

01/01/2016 12/31/2016

A000

1

3710 65.00

Y374

01/01/2016 12/31/2016

A000

2

3710 65.00

Y374

01/01/2017 12/31/2017

A000

1

3710 65.00

Y374

01/01/2017 12/31/2017

A000

2

3710 65.00

Y374

01/01/2018 12/31/2018

A000

1

3710 65.00

Y374

01/01/2018 12/31/2018

A000

2

3710 65.00

8.

Choose Enter.

9.

Save your entries.

Valid to

CUSTOMER 296

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Define Accounts for Splitting the Cost of Goods Sold Use In this activity, you can refine the settings for COGS postings to split the COGS amount and post it to different accounts according to the cost component elements that are used in the underlying costing sheet. This step assign each company code COGS Scheme.

Procedure 1.

Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Financial Accounting (New)  General Ledger Accounting (New)  Periodic Processing  Integration  Materials Management  Define Accounts for Splitting the Cost of Goods Sold

Transaction Code

SM34 (Customizing Object FCOC_COGS_SCHEME)

2.

On the Change View "Splitting Scheme": Overview screen, select schema 0YA000 and double click Company Code Assignment.

3.

Make the following entries:

4.

CoCd

Valid From

Scheme

3710

01.01.2014

0YA000

Save your entries.

Define Valuation Variants Use The Valuation Variant controls various parameters regarding the valuation of input items for the object for which costs are being determined.

Procedure 1.

Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Controlling  Product Cost Controlling  Product Cost Planning  Material Cost Estimate with Quantity Structure  Costing Variant: Components  Define Valuation Variants

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 297

Transaction Code

OKK4 SM30 (Customizing Object V_CK05)

2.

On the Change View "Valuation Variants" screen, double click variant 0Y1

3.

On the Change View "Valuation Variants": Details screen, select Create.

4.

On Change View“ Valuation Variants (Organizational-Unit-Dependent) screen, click New Entries F 5

5.

Make the following entries and keep other settings unchanged: Field

User Action or Values

Valuation variant

0Y1

Plant

3710

Overhead tab-Costing Sheet

3710PC

Comments

6.

Save your entries C t r l + S .

7.

Repeat the above steps for Valuation Variants 0Y2 and Overhead tab-Costing Sheet 3710PP for plant 3710.

Costing Variants-Activate Controlling area split Use In this transaction, you activate cost component split in controlling area currency. Procedure 1.

Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Controlling  Product Cost Controlling  Product Cost Planning  Material Cost Estimate with Quantity Structure  Define Costing Variants

Transaction Code

OKKN

2.

On the Change View "Costing Variants", screen, double click variant PPC1.

3.

On the Change View "Costing Variants", screen, choose the Assignments tab.

4.

Choose Cost Comp Split in Contr Area Currency.

5.

Make the following entries: Field

User Action or Values

Company Code

3710

Additional CCS

X

Comments

CUSTOMER 298

Localization objects - per Business Priority

6.

Save your entries.

4.4.5.2

Manual Rework

If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity

Manual transport possible

Manual action in target system / client required

Remarks

KZZ2 Defining Percentage Overhead

No

Yes

Follow step as per from this guide and create manually in target system

If manual transport is possible, proceed as follows: 1.

Logon to the source system / client.

2.

Go to the respective customizing activity as described in the respective section.

3.

To select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request, choose Table View  Transport. If this is not possible, see the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity.

4.

Release the created transport request and import it into the target system / client. Check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information.

If manual action in the target system / client is required, proceed as follows: 1.

Logon to the target system / client.

2.

Go to the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 299

4.4.6

Cost Object Controlling – by Order [local] (BE7)

4.4.6.1

Configuration – On Premise

4.4.6.1.1 Define Goods Received Valuation for Order Delivery Define Goods Received Valuation for Order Delivery Use This activity determines the valuation of material transferred from a production order to stock. Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Controlling  Product Cost Controlling  Cost Object Controlling  Product Cost by Order  Define Goods Received Valuation for Order Delivery

Transaction Code

SPRO

Make the following entries: Valuation Area

3710

Valuation Variant

0Y1

Save your entries.

Define Cost-Accounting-Relevant Default Values for Order Types and Plant Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Controlling  Product Cost Controlling  Cost Object Controlling  Product Cost by Order  Manufacturing Orders  Define Cost-Accounting-Relevant Default Values for Order Types and Plants

CUSTOMER 300

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

On the Change View “Default Values for Order Cost Estimate”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

Confirm the information message.

4.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field

Description

Plant

3710

Order Type

CPOM

Default Rule

PP1

RA Key 5.

User action and Values

Results Analysis Key

Comment

MBMF01

Save your entries.

Define Posting Rules for Settling Work in Process Use For each RA Category, a P/L and a balance sheet account is defined, where the calculated WIP is posted to when the WIP is transferred to Financial Accounting. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Controlling  Product Cost Controlling  Cost Object Controlling  Product Cost by Order  Period-End Closing  Work in Process  Define Posting Rules for Settling WIP

Transaction Code

OKG8

2.

Choose New entries.

3.

Make the following entries: CO Area

Compan y Code

RA versio n

RA categor y

Rec numbe r

P/L Acct

BalSheetAcc t

A00 0

3710

0

WIPR

0

5420000 0

13200000

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

Acct Prin c

CUSTOMER 301

A00 0 4.

3710

0

RUCR

0

5404000 0

24098600

Save your entries.

Define Default Variance Keys for Plants Use The Variance Key is part of the order header and controls variance calculation. The system selects the value set by this step as default value when a material master is created. From the material master, the variance key is then transferred to the order when an order for the material is created.

Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Controlling  Product Cost Controlling  Cost Object Controlling  Product Cost by Order  Period End Closing  Variance Calculation -> Define Default Variance Keys for Plants

Transaction Code

OKVW

Make the following entries: Plant

Variance Key

3710

000001

Save your entries.

Valuation Variants for Product Costing Use The Valuation Variant controls various parameters regarding the valuation of input items for the object for which costs are being determined.

Procedure 1.

Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: CUSTOMER

302

Localization objects - per Business Priority

IMG Menu

Controlling  Product Cost Controlling  Product Cost Planning  Material Cost Estimate with Quantity Structure  Costing Variant: Components  Define Valuation Variants

Transaction Code

OKK4 SM30 (Customizing Object V_CK05)

2.

On the Change View "Valuation Variants" screen, double click variant 0Y1.

3.

On the Change View "Valuation Variants": Details screen, choose Create.

4.

On the Change View “Valuation Variants (Organizational-Unit-Dependent)" screen, choose New Entries F 5

5.

Make the following entries (keep other settings unchanged):

6.

Field

User Action or Values

Valuation variant

0Y1

Plant

3710

Overhead tab-Costing Sheet

3710PC

Comments

Save your entries.

4.4.7

Cost Object Controlling – by Period [local] (BE9)

4.4.7.1

Configuration – On-Premise

4.4.7.1.1 Define Goods Received Valuation for Order Delivery Define Goods Received Valuation for Order Delivery Use This activity determines the valuation of material transferred from a production order to stock. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Controlling  Product Cost Controlling  Cost Object Controlling  Product Cost by Order  Define Goods Received Valuation for Order Delivery

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 303

Transaction Code 2.

3.

SPRO

Make the following entries: Valuation Area

3710

Valuation Variant

0Y1

Save your entries.

Defining Cost-Accounting-Relevant Default Values for Order Types and Plants Use This activity configures various settings that are transferred to the order when an order of the respective plant/type is created. Prerequisites Costing Variants, RA Keys Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Transaction Code 2.

Controlling  Product Cost Controlling  Cost Object Controlling  Product Cost by Period  Product Cost Collectors  Define Cost-Accounting-Relevant Default Values for Order Types and Plants SPRO

Make the following entries: Plant Order Type

Default Rule

Prel./Vers. Cstg

Simul. Costing

RA key

3710 YBMR

STR

PSRM

PYRM

MBMF03

CUSTOMER 304

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Valuation Variants for Product Costing Use The Valuation Variant controls various parameters regarding the valuation of input items for the object for which costs are being determined.

Procedure 1.

Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Controlling  Product Cost Controlling  Product Cost Planning  Material Cost Estimate with Quantity Structure  Costing Variant: Components  Define Valuation Variants

Transaction Code

OKK4 or SM30 (Customizing Object V_CK05)

2.

On the Change View "Valuation Variants", screen, double click variant 0Y1.

3.

On the Change View "Valuation Variants": Details screen, choose Create.

4.

On the Change View “Valuation Variants (Organizational-Unit-Dependent)" screen, choose New Entries F 5

5.

Make the following entries: Field

User Action or Values

Valuation variant

0Y1

Plant

3710

Overhead tab-Costing Sheet

3710PC

Comments

6.

Repeat the above steps for Valuation variant 0Y7 and Costing sheet 3710PC

7.

Save your entries.

4.5 Localization objects for Material Managements 4.5.1 Output Management - MM [local] (J21) 4.5.1.1 Configuration of Output Management MM – Local Data (for On-premise)

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 305

4.5.1.1.1 Output Condition Record: Invoice Verification The purpose of this activity is to create an output condition record for invoice verification.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using the following navigation option: SAP ECC Menu Invoice

Materials Management Logistics Invoice Verification  Message Determination  Maintain Conditions  Create Condition: Invoice Verification

Transaction Code

MRM1

2.

On the Create Output-Condition records: Invoice Verification screen, enter output type EINK and choose Enter.

3.

Choose Key combination and select CoCode, Blocking Reason: Price in the Key Combination dialog box. Choose Enter.

4.

On the Create Condition records (Mail to Purchasing): Fast Entry screen, enter the following values and choose Enter: Field Name

Description

Company Code

User Action and Values

Comment

3710

BlockR Pr.

Blocking reason: price

select

Funct

Partner function

ME

Medium

Message transmission medium

7

Date/time

Dispatch time

4

Language

It is possible to insert the designated language key in which you: Display texts Enter texts Print documents. Example: for English EN

5.

Save your entries. CUSTOMER

306

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Result The condition records are created. For the following output types, the output messages are generated automatically: EINK.

4.5.1.2

Manual Rework

If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity

Manual transport possible

Manual action in target system / client required

3.1.1 Output Condition Records: Invoice Verification

No

Yes

Remarks

In case a manual transport is possible please proceed as follows: 1.

Logon to the source system / client.

2.

Go to the respective customizing activity as described in the respective section.

3.

Select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request. Most likely this can be done by choosing Table View -> Transport. If this is not possible please refer to the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity.

4.

The newly created transport request needs to be released and imported in the target system / client.

Remark: Please also check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information. In case manual action in the target system / client is required please proceed as follows: 1.

Logon to the target system / client.

2.

Go to the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 307

4.5.2

Materials Management - Settings [local] (J05)

4.5.2.1

Logistics General

4.5.2.1.1 Maintaining Company Codes for Materials Management 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Logistics General  Material Master  Basic Settings  Maintain Company Codes for Materials Management

Transaction Code

OMSY

On the Change View “Materials Management View on Company Codes”: Overview screen, make the following entries: Field Name

Entry Value

Company Code

3710

Year



Period

12 (Last period of previous year)

ABp - Allow Posting to Previous Period (Backposting)

X

Save your entries.

4.5.2.1.2 Define Attributes of Material Types Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Logistics – General  Material Master  Basic Settings  Material Types  Define Attributes of Material Types

Transaction Code

OMS2

2.

On the Change View “Material Types”: Overview screen, select Material Type MAT.

3.

Enter the Acct cat. Reference with 0005 for material type MAT.

4.

Double click Quantity/value updating, and make the following entries for the settings of your plant 3710: CUSTOMER

308

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Plant

Qty Updating

Value Update

3710

Select

Select

5.

Save your entries.

6.

Choose Back.

7.

On the Change View “Material Types”: Overview screen, Select Material Type SERV.

8.

Enter the Acct cat. Reference with 0006 and choose Initial Status for material type SERV.

9.

Save your entries

4.5.2.2

Configuration of Materials Management

4.5.2.2.1 MRP Settings Create MRP Controller 1.

Access the activity using the following navigation path: IMG Menu

Production  Material Requirements Planning  Master Data  Define MRP Controllers

Transaction Code

OMD0

2.

On the Change View “MRP Controllers”: Overview screen, choose New Entries F 5 .

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field Name

Entry Value

Plant

3710

MRP Controller

001

Description

MRP Controller 001

4.

Save your entries.

5.

Choose Back.

Activate MRP and Set Up Planning File 1.

Access the activity using the following navigation path: IMG Menu

Production  Material Requirements Planning  Planning File Entries  Activate MRP and Set Up Planning File

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 309

Transaction Code

OMDU

1.

On the Activation screen, choose Material Requirements planning.

2.

On the Change View “Activate Requirements Planning”: Overview screen, enter the following data: Plnt

Plant name

Activate requirements planning

3710

Leave unchanged

X

3.

Save your entries.

4.

Choose Back.

4.5.2.2.2 Purchasing Set Tolerance Limits for Price Variance 1.

Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

SAP Customizing Implementation Guide  Materials Management  Purchasing  Purchase Order  Set Tolerance Limits for Price Variance

Transaction Code

S_ALR_87002196

2.

On the Change View “Tolerance Limits”: Overview screen, choose the New Entries button.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Tolerance Key

PE

Company Code

3710

Amounts in

EUR

Lower Limit Absolute/ Do not check

Selected

Absolute/ Check limit

Not selected

Percentage/ Do not check

Not selected

Percentage/ Check limit

selected

Tolerance limit %

20,00

Upper Limit Absolute/ Do not check

Selected

CUSTOMER 310

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Entry Value

Absolute/ Check limit

Not selected

Percentage/ Do not check

Not selected

Percentage/ Check limit

selected

Tolerance limit %

10,00

4.

Save your settings.

5.

Repeat the above steps for maintenance of the following tolerance key: Field Name

Entry Value

Tolerance Key

SE

Company Code

3710

Amounts in

EUR

Lower Limit Do not check

Selected

Upper Limit Do not check

Not selected

Check limit

Selected

Tolerance limit %

10,00

Taxes in Procurement Setting Tax Indicator for Material Use In this step, you maintain the tax indicators that you wish to assign to materials. You do this for each country of destination. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP IMG Menu

Materials Management  Purchasing  Taxes  Set Tax Indicator for Material

Transaction Code

S_ALR_87002112

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 311

2.

On the Change View “Determination of Tax Code: Maintain Material Indicator: Overview” screen, choose New entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries. Dst. Country

Material

Description

NL

0

Material 0%

NL

1

Material 100%

NL

2

Material 50% exempt

NL

7

Service 100%

4.

Save your settings.

5.

Choose Back F 3 .

Result The tax indicators are created.

Setting Tax Indicator for Plant Use In this step, you maintain the tax indicators that you wish to assign to materials. You do this for each country of destination.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP IMG Menu

Materials Management  Purchasing  Taxes  Set Tax Indicator for Plant

Transaction Code

S_ALR_87002111

2.

On the Change View “Determination of Tax Indicator: Maintain Plant Indicator: Overview” screen, choose New entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries.

4.

Dst. Country

Plant Tax ID

Description

NL

0

Exempt

NL

1

Taxable

Save your settings. CUSTOMER

312

Localization objects - per Business Priority

5.

Choose Back F 3 .

Result The tax indicators are created.

Setting Tax Indicator for Account Assignment Use In this step, you maintain the tax indicators that you wish to assign to materials. You do this for each country of destination. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP IMG Menu

Materials Management  Purchasing  Taxes  Set Tax Indicator for Account Assignment

Transaction Code

S_ALR_87002110

2.

On the Change View “Determine Tax Code: Maintain Account Assignment Indicator: Overview” screen, choose New entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Dst. Country

Account Assignment ID

Description

NL

0

Exempt

NL

1

Taxable

4.

Save your settings.

5.

Choose Back F 3 .

Result The tax indicators are created.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 313

Assigning Tax Indicators for Plant Use In this step, you maintain the tax indicators that you wish to assign to materials. You do these for each country of destination.

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management  Purchasing  Taxes  Assign Tax Indicators for Plants

Transaction Code

S_ALR_87002103

On the Change View “Assignment of Tax Indicator to Plant”: Overview screen, make the following entries: Plant

Plant Tax ID

Description

Plant_1 (3710)

1

Taxable

3.

Save your settings.

4.

Choose Back F 3

Result The tax indicators are created.

Assigning Tax Indicators for Account Assignments Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management  Purchasing  Taxes  Assign Tax Indicators for Account Assignments

Transaction Code

S_ALR_87002096

2.

On the Change View “Assignment of Tax Indicator to Account Assignment Category”: Overview” screen, choose New Entries.

3.

Make the following entries: CUSTOMER

314

Localization objects - per Business Priority

A

DstC

AcAsg

NL

0

4.

Save your settings.

5.

Choose Back F 3 .

4.5.2.2.3 ERP-Pricing Define Condition Types Use The purpose of this activity is to define condition types.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management  Purchasing  Conditions  Define Price Determination Process  Define Condition Type

Transaction Code

S_ALR_87002211

2.

In the Choose Activity dialog box, select Define Condition Types.

3.

On the Change View “Conditions: Condition Types” Overview screen, select New Entries and make the following entries: Cond.Typ e TTX1

4.

Condition class Non-Deductible Tax

Calculation type

Cond.categor y Tax

Taxes

Fixed amount

Save your entries.

Result You have created a new condition type for Pricing.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 315

Define Calculation Schema Use The condition maintenance group bundles condition tables and types for condition maintenance. This defines a special view for condition maintenance.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management  Purchasing  Conditions  Define Price Determination Process  Define Pricing Procedure

Transaction Code

S_ALR_87002220

2.

On the Change View “Schemas” Overview screen, select New Entries and create the procedure A37001.

3.

Double click Control data.

4.

Make the following entries:

5.

Procedure

Step

Cond. Type

A37001

20

PPR0

A37001

60

PMP0

A37001

100

A37001

200

DRG1

A37001

210

DRN1

A37001

220

DRQ1

A37001

230

DRV1

A37001

240

DRW1

A37001

300

Sum Surcharges/Discounts

A37001

700

Net Amount

A37001

850

A37001

900

A37001

910

Description (enter only the missing ones)

Gross Amount

TTX1 Total Amount DCD1

Save your entries.

CUSTOMER 316

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Result You have created the new calculation schema.

Define Schema Group for Purchasing Organizations Use In this step, you define schema groups for your purchasing organization. These allow you to group together purchasing organizations that use the same calculation schema. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management  Purchasing  Conditions  Define Price Determination Process  Define Scheme Groups

Transaction Code

S_ALR_87002219

2.

On the Choose Activity information screen, choose Schema Groups for Purchasing Organizations.

3.

On the Change View “Schema Groups for Purchasing Organizations”: Overview screen, maintain the following entries: Schema Grp Purch. Org

Description

3710

Pur. Org. 3710 (The Netherlands)

4.

Save your entries.

Result The Standard schema for purchase organizations has been defined.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 317

Define Schema Group - Assignment of Schema Group to Purchasing Organization Use In this step, you assign purchasing transactions and processes to a calculation schema; that is, you specify the cases in which a certain schema is used for standard purchase orders (depending on the schema group of the vendor and the purchasing organization).

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management  Purchasing  Conditions  Define Price Determination Process  Define Scheme Group

Transaction Code

S_ALR_87002219

2.

In the Choose Activity information screen, choose Assignment of Schema Group to Purchasing Organization.

3.

On the Change View: “Assignment of Schema Group to Purchasing Organization” Overview screen, maintain the following entries:

4.

Purch. Org

Schema group Purch. Org

Comment

3710

3710

[3710/3710]

Save your entries.

Result The assignment of the Group for Calculation Schema (Purchasing Organization) to the Purchasing Organization has been defined.

Define Schema Determination Use In this step, you assign purchasing transactions and processes to a calculation schema; that is, you specify the cases in which a certain schema is used for standard purchase orders (depending on the schema group of the vendor and the purchasing organization).

CUSTOMER 318

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management  Purchasing  Conditions  Define Price Determination Process  Define Schema Determination

Transaction Code

S_ALR_87002218

2.

In the Choose Activity information screen, choose Determine Calculation Schema for Standard Purchase Orders.

3.

On the Change View: “Assignment of Schema Group to Purchasing Organization” Overview screen, maintain the following entries: Schema GrpPOrg

Sch.Grp Vndr

Proc.

Description

3710

01

A37001

Services/Materials (NL)

3710

(leave blank)

A37001

Services/Materials (NL)

Result The assignment of the Group for Calculation Schema (Purchasing Organization) to the Purchasing Organization has been defined.

4.5.2.2.4 Tax Condition Records Creating Tax Conditions Records Use The purpose of this activity is to create condition records for automatic determination of the tax code in a purchase document. Prerequisites The access sequence 0003 for the condition TTX1 is maintained. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 319

SAP ECC Menu

Logistics  Materials Management  Purchasing  Master Data  Taxes  Create

Transaction Code

MEK1

2.

Enter the condition type TTX1

Non-Deductible Tax and

choose Enter.

3.

Choose the key combination Taxes: Material, Plant and Origin and choose Enter.

4.

Create an entry for each possible combination of Tax indicator for material, Tax Indicator: Plant and Tax indicator: Import and assign in column Tax the tax code, which should be determined for the appropriated combination. Entries for Netherlands (Country key NL): Taxind. Mat.

Taxind. Plant

Import

Tax Key

0

0

0 no import

A8

0

0

1 import

A8

0

0

2 within EC

A8

0

1

0

A8

0

1

1

A8

0

1

2

A8

1

0

0

A8

1

0

1

A8

1

0

2

A8

1

1

0

AA

1

1

1

A8

1

1

2

E1

2

0

0

A8

2

0

1

A8

2

0

2

A8

2

1

0

A9

2

1

1

A8

2

1

2

E2

7

0

0

AC

7

0

1

AC

7

0

2

AC

7

1

0

AE

CUSTOMER 320

Localization objects - per Business Priority

7

1

1

AC

7

1

2

E1

Result The tax condition records have been created.

4.5.2.2.5 Valuation and Account Assignment Configure Price Change in Previous Period 1.

Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

SAP Customizing Implementation Guide  Materials Management  Valuation and Account Assignment Configure Price Change in Previous Period

Transaction Code

S_ALR_87002353

2.

On the Change View “Price Change in Previous Period, not in Current Period" screen, select Price carr.over (Price change: carried over from previous to current period) for each company code.

3.

Save your settings.

Group Together Valuation Areas Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management  Valuation and Account Assignment  Account Determination  Account Determination Without Wizard  Group Together Valuation Areas

Transaction Code

OMWD

2.

On the Change View “Acct Determination for Val. Areas”: Overview screen, enter Val.Grpg Code (Valuation Grouping Code) 0001 for valuation area 3710.

3.

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 321

4.5.2.2.6 Logistics Invoice Verification Access the customizing activities as outlined in the BC Set output documentation below and adjust the settings according to the respective table values listed.

Maintaining Default Values for Tax Codes Use In this step, you define for each company code which tax codes the SAP System suggests when you enter incoming invoices. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management  Logistics Invoice Verification  Incoming Invoice  Maintain Default Values for Tax Codes

Transaction Code

OMR2

2.

On the Change View “Tax Defaults in Invoice Verification”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

Enter the following data.

4.

CoCd

Defaults, domestic Tax Code

Default value unplanned delivery costs

3710 Company Code 3710

AA

AA

Save your entries.

Configure How Exchange Rate Differences are Treated Procedure 1.

Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

SAP Customizing Implementation Guide  Materials Management  Logistics Invoice Verification  Incoming Invoice  Configure How Exchange Rate Differences are Treated

CUSTOMER 322

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Transaction Code 2.

3.

S_ALR_87002276

On the Change View "Treatment of Exch. Rate Differences": Overview screen, make the following settings: Field Name

User action and values

CoCd (Company code)

3710

ERD setting

No entry

RType

No entry

CurrType (Local Currency Type)

10

CCCurr

No entry

CurrType (Currency type 1 in ML currency)

30

MLCur1

No entry

CurrType (Currency type 2 in ML currency)

No entry

MLCur2

No entry

Save your settings.

Set Tolerance Limit Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management  Logistics Invoice Verification  Invoice Block  Set Tolerance Limits

Transaction Code

S_ALR_87002392

2.

On the Change View “Tolerance Limits”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the following values for company code 3710. Field Name

User action and values

Tolerance key

AN

Company Code

3710

Do not check

X

4.

Save your settings.

5.

Repeat the above steps for all combinations of company codes and tolerance keys displayed by the following shortcuts:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 323

Company Code 3710 Field Name

User action and values

Tolerance key

AP

Company Code

3710

Absolute value: Do not check

X

Field Name

User action and values

Tolerance key

BD

Company Code

3710

Absolute value: Do not check Absolute value: Check limit

X

Value

2,56

Field Name

User action and values

Tolerance key

BR

Company Code

3710

Lower Limit Percentage Check Limit

X

Tolerance Limit %

25

Upper Limit Percentage Check Limit

X

Value

25

Field Name

User action and values

Tolerance key

BW

Company Code

3710

Percentage: Do not check (Lower limit) Percentage: Check limit (Lower limit)

X

Tolerance limit % (Lower limit)

5,00

Percentage: Do not check (Upper limit) Percentage: Check limit (Upper limit)

X

Tolerance limit % (Upper limit)

2,00

CUSTOMER 324

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

User action and values

Tolerance key

DQ

Company Code

3710

Lower Limit: Absolute- do not check

X

Value Lower limit: Percentage- Do not Check

X

Tolerance limit % Upper Limit: Absolute- Do not check

X

Value Upper Limit: Percentage- Do not Check

X

Tolerance limit %

Field Name

User action and values

Tolerance key

DW

Company Code

3710

Upper limit: Absolute Do not check

X

Check limit Value

Field Name

User action and values

Tolerance key

KW

Company Code

3710

Lower limit: Check limit

X

Value

10,23

Lower limit: Percentage- Check limit

X

Tolerance limit %

20,00

Upper Limit: Absolute-Check Limit

X

Value

5,11

Upper Limit: Percentage Check Limit

X

Tolerance Limit %

5,00

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 325

Field Name

User action and values

Tolerance key

PP

Company Code

3710

Lower limit: Absolute check limit

X

Value

10,23

Lower limit: Percentage- Check

X

Tolerance limit %

20,00

Upper Limit: Absolute- Check Limit

X

Value

5,11

Upper Limit: Percentage-Check Limit

X

Tolerance Limit %

5,00

Field Name

User action and values

Tolerance key

PS

Company Code

3710

Lower limit: Absolute check limit

X

Value

10,23

Lower limit: Percentage- check limit

X

Tolerance limit %

10,00

Upper Limit: Absolute- check Limit

X

Value

10,23

Upper Limit: Percentage-Check Limit

X

Tolerance Limit %

10,00

Field Name

User action and values

Tolerance key

ST

Company Code

3710

Upper Limit: Absolute- check limit

X

Value

51,13

Field Name

User action and values

Tolerance key

VP

CUSTOMER 326

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

User action and values

Company Code

3710

Lower limit: Percentage- Do not Check

X

Tolerance limit % Upper Limit: Percentage- Check limit

X

Tolerance Limit %

25,00

6.

Choose Back F 3 .

7.

Save your settings.

Editing PO Supplement Text in Invoice Verification Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management  Logistics Invoice Verification  Incoming Invoice  Edit PO Supplement Text in Invoice Verification

Transaction Code

S_ALR_87002443

2.

On the PO Text Types screen, choose Order text general.

3.

On the Change View “PO Supplement”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

4.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:

5.

Company Code

PO Text

3710

X

Save your settings.

PO Supplement Text: Parameters, Invoice Verification Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management  Logistics Invoice Verification  Incoming Invoice  Edit PO Supplement Text in Invoice Verification

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 327

Transaction Code

S_ALR_87002443

2.

On the PO Text Types screen, select Notifiable Purchase Order Text Type.

3.

On the Change View “PO Supplement”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

4.

On the PO Text Types screen, choose Notifiable order text types.

5.

Choose New Entries, and make the following entries:

6.

Company Code

ID

3710

F03

3710

F05

3710

F06

3710

F07

3710

F11

Save your entries.

Configuring Vendor-Specific Tolerances Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management ( Logistics Invoice Verification ( Incoming Invoice ( Configure Supplier-specific Tolerances

Transaction Code

S_ALR_87002456

2.

On the Change View “Vendor-Specific Tolerances”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries for company code 3710: Field Name

User action and values

Company Code

3710

Tolerance Group

0001

Absolute lower limit: Check limit

X

Negative Lower limit Acceptance

-200,00

Percentage lower limit:

X

Check limit CUSTOMER 328

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.

Field Name

User action and values

Percentage Lower Acceptance limit

4,00%

Negative small difference: Check limit

X

Small difference

-10,00

Positive small difference: Check limit

X

Small difference

5,00

Absolute upper limit: Check limit

X

Positive Acceptance Upper limit

50,00

Percentage upper limit: check limit

X

Percentage upper acceptance limit

2,00%

Automatic invoice reduction. Absolute Upper limit: Check limit

X

Invoice reduction tolerance amount

40,00

Percentage upper limit: Check limit

X

Percentage Invoice reduction Tolerance

5,00%

Save your settings.

Setting Check for Duplicate Invoices Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management  Logistics Invoice Verification  Incoming Invoice  Set Check for Duplicate Invoices

Transaction Code

S_ALR_87099726

On the Change View “Duplicate Invoice Check”: Overview screen, choose New entries, and maintain the following values: Company Code

Check Co. Code

Check reference

Check Inv. Date

3710

X

X

X

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 329

4.5.3

Materials Management - Settings [local] (BR5)

4.5.3.1

Configuration for OP and CE

4.5.3.1.1 Settings for Logistics General Define Attributes for Material Types Use In this activity you define attributes for material types. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Logistics – General  Material Master  Basic Settings  Material Types  Define Attributes of Material Types

Transaction Code

S_ALR_87002312

2.

On the Change View “Material Types”: Overview screen, select Material Type FERT.

3.

Double click Quantity/value updating, and make the following entries for the settings of your Plant 3710: Plant

Qty Updating

Value Update

3710

Select

Select

4.

Save your entries.

5.

Repeat the above steps for the following material types. Material Type

Plant

Qty Updating

Value Update

HALB

3710

Select

Select

HAWA

3710

Select

Select

LEIH

3710

Select

Select

ROH

3710

Select

Select

Result The attributes of material types have been defined. CUSTOMER 330

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Define Special Procurement Types Use In this step, you define the special procurement keys which, in addition to the procurement type, control the procurement and storage of a material. The special procurement type always refers to a procurement type.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management  Consumption-Based Planning  Master Data  Define Special Procurement Type

Transaction Code

S_ALR_87000674

2.

On the Change View “Special Procurement”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following entries: Field Name

4.

Description

User action and values

Plant

3710

Sp.Pr. Type

30

Description

Subcontracting

Procurement Type

F

Special procurement

L

Save your entries.

Result The special procurement type 30 for subcontracting has been defined.

Activate Item Amount Check Use In this step, you determine whether the system blocks invoice items when their value exceeds a certain amount.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 331

Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management Logistics Invoice Verification  Invoice Block  Item Amount Check  Activate Item Amount Check

Transaction Code

S_ALR_87002407

On the Change View: “"Activate Block Due to Item Amount”": Overview screen make the following entries: CoCd

Check item amount

3710

X

Save your entries C t r l

Comment

+ S.

Result The activation item amount check has been defined.

Set Item Amount Check Use In this step, you determine whether the system blocks invoice items when their value exceeds a certain amount. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management Logistics Invoice Verification  Invoice Block  Item Amount Check  Set Item Amount Check

Transaction Code

S_ALR_87002420

On the Change View: "Invoice Verification: Amount Check": Overview screen make the following entries: CoCd

I

3710 3.

Save your entries C t r l

Text for Item Cat.

Goods receipt

Comment

X + S.

CUSTOMER 332

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Result Invoice verification amount check has been defined.

4.5.3.2

Manual Rework

If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity

Manual transport possible

Manual action in target system / client required

Define Attributes for Material Types

No

Yes

Define Special Procurement Types

No

Yes

Activate Item Amount Check

No

Yes

Set Item Amount Check

No

Yes

Remarks

In case a manual transport is possible please proceed as follows: 1.

Logon to the source system / client.

2.

Go to the respective customizing activity as described in the respective section.

3.

Select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request. Most likely this can be done by choosing Table View -> Transport. If this is not possible please refer to the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity.

4.

The newly created transport request needs to be released and imported in the target system / client.

Remark: Please also check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information. In case manual action in the target system / client is required please proceed as follows: 1.

Logon to the target system / client.

2.

Go to the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 333

4.5.4

Batch Management (BLH)

4.5.4.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.5.4.1.1 Batch Management General Internal Batch Number Assignment for Assigned Goods Receipt Use The purpose of this activity is to set the internal number allocation of batches at goods receipt to automatic. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Logistics - General  Batch Management  Batch Number Assignment  Activate Internal Batch Number Assignment

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

Choose the activity Internal Batch Number Assignment for Assigned Goods Receipt.

3.

On the Change View “Internal Batch Number Assignment for Assigned Goods Receipt” screen, enter the following information:

4.

Plant

Bch no. automatic f. GR w. acctAssg

Plant_1 (3710)

X

Save your entries.

CUSTOMER 334

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.5.4.1.2 Configuration of Batch Management Configuration for Batch Management General Making Settings for Batch Where-Used List Use The purpose of this activity is to make the settings for the batch where-used list.

Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Logistics - General  Batch Management  Batch WhereUsed List  Make Settings for Batch Where-Used List

Transaction Code

SPRO

On the Batch Where-Used List: Overview screen, enter the following information. Plant

Description

BaWU synchron. posting

PLANT_1 (3710)

Production Plant

X

Save your entries.

Result You have made settings for the batch where-used list.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 335

Configuration for Batch Determination and Batch Check MM Batch Determination and Batch Check Defining Inventory Management Strategy Types (FIFO & Expiration Date) Use The purpose of this activity is to define the Inventory Management strategy types. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Logistic - General  Batch Management  Batch Determination and Batch Check  Strategy Types  Define Inventory Management Strategy Types

Transaction Code

SPRO

On the Change View “Strategy types (&1&2)”: overview screen, choose New Entries and make the following entries: Field Name

Description User Action and Values

Condit. type

YB11

Description

BP: Batch number

Access seq.

ME01

Comment

Selection Class

YB_BATCH

Sorting Sort sequence

YB_FIFO_SORT

Batch split No. of splits Changes allowed

Leave empty X

Quantity proposal Display UoM

A

CUSTOMER 336

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Description User Action and Values

Comment

Dialog Batch Determin.

Leave empty

Qty proposal

Leave empty

3.

Save your entries.

4.

On the Change View “Strategy types (&1&2)”: overview screen, choose New Entries and make the following entries: Field Name

Description User Action and Values

Condit. type

YB12

Description

BP: Expiration date

Access seq.

ME01

Comment

Selection Class

YB_EXP_DATE_002

Sorting Sort sequence

YB_EXP_DATE_SORT

Batch split No. of splits

3

Changes allowed

X

Quantity proposal Display UoM

B

Dialog Batch Determin.

X

Qty proposal 5.

Save your entries.

6.

Choose Back F 3 .

Leave empty

Allocating IM Search Procedure/Activate Check Use The purpose of this activity is to allocate the IM search procedure and activate the check. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 337

2.

IMG Menu

Logistic - General  Batch Management  Batch Determination and Batch Check  Batch Search Procedure Allocation and Check Activation  Allocate IM Search Procedure /Activate Check

Transaction Code

OMCG

On the Change View “Search Procedures: batch determine. MM”: Overview screen, choose movement type 261 (GI for order) and make the following entries: MvT Movment Type Text 261

S Special Stock description

GI for order

3.

Save your entries.

4.

Choose Back F 3 .

Search

Check batch

YB0001 X

Result You have allocated the IM search procedure and activated the check.

PP Batch Determination and Batch Check Defining Production Order Strategy Types (FIFO & Expiration Date) Use The purpose of this activity is to define the process order strategy types.

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Logistic - General  Batch Management  Batch Determination and Batch Check  Strategy Types  Define Production Order Strategy Types

Transaction Code

SPRO

On the Change View “Strategy types (&1&2)”: overview screen, choose New Entries and make the following entries: CUSTOMER

338

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Description User Action and Values

Condit. type

YB11

Description

BP: Batch number

Access seq.

C001

Comment

Selection Class

YB_BATCH

Sorting Sort sequence

YB_FIFO_SORT

Batch split No. of splits Changes allowed

Leave empty X

Quantity proposal Display UoM

A

Dialog Batch Determin.

Leave empty

Qty proposal

Leave empty

3.

Save your entries.

4.

On the Change View “Strategy types (&1&2)”: overview screen, choose New Entries and make the following entries:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 339

Field Name

Description User Action and Values

Condit. type

YB12

Description

BP: Expiration date

Access seq.

C001

Comment

Selection Class

YB_EXP_DATE_002

Sorting Sort sequence

YB_EXP_DATE_SORT

Batch split No. of splits

3

Changes allowed

X

Quantity proposal Display UoM

B

Dialog Batch Determin.

X

Qty proposal 5.

Save your entries.

6.

Choose Back F 3 .

Leave empty

Result You have defined process order strategy types.

Defining Production / Process Order Search Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Logistic - General  Batch Management  Batch Determination and Batch Check  Batch Search Procedure Definition  Define Production Order Search Procedure

Transaction Code

SPRO

On the Change View “Procedures”: overview screen, choose New Entries and make the following entries:

CUSTOMER 340

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Procedure

Description

YB0001

BP: Search procedure

3.

Choose Back F 3 .

4.

Select your entry (for example, YB0001) and choose Control.

5.

Make the following entries: Step

Contr

CTyp

10

1

YB11

20

1

YB12

6.

Save your entries C t r l

7.

Choose Back F 3 .

+ S

Result You have defined a production order search procedure.

SD Batch Determination and Batch Check Defining Sales & Distribution Strategy Types (FIFO & Expiration Date) Procedure 1.

2.

Access the next activity using the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Logistic - General  Batch Management  Batch Determination and Batch Check  Strategy Types  Define Sales & Distribution Strategy Types

Transaction Code

SPRO

On the Change View “Strategy types (&1&2)”: Overview screen, choose New Entries and make the following entries: Field Name

Description User Action and Values

Condit. type

YB11

Description

BP: Batch number

Access seq.

SD01

Comment

Selection How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 341

Field Name Class

Description User Action and Values

Comment

YB_BATCH

Sorting Sort sequence

YB_FIFO_SORT

Batch split No. of splits Changes allowed

Leave empty X

Quantity proposal Display UoM

A

Dialog Batch Determin.

Leave empty

Qty proposal

Leave empty

3.

Save your entries.

4.

On the Change View “Strategy types (&1&2)”: overview screen, choose New Entries and make the following entries: Field Name

Description User Action and Values

Condit. type

YB12

Description

BP: Expiration date

Access seq.

SD01

Comment

Selection Class

YB_EXP_DATE_002

Sorting Sort sequence

YB_EXP_DATE_SORT

Batch split No. of splits

3

Changes allowed

X

Quantity proposal Display UoM

B

Dialog Batch Determin.

X

Qty proposal 5.

Save your entries.

6.

Choose Back F 3 .

Leave empty

CUSTOMER 342

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Result The SD batch search strategy types have been created.

Defining Sales and Distribution Search Procedure Use The purpose of this activity is to define batch search procedures for production orders in the areas Inventory Management, Warehouse Management, and Sales and Distribution. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Logistic - General  Batch Management  Batch Determination and Batch Check  Batch Search Procedure Definition  Define Inventory Management Search Procedure

Transaction Code

SPRO

On the Change View “Procedures”: overview screen, choose New Entries and make the following entries: Procedure

Description

YB0001

BP: Search procedure

3.

Select your entry (for example, YB0001) and choose Control data.

4.

Enter the following information: Step

Contr

CTyp

10

1

YB11

20

1

YB12

5.

Save your entries.

6.

Choose Back F 3 .

Result You have defined an SD search procedure.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 343

Allocating SD Search Procedure/Activate Check Use The purpose of this activity is to allocate the IM search procedure and activates the check.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Logistic - General  Batch Management  Batch Determination and Batch Check  Batch Search Procedure Allocation and Check Activation  Allocate SD Search Procedure /Activate Check

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

On the Change View “Search Procedure for Batches: Determination in Sales Docs screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, make the following entries:

4.

Sales Org.

Distribution Channel

Division Sales DocType

Search Procedure

Check Batch

3710

10

00

CBFD

YB0001

X

3710

10

00

CBMO

YB0001

X

3710

10

00

OR

YB0001

X

3710

10

00

CBRE

YB0001

X

3710

10

00

KB

YB0001

X

Save your entries.

Result You have allocated the SD search procedure and activated the check.

CUSTOMER 344

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.5.5

Serial Number Management (BLN)

4.5.5.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.5.5.1.1 Configuration Settings for Physical Inventory 1.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management  Inventory Management and Physical Inventory  Physical Inventory  Settings for Physical Inventory

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

On the Change view “Settings for Physical Inventory” Overview screen, select the entry Plant_1 (3710) and choose Details.

3.

On the Change View “Settings for Physical Inventory” Details screen, make the following entry: Plant

Display Serial Nos

Print Serial Numbers

3710

X

++++++++++

4.

Choose Back.

5.

Save your entries.

4.5.5.2

Manual Rework

If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity

Manual transport possible

Manual action in target system / client required

Material Master Settings

No

Yes

Remarks

In case a manual transport is possible please proceed as follows: How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 345

1.

Logon to the source system / client.

2.

Go to the respective customizing activity as described in the respective section.

3.

Select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request. Most likely this can be done by choosing Table View -> Transport. If this is not possible please refer to the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity.

4.

The newly created transport request needs to be released and imported in the target system / client.

Remark: Please also check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information. In case manual action in the target system / client is required please proceed as follows: 1.

Logon to the target system / client.

2.

Goto the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.

4.5.6 Procurement & Consumption of Consigned Inventory (BMT) 4.5.6.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.5.6.1.1 Master Data Master Management Changing Material Master Use The purpose of this activity is to change the material master data. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP ECC Menu

Logistics  Materials Management  Material Master  Material  Change  Immediately

Transaction Code

MM02

CUSTOMER 346

Localization objects - per Business Priority

2.

Choose Select view(s).

3.

Select the line MRP2.

4.

Maintain the material master with the following select criteria: Field Name

User Action and Values

Material

RM128

Plant

3710 (production plant)

Procurement Subscreen Special Procurement 5.

10 (consignment)

Save your entries.

Purchasing Create Purchase Info Record Use The purpose of this activity is to create the info records which are necessary to create the purchasing documents for the consignment material.

Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP ECC Menu

Logistics  Material Management  Purchasing  Master Data  Info Record  ME11 Create

Transaction Code

ME11

Enter the data required on the Create Info Record: Initial screen. Enter the data as follows: Field Name

User Action and Values

Vendor

For example, (Vendor 01)

Material

For example, (Raw material)

Purchasing Organization

3710

Plant

3710 (production plant)

Info category:

“Consignment”

Choose Enter.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 347

4.

On the Create Info Record: General Data screen, choose Purch. Org. Data1.

5.

On the Create Info Record: Purch. Organization Data screen, enter the data as follows: Control Subscreen: Field Name

User Action and Values

Pl.Deliv.Time

For example,

Purch. Group

001

Standard Qty.

1000

GR-Bsd IV

“Set flag”

Net price

165

Currency Key

EUR

Price unit

100

Order price unit

PC

Tax Code

V1

Description

6.

Choose Enter. The system fills in the missing data from material master.

7.

Save your entries.

Result The consignment info record to RM128 and vendor 37300001 is created.

Creating Scheduling Agreement Use The purpose of this activity is to create the scheduling agreement for purchasing. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics  Materials Management  Purchasing  Outline Agreement  Scheduling Agreement  Create  Vendor Known

Transaction Code

ME31L

Maintain the outline agreement with the following entries: CUSTOMER

348

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

User Action and Values

Description

Vendor

37300001

Agreement type

LP

Scheduling Agreement

Agreement Date



(propose)

Purch. Organization

3710

Purchasing group

001

Plant

3710

3.

Choose Enter.

4.

On the Create Scheduling agreement: Header data screen, make the following entries: Field Name

User Action and Values

Validity end



Description

5.

Choose Enter.

6.

On the Create Scheduling agreement: Item overview screen, make the following entries:

7.

Field Name

User Action and Values

Item cat.egory

K

Material

RM128

Target quantity

120 000

Description

Save your entries.

Maintain Source List Use The purpose of this activity is to maintain/create a source list for a material within a plant (here: for semi RAW material RAW128 (R128). Prerequisite The material RAW128 (R128) must already exist in the material master on plant level.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 349

2.

SAP Menu

Logistics  Materials Management  Purchasing  Master Data  Source List  Maintain

Transaction Code

ME01

On the Maintain Source List: Initial screen, make the following entries: Field Name

User Action and Values

Material

For example,

Plant

For example,

Description

Production plant

3.

Choose Enter.

4.

On the Maintain Source List: Overview screen, make the following entries: Field Name

User Action and Values

Description

Valid from

For example,

Today

Valid to

For example,

Date in the very future

Vendor

For example,

Relevant Vendor

POrg

For example,

Relevant Purchase Organization

OUn

For example, (will be set from the system)

Purchase order unit

Agmt

For example,

Relevant agreement number (here delivery schedule)

Item

For example,

Relevant item from delivery schedule

MRP

For example,

Source list usage in Materials planning

5.

Choose the source list line and go to Header  Source list  Check. A system message appears All source list records OK.

6.

Save your entries.

7.

Go back twice.

CUSTOMER 350

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.5.7Return to Vendor (BMZ) 4.5.7.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.5.7.1.1 Returns to Vendor Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management  Purchasing  Purchase Order  Returns Order  Returns to Vendor

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

Choose New Entries.

3.

Make the following entries: Cat

Type

SPlt

Del. Type Returns

F

NB

Plant_1 (3710)

RL

4.

Save your entries.

5.

Choose Back.

4.5.8 Sample Master Data Business Partners [local] (JA2) Both Material Management and Sales and Distribution are using the business partner master data. Please check which area is responsible for the configuration.

4.5.8.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.5.8.1.1 Create Domestic Customers 1.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: SAP GUI Transaction

BP _Maintain Business Partner (Enter in the transaction call field)

Access via FIORI Launchpad in an OP (On Premise) environment: How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 351

Business Role ID and

SAP_BR_BUPA_MASTER_SPECIALIST

Name

Master Data Specialist - Business Partner Data

Access via FIORI Launchpad in a CLOUD environment: Business Catalog Role ID

SAP_BCR_CMD_BP_MAINT_PC

and Name

Master Data - Business Partner

2.

Choose the Maintain Business Partner tile to launch the application from the FIORI Launchpad or call the transaction /bp in a SAP GUI environment

3.

On the Customer Master Data screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Business Partner Number

37100001

Business partner category

2

Business Partner Grouping

BP03

Search term 1 for business partner

KLANT1

Form-of-Address Key

3

Name 1 of organization

Binnenlandse klant 1

BP: Legal form of organization

1

BP role

FLCU01

BP role

UDM000

BP Role Category

FLCU01

BP Role Category

UDM000

Bank country key

NL

Bank Keys

ING

Bank account number

005544999

Industry System

1

Industry sector

91

Tax Number Category

NL0

Business Partner Tax Number

NL001234560B01

City

Apeldoorn

City postal code

7322 HR

Street

Korfstraat

House Number

1

CUSTOMER 352

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Entry Value

Country Key

NL

Region (State, Province, County)

GE

Address time zone

CET

Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered

2

Language Key

N

2-Character SAP Language Code

NL

City file test status

C

Country for telephone/fax number

NL

Country ISO code

NL

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

Telephone no.: dialing code + number

+31 26 12345

Complete number: dialing code + number + extension

+31 26 12345

Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone

1

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

10101

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

E-Mail Address

[email protected]

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

19000101

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

Address Type

XXDEFAULT

Purchasing Organization

3710

Purchase order currency

EUR

External Interface: Tax Indicators

I

Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)

NL

Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)

TTX1

Tax classification for customer

1

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 353

Field Name

Entry Value

Company Code

3710

Key for sorting according to assignment numbers

9

Reconciliation Account in General Ledger

0012100000

Terms of Payment Key

4

Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor

3710-CUST1

Accounting clerk

1

Sales Organization

3710

Distribution Channel

10

Division

00

Customer group

1

Incoterms (Part 1)

EXW

Incoterms (Part 2)

's-Hertogenbosch

Delivery Priority

2

Shipping Conditions

01

Currency

EUR

Account assignment group for this customer

1

Terms of Payment Key

4

Delivering Plant (Own or External)

3710

Partner Function

AG

Partner counter

0

Default Partner

X

4.

Save your entries.

5.

On the Customer Master Data screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Business Partner Number

37100002

Business partner category

2

Business Partner Grouping

BP03

Search term 1 for business partner

KLANT2

Form-of-Address Key

3

CUSTOMER 354

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Entry Value

Name 1 of organization

Binnenlandse klant 1

BP: Legal form of organization

1

BP role

FLCU01

BP role

UDM000

BP Role Category

FLCU01

BP Role Category

UDM000

Bank country key

NL

Bank Keys

ABN

Bank account number

#009876543

Industry System

1

Industry sector

91

Tax Number Category

NL1

Business Partner Tax Number

NL001234560B02

City

Arnhem

City postal code

3012 CL

Street

Keizersgracht

House Number

2

Country Key

NL

Region (State, Province, County)

GE

Address time zone

CET

Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered

1

Language Key

N

2-Character SAP Language Code

NL

City file test status

C

Country for telephone/fax number

NL

Country ISO code

NL

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

Telephone no.: dialing code + number

+31 55 12345

Complete number: dialing code + number+extension

+31 55 12345

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 355

Field Name

Entry Value

Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone

1

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

10101

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

E-Mail Address

[email protected]

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

10101

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

Address Type

XXDEFAULT

Purchasing Organization

3710

Purchase order currency

EUR

External Interface: Tax Indicators

I

Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)

NL

Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)

TTX1

Tax classification for customer

1

Company Code

NL

Key for sorting according to assignment numbers

9

Reconciliation Account in General Ledger

0012100000

Terms of Payment Key

4

Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor

3710-CUST2

Accounting clerk

1

Sales Organization

3710

Distribution Channel

10

Division

00

Customer group

1

Incoterms (Part 1)

EXW

Incoterms (Part 2)

's-Hertogenbosch

CUSTOMER 356

Localization objects - per Business Priority

6.

Field Name

Entry Value

Delivery Priority

2

Shipping Conditions

01

Currency

EUR

Account assignment group for this customer

1

Terms of Payment Key

4

Delivering Plant (Own or External)

3710

Partner Function

AG

Partner counter

0

Default Partner

X

Save your entries.

4.5.8.1.2 Create Domestic Vendors 1.

Choose the Maintain Business Partner tile to launch the application from the FIORI Launchpad or call the transaction /bp in a SAP GUI environment. Field Name

Entry Value

Business Partner Number

37300001

Business partner category

2

Business Partner Grouping

BP03

Search term 1 for business partner

LEV01

Form-of-Address Key

3

Name 1 of organization

Binnenlandse leverancier NL 01

BP: Legal form of organization

1

BP role

FLVN01

BP Role Category

FLVN01

Bank country key

NL

Bank Keys

ABN

Bank account number

0544044150

Tax Number Category

NL

Business Partner Tax Number

NL001234560B02

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 357

Field Name

Entry Value

City

Amsterdam

City postal code

1071 DG

Street

Honthorststraat

House Number

1

Country Key

NL

Region (State, Province, County)

NH

Address time zone

CET

Language Key

N

2-Character SAP Language Code

NL

City file test status

C

Country for telephone/fax number

NL

Country ISO code

NL

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

Telephone no.: dialing code +number

+31 71 5232 0

Complete number: dialing code + number + extension

+31 71 5232 0

Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone

1

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

10101

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

E-Mail Address

[email protected]

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

10101

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

Address Type

XXDEFAULT

Purchasing Organization

3710

CUSTOMER 358

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Entry Value

Purchase order currency

EUR

Company Code

3710

Key for sorting according to assignment numbers

9

Reconciliation Account in General Ledger

21100000

List of the Payment Methods to be Considered

T

Terms of Payment Key

4

Our account number with the vendor

3710-LEV01

Accounting clerk

1

Purchasing Organization

3710

Currency

EUR

Terms of Payment Key

4

Indicator: GR-Based Invoice Verification

X

Group for Calculation Schema (Vendor)

1

Purchasing Group

1

Planned Delivery Time in Days

2

Shipping Conditions

1

Partner Function

LF

Partner counter

0

Default Partner

X

2.

Save your entries.

3.

On the Customer Master Data screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Business Partner Number

37300002

Business partner category

2

Business Partner Grouping

BP03

Search term 1 for business partner

LEV01

Form-of-Address Key

3

Name 1 of organization

Binnenlandse leverancier NL 02

BP: Legal form of organization

1

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 359

Field Name

Entry Value

BP role

FLVN01

BP Role Category

FLVN01

Bank country key

NL

Bank Keys

ABN

Bank account number

0265425328

Tax Number Category

NL01

Business Partner Tax Number

NL001234560B05

City

Leiden

City postal code

2311 CV

Street

Kerkstraat

House Number

2

Country Key

NL

Region (State, Province, County)

DR

Address time zone

CET

Language Key

N

2-Character SAP Language Code

NL

City file test status

C

Country for telephone/fax number

NL

Country ISO code

NL

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

Telephone no.: dialing code + number

0592 362-0

Complete number: dialing code + number + extension

05292 362-0

Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone

1

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

10101

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

CUSTOMER 360

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.

Field Name

Entry Value

E-Mail Address

[email protected]

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

10101

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

Address Type

XXDEFAULT

Purchasing Organization

3710

Purchase order currency

EUR

Company Code

3710

Key for sorting according to assignment numbers

9

Reconciliation Account in General Ledger

21100000

List of the Payment Methods to be Considered

T

Terms of Payment Key

4

Our account number with the vendor

3710- LEV01

Accounting clerk

1

Purchasing Organization

3710

Currency

EUR

Terms of Payment Key

4

Indicator: GR-Based Invoice Verification

X

Group for Calculation Schema (Vendor)

1

Purchasing Group

1

Planned Delivery Time in Days

3

Shipping Conditions

1

Partner Function

LF

Partner counter

0

Default Partner

X

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 361

4.5.8.1.3 Create Domestic Contacts for Business Partners Procedure 1.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: SAP GUI Transaction

BP _Maintain Business Partner (Enter in the transaction call field)

Access via FIORI Launchpad in an OP (On Premise) environment: Business Role ID and

SAP_BR_BUPA_MASTER_SPECIALIST

Name

Master Data Specialist - Business Partner Data

Access via FIORI Launchpad in a CLOUD environment:

2.

Business Catalog Role ID

SAP_BCR_CMD_BP_MAINT_PC

and Name

Master Data - Business Partner

Choose the Maintain Business Partner tile to launch the application from the FIORI Launchpad or call the transaction /bp in a SAP GUI environment Field Name

Entry Value

Entry Value

Entry Value

Entry Value

Business Partner Number

37910001

37910002

37910003

37910004

Business partner category

1

1

1

1

Business Partner Grouping

BP03

BP03

BP03

BP03

37910001

37910002

37910003

3791000

Search term 1 for business partner

4 Form-of-Address Key

1

2

1

2

First name of business partner (person)

Alina

Alexander

Barbara

Bernd

Last name of business partner (person)

Mueller

Linke

Meger

Fischer

Sex of business partner (person)

1

2

1

2

Business Partner: Correspondence Language

N

N

N

N

CUSTOMER 362

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Entry Value

Entry Value

Entry Value

Entry Value

2-Character SAP Language Code

NL

NL

NL

NL

BP role

BUP001

BUP001

BUP001

BUP001

BP Role Category

BUP001

BUP001

BUP001

BUP001

Country for telephone/fax number

NL

NL

NL

NL

City

Apeldoorn

Apeldoorn

Arnhem

Arnhem

City postal code

7322 HR

7322 HR

3012 C

3012 C

Street

Amerikastraat

Amerikastraat 1

Keizersgracht

Keizersgracht

House Number

1

2

1

2

Region (State, Province, County)

GE

GE

GE

GE

Address time zone

CET

CET

CET

CET

Language Key

N

N

N

N

2-Character SAP Language Code

NL

NL

NL

NL

Country for telephone/fax number

NL

NL

NL

NL

Country ISO code

NL

NL

NL

NL

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

X

X

X

Telephone no.: dialing code + number

09990 4513-0

09990 4513-0

09990 41252-0

09990 41252-0

Telephone no.: Extension

01

02

01

02

Complete number: dialing code + number+extension

09990 4513-12

09990 4513-32

09990 41252212

09990 41252221

Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone

1

1

1

1

Sequence Number

1

1

1

1

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 363

Field Name

Entry Value

Entry Value

Entry Value

Entry Value

Communication Data: 10101 Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

10101

10101

10101

Communication Data: 99991231 Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

99991231

99991231

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

X

X

X

E-Mail Address

alina.mueller alexander.linke barbara.meger bernd.fischer @37100001.com @37100001.com @37100002.com @37100002.com

Communication Data: 10101 Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

10101

10101

10101

Communication Data: 99991231 Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

99991231

99991231

Address Type

XXDEFAULT

XXDEFAULT

XXDEFAULT

XXDEFAULT

Business Partner Number

37100001

37100001

37100002

37100002

37910005

37910006

37910007

3791008

Business Partner Number

4 Business Partner Relationship Category

BUR001

BUR001

BUR001

BUR001

Remark: In the UI transaction you need to create a "Relationship" of the BP-Employee to the indicated BP-Customers. The relationship type BUR001 is shown as “Is Employee of …” Validity Date (Valid To)

99991231

99991231

99991231

99991231

Validity Date (Valid From)

10101

10101

10101

10101

Function of partner

3

2

2

3

Department

3

2

2

3

CUSTOMER 364

Localization objects - per Business Priority

3.

First telephone no.: dialing code + number

05777- 4513-0

05777- 4513-0

026 41252-0

026 41252-0

First Telephone No.: Extension

12

32

212

221

E-Mail Address

alina.mueller alexander.linke barbara.meger bernd.fischer @37100001.com @37100001.com @37100002.com @37100002.com

Sales Organization

3710

3710

3710

3710

Distribution Channel

10

10

10

10

Division

0

0

0

0

Save your entries.

4.5.9 Trading Goods (HAWA) related sample master data [local] (BM7) 4.5.9.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.5.9.1.1 Creating Material Master – Organization Dependent Views for Trading Materials Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP ECC menu

Logistics  Materials Management  Material Master  Material  Create (General)  Immediately

Transaction code

MM01

On the initial screen, make the following entries and choose Enter: Field name

3.

Description User action and values

Material



Industry sector

M Mechanical Engineer

Material type

HAWA Trade materials

Note

In the Select View(s) dialog box, choose Views:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 365

4.

5.

General Plant Data / Storage 1 and 2: for all materials Material

Plant 1

TG10

3710

TG11

3710

TG12

3710

TG13

3710

TG14

3710

TG20

3710

TG21

3710

TG22

3710

Choose Enter.

General Plant Data / Storage 1/2 1.

Choose the Plant data/stor.1/2 tab, view entries and choose Enter to continue. Field Name

Description User Action and Values

Plant

Comment

3710

Stor. location

see table below for material- and plant-specific data

Material

Plant

Stor. Location

TG10

3710

371A;

TG11

3710

371A;371R

TG12

3710

371A;371R

TG13

3710

371A

TG14

3710

371A

TG20

3710

371A;371R

TG21

3710

371A;371R

TG22

3710

371A;371R

2.

Choose Enter to go to the second screen.

3.

Save your entries to go to the initial screen.

4.

On the initial screen, make the following entries and choose Enter:

CUSTOMER 366

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field name

5.

Description

User action and values

Material



Industry sector

M Mechanical Engineer

Material type

ROH Raw Materials

Note

see table below

In the Select View(s) dialog box, choose Views:

 Sales Org. Data 1 and 2, Sales General Plant Data: for all materials  Purchasing and Purchase Order Text: for all materials  MRP views 1, 2, 3 and 4: for all materials  Accounting 1 and 2: for all materials 6.

Choose Enter and make the following entries: Field name

7.

Description User action and values

Plant

3710

Stor. location



Sales Org.

3710

Distr.Channel

10

Material

Plant 1

Sales Org. 1

TG10

3710

3710

TG11

3710

3710

TG12

3710

3710

TG13

3710

3710

TG14

3710

3710

TG20

3710

3710

TG21

3710

3710

TG22

3710

3710

Note first create the materials for plant 3710, see table below for further plants first create the materials for sales organization 3710, see table below for further sales organizations

Choose Enter.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 367

Sales Data 1.

On the Sales: sales org. 1 tab page, make the following entries, and choose Enter: Field name

2.

Description User action and values

Delivering plant

3710

Tax classification ("TTX1")

1 for taxable

On the Sales: sales org. 2 tab page, make the following entries, and choose Enter: Field name

3.

Note

Description

User action and values

Acct assignment grp

01

Item category group



Note

On the Sales: General/plant tab page, make the following entries and choose Enter: Field name

Description

User action and values

Availability check

Y2

Trans. Grp

0001

LoadingGrp

0001

Batch Management



Profit Center

YB700

Note

set batch management indicator for materials TG21 and TG22

4.

On the Sales text tab page, enter the text that should appear on sales documents for this material.

5.

Choose the MRP tab page (ENTER does not work when the cursor is in a text field).

Purchasing Data 1.

On the Purchasing tab page, make the following entries and choose Enter: Field name Purchasing group

Description User action and values

Note see table below for material- and plantspecific data

CUSTOMER 368

Localization objects - per Business Priority

2.

Material

Plant

Purchasing group

TG10

3710

001

TG11

3710

002

TG12

3710

002

TG13

3710

001

TG14

3710

002

TG20

3710

002

TG21

3710

002

TG22

3710

002

Choose the MRP1 tab page (ENTER does not work when the cursor is in a text field).

MRP Data 1.

On the MRP1 tab page, make the following entries and choose Enter. Field name

Description

MRP type

User action and values

Note

PD

see table below

VB Reorder point

0;

see table below

10 MRP controller



see table below

Lot size

EX

see table below

Material

Plant

MRP Type

Reorder Point

MRP controller

Lot Size

TG10

3710

PD

0

001

EX

TG11

3710

PD

0

001

EX

TG12

3710

VB

10

001

EX

TG13

3710

VB

10

001

EX

TG14

3710

PD

0

001

EX

TG20

3710

VB

10

001

EX

TG21

3710

VB

10

001

EX

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 369

TG22 2.

3710

VB

10

001

On the MRP2 tab page, make the following entries and choose Enter. Field name

Description

User action and values

Procurement Type

F

Special Procurement

blank;

Storage Location for External Procurement

3.

EX

Note

see table below for material- and plantspecific data

SchedMargin Key

000

Planned Delivery Time



Storage Location for External Procurement

Material

Plant

TG10

3710

8

TG11

3710

10

TG12

3710

10

TG13

3710

8

TG14

3710

10

TG20

3710

10

TG21

3710

10

TG22

3710

10

see table below for material- and plantspecific data

Planned Delivery Time

On the MRP3 tab page, make the following entries and choose Enter. Field name

Description

User action and values

Strategy group

40

Total replenishment lead time



Material

Plant

Total repl. lead time

TG10

3710

5

Note

see table below for material- and plantspecific data

CUSTOMER 370

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.

Material

Plant

Total repl. lead time

TG11

3710

4

TG12

3710

4

TG13

3710

5

TG14

3710

4

TG20

3710

4

TG21

3710

4

TG22

3710

4

On the MRP4 tab page, view values and choose Enter.

Accounting Data Procedure 1.

On the Accounting 1 tab page, make the following entries and choose Enter. Field name

2.

Description

User action and values

Note

Price unit

1

Standard price



see table below for material- and plantspecific data

Per. unit price



see table below for material- and plantspecific data

Material

Plant

Standard price

Per. unit price

TG10

3710

13,00

13,00

TG11

3710

13,50

13,50

TG12

3710

13,50

13,50

TG13

3710

13,50

13,50

TG14

3710

13,50

13,50

TG20

3710

13,50

13,50

TG21

3710

13,50

13,50

TG22

3710

13,50

13,50

Select the second accounting screen

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 371

3.

Choose Enter.

4.

The Last data screen reached dialog box appears.

5.

Choose Yes to save your entries.

Result The trading materials are created.

4.5.10 BP-Customers and -Suppliers, Sample Master Data [local] (BN6) Both Material Management and Sales and Distribution are using the business partner master data. Please check which area is responsible for the configuration.

4.5.10.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.5.10.1.1 Create Domestic Customers 1.

2.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: SAP ECC menu

Logistics  Settlement Management  Environment  Master Data  Maintain Business Partner

Transaction code

BP

On the Maintain Business Partner screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Business Partner Number

37100003

Business partner category

2

Business Partner Grouping

BP03

Search term 1 for business partner

Customer3

Form-of-Address Key

3

Name 1 of organization

Domestic NL 3

BP: Legal form of organization

1

BP role

FLCU01

BP role

UDM000

CUSTOMER 372

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Entry Value

BP role

FLCU00

BP Role Category

FLCU01

BP Role Category

UDM000

BP Role Category

FLCU00

Bank country key

NL

Bank Keys

ING

Bank account number IBAN (International Bank Account Number)

NL40INGB0005544499

Industry System

0001

Industry sector

91

Tax Number Category

NL0

Business Partner Tax Number

NL001234560B03

City

Duivendrecht

City postal code

1114 AJ

Street

Oostweg

House Number

2

Country Key

NL

Region (State, Province, County)

GE

Address time zone

CET

Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered

0000000002

Language Key

NL

2-Character SAP Language Code

NL

City file test status

C

Country for telephone/fax number

NL

Country ISO code

NL

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

Telephone no.: dialing code + number

20 570 1922

Complete number: dialing code + number + extension

20 570 1923

Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone

1

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 373

Field Name

Entry Value

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

01.01.1900

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

31.12.9999

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

E-Mail Address

[email protected]

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

01.01.1900

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

31.12.9999

Address Type

XXDEFAULT

Purchasing Organization

3710

Purchase order currency

EUR

External Interface: Tax Indicators

C

Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)

NL

Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)

TTX1

Tax classification for customer

1

Company Code

3710

Key for sorting according to assignment numbers

9

Reconciliation Account in General Ledger

0012100000

List of the Payment Methods to be Considered

T

Terms of Payment Key

NT30

Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor

3710-CUST3

Accounting clerk

01

Sales Organization

3710

Distribution Channel

10

Division

00

Customer group

01

CUSTOMER 374

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Entry Value

Incoterms (Part 1)

EXW

Incoterms (Part 2)

Amsterdam

Delivery Priority

02

Shipping Conditions

01

Currency

EUR

Account assignment group for this customer

01

Terms of Payment Key

0004

Delivering Plant (Own or External)

3710

Partner Function

AG (RE, RG, WE)

Partner counter

000

Default Partner

X

3.

Save your entries.

4.

On the Maintain Business Partner screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Business Partner Number

37100004

Business partner category

2

Business Partner Grouping

BP03

Search term 1 for business partner

Customer 4

Form-of-Address Key

0003

Name 1 of organization

Domestic NL 4

BP: Legal form of organization

01

BP role

FLCU01

BP role

UDM000

BP role

FLCU00

BP Role Category

FLCU01

BP Role Category

UDM000

BP Role Category

FLCU00

Bank country key

NL

Bank Keys

ING

Bank account number IBAN (International Bank Account Number) How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

NL40INGB0005544499 CUSTOMER 375

Field Name

Entry Value

Industry System

0001

Industry sector

91

Tax Number Category

NL0

Business Partner Tax Number

NL161882268

City

Diemen

City postal code

1112 XN

Street

Diemerhof

House Number

10

Country Key

NL

Region (State, Province, County)

GE

Address time zone

CET

Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered

0000000001

Language Key

NL

2-Character SAP Language Code

NL

City file test status

C

Country for telephone/fax number

NL

Country ISO code

NL

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

Telephone no.: dialing code + number

20 346 3400

Complete number: dialing code + number + extension

20 346 3400

Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone

1

Sequence Number

001

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

01.01.1900

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

31.12.9999

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

E-Mail Address

[email protected]

CUSTOMER 376

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Entry Value

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

01.01.1900

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

31.12.9999

Address Type

XXDEFAULT

Purchasing Organization

3710

Purchase order currency

EUR

External Interface: Tax Indicators

C

Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)

DE

Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)

TTX1

Tax classification for customer

1

Company Code

3710

Key for sorting according to assignment numbers

009

Reconciliation Account in General Ledger

12100000

List of the Payment Methods to be Considered

T

Terms of Payment Key

0004

Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor

3710-CUST4

Accounting clerk

1

Sales Organization

3710

Distribution Channel

10

Division

00

Customer group

1

Incoterms (Part 1)

EXW

Incoterms (Part 2)

Amsterdam

Delivery Priority

02

Shipping Conditions

01

Currency

EUR

Account assignment group for this customer

1

Terms of Payment Key

0004

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 377

Field Name

Entry Value

Delivering Plant (Own or External)

3710

Partner Function

AG (RE, RG, WE)

Partner counter

000

Default Partner

X

5.

Save your entries.

6.

On the Maintain Business Partner screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Business Partner Number

37100006

Business partner category

2

Business Partner Grouping

BP03

Search term 1 for business partner

Customer 6

Form-of-Address Key

3

Name 1 of organization

Domestic NL 6 (Returns)

BP: Legal form of organization

01

BP role

FLCU01

BP role

UDM000

BP role

FLCU00

BP Role Category

FLCU01

BP Role Category

UDM000

BP Role Category

FLCU00

Bank country key

NL

Bank Keys

ABN

Bank account number IBAN (International Bank Account Number)

NL02ABNA0123456789

Industry System

0001

Industry sector

91

Tax Number Category

NL0

Business Partner Tax Number

NL001234560B03

City

Amsterdam Zuid-Oost

City postal code

1101 HE

CUSTOMER 378

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Entry Value

Street

De Entree

House Number

123

Country Key

NL

Region (State, Province, County)

GE

Address time zone

CET

Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered

0000000001

Language Key

NL

2-Character SAP Language Code

NL

City file test status

C

Country for telephone/fax number

NL

Country ISO code

NL

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

Telephone no.: dialing code + number

800 2487636

Complete number: dialing code + number + extension

800 2487636

Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone

1

Sequence Number

001

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

01.01.1900

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

31.12.9999

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

E-Mail Address

[email protected]

Sequence Number

001

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

01.01.1900

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

31.12.9999

Address Type

XXDEFAULT

Purchasing Organization

3710

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 379

7.

Field Name

Entry Value

Purchase order currency

EUR

Account Number of Vendor or Creditor

373000006

External Interface: Tax Indicators

C

Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)

NL

Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)

TTX1

Tax classification for customer

1

Company Code

3710

Key for sorting according to assignment numbers

009

Reconciliation Account in General Ledger

0012100000

List of the Payment Methods to be Considered

T

Terms of Payment Key

0004

Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor

3710-CUST6

Accounting clerk

01

Sales Organization

3710

Distribution Channel

10

Division

00

Customer group

01

Incoterms (Part 1)

EXW

Incoterms (Part 2)

Amsterdam

Delivery Priority

02

Shipping Conditions

RE

Currency

EUR

Account assignment group for this customer

01

Terms of Payment Key

0004

Delivering Plant (Own or External)

3710

Partner Function

AG (RE, RG, WE)

Partner counter

0

Default Partner

X

Save your entries. CUSTOMER

380

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.5.10.1.2 Create Domestic Vendors Procedure 1.

2.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: SAP ECC menu

Logistics  Settlement Management  Environment  Master Data  Maintain Business Partner

Transaction code

BP

On the Maintain Business Partner screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Business Partner Number

37300006

Business partner category

2

Business Partner Grouping

BP03

Search term 1 for business partner

Supplier 6

Form-of-Address Key

0003

Name 1 of organization

Domestic NL 6 (Returns)

BP: Legal form of organization

01

BP role

FLVN01

BP role

FLVN00

BP Role Category

FLVN01

BP Role Category

FLVN00

Bank country key

NL

Bank Keys

ABN

Bank account number IBAN (International Bank Account Number)

NL02ABNA0123456789

Tax Number Category

NL0

Business Partner Tax Number

NL001234560B03

City

Amsterdam Zuid-Oost

City postal code

1101 HE

Street

De Entree

House Number

123

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 381

Field Name

Entry Value

Country Key

NL

Region (State, Province, County)

GE

Address time zone

CET

Language Key

NL

2-Character SAP Language Code

NL

City file test status

C

Country for telephone/fax number

DE

Country ISO code

NL

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

Telephone no.: dialing code + number

800 2487636

Complete number: dialing code + number + extension

800 2487636

Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone

1

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

01.01.1900

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

31.12.9999

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

E-Mail Address

[email protected]

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

01.01.1900

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

31.12.9999

Address Type

XXDEFAULT

Purchasing Organization

3710

Customer Number

37100006

Purchase order currency

EUR

Company Code

3710

Key for sorting according to assignment numbers

009

CUSTOMER 382

Localization objects - per Business Priority

3.

Field Name

Entry Value

Reconciliation Account in General Ledger

21100000

List of the Payment Methods to be Considered

T

Terms of Payment Key

0001

Our account number with the vendor

3710-LIEF6

Accounting clerk

01

Purchasing Organization

3710

Currency

EUR

Terms of Payment Key

0001

Indicator: GR-Based Invoice Verification

X

Group for Calculation Schema (Vendor)

01

Purchasing Group

001

Planned Delivery Time in Days

2

Shipping Conditions

01

Partner Function

LF

Partner counter

000

Default Partner

X

Save your entries.

4.5.11 Physical Inventory / Inventory Count and Adjustment (BMN) 4.5.11.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.5.11.1.1 Allow Freezing of Book Inventory Balance in Storage Location Use The purpose of this step is to allow freezing of book inventory balance in storage location.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 383

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management  Inventory Management and Physical Inventory  Physical Inventory  Allow Freezing of Book Inventory Balance in Storage Location

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

In the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box, enter Plant choosing Enter.

3.

On the Change View “Storage Locations”: Overview screen, choose Freeze book inv. SLoc for the storage locations shown below:

1 (3710)

and confirm

Storage Location Std. storage 1 (371A) Std. storage 2 (371B) Returns (371C) Shipping (371R) 4.

Save your entries.

4.5.11.1.2 Define Tolerances for Physical Inventory Differences Use The purpose of this step is to define tolerances for physical inventory differences.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management  Inventory Management and Physical Inventory  Physical Inventory  Define Tolerances for Physical Inventory Differences

Transaction Code

OMJ2

2.

On the Maintain Phys. Inv. Tolerance  Employee screen choose Physical inventory tolerance group.

3.

On the Change View Tolerance Groups for Persons Processing Inventory Differences screen, select New Entries. CUSTOMER

384

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.

5.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the values shown below: Field

Value

Phys.inv.tolerance group

0001

Company Code

3710

Diff. Amount per phys.inv.doc

100.000,00

Diff. Amount per phys.inv. item

10.000,00

Save your entries.

4.5.11.1.3 Define Tolerances for Physical Inventory Differences Use The purpose of this step is to define tolerances for physical inventory differences. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management  Inventory Management and Physical Inventory  Physical Inventory  Define Tolerances for Physical Inventory Differences

Transaction Code

OMJ2

2.

On the Maintain Phys. Inv. Tolerance  Employee screen choose User Name.

3.

On the Change View “Allocate User--> Phys. Inv. Tolerance Gr.": Overview.” screen, make the following entries:

4.

Field

Value

User name

*

Phys.inv.tolerance grp

0001

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 385

4.5.12 General materials (MAT) related sample master data sLog/Local (J51) 4.5.12.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.5.12.1.1 Create Material Master 1.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: Fiori Application

2.

Manage Material

On the Material screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Basic Data Material

TG0011

Material Group

L001 – Trading Material

Generic Item Group Category

NORM – Standard Item

Basic Data Details Material Description

Handelsware, PD, Normaler Handel

Base Unit of Measure

PC

Net Weight

0,900 KG

Gross Weight

1,000 KG

Transportation Group

0001

Plants Plant

3710

Availability Check

SP

Loading Group

0001

Procurement Type

F

Purchasing Group

001

Scheduling Margin Key

000

Profit Center

YB110

Period Indicator

M

Plant: Material Requirements Planning MRP Type

PD

CUSTOMER 386

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Entry Value

MRP Controller

001

Lot Size

EX

Plant: Storage Locations Storage Location

371A

Storage Location

371B

Distribution Chains Sales Organization

3710

Distribution Channel

10

Item Category Group

NORM

Distribution Chain: Sales Delivering Plant

3710

Accounting Assignment Group

01

Item Category Group

NORM

Distribution Chain: Tax Country

NL

Tax Category

TTX1

Tax Classification

1

Valuation Area Plant Valuation Class

3100

Material Price Determination Control

2

Currency (Company Code Currency)

EUR

Standard price (Company Code Currency)

20.00

Price Unit (Company Code Currency)

1

Price Control (Company Code Currency)

V

Currency (Group Currency)

USD

Standard price (Group Currency)

25.00

Price Unit (Group Currency)

1

Price Control (Group Currency)

V

3.

Save your entries.

4.

On the Material screen, create the following settings:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 387

Field Name

Entry Value

Basic Data Material

TG0011

Material Group

L001 – Trading Material

Generic Item Group Category

NORM – Standard Item

Basic Data Details Material Description

Handelsware, Bestellpunkt, Normaler Handel

Base Unit of Measure

PC

Net Weight

0,900 KG

Gross Weight

1,000 KG

Transportation Group

0001

Plants Plant

3710

Availability Check

SP

Loading Group

0001

Procurement Type

F

Purchasing Group

001

Scheduling Margin Key

000

Profit Center

YB110

Period Indicator

M

Plant: Material Requirements Planning MRP Type

PD

MRP Controller

001

Lot Size

EX

Plant: Storage Locations Storage Location

371A

Storage Location

371B

Distribution Chains Sales Organization

3710

Distribution Channel

10

Item Category Group

NORM

CUSTOMER 388

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Entry Value

Distribution Chain: Sales Delivering Plant

3710

Accounting Assignment Group

01

Item Category Group

NORM

Distribution Chain: Tax Country

NL

Tax Category

TTX1

Tax Classification

1

Valuation Area Plant

5.

Valuation Class

3100

Material Price Determination Control

2

Currency (Company Code Currency)

EUR

Standard price (Company Code Currency)

20.00

Price Unit (Company Code Currency)

1

Price Control (Company Code Currency)

V

Currency (Group Currency)

USD

Standard price (Group Currency)

25.00

Price Unit (Group Currency)

1

Price Control (Group Currency)

V

Save your entries.

4.5.12.1.2 Create Info Records Procedure 1.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: Fiori Application

Create Info Records

On the Create Info Records screen, create the following settings:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 389

Field Name

Field Name

Entry Value

Entry Value

Entry Value

002

001

002

3710

3710

3710

I_INCO1

EXW

EXW

EXW

I_INCO2

VENDOR

VENDOR

VENDOR

I_EKGRP I_EKORG

Purchasing Organization

I_INFOCA T

Info record Category Indicator

NORMB

NORMB

NORMB

I_LIFNR

Vendor's account number

37300001

37300001

37300002

I_MATNR

Material Number

TG0011

TG0012

TG0011

I_MWSKZ

AA

AA

AA

I_NETPR

30.00

40.00

35.00

I_NORBM

10

100

10

I_PEINH

1

1

1

I_UEBTO

10

10

10

I_UNTTO

10

10

10

I_WAERS

EUR

EUR

EUR

3710

3710

3710

X

X

X

I_WERKS

Plant

I_XERSN 2.

Save your entries.

3.

On the Create Info Records screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Field Name

Entry Value

Entry Value

Entry Value

001

001

001

3710

3710

3710

I_INCO1

EXW

EXW

EXW

I_INCO2

VENDOR

VENDOR

VENDOR

I_EKGRP I_EKORG

Purchasing Organization

I_INFOCA T

Info record Category Indicator

NORMB

NORMB

NORMB

I_LIFNR

Vendor's account number

37300002

37300001

37300002

CUSTOMER 390

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Field Name

Entry Value

Entry Value

Entry Value

I_MATNR

Material Number

TG0012

TG0001

TG0001

I_MWSKZ

AA

AA

AA

I_NETPR

45.00

10

10

I_NORBM

100

10

10

I_PEINH

1

1

1

I_UEBTO

10

10

10

I_UNTTO

10

10

10

I_WAERS

EUR

EUR

EUR

3710

3710

3710

X

X

X

I_WERKS

Plant

I_XERSN 4.

Save your entries.

4.5.12.1.3 Condition Maintenance Purch. Prices Procedure 1.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: Fiori Application

2.

Edit Info Record

On the Edit Info Record screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Entry Value

Entry Value

Application as Condition Technique

M

M

M

Condition Maintenance Group

0MMP010001

0MMP010001

0MMP010001

Maintenance Context

AMMP010001 AMMP010001 AMMP010001

Condition Type

PPR0

PPR0

PPR0

Purchasing Organization

3710

3710

3710

Vendor Account Number

37300001

37300002

37300001

0

0

0

Purchasing info record category How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 391

3.

Field Name

Entry Value

Entry Value

Entry Value

Material Number

TG0011

TG0011

TG0012

Plant

3710

3710

3710

Condition Rate

30.00

35.00

40.00

Condition Currency

EUR

EUR

EUR

Condition Pricing Unit

1

1

1

Calculation Type for Condition

C

C

C

Usage for Condition Technique

PR

PR

PR

Condition Table

SAP017

SAP017

SAP017

On the Edit Info Record screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Entry Value

Entry Value

Application as Condition Technique

M

M

M

Condition Maintenance Group

0MMP010001

0MMP010001

0MMP010001

Maintenance Context

AMMP010001 AMMP010001 AMMP010001

Condition Type

PPR0

PPR0

PPR0

Purchasing Organization

3710

3710

3710

37300002

37300001

37300002

Purchasing info record category

0

0

0

Material Number

TG0012

TG0001

TG0001

Plant

3710

3710

3710

Condition Rate

45.00

10.00

10.00

Condition Currency

EUR

EUR

EUR

Condition Pricing Unit

1

1

1

Calculation Type for Condition

C

C

C

Usage for Condition Technique

PR

PR

PR

Vendor Account Number

CUSTOMER 392

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.

Field Name

Entry Value

Entry Value

Entry Value

Condition Table

SAP017

SAP017

SAP017

Save your entries.

4.5.12.1.4 Condition Maintenance Sales Prices Procedure 1.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: Fiori Application

2.

3.

Edit Info Record

On the Edit Info Record screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Entry Value

Application as Condition Technique

V

V

Condition Maintenance Group

0SDP020001 0SDP020001

Maintenance Context

GCM

GCM

Condition Type

PPR0

PPR0

Sales Organization

3710

3710

Distribution Channel

10

10

Material Number

TG0011

TG0012

Condition Rate

50.00

60.00

Condition Currency

EUR

EUR

Usage for Condition Technique

PR

PR

Condition Table

SAP304

SAP304

Condition Pricing Unit

1

1

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 393

4.5.13

Sample Master Data Ariba Integration [local] (J88)

4.5.13.1

Configuration - On Premise

The following section describes the complete settings for this building block. These settings can be divided into three main groups: 1.

Prerequisite settings that have to be checked and which were delivered by SAP (as part of the standard delivery) The term Check refers to these prerequisite settings.

2.

Settings defined by the customer (in the customer namespace and customerspecific): The system uses automation to request individual customer settings during the personalization process. These settings can be initial or reused from existing SAP ERP layers and are indicated in the text by .

3.

Additional settings that must be made covered either by automation or manual configuration (in the customer namespace). The term Create refers to these additional settings in the text.

4.5.13.1.1 Create Domestic Vendors Procedure 1.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: UI

2.

Manage Supplier Master Data (Transaction /bp)

On the Customer Master Data screen, create the following settings:

CUSTOMER 394

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Entry Value

Business Partner Number

37300080

Business partner category

2

Business Partner Grouping

BP03

Search term 1 for business partner

LIEF80

Form-of-Address Key

3

Name 1 of organization

Domestic NL (Ariba Network)

BP: Legal form of organization

1

BP role

FLVN01 / FLVN00

BP Role Category

FLVN01 / FLVN00

Bank country key

NL

Bank Keys

50070024

Bank account number

240202

Country for telephone/fax number

NL

Telephone no.: dialing code + number

058-2884114

Complete number: dialing code + number + extension

058-2884114

Sequence Number

1

E-Mail Address

[email protected]

Flag: Connected to an SAP System

3

Sequence Number

1

BUS_EI_ADDRESS_TASK

I

City

Leeuwarden

City postal code

8938 AR

Street

Mercuriusweg

House Number

10

Region (State, Province, County)

4

Address time zone

CET

Language Key

D

2-Character SAP Language Code

DE

City file test status

C

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 395

Address Type

XXDEFAULT

Purchasing Organization

3710

Purchase order currency

EUR

Company Code

3710

Key for sorting according to assignment numbers

9

Reconciliation Account in General Ledger

21100000

List of the Payment Methods to be Considered

I

Terms of Payment Key

1

Our account number with the vendor

3710-LIEF80

Planning group

3.

Accounting clerk

1

Purchasing Organization

3710

Currency

EUR

Terms of Payment Key

1

Indicator: GR-Based Invoice Verification

X

Purchasing Group

001

Planned Delivery Time in Days

2

Shipping Conditions

1

Partner Function

LF

Partner counter

0

Default Partner

X

Save your entries.

4.5.13.1.2 Create Info Record Procedure 1.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: UI

2.

Create Info Record (ME11)

On the Maintain Material Prices screen, create the following settings:

CUSTOMER 396

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Description

Entry Value

I_APLFZ

1

I_EKGRP

0001

I_EKORG

Purchasing Organization

3710

I_INCO1

EXW

I_INCO2

VENDOR

I_INFOCAT

Info record Category Indicator

NORMB

I_LIFNR

Vendor's account number

37300080

I_MATNR

Material Number

TG0011

I_NETPR

20

I_NORBM

10

I_PEINH

1

I_UEBTO

10

I_UNTTO

10

I_WAERS

EUR

I_WERKS

Plant

I_XERSN

3710 X

3.

Save your entries.

4.

On the Maintain Material Prices screen, create the following settings:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 397

Field Name

Description

Entry Value

I_APLFZ

10

I_EKGRP

0001

I_EKORG

Purchasing Organization

3710

I_INCO1

EXW

I_INCO2

VENDOR

I_INFOCAT

Info record Category Indicator

NORMB

I_LIFNR

Vendor's account number

37300080

I_MATNR

Material Number

TG0012

I_NETPR

20

I_NORBM

100

I_PEINH

1

I_UEBTO

10

I_UNTTO

10

I_WAERS

EUR

I_WERKS

Plant

3710

I_XERSN 5.

X

Save your entries.

4.5.13.1.3 Map Company Codes for Log. Invoice Procedure 1.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: IMG Menu

Integration with Other SAP Components  SAP Business Suite Integration Component for Ariba  Application-Specific Settings  SAP ERP Integration Component for Ariba  Define SAP-ERP Specific Mapping Settings  Define Mapping Settings for Invoices

2.

In the dialog box, double click Incoming Invoice: Map Company Codes for Logistics Invoice Verification.

3.

On the Change View “Incoming Invoice: Map Company Codes for Logistics Invoice Verification” screen, create the following entry: Vendor

Name of Partner in cXML

37300080 Company Code 3710

Company Code 3710

CUSTOMER 398

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.

Save your entries.

4.5.13.1.4 Map Tax Codes for Logistics Invoice Verification 1.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: IMG Menu

Integration with Other SAP Components  SAP Business Suite Integration Component for Ariba  Application-Specific Settings  SAP ERP Integration Component for Ariba  Define SAP-ERP Specific Mapping Settings  Define Mapping Settings for Invoices

2.

In the dialog box, double click Incoming Invoice: Map Tax Codes for Logistics Invoice Verification.

3.

On the Change View “Incoming Invoice: Map Company Codes for Logistics Invoice Verification” screen, create the following entry: Vendor

Tax Category in cXML

Tax rate in cXML

Country Tax Code

____(blank)

Vat

0

NL

A8

____(blank)

Vat

21

NL

AA

____(blank)

Vat

6

NL

A9

37300080

Vat

0

NL

A8

37300080

Vat

21

NL

AA

6

NL

A9

37300080) Vat

Remark: “vat” has to be entered in lower case!!! 4.

Save your entries.

4.5.14 BP-Customers and -Suppliers CPD, Sample Master Data [local] (BRC) 4.5.14.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.5.14.1.1 Create CPD Customers 1.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: SAP ECC menu

Logistics  Settlement Management  Environment  Master Data  Maintain Business Partner

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 399

Transaction code 2.

BP

On the Maintain Business Partner screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Business Partner Number

37100273

Business partner category

2

Business Partner Grouping

CPDS

Search term 1 for business partner

CPD NL

Form-of-Address Key

0003

Name 1 of organization

Domestic Customer NL CPD

BP: Legal form of organization

01

BP role

FLCU01

BP role

FLCU00

BP role BP role BP Role Category

FLCU01

BP Role Category

FLCU00

BP Role Category BP Role Category Bank country key

NL

Bank Keys IBAN (International Bank Account Number) Industry System Industry sector Tax Number Category Business Partner Tax Number City

Leeuwarden

City postal code

8938 AR

Street House Number Country Key

NL

CUSTOMER 400

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Entry Value

Region (State, Province, County) Address time zone Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered Language Key

NLD

2-Character SAP Language Code

NL

City file test status

C

Country for telephone/fax number

NL

Country ISO code

NL

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

Telephone no.: dialing code + number Complete number: dialing code + number + extension Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone

1

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

19000101

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

E-Mail Address

[email protected]

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

19000101

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

Address Type

XXDEFAULT

Purchasing Organization

3710

Purchase order currency

EUR

External Interface: Tax Indicators

C

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 401

3.

Field Name

Entry Value

Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)

NL

Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)

TTX1

Tax classification for customer

1

Company Code

3710

Key for sorting according to assignment numbers

009

Reconciliation Account in General Ledger

12100000

Payment methods

T

Terms of Payment Key

0001

Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor

3710-CPD

Accounting clerk

01

Sales Organization

3710

Distribution Channel

10

Division

00

Customer group

01

Incoterms (Part 1)

EXW

Incoterms (Part 2)

Leeuwarden

Delivery Priority

02

Shipping Conditions

01

Currency

EUR

Account assignment group for this customer

01

Terms of Payment Key

0001

Delivering Plant (Own or External)

3710

Partner Function

AG

Partner counter

000

Default Partner

X

Save your entries.

4.6 Localization objects for Sales and Distribution

CUSTOMER 402

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.6.1 Sales and Distribution - Common Settings [local] (J94) 4.6.1.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.6.1.1.1 ERP Tax Define Tax Access Sequence Use This activity defines access sequences. The access sequence is a search strategy, which the SAP System uses to search for condition records valid for a condition type. For example, you can define for a price that the SAP System first searches for a customerspecific price and then for a price list price.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: Transaction code

SPRO

IMG menu

Sales and Distribution  Basic Functions  Pricing  Pricing Control  Define Access Sequences

2.

Double click Maintain Access Sequences.

3.

Accept the warning dialog box.

4.

Choose New Entries.

5.

Make the following entries: Field name

Description

User action and values

AcSq

TTX1

Description

Tax on Sales or Purchases

6.

Choose Enter.

7.

Double click Accesses.

8.

Choose New Entries.

9.

Make the following entries:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

Note

CUSTOMER 403

Field name

Description

User action and values

No.

10

Table

002

Requirement

7

10.

Choose Enter.

11.

Save your entries.

12.

Choose Back.

Note

Define Tax Condition Types Use This activity defines condition types. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Sales and Distribution  Basic Functions  Pricing  Pricing Control  Define Condition Types

Transaction Code

SPRO

Table / Delivery Class

T685 / Dev. Class E

BBID Task / File

VV_T685A_VA_VV_T685A_VA_J94.TXT

2.

In the Choose Activity dialog box, double click Maintain Condition Types.

3.

Choose New Entries.

4.

Make the following entries: Source

TTX1 5.

Target

Output Tax TTX1

Comment 1.) Shared CT by SFS and PBP 2.) Delete old CT-Key from name Output Tax Output Tax (MWST)

Make the following entries: Field Name Condition Type

Description

User Action and Values

Comment

TTX1

CUSTOMER 404

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

Description

Output Tax

Access Sequence

TTX1

Comment

Control data 1 Cond. Class

D

Calculat.type

A

Condition Category

D

Rounding Rule

blank

Group condition Group cond.

X

Changes which can be made Manual entries

D

Amount/percent Item condition

X

Delete Master data Delete fr. DB Control data 2 Qty conversion Test determination TextDetPrc Text ID 6.

Save your entries.

7.

Choose Back.

Result You created a new condition type.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 405

Define Tax Determination Rules Use In this section, you define the rules for tax calculation.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP ECC Menu

Sales and Distribution  Basic Functions Taxes  Define Tax Determination Rules

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

On the Change View “Tax: Tax Category by Country”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, maintain the following: Tax Country NL

4.

The Netherlands

Sequence

Tax Category

1

TTX1

Output Tax

Save your entries.

Define Tax Relevancy of Master Records for Customer Taxes Use In this section, you define the tax relevance for customers and materials for each tax category. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP ECC Menu Sales and Distribution  Basic Functions Taxes  Define Tax Relevancy Of Master Records Customer Taxes Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

On the Change View Customer Taxes: Overview screen choose New Entries F 5 .

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, maintain the following: Tax categ.

Tax class

Description

CUSTOMER 406

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.

TTX1

0

Tax Exempt

TTX1

1

Liable for Taxes

Save your entries.

Define Tax Relevancy of Master Records for Material Taxes Use In this section, you define the tax relevance for customers and materials for each tax category. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP ECC Menu Sales and Distribution  Basic Functions Taxes  Define Tax Relevancy Of Master Records Material Taxes Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

On the Change View Material Taxes: Overview screen, choose New Entries F 5 .

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, maintain the following:

4.

Tax categ.

Tax class

Description

TTX1

0

No tax

TTX1

1

Full tax

TTX1

2

Half tax

TTX1

7

Full tax Service

Save your entries.

4.6.1.1.2 Maintain Tax Condition Records Use In this activity you create Tax Condition records for the specific country. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 407

2.

IMG Menu

N/A

Transaction Code

VK15

BBID

J94

Task / File

SMB99_VK15_O200_J01_J94.TXT

On the Create Condition Records screen, make the following entries and choose Execute: Field

Input Value

Condition Type

TTX1

Table

002

3.

On the Create Output Tax Condition (TTX1): Fast Entry screen, in the Country field, enter NL.

4.

To create the Tax Condition Records for Netherlands, make the following entries: Cond.Type Country TaxClassI

TaxClassiI Amount Currency Tax Code

Customer Material

5.

TTX1

NL

0

0

0.000

%

A0

TTX1

NL

0

1

0.000

%

A0

TTX1

NL

1

0

0.000

%

A0

TTX1

NL

1

1

21.000

%

A2

TTX1

NL

0

7

0.000

%

A0

TTX1

NL

1

7

21.000

%

A6

Save your entries.

4.6.2 Sales and Distribution - Common Settings [local] (BD2) 4.6.2.1

Configuration – Cloud Edition

4.6.2.1.1 SD Business Partner Configuration Define Sales Districts 1.

Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code

OVR0

CUSTOMER 408

Localization objects - per Business Priority

IMG Menu

Sales and Distribution  Master Data  Business Partners  Customers  Sales  Define Sales Districts

2.

On the Change View “Customers: Sales Districts”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following data: Sales district

District name

NL0001

Northern Netherlands

NL0002

Southern Netherlands

NL0003

Western Netherlands

NL0004

Eastern Netherlands

NL0005

Middle Netherlands

4.

Save your entries.

5.

Choose Back.

4.6.2.1.2 LIS Configuration Assign Update Group at Header Level Procedure 1.

Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Logistics – General  Logistics Information System (LIS)  Logistics Data Warehouse  Updating  Updating Control  Settings: Sales  Update Group  Assign Update Group at Header Level

Transaction Code

OVRO

2.

Choose New Entries.

3.

Make the following entries: Field Name

User action and values

Sales Org

3710

Dist Channel

10

Division

00

Customer Stats Group

1

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 409

Field Name

User action and values

StatGrpSales Doc

01

Update Group

000001

4.

Save your entries.

5.

Choose

6.

Repeat the above steps, using a StatGrpSalesDoc of 02 and an Update Group of 000002.

Back.

Assign Update Group at Item Level Use In this activity, you make all the necessary settings at item level for the Sales Information System. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Logistics  General  Logistics Information System (LIS)  Logistics Data Warehouse  Updating  Updating Control  Settings: Sales  Update Group  Assign Update Group at Item Level

Transaction Code

OVRP

2.

Choose New Entries.

3.

Make the following entries: Field Name

User action and values

Sales Org

3710

Dist Channel

10

Division

00

Customer Stats Group

1

CustGroupMaterial

1

StatGrpSales Doc

01

StatGrpDocumentItm

1

Update Group

000001

CUSTOMER 410

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.

Save your entries.

5.

Choose

6.

Repeat the above steps, using the following data:

Back.

Field Name

One

Two

Three

Sales Org

3710

3710

3710

Dist Channel

10

10

10

Division

00

00

00

Customer Stats Group

1

1

1

CustGroupMaterial

1

1

1

StatGrpSales Doc

01

02

02

StatGrpDocumentItm

02

01

02

Update Group

000002

000001

000002

4.6.3 Sales and Distribution - Sale from Stock [local] (J04) 4.6.3.1

Configuration - On Premise

The following section describes the complete settings for this building block. These settings can be divided into three main groups: 1.

Prerequisite settings that have to be checked and which were delivered by SAP (as part of the standard delivery) The term Check refers to these prerequisite settings.

2.

Settings defined by the customer (in the customer namespace and customerspecific): The system uses automation to request individual customer settings during the personalization process. These settings can be initial or reused from existing SAP ERP layers and are indicated in the text by .

3.

Additional settings that must be made, covered either by automation or manual configuration (in the customer namespace). The term Create refers to these additional settings in the text.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 411

4.6.3.1.1 SD Core Configuration and Logistics Execution Order Scheduling Defining Floats (Scheduling Margin Key) Use The purpose of this step is to define the scheduling margin key. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Shop Floor Control  Operations  Scheduling  Define Scheduling Margin Key

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

On the Change View “Margins for scheduling”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

Make the following entries:

4.

Plant Key Name 1

Opening Period

Float After Production

Float Before Production

Release Period

3710 000

000

000

000

000

3710 001

010

001

002

005

Save your entries.

Assigning G/L Accounts Use This activity allocates G/L accounts for revenue account determination. You have to make the allocation for every access sequence you have defined beforehand. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: CUSTOMER

412

Localization objects - per Business Priority

IMG Menu

Sales and Distribution  Basic Functions  Account Assignment Costing  Revenue Account Determination  Assign G/L Accounts

Transaction Code

VKOA

2.

On the Assign G/L Accounts screen, double click Table 1.

3.

On the Change View “Cust Grp/MaterialGrp/AcctKey”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

4.

Maintain the following data for C001 Table: App CndTy. ChAc SOrg. AAG AAG ActKy G/L acct V

KOFI

YCOA 3710 01

01

ERL

0041000000

V

KOFI

YCOA 3710 01

01

ERS

0044002000

V

KOFI

YCOA 3710 01

02

ERL

0041000000

V

KOFI

YCOA 3710 01

02

ERS

0044002000

V

KOFI

YCOA 3710 01

03

ERL

0041000000

V

KOFI

YCOA 3710 01

03

ERS

0044002000

V

KOFI

YCOA 3710 02

01

ERL

0041001000

V

KOFI

YCOA 3710 02

01

ERS

0044002100

V

KOFI

YCOA 3710 02

02

ERL

0041001000

V

KOFI

YCOA 3710 02

02

ERS

0044002100

V

KOFI

YCOA 3710 02

03

ERL

0041001000

V

KOFI

YCOA 3710 02

03

ERS

0044002100

V

KOFI

YCOA 3710 03

01

ERL

0041001500

V

KOFI

YCOA 3710 03

02

ERL

0041001500

V

KOFI

YCOA 3710 03

03

ERL

0041001500

5.

Save your entries.

6.

Choose Back.

7.

Repeat the steps for Table C002 with the following data:

Provision acc.

App

CndTy.

ChAc

SOrg.

AAG

ActKy

G/L acct

V

KOFI

YCOA

3710

01

ERL

0041000000

V

KOFI

YCOA

3710

01

ERS

0044002000

V

KOFI

YCOA

3710

01

YB2

0044003000

V

KOFI

YCOA

3710

02

ERL

0041001000

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

Provision acc.

0012550000

CUSTOMER 413

8.

9.

10.

App

CndTy.

ChAc

SOrg.

AAG

ActKy

G/L acct

Provision acc.

V

KOFI

YCOA

3710

02

ERS

0044002100

0012550000

V

KOFI

YCOA

3710

02

YB2

0044003100

V

KOFI

YCOA

3710

03

ERL

0041001500

V

KOFI

YCOA

3710

03

ERS

0044002200

V

KOFI

YCOA

3710

03

YB2

0044003200)

0012550000

Repeat the steps for Table C003 with the following data: App CndTy.

ChAc

SOrg. AAG ActKy G/L acct

V

KOFI

YCOA 3710 01

ERL

0041000000

V

KOFI

YCOA 3710 02

ERL

0041000000

V

KOFI

YCOA 3710 03

ERL

0041000000

Provision acc.

Repeat the steps for Table C004 with the following data: App

CndTy.

ChAc

SOrg.

G/L acct

V

KOFI

YCOA

3710

0041000000

Provision acc.

Repeat the steps for Table C005 with the following data: App CndTy.

ChAc

SOrg.

ActKy

G/L acct

V

YCOA

3710

VST

0012600000

KOFI

11.

Save your entries.

12.

Choose Back.

Provision acc.

Availability Check Availability Check: Defining Checking Groups Default Value Use This activity defines the checking group that the system proposes when you create a new material master record. You can overwrite the default value for the checking group in the material master record. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:

CUSTOMER 414

Localization objects - per Business Priority

IMG Menu

Sales and Distribution  Basic Functions  Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements  Availability Check  Availability Check With ATP Logic or Against Planning  Define Checking Groups Default Value

Transaction Code

SM30 (Customizing Object V_TMVFU)

2.

Choose New Entries.

3.

Enter the following data: Material Type

Plant

Availability Check

SERV

3710

NC

MAT

3710

SR

4.

Save your entries.

5.

Choose Back.

Availability Check: Define Default Settings Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Sales and Distribution  Basic Functions  Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements  Availability Check  Availability Check With ATP Logic or Against Planning  Define Default Settings

2.

Choose New Entries.

3.

Enter the following data: Sales Org.

Distr. Chl

Division

Fixed date and qty

Avail.check rule

3710

10

00

leave empty

C

4.

Save your entries.

5.

Choose Back.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 415

4.6.3.1.2 Sales Order Processing I Sales Organizations - Assigning Order Type Use In this menu option, you allocate the allowed order types to each sales area group. If all sales order types are allowed for each of your sales area, you do not need to make any entries. If you wish to check allowed sales document types, you must set up common sales areas. You must define common sales organizations, common distribution channels, and common divisions. If, for example, you defined common divisions, then you must also define common distribution channels and sales organizations. For this specific step, you enter your group sales organization in the sales organization field. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Sales and Distribution  Sales  Sales Documents  Sales Documents Header  Assign Sales Area To Sales Document Types

Transaction Code

OVAO

2.

In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Combine Sales Organizations.

3.

On the Change View: Sales Organizations – Assign Order Type: Overview screen, make the following entries: Sales Organization

Reference Sales Organization

3710

leave it blank

4.

Save your entries.

5.

Choose Back.

Distribution Channel by Sales Organization - Assign Order Type Use In this menu option, you allocate the allowed order types to each sales area group. CUSTOMER 416

Localization objects - per Business Priority

If all sales order types are allowed for each of your sales area, you do not need to make any entries. If you wish to check allowed sales document types, you must set up common sales areas. This action means you must define common sales organizations, common distribution channels, and common divisions. If, for example, you defined common divisions, you must also define common distribution channels and sales organizations. Set the respective group distribution channel in the distribution channel field.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Sales and Distribution  Sales  Sales Documents  Sales Documents Header  Assign Sales Area To Sales Document Types

Transaction Code

OVAM

2.

In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Combine Distribution Channels.

3.

On the Change View: Distribution by Sales Org – Assign Order Type”: Overview screen, make the following entries: Sales Organization

Reference Distribution Channel

3710

leave it blank

4.

Save your entries.

5.

Choose Back.

Divisions by Sales Organization - Assign Order Type Use In this menu option, you allocate the allowed order types to each sales area group. If all sales order types are allowed for each of your sales area, you do not need to make any entries. If you wish to check allowed sales document types, you must set up common sales areas. You must define common sales organizations, common distribution channels, and common divisions. If, for example, you defined common divisions, then you must also define common distribution channels, and sales organizations. Enter your group division in the division field.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 417

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Sales and Distribution  Sales  Sales Documents  Sales Documents Header  Assign Sales Area To Sales Document Types

Transaction Code

OVAN

2.

In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Combine Divisions.

3.

On the Change View: Divisions by SalesOrg – Assign Order Type”: Overview screen, make the following entries: Sales Organization

Reference Division

3710

leave it blank

4.

Save your entries.

5.

Choose Back.

4.6.3.1.3 Country Specific Sale from Stock Pricing ERP Condition Technique Maintain Pricing Procedure Use In this activity, you define the pricing procedure to be used. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Sales and Distribution  Basic Functions  Pricing  Pricing Control  Define and Assign Pricing Procedures

Transaction Code

SPRO

Table / Delivery Class

T685 / Dev. Class E

In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Maintain Pricing Procedures. CUSTOMER

418

Localization objects - per Business Priority

3.

On the Change View “Procedures”: Overview screen, select the entry for procedure A10002 Materials (Germany), and choose Copy As…

4.

Overwrite the procedure name with A37002, description Materials choose Enter.

5.

In the dialog box, choose Copy all.

6.

Save your entries.

7.

Choose Back.

8.

Save your entries.

9.

Afterwards in procedure A37002 condition types are available as follows:

Usage

Application CT

Step

A

V

PCO1

10

[A37002/10/PCO1]

A

V

PPR0

20

[A37002/20/PPR0]

A

V

PMP0

60

[A37002/60/PMP0]

A

V

A

V

DPG1

120

[A37002/120/DPG1]

A

V

DCM1

130

[A37002/130/DCM1]

A

V

DC01

140

[A37002/140/DC01]

A

V

DM01

150

[A37002/150D/M01]

A

V

DPG2

160

[A37002/160/DPG2]

A

V

DPG3

170

[A37002/170/DPG3]

A

V

DPG4

180

[A37002/180/DPG4]

A

V

DPG5

190

[A37002/190/DPG5]

A

V

DRG1

200

[A37002/200/DRG1]

A

V

DRN1

210

[A37002/210/DRN1]

A

V

DRQ1

220

[A37002/220/DRQ1]

A

V

DRV1

230

[A37002/230/DRV1]

A

V

DRW1 240

A

V

300

A

V

A

V

A

V

100

PNP0

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

Gross Amount

850

Comment

[A37002/100/Gross A]

[A37002/240/DRW1] Sum Surcharges /discounts

310 700

TTX1

Description

(Netherlands), and

[A37002/300/Sum Su] [A37002/310/PNP0]

Net Amount 1

[A37002/700/Net A1] [A37002/850/TTX1] CUSTOMER 419

A

V

DRD1

899

A

V

A

V

DCD1

910

[A37002/910/DCD1]

A

V

PCIP

930

[A37002/930/DCIP]

A

V

900

950

[A37002/899/DRD1] Total Amount

Profit Margin

[A37002/900/Total A]

[A37002/950/Profit M

Remark: Naming convention for additional countries:

Assign Pricing Procedures (Determination in Sales Docs) Use In this activity, you define how the pricing procedure is determined.

CUSTOMER 420

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Sales and Distribution  Basic Functions  Pricing  Pricing Control  Define and Assign Pricing Procedures

Transaction Code

OVKK

Table / Delivery Class

T683V / Dev. Class C

BBID Task / File

V_T683V_V_T683V_J04.TXT

2.

In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Define Pricing Procedure Determination.

3.

On the Change View “Pricing Procedures: Determination in Sales Docs.”: Overview screen, make the following entries: Sales DChl Division DoPr CuPP Org.

PriPr.

CTyp

Comment

3710 10

00

A

A37002 PPR0

Netherlands, Material,

3710 10

00

A

01

Netherlands, Material,

4.

Save your entries.

5.

Choose Back.

A37002 PPR0

4.6.3.1.4 Delivery and Transportation Schedule Define Schedule by Shipping Point Use In this step, you assign the working hours to the shipping point.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

IMG  Logistic Execution  Shipping v Basic Shipping Functions  Scheduling  Delivery Scheduling and

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 421

Transportation Scheduling  Define Scheduling by Shipping Point Transaction Code 2.

OVLZ

Choose New Entries, and make the following entries: Field Name

3.

Description User Action and Values Comment

Shipping Point

3710

Factory calendar

NL

Determine load. time

C

Loading time w.days

0,50

Det.pick/pack time

C

Pick/pack time wrkdys

0,50

Choose Detail

Save your entries.

4.6.3.1.5 Routes Define Routes and Stages Use Routes are used for transport scheduling and for the execution of the scheduling. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

IMG  Logistic Execution  Shipping  Basic Shipping Functions  Routes  Define Routes  Define Routes and Stages

Transaction Code

0VTC

2.

Choose New Entries.

3.

Enter the following data: Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

Route

Route Number

TR0001

Comment

CUSTOMER 422

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

Description

Truck/0days lead time/1day transit time

Shipping Type

01 - Truck

Transit duration in calendar days

1,00

Comment

Transportation lead time in calendar days Factory cal

Factory calendar key

4.

Save your entries.

5.

Choose Back F 3

6.

Repeat the steps for the following data: Route

Route Description

Shipping Transit duration type in calendar days

TR0002 Truck/0days lead time/2days transit time

01

TR0100 Truck/1day lead time /0days transit time

01

TR0101 Truck/1day lead time /1day transit time

01

TR0102 Truck/1day lead time /2days transit time

01

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

99

Transportation lead time in calendar days

2,00

Factory calendar key

99

1,00

99

1,00

1,00

99

2,00

1,00

99

CUSTOMER 423

Define Transportation Zones Use This activity defines transportation zones according to country, and depending on your company's needs. Transportation zones represent delivery recipient (ship-to party) regions, or delivery shipper (vendor) regions.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Alternative IMG paths: Sales and Distribution  Basic Functions  Routes  Route Determination  Define Transportation Zones OR Logistics Execution  Shipping  Basic Shipping Functions  Routes  Route Determination  Define Transportation Zones OR Logistics Execution  Transportation  Basic Transportation Functions  Routes  Route Determination  Define Transportation Zones

Transaction Code

OVR1

2.

On the Change View “Customers: Transportation Zones”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

Make the following entries:

4.

Ctry

TranspZone

Description

NL

3700000001

Region North

NL

3700000002

Region South

Save your entries.

CUSTOMER 424

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Maintain Country and Transportation Zone for Shipping Point Use In this IMG activity, you can assign countries and transportation zones for each shipping point.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

2.

IMG  Logistic Execution  Shipping  Basic Shipping Functions  Routes  Route Determination  Maintain Country And Transportation Zone For Shipping Point

Choose New Entries, and make the following entries: Shipping Point

Country

Transportation Zone

3710

NL

3700000002

3.

Save your entries.

4.

Choose Back F 3

Maintain Route Determination Use In this step you define how the route is being determined by the system.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

2.

IMG  Logistic Execution  Shipping  Basic Shipping Functions  Routes  Route Determination  Maintain Route Determination

Choose New Entries, and make the following entries: Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

CDep

Country of Depart

NL

DepZ

Departure Zone

3700000002

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

Comment

CUSTOMER 425

Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

DstC

Destination Country

NL

RecZ

Transportation Zone

0000000001

Comment

3.

Select the new entry.

4.

Go to sub dialog Route Determination Without Weight Group (Order), and make the following entries: Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

SC

Shipping Condition

01

TGroup

0001

Proposed route

TR0002

SC

Shipping Condition

02

TGroup

0001

Proposed route

TR0100

SC

Shipping Condition

03

TGroup

0001

Proposed route

TR0001

SC

Shipping Condition

Comment

04

TGroup

0001

Proposed route

TR0102

5.

Choose Back F 3 .

6.

Choose New Entries, and make the following entries: Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

CDep

Country of Depart

NL

DepZ

Departure Zone

3700000002

DstC

Destination Country

NL

RecZ

Transportation Zone

0000000002

Comment

7.

Select the new entry.

8.

Go to sub dialog Route Determination Without Weight Group (Order), and make the following entries: Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

SC

Shipping Condition

01

TGroup

0001

Proposed route

TR0001

Comment

CUSTOMER 426

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

SC

Shipping Condition

02

TGroup

0001

Proposed route

TR0100

SC

Shipping Condition

9.

03

TGroup

0001

Proposed route

TR0001

SC

Shipping Condition

Comment

04

TGroup

0001

Proposed route

TR0101

Save your entries.

4.6.4 Sales and Distribution - Sale from Stock [local] (BD5) 4.6.4.1

Configuration – Cloud Edition

4.6.4.1.1 SD Core Configuration and Logistics Execution Logistics Execution Assign Purchasing Data Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code

SM30 (Customizing Object V_TVFP)

IMG Menu

Logistics Execution  Transportation  Shipment Costs  Settlement  Assign Purchasing Data

Choose New Entries, then maintain the following data: TPPt

SCTy

POrg

PGr

Plnt

3710

0001

3710

001

3710

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 427

4.

Choose Back.

Pricing_Stock_Country_Specific_BL Maintain Pricing Procedure Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Sales and Distribution  Basic Functions  Pricing  Pricing Control  Define and Assign Pricing Procedures

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Maintain Pricing Procedures.

3.

Choose New Entry and enter in Y37101.

4.

Select Pricing procedure Y37101, choose Control Data and make following entries: Condition Type

Manual only

Account Required Print Subtotal Statistical key

TTX1

A

PCIP

MWS B

DCD1

X X

DRD1

X

YZWR

ERS S

ERL #3

YBHD

X

S

#4

a

#2

ERF

PNP0

X

ERL

DRW1

X

a

YB3

DRV1

X

a

YB3

DRQ1

X

a

YB3

DRN1

X

a

YB3

DRG1

X

a

YB3

DPG5

a

YB2

DPG4

a

YB2

CUSTOMER 428

Localization objects - per Business Priority

DPG3

a

YB1

DPG2

a

YB2

DM01

a

YB1

YK07

X

YB2

DC01

a

YB2

DCM1

a

YB2

DPG1

a

YB2

a PMP0

X

ERL

PPR0 PCO1

#1

X

ERL

X

5.

Save your entries.

6.

Choose Back.

B

ERL

Assign Pricing Procedures (Determination in Sales Docs) Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Sales and Distribution  Basic Functions  Pricing  Pricing Control  Define and Assign Pricing Procedures

Transaction Code

OVKK

2.

In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Define Pricing Procedure Determination.

3.

On the Change View “Pricing Procedures: Determination in Sales Docs.”: Overview screen, make the following entries: Sales Org.

DChl

Division

DoPr

3710

10

00

Y1

3710

10

00

Y1

4.

Save your entries.

5.

Choose Back.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CuPP

01

PriPr.

CTyp

Y37101

PPR0

Y37101

PPR0

CUSTOMER 429

Assign G/L Account Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Sales and Distribution  Basic Functions  Account Assignment Costing  Revenue Account Determination  Assign G/L Accounts

Transaction Code

VKOA

2.

On the Assign G/L Accounts screen, double click Table 5.

3.

On the Change View “Acct Key”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

4.

Maintain the following data: App CndTy ChAc SOrg.

ActKy

G/L acct

V

KOFI

YCOA 3710

VST

12600000

V

KOFI

YCOA 3710

ERF

52590000

V

KOFI

YCOA 3710

YB1

44004000

V

KOFI

YCOA 3710

YB3

44006000

V

KOFI

YCOA 3710

YB4

44005000

5.

Save your entries.

6.

Choose Back.

Accruals Account

Availability Check Define Checking Groups Default Value Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Sales and Distribution  Basic Functions  Availability Check and Transfer of Requirements  Availability Check  Availability Check With ATP Logic or Against Planning  Define Checking Groups Default value

Transaction Code

OVZ3

Choose New Entries. CUSTOMER

430

Localization objects - per Business Priority

3.

4.

Enter the following data: Material Type

Plant

Availability Check

FERT

3710

Y2

HAWA

3710

Y2

LEIH

3710

Y2

Save your entries.

Define Print Parameters Set Print Parameters Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Logistics Execution  Shipping  Basic Shipping Functions  Output Control  Define print parameters shipping

Transaction Code

VP01SHP

2.

On the Maintain Print Parameters screen, locate and double click Delivery Note (LD00).

3.

Choose New Entries and maintain the following data: Ship Point

Output Device

Name

3710



LIST1S LD00

4.

Save your entries.

5.

Choose Back.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

Suffix 1

Suffix 2

Immediate Release

LIEFER X

CUSTOMER 431

Define Print Parameters Define Print Parameters for Sales Header Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Sales and Distribution  Basic Functions  Output Control  Define Print Parameters

Transaction Code

VP01

2.

On the Maintain Print Parameters screen, locate and double click Inquiry (AF00).

3.

Choose New Entries and maintain the following data: SOrg

Output Device

3710

Name

Suffix 1

LIST1S AF00

4.

Save your entries.

5.

Choose Back.

6.

Repeat the steps for the following data: CTyp SOrg. Output Device

Suffix 2

Immediate Release

ANFRAGE Checked

Name Suffix 1 Suffix 2

Immediate Release

AN00 3710 LIST1S AN00

ANGEBOT X

BA00 3710 LIST1S BA00

AUFTRAG X

CUSTOMER 432

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.6.4.1.2 SD Process Configuration I Sales Order Processing I Assign sales area to credit control area Procedure 1.

Access the transaction using one of the following navigation options: Transaction Code

2.

OVFL

On the Change View “Sales Area: Allocation to Credit Control Area”: Overview screen, make the following entries in row CCAr: SOrg.

DChl

DV

CCAr

3710

10

00

A000

4.6.4.1.3 Master Data Output - condition records: Sales Procedure 1.

Access the transaction using the following transaction code: Transaction Code

2.

VV11

On the Create Output screen, make the following entries: Field Name

Description

Output Type

User Action and Values

Comment

AN00/BA00

3.

Choose Key Combination.

4.

Make the following entries: Output Sales Dispatch SalesDocType Function Medium Lang. Type Organization Time AN00

QT

SP

1

4

AN00

3710

OR

SP

1

4

BA00

3710

OR

SP

1

4

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 433

5.

Choose Communication and enter the required output device, choose Print Immediately and Release after Output.

Create condition records LD00 Procedure 1.

Access the transaction using the following transaction code: Transaction code

2.

VV21

On the Create Output screen, make the following entries: Field Name

Description

Output Type

User Action and Values

Comment

LD00

3.

Choose Key Combination.

4.

Enter the required customer.

5.

Make the following entries: Output Type

Shipping point

Partner Function

Medium

Dispatch Time

LD00

3710

SH

1

4

Lang.

6.

Choose Communication and enter the required output device, choose Print Immediately and Release after Output.

7.

Save your entries

4.6.4.2

Manual Rework

If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity

Manual transport possible

Manual action in target system / client required

Output Condition Records: Sales

No

Yes

Output Condition Records: LD00

No

Yes

Remarks

In case a manual transport is possible please proceed as follows: CUSTOMER 434

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Logon to the source system / client. 1.

Go to the respective customizing activity as described in the respective section.

2.

Select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request. Most likely this can be done by choosing Table View -> Transport. If this is not possible please refer to the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity.

3.

The newly created transport request needs to be released and imported in the target system / client.

Remark: Please also check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information. 1.

In case manual action in the target system / client is required please proceed as follows:

2.

Logon to the target system / client.

3.

Go to the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.

4.6.5 Sample Master Data Business Partners [local] (JA2) Both Material Management and Sales and Distribution are using the business partner master data. Please check which area is responsible for the configuration.

4.6.5.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.6.5.1.1 Create Domestic Customers 1.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: SAP GUI Transaction

BP _Maintain Business Partner (Enter in the transaction call field)

Access via FIORI Launchpad in an OP (On Premise) environment: Business Role ID and

SAP_BR_BUPA_MASTER_SPECIALIST

Name

Master Data Specialist - Business Partner Data

Access via FIORI Launchpad in a CLOUD environment: Business Catalog Role ID

SAP_BCR_CMD_BP_MAINT_PC

and Name

Master Data - Business Partner

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 435

2.

Choose the Maintain Business Partner tile to launch the application from the FIORI Launchpad or call the transaction /bp in a SAP GUI environment

3.

On the Customer Master Data screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Business Partner Number

37100001

Business partner category

2

Business Partner Grouping

BP03

Search term 1 for business partner

KLANT1

Form-of-Address Key

3

Name 1 of organization

Binnenlandse klant 1

BP: Legal form of organization

1

BP role

FLCU01

BP role

UDM000

BP Role Category

FLCU01

BP Role Category

UDM000

Bank country key

NL

Bank Keys

ING

Bank account number

005544999

Industry System

1

Industry sector

91

Tax Number Category

NL0

Business Partner Tax Number

NL001234560B01

City

Apeldoorn

City postal code

7322 HR

Street

Korfstraat

House Number

1

Country Key

NL

Region (State, Province, County)

GE

Address time zone

CET

Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered

2

CUSTOMER 436

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Entry Value

Language Key

N

2-Character SAP Language Code

NL

City file test status

C

Country for telephone/fax number

NL

Country ISO code

NL

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

Telephone no.: dialing code + number

+31 26 12345

Complete number: dialing code + number +extension

+31 26 12345

Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone

1

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

10101

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

E-Mail Address

[email protected]

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

19000101

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

Address Type

XXDEFAULT

Purchasing Organization

3710

Purchase order currency

EUR

External Interface: Tax Indicators

I

Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)

NL

Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)

TTX1

Tax classification for customer

1

Company Code

3710

Key for sorting according to assignment numbers

9

Reconciliation Account in General Ledger

0012100000

Terms of Payment Key

4

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 437

Field Name

Entry Value

Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor

3710-CUST1

Accounting clerk

1

Sales Organization

3710

Distribution Channel

10

Division

00

Customer group

1

Incoterms (Part 1)

EXW

Incoterms (Part 2)

's-Hertogenbosch

Delivery Priority

2

Shipping Conditions

01

Currency

EUR

Account assignment group for this customer

1

Terms of Payment Key

4

Delivering Plant (Own or External)

3710

Partner Function

AG

Partner counter

0

Default Partner

X

4.

Save your entries.

5.

On the Customer Master Data screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Business Partner Number

37100002

Business partner category

2

Business Partner Grouping

BP03

Search term 1 for business partner

KLANT2

Form-of-Address Key

3

Name 1 of organization

Binnenlandse klant 1

BP: Legal form of organization

1

BP role

FLCU01

BP role

UDM000

CUSTOMER 438

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Entry Value

BP Role Category

FLCU01

BP Role Category

UDM000

Bank country key

NL

Bank Keys

ABN

Bank account number

#009876543

Industry System

1

Industry sector

91

Tax Number Category

NL1

Business Partner Tax Number

NL001234560B02

City

Arnhem

City postal code

3012 CL

Street

Keizersgracht

House Number

2

Country Key

NL

Region (State, Province, County)

GE

Address time zone

CET

Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered

1

Language Key

N

2-Character SAP Language Code

NL

City file test status

C

Country for telephone/fax number

NL

Country ISO code

NL

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

Telephone no.: dialing code +number

+31 55 12345

Complete number: dialing code + number + extension

+31 55 12345

Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone

1

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

10101

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 439

Field Name

Entry Value

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

E-Mail Address

[email protected]

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

10101

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

Address Type

XXDEFAULT

Purchasing Organization

3710

Purchase order currency

EUR

External Interface: Tax Indicators

I

Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)

NL

Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)

TTX1

Tax classification for customer

1

Company Code

NL

Key for sorting according to assignment numbers

9

Reconciliation Account in General Ledger

0012100000

Terms of Payment Key

4

Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor

3710-CUST2

Accounting clerk

1

Sales Organization

3710

Distribution Channel

10

Division

00

Customer group

1

Incoterms (Part 1)

EXW

Incoterms (Part 2)

's-Hertogenbosch

Delivery Priority

2

Shipping Conditions

01

Currency

EUR

Account assignment group for this customer

1

Terms of Payment Key

4

CUSTOMER 440

Localization objects - per Business Priority

6.

Field Name

Entry Value

Delivering Plant (Own or External)

3710

Partner Function

AG

Partner counter

0

Default Partner

X

Save your entries.

4.6.5.1.2 Create Domestic Vendors Choose the Maintain Business Partner tile to launch the application from the FIORI Launchpad or call the transaction /bp in a SAP GUI environment Field Name

Entry Value

Business Partner Number

37300001

Business partner category

2

Business Partner Grouping

BP03

Search term 1 for business partner

LEV01

Form-of-Address Key

3

Name 1 of organization

Binnenlandse leverancier NL 01

BP: Legal form of organization

1

BP role

FLVN01

BP Role Category

FLVN01

Bank country key

NL

Bank Keys

ABN

Bank account number

0544044150

Tax Number Category

NL

Business Partner Tax Number

NL001234560B02

City

Amsterdam

City postal code

1071 DG

Street

Honthorststraat

House Number

1

Country Key

NL

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 441

Field Name

Entry Value

Region (State, Province, County)

NH

Address time zone

CET

Language Key

N

2-Character SAP Language Code

NL

City file test status

C

Country for telephone/fax number

NL

Country ISO code

NL

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

Telephone no.: dialing code + number

+31 71 5232 0

Complete number: dialing code + number + extension

+31 71 5232 0

Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone

1

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

10101

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

E-Mail Address

[email protected]

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

10101

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

Address Type

XXDEFAULT

Purchasing Organization

3710

Purchase order currency

EUR

Company Code

3710

Key for sorting according to assignment numbers

9

Reconciliation Account in General Ledger

21100000

CUSTOMER 442

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Entry Value

List of the Payment Methods to be Considered

T

Terms of Payment Key

4

Our account number with the vendor

3710-LEV01

Accounting clerk

1

Purchasing Organization

3710

Currency

EUR

Terms of Payment Key

4

Indicator: GR-Based Invoice Verification

X

Group for Calculation Schema (Vendor)

1

Purchasing Group

1

Planned Delivery Time in Days

2

Shipping Conditions

1

Partner Function

LF

Partner counter

0

Default Partner

X

7.

Save your entries.

8.

On the Customer Master Data screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Business Partner Number

37300002

Business partner category

2

Business Partner Grouping

BP03

Search term 1 for business partner

LEV01

Form-of-Address Key

3

Name 1 of organization

Binnenlandse leverancier NL 02

BP: Legal form of organization

1

BP role

FLVN01

BP Role Category

FLVN01

Bank country key

NL

Bank Keys

ABN

Bank account number

0265425328

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 443

Field Name

Entry Value

Tax Number Category

NL01

Business Partner Tax Number

NL001234560B05

City

Leiden

City postal code

2311 CV

Street

Kerkstraat

House Number

2

Country Key

NL

Region (State, Province, County)

DR

Address time zone

CET

Language Key

N

2-Character SAP Language Code

NL

City file test status

C

Country for telephone/fax number

NL

Country ISO code

NL

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

Telephone no.: dialing code + number

0592 362-0

Complete number: dialing code + number + extension

05292 362-0

Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone

1

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

10101

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

E-Mail Address

[email protected]

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

10101

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

CUSTOMER 444

Localization objects - per Business Priority

9.

Field Name

Entry Value

Address Type

XXDEFAULT

Purchasing Organization

3710

Purchase order currency

EUR

Company Code

3710

Key for sorting according to assignment numbers

9

Reconciliation Account in General Ledger

21100000

List of the Payment Methods to be Considered

T

Terms of Payment Key

4

Our account number with the vendor

3710- LEV01

Accounting clerk

1

Purchasing Organization

3710

Currency

EUR

Terms of Payment Key

4

Indicator: GR-Based Invoice Verification

X

Group for Calculation Schema (Vendor)

1

Purchasing Group

1

Planned Delivery Time in Days

3

Shipping Conditions

1

Partner Function

LF

Partner counter

0

Default Partner

X

Save your entries.

4.6.5.1.3 Create Domestic Contacts for Business Partners Procedure 1.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: SAP GUI Transaction

BP _Maintain Business Partner (Enter in the transaction call field)

Access via FIORI Launchpad in an OP (On Premise) environment: How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 445

Business Role ID and

SAP_BR_BUPA_MASTER_SPECIALIST

Name

Master Data Specialist - Business Partner Data

Access via FIORI Launchpad in a CLOUD environment:

2.

Business Catalog Role ID

SAP_BCR_CMD_BP_MAINT_PC

and Name

Master Data - Business Partner

Choose the Maintain Business Partner tile to launch the application from the FIORI Launchpad or call the transaction /bp in a SAP GUI environment Field Name

Entry Value

Entry Value

Entry Value

Entry Value

Business Partner Number

37910001

37910002

37910003

37910004

Business partner category

1

1

1

1

Business Partner Grouping

BP03

BP03

BP03

BP03

37910001

37910002

37910003

3791000

Search term 1 for business partner

4 Form-of-Address Key

1

2

1

2

First name of business partner (person)

Alina

Alexander

Barbara

Bernd

Last name of business partner (person)

Mueller

Linke

Meger

Fischer

Sex of business partner (person)

1

2

1

2

Business Partner: Correspondence Language

N

N

N

N

2-Character SAP Language Code

NL

NL

NL

NL

BP role

BUP001

BUP001

BUP001

BUP001

BP Role Category

BUP001

BUP001

BUP001

BUP001

Country for telephone/fax number

NL

NL

NL

NL

City

Apeldoorn

Apeldoorn

Arnhem

Arnhem

City postal code

7322 HR

7322 HR

3012 C

3012 C

CUSTOMER 446

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Entry Value

Entry Value

Entry Value

Entry Value

Street

Amerikastraat

Amerikastraat 1

Keizersgracht

Keizersgracht

House Number

1

2

1

2

Region (State, Province, County)

GE

GE

GE

GE

Address time zone

CET

CET

CET

CET

Language Key

N

N

N

N

2-Character SAP Language Code

NL

NL

NL

NL

Country for telephone/fax number

NL

NL

NL

NL

Country ISO code

NL

NL

NL

NL

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

X

X

X

Telephone no.: dialing code + number

09990 4513-0

09990 4513-0

09990 41252-0

09990 41252-0

Telephone no.: Extension

01

02

01

02

Complete number: dialing code +number +extension

09990 4513-12

09990 4513-32

09990 41252212

09990 41252221

Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone

1

1

1

1

Sequence Number

1

1

1

1

Communication Data: 10101 Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

10101

10101

10101

Communication Data: 99991231 Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

99991231

99991231

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

X

X

X

E-Mail Address

alina.mueller alexander.linke barbara.meger bernd.fischer @37100001.com @37100001.com @37100002.com @37100002.com

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 447

Field Name

Entry Value

Entry Value

Entry Value

Entry Value

Communication Data: 10101 Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

10101

10101

10101

Communication Data: 99991231 Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

99991231

99991231

Address Type

XXDEFAULT

XXDEFAULT

XXDEFAULT

XXDEFAULT

Business Partner Number

37100001

37100001

37100002

37100002

37910005

37910006

37910007

3791008

Business Partner Number

4 Business Partner Relationship Category

BUR001

BUR001

BUR001

BUR001

Remark: In the UI transaction you need to create a "Relationship" of the BP-Employee to the indicated BP-Customers. The relationship type BUR001 is shown as "Is Employee of …" Validity Date (Valid To)

99991231

99991231

99991231

99991231

Validity Date (Valid From)

10101

10101

10101

10101

Function of partner

3

2

2

3

Department

3

2

2

3

First telephone no.: dialing code + number

05777- 4513-0

05777- 4513-0

026 41252-0

026 41252-0

First Telephone No.: Extension

12

32

212

221

E-Mail Address

alina.mueller alexander.linke barbara.meger bernd.fischer @37100001.com @37100001.com @37100002.com @37100002.com

Sales Organization

3710

3710

3710

3710

Distribution Channel

10

10

10

10

CUSTOMER 448

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Division 3.

0

0

0

0

Save your entries.

How to localize with SAP Best Practices Localization objects - per Business Priority

CUSTOMER 449

4.6.6

Free of Charge Delivery [local] (BDC)

4.6.6.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.6.6.1.1 Creating Condition Records for Output Type Use In this activity, you create the condition records for output type BA00.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Output→ Sales Document → Create

Transaction Code

VV11

2.

On the Create Output – Condition Records: Sales screen, enter the output type BA00 and choose Enter.

3.

On the Create Condition Records (Order Confirmation): Fast Entry screen, make the following entries: Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

Sales Organization

3710

Sales Document Type

CBFD

Function

SP

Comment

Partner Medium

1

Date/Time

4

Language 4.

Save your entries.

5.

Choose Back.

CUSTOMER 450

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Result You created the output condition record for output type BA00 and sales document type CBFD.

4.6.7

Customer Returns [local] (BDF)

4.6.7.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.6.7.1.1 Creating Condition Records BA00 Use In this activity you create the condition records for output type BA00.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Output → Sales Document → Create

Transaction Code

VV11

2.

On the Create Output – Condition Records: Sales screen, in the Output Type field, enter BA00 and choose Enter.

3.

On the Create Condition Records (Order Confirmation): Fast Entry screen, make the following entries: Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

Sales Organization

3710

Sales Document Type

CBRE

Function

SP

Partner Medium

1

Date/Time

4

Language 4.

Save your entries.

5.

Choose Back.

Comment

Result You have created the output condition record for output type BA00 and sales document type CBRE.

4.6.8 Returnable Packaging (LEIH) related sample master data [local] (BDZ) 4.6.8.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.6.8.1.1 Create Material Master – Organization Dependency View for Returnable Packaging Use In this activity, you create trading materials.

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the transaction choosing one of the following navigation options: SAP menu

Logistics  Materials Management  Material Master  Material  Create (General)  Immediately

Transaction code

MM01

On the initial screen, make the following entries and press Enter: Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

Comment

Material



Industry sector

M Mechanical Engineer

Material type

LEIH Returnable Packaging

General Plant Data / Storage 1/2 3.

Choose the Plant data/stor.1/2 tab, view entries and choose Enter to continue. Field Name Plant

Description User Action and Values

Comment

3710

CUSTOMER 452

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Description User Action and Values

Stor. location

Comment see table below for material- and plant-specific data

Material

Plant

Stor. location

RP001

3710

371A

RP001

3710

371R

4.

Choose Enter to go to the second screen.

5.

Choose Save to go to the initial screen.

6.

On the initial screen, make the following entries and choose Enter: Field Name

7.

Description

User Action and Values

Material



Industry sector

M Mechanical Engineer

Material type

HAWA trading goods

Material

Plant

Stor. location

RP001

3710



Comment

On the Select View(s) dialog box, select the following views and press Enter:

 Sales Org. Data 1 and 2, Sales General Plant Data  MRP views 1, 2, 3 and 4  Accounting 1 and 2 8.

Make the following entries and press Enter. Field Name

Description User Action and Values

Comment

Plant

3710

first create the materials for plant 1010, see table below for further plants

Stor. location



f

Sales Org.

3710

Distr.Channel

10

Material

Plant 1

Sales Org. 1

Sales Org. 2

Warehouse 1

Warehouse 2

RP001

3710

3710

Sales Data 9.

Choose the Sales: sales org. 1 tab.

10.

Make the following entries and press Enter: Field Name

Description User Action and Values

Delivering plant

3710

Tax classification ("TTX1")

1 for taxable

11.

Choose the Sales: sales org. 2 tab.

12.

Make the following entries and press Enter: Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

Acct assignment grp

Y2

Item category group

CB02

13.

Choose the Sales: General/plant tab.

14.

Make the following entries and press Enter: Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

Availability check

SP

Trans. Grp

0001

LoadingGrp

0001

Profit Center

YB111

Comment

Comment

Comment

15.

Choose the Sales text tab.

16.

Enter text that should appear on sales documents for this material.

MRP Data 17.

Choose the MRP tab (ENTER does not work when the cursor is in a text field)

18.

Choose the MRP1 tab.

19.

Make the following entries and press Enter. Field Name MRP type

Description

User Action and Values

Comment

ND

Reorder point MRP controller

001

CUSTOMER 454

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

20.

Choose the MRP2 tab.

21.

Make the following entries and press Enter. Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

Procurement Type

F

Planned Delivery Time

10

22.

Choose the MRP3 tab.

23.

View the values and press Enter.

24.

Choose the MRP4 tab.

25.

View the values and press Enter.

Comment

Comment

Accounting Data 26.

Choose the Accounting 1 tab.

27.

Make the following entries and press Enter. Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

Price unit

1

Valuation Class

3050

Price Control

V

Standard price

5

Comment

28.

Select the second accounting screen, and press Enter.

29.

On the Last data screen reached dialog box, choose Yes to save your entries.

Result The trading materials are created.

4.6.8.1.2 Create Pricing Conditions Use The SAP Baseline Package scenarios require several pricing conditions.

Procedure 1.

Access the transaction using the following transaction code: Transaction code

VK15

2.

On the Create Condition Records screen, enter PPR0 in the input field Condition type and 304 in the input field Table.

3.

Choose Key combination.

4.

In the Key Combination dialog box, select Material with release status.

5.

Choose Continue E n t e r .

6.

In the Valid From field enter the

and in the Valid to field enter

Sales Organization

Distribution Channel

Material

Condition Price Unit

Amount

3710

10

RP001

1

5

7.

Choose Enter.

8.

Save your entries.

9.

Choose Back F 3 .

Result The pricing conditions have been created.

4.6.9

Returnables Processing [local] (BDY)

4.6.9.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.6.9.1.1 Master Data Creating Output Condition for Confirmation Use The output condition is created to enable printing of a confirmation-document for the customer.

CUSTOMER 456

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: User Menu

Logistics  Sales and Distribution  Master Data  Output  Sales Document  Create

Transaction Code

VV11

On the Create Output – Condition Records: Billing screen, choose BA00:

Order

Confirmation. 3.

Choose Enter.

4.

On the Create Condition Records (Order Confirmation): Fast Entry screen, make the following entries: Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

Sales Document Type

CBG0

Partner Function

SP

Medium

1

Date/Time

4

5.

Select the entry and choose Communication. Select the print option Print immediately.

6.

Save your entries.

7.

Choose Back F 3 .

Result The output condition BA00 for the immediately confirmation-printout is created.

4.6.10 SEPA Direct Debit Handling in Sales and Distribution (BKW) 4.6.10.1

Configuration – On-Premise

4.6.10.1.1 Output Control Create Condition Record BA00_CBDD 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:

Transaction Code

VV11

IMG Menu

Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Output→ Sales Document → Create

2.

On the Create Output – Condition Records: Sales screen, enter the output type BA00 and choose Enter.

3.

On the Create Condition Records (Order Confirmation): Fast Entry screen, make the following entries: Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

Sales Organization

3710

Sales Document Type

CBDD

Function

SP

Medium

1

Date/Time

4

4.

Save your entries.

5.

Choose Back.

Comment

4.6.10.2 Manual Rework If you need to apply the Manual Rework procedure additional manual activities are required. These activities are listed in the table below. Configuration activity

Manual transport possible

Manual action in target system / client required

3.1.1 Create Condition Record BA00_CBDD

No

Yes

Remarks

In case a manual transport is possible please proceed as follows: Logon to the source system / client. 1.

Go to the respective customizing activity as described in the respective section.

2.

Select all relevant table entries and put them into a transport request. Most likely this can be done by choosing Table View -> Transport. If this is not possible please refer to the more detailed instructions given in the respective section of the effected customizing activity. CUSTOMER

458

Localization objects - per Business Priority

3.

The newly created transport request needs to be released and imported in the target system / client.

Remark: Please also check the documentation for the related IMG activity regarding specific information. In case manual action in the target system / client is required please proceed as follows: 1.

Logon to the target system / client.

2.

Go to the respective customizing activity and make the relevant settings as described in the respective section.

4.6.11 BP-Customers and -Suppliers, Sample Master Data [local] (BN6) Both Material Management and Sales and Distribution are using the business partner master data. Please check which area is responsible for the configuration.

4.6.11.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.6.11.1.1 Create Domestic Customers 1.

2.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: SAP ECC menu

Logistics  Settlement Management  Environment  Master Data  Maintain Business Partner

Transaction code

BP

On the Maintain Business Partner screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Business Partner Number

37100003

Business partner category

2

Business Partner Grouping

BP03

Search term 1 for business partner

Customer3

Form-of-Address Key

3

Name 1 of organization

Domestic NL 3

BP: Legal form of organization

1

BP role

FLCU01

Field Name

Entry Value

BP role

UDM000

BP role

FLCU00

BP Role Category

FLCU01

BP Role Category

UDM000

BP Role Category

FLCU00

Bank country key

NL

Bank Keys

ING

Bank account number IBAN (International Bank Account Number)

NL40INGB0005544499

Industry System

0001

Industry sector

91

Tax Number Category

NL0

Business Partner Tax Number

NL001234560B03

City

Duivendrecht

City postal code

1114 AJ

Street

Oostweg

House Number

2

Country Key

NL

Region (State, Province, County)

GE

Address time zone

CET

Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered

0000000002

Language Key

NL

2-Character SAP Language Code

NL

City file test status

C

Country for telephone/fax number

NL

Country ISO code

NL

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

Telephone no.: dialing code + number

20 570 1922

Complete number: dialing code + number + extension

20 570 1923

CUSTOMER 460

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Entry Value

Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone

1

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

01.01.1900

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

31.12.9999

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

E-Mail Address

[email protected]

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

01.01.1900

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

31.12.9999

Address Type

XXDEFAULT

Purchasing Organization

3710

Purchase order currency

EUR

External Interface: Tax Indicators

C

Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)

NL

Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)

TTX1

Tax classification for customer

1

Company Code

3710

Key for sorting according to assignment numbers

9

Reconciliation Account in General Ledger

0012100000

List of the Payment Methods to be Considered

T

Terms of Payment Key

NT30

Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor

3710-CUST3

Accounting clerk

01

Sales Organization

3710

Distribution Channel

10

Division

00

Field Name

Entry Value

Customer group

01

Incoterms (Part 1)

EXW

Incoterms (Part 2)

Amsterdam

Delivery Priority

02

Shipping Conditions

01

Currency

EUR

Account assignment group for this customer

01

Terms of Payment Key

0004

Delivering Plant (Own or External)

3710

Partner Function

AG (RE, RG, WE)

Partner counter

000

Default Partner

X

3.

Save your entries.

4.

On the Maintain Business Partner screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Business Partner Number

37100004

Business partner category

2

Business Partner Grouping

BP03

Search term 1 for business partner

Customer 4

Form-of-Address Key

0003

Name 1 of organization

Domestic NL 4

BP: Legal form of organization

01

BP role

FLCU01

BP role

UDM000

BP role

FLCU00

BP Role Category

FLCU01

BP Role Category

UDM000

BP Role Category

FLCU00

Bank country key

NL

Bank Keys

ING

Bank account number CUSTOMER 462

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Entry Value

IBAN (International Bank Account Number)

NL40INGB0005544499

Industry System

0001

Industry sector

91

Tax Number Category

NL0

Business Partner Tax Number

NL161882268

City

Diemen

City postal code

1112 XN

Street

Diemerhof

House Number

10

Country Key

NL

Region (State, Province, County)

GE

Address time zone

CET

Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered

0000000001

Language Key

NL

2-Character SAP Language Code

NL

City file test status

C

Country for telephone/fax number

NL

Country ISO code

NL

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

Telephone no.: dialing code + number

20 346 3400

Complete number: dialing code + number + extension

20 346 3400

Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone

1

Sequence Number

001

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

01.01.1900

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

31.12.9999

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

Field Name

Entry Value

E-Mail Address

[email protected]

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

01.01.1900

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

31.12.9999

Address Type

XXDEFAULT

Purchasing Organization

3710

Purchase order currency

EUR

External Interface: Tax Indicators

C

Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)

DE

Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)

TTX1

Tax classification for customer

1

Company Code

3710

Key for sorting according to assignment numbers

009

Reconciliation Account in General Ledger

12100000

List of the Payment Methods to be Considered

T

Terms of Payment Key

0004

Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor

3710-CUST4

Accounting clerk

1

Sales Organization

3710

Distribution Channel

10

Division

00

Customer group

1

Incoterms (Part 1)

EXW

Incoterms (Part 2)

Amsterdam

Delivery Priority

02

Shipping Conditions

01

Currency

EUR

Account assignment group for this customer

1

CUSTOMER 464

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Entry Value

Terms of Payment Key

0004

Delivering Plant (Own or External)

3710

Partner Function

AG (RE, RG, WE)

Partner counter

000

Default Partner

X

5.

Save your entries.

6.

On the Maintain Business Partner screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Business Partner Number

37100006

Business partner category

2

Business Partner Grouping

BP03

Search term 1 for business partner

Customer 6

Form-of-Address Key

3

Name 1 of organization

Domestic NL 6 (Returns)

BP: Legal form of organization

01

BP role

FLCU01

BP role

UDM000

BP role

FLCU00

BP Role Category

FLCU01

BP Role Category

UDM000

BP Role Category

FLCU00

Bank country key

NL

Bank Keys

ABN

Bank account number IBAN (International Bank Account Number)

NL02ABNA0123456789

Industry System

0001

Industry sector

91

Tax Number Category

NL0

Business Partner Tax Number

NL001234560B03

City

Amsterdam Zuid-Oost

Field Name

Entry Value

City postal code

1101 HE

Street

De entrée

House Number

123

Country Key

NL

Region (State, Province, County)

GE

Address time zone

CET

Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered

0000000001

Language Key

NL

2-Character SAP Language Code

NL

City file test status

C

Country for telephone/fax number

NL

Country ISO code

NL

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

Telephone no.: dialing code + number

800 2487636

Complete number: dialing code + number+ extension

800 2487636

Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone

1

Sequence Number

001

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

01.01.1900

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

31.12.9999

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

E-Mail Address

[email protected]

Sequence Number

001

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

01.01.1900

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

31.12.9999

Address Type

XXDEFAULT

CUSTOMER 466

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Entry Value

Purchasing Organization

3710

Purchase order currency

EUR

Account Number of Vendor or Creditor

373000006

External Interface: Tax Indicators

C

Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)

NL

Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)

TTX1

Tax classification for customer

1

Company Code

3710

Key for sorting according to assignment numbers

009

Reconciliation Account in General Ledger

0012100000

List of the Payment Methods to be Considered

T

Terms of Payment Key

0004

Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor

3710-CUST6

Accounting clerk

01

Sales Organization

3710

Distribution Channel

10

Division

00

Customer group

01

Incoterms (Part 1)

EXW

Incoterms (Part 2)

Amsterdam

Delivery Priority

02

Shipping Conditions

RE

Currency

EUR

Account assignment group for this customer

01

Terms of Payment Key

0004

Delivering Plant (Own or External)

3710

Partner Function

AG (RE, RG, WE)

Partner counter

0

Default Partner

X

7.

Save your entries.

4.6.11.1.2 Create Domestic Vendors Procedure 1.

2.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: SAP ECC menu

Logistics  Settlement Management  Environment  Master Data  Maintain Business Partner

Transaction code

BP

On the Maintain Business Partner screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Business Partner Number

37300006

Business partner category

2

Business Partner Grouping

BP03

Search term 1 for business partner

Supplier 6

Form-of-Address Key

0003

Name 1 of organization

Domestic NL 6 (Returns)

BP: Legal form of organization

01

BP role

FLVN01

BP role

FLVN00

BP Role Category

FLVN01

BP Role Category

FLVN00

Bank country key

NL

Bank Keys

ABN

Bank account number IBAN (International Bank Account Number)

NL02ABNA0123456789

Tax Number Category

NL0

Business Partner Tax Number

NL001234560B03

City

Amsterdam Zuid-Oost

City postal code

1101 HE

CUSTOMER 468

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Entry Value

Street

De Entree

House Number

123

Country Key

NL

Region (State, Province, County)

GE

Address time zone

CET

Language Key

NL

2-Character SAP Language Code

NL

City file test status

C

Country for telephone/fax number

DE

Country ISO code

NL

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

Telephone no.: dialing code +number

800 2487636

Complete number: dialing code +number +extension

800 2487636

Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone

1

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

01.01.1900

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

31.12.9999

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

E-Mail Address

[email protected]

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

01.01.1900

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

31.12.9999

Address Type

XXDEFAULT

Purchasing Organization

3710

Customer Number

37100006

Purchase order currency

EUR

3.

Field Name

Entry Value

Company Code

3710

Key for sorting according to assignment numbers

009

Reconciliation Account in General Ledger

21100000

List of the Payment Methods to be Considered

T

Terms of Payment Key

0001

Our account number with the vendor

3710-LIEF6

Accounting clerk

01

Purchasing Organization

3710

Currency

EUR

Terms of Payment Key

0001

Indicator: GR-Based Invoice Verification

X

Group for Calculation Schema (Vendor)

01

Purchasing Group

001

Planned Delivery Time in Days

2

Shipping Conditions

01

Partner Function

LF

Partner counter

000

Default Partner

X

Save your entries.

4.6.12 BP-Customers and -Suppliers CPD, Sample Master Data [local] (BRC) 4.6.12.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.6.12.1.1 Create CPD Customers Procedure 1.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: SAP ECC menu

Logistics  Settlement Management  Environment  Master Data  Maintain Business Partner

CUSTOMER 470

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Transaction code 2.

BP

On the Maintain Business Partner screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Business Partner Number

37100273

Business partner category

2

Business Partner Grouping

CPDS

Search term 1 for business partner

CPD NL

Form-of-Address Key

0003

Name 1 of organization

Domestic Customer NL CPD

BP: Legal form of organization

01

BP role

FLCU01

BP role

FLCU00

BP role BP role BP Role Category

FLCU01

BP Role Category

FLCU00

BP Role Category BP Role Category Bank country key

NL

Bank Keys IBAN (International Bank Account Number) Industry System Industry sector Tax Number Category Business Partner Tax Number City

Leeuwarden

City postal code

8938 AR

Street House Number Country Key

NL

Field Name

Entry Value

Region (State, Province, County) Address time zone Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered Language Key

NLD

2-Character SAP Language Code

NL

City file test status

C

Country for telephone/fax number

NL

Country ISO code

NL

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

Telephone no.: dialing code +number Complete number: dialing code +number +extension Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone

1

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

19000101

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

E-Mail Address

[email protected]

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

19000101

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

Address Type

XXDEFAULT

Purchasing Organization

3710

Purchase order currency

EUR

External Interface: Tax Indicators

C

CUSTOMER 472

Localization objects - per Business Priority

3.

Field Name

Entry Value

Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)

NL

Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)

TTX1

Tax classification for customer

1

Company Code

3710

Key for sorting according to assignment numbers

009

Reconciliation Account in General Ledger

12100000

Payment methods

T

Terms of Payment Key

0001

Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor

3710-CPD

Accounting clerk

01

Sales Organization

3710

Distribution Channel

10

Division

00

Customer group

01

Incoterms (Part 1)

EXW

Incoterms (Part 2)

Leeuwarden

Delivery Priority

02

Shipping Conditions

01

Currency

EUR

Account assignment group for this customer

01

Terms of Payment Key

0001

Delivering Plant (Own or External)

3710

Partner Function

AG

Partner counter

000

Default Partner

X

Save your entries.

4.6.13

Free Goods Processing [local] (BKC)

4.6.13.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.6.13.1.1 Activating Free Goods Determination Use The purpose of this activity is to assign the procedure to activate free goods. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Sales and Distribution  Basic Functions  Free Goods  Condition Technique for Free Goods  Activate Free Goods Determination

Transaction Code

V/N6

On the Change View “Determining Free Goods Procedure in Sales”: Overview screen, change the following entries: SOrg.

DChl.

Dv

DoPr

3710

10

00

Y1

3710

10

00

Y1

3.

Choose Enter.

4.

Save your entries.

5.

Choose Back F 3 .

Cu

Proc. YA0001

01

YA0001

Result Free goods determination has been activated for the relevant sales organizations.

CUSTOMER 474

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.6.13.1.2 Master Data Creating Free Goods Determination Use The purpose of this activity is to create a free goods condition for material.TG11 Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP ECC menu

Logistics  Sales and Distribution  Master Data  Conditions  Free Goods  Create

Transaction Code

VBN1

2.

On the Create free goods determination screen, in the Discount type field, enter YA00 and press Enter.

3.

Make the following entries:

4.

Field

User Action or Values

Sales Organization

3710

Distribution Channel

10

Customer

37100001

Comments

In the fast entry section of the screen enter the following details: Material

Min qty.

For

Unit

are free good

TG11

1000

500

PC

10

5.

Choose Enter.

6.

Save your entries.

7.

Choose Back F 3 .

Result The free goods condition record has been created. For a sales order item with quantity > 1000 pieces the customer gets 10 pieces free for every 500 pieces.  Sales order item 999 = No free goods  Sales order item 1000 = 20 pieces free  Sales order item 2000 = 40 pieces free.

4.6.14 Sample Master Data for SEPA Processing [local] (BN9) 4.6.14.1

Configuration for OP

4.6.14.1.1 Create Domestic Customers Procedure 1.

2.

Access the transaction using the following navigation path: SAP ECC menu

Logistics  Settlement Management  Environment  Master Data  Maintain Business Partner

Transaction code

BP

On the Customer Master Data screen, create the following settings: Field Name

Entry Value

Business Partner Number

37100100

Business partner category

2

Business Partner Grouping

BP03

Search term 1 for business partner

CUST100

Form-of-Address Key

0003

Name 1 of organization

Domestic Customer NL 100 (SEPA)

BP: Legal form of organization

01

BP role

FLCU01

BP role

UDM000

BP role

FLCU00

BP Role Category

FLCU01

BP Role Category

UDM000

BP Role Category

FLCU00

Bank country key

NL

Bank Keys IBAN (International Bank Account Number)

NL02ABNA0123456789

CUSTOMER 476

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Entry Value

Industry System

0001

Industry sector

91

Tax Number Category

NL0

Business Partner Tax Number

NL001234560B01

City

Apeldoorn

City postal code

7322 HR

Street

Korfstraat

House Number

2

Country Key

NL

Region (State, Province, County)

GE

Address time zone

CET

Transportation zone to or from which the goods are delivered

2

Language Key

NL

2-Character SAP Language Code

NL

City file test status

C

Country for telephone/fax number

NL

Country ISO code

NL

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

Telephone no.: dialing code +number

+31 26 12345

Complete number: dialing code +number+ extension

+31 26 12345

Indicator: Telephone is a Mobile Telephone

1

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

19000101

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

Standard Sender Address in this Communication Type

X

E-Mail Address

[email protected]

Field Name

Entry Value

Sequence Number

1

Communication Data: Valid From (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

19000101

Communication Data: Valid To (YYYYMMDDHHMMSS)

99991231

Address Type

XXDEFAULT

Purchasing Organization

3710

Purchase order currency

EUR

External Interface: Tax Indicators

C

Departure country (country from which the goods are sent)

NL

Tax category (sales tax, federal sales tax,...)

TTX1

Tax classification for customer

1

Company Code

3710

Key for sorting according to assignment numbers

009

Reconciliation Account in General Ledger

0012100000

List of the Payment Methods to be Considered

TE

Terms of Payment Key

SEPA

Shipper's (Our) Account Number at the Customer or Vendor

3710-CUST100

Accounting clerk

01

Sales Organization

3710

Distribution Channel

10

Division

00

Customer group

1

Incoterms (Part 1) Incoterms (Part 2) Delivery Priority

02

Shipping Conditions

01

Currency

EUR

CUSTOMER 478

Localization objects - per Business Priority

3.

Field Name

Entry Value

Account assignment group for this customer

1

Terms of Payment Key

SEPA

Delivering Plant (Own or External)

371

Partner Function

AG

Partner counter

000

Default Partner

X

Save your entries.

4.6.14.1.2 Creating SEPA Mandate Master Data Use The scope items require active SEPA mandates for customers with SEPA direct debit payment method. In the context of the SEPA Direct Debit Scheme (SDD), Mandate is an authorization given by the payer for payment to be collected in the form of a direct debit. The mandate must be created, printed and sent to the customer. Once the customer has approved it, the user can have its status to active. Once the status is correct, a Direct Debit can be processed using the payment transaction F110. Mandate can be accessed directly in customer master data, under general data, payment transaction, for each valid bank details, using Edit mandate button. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using the following navigation option: SAP ECC menu Accounting  Financial Accounting  Accounts Receivable  Master Records  SEPA Mandates  Create Transaction code

2.

3.

FSEPA_M1

On the Create Mandate: Initial Screen, enter the first value following Customer and Paying Company Code and repeat for the customer list the steps below: Mandate Ref.

Customer

Paying company code

3710_37100100

37100100

3710

Choose Enter.

4.

If a mandate already exist choose Create F 5 on the Mandates screen

5.

On the Create Mandate: Detail Screen, choose Supplement Data F 7 Default values are retrieved from Customer Master Data and Paying Company Code master data. Data can be checked and modified: o Basic Data o Status: To be confirmed o Valid From: current date o Trans. Type: Recurring Use Mandate o Payer o Name and address of Payer o IBAN and SWIFT code of Payer o Payment Recipient o Name/address of Payment Recipient

6.

On the Create Mandate: Detail screen, on the Basic Data tab page, choose B2B Mandate check box.

7.

On the Create Mandate: Detail screen, on the Basic Data tab page, set B2B Mandate Status to 1 active.

8.

On the Create Mandate: Detail screen, on the Basic Data tab page, enter the Location of Signature and Signature date. Only a Mandate with Location of Signature and Signature Date fulfilled can be active. Only an active Mandate can be used by SEPA Direct Debit in automatic payment program F110.

9.

Choose Check Mandate F 6 . The system displays the message: The errors.

10.

Save your entries.

data contains no

If necessary, you can instead save and print the mandate directly using the Save and Print button.

Result You have now created a Mandate reference number xxxxxxxxxxxx. It is ready to use as an example. Usually, productive mandates are created with an inactive status and the user must print the mandate, send it to the customer, and change the mandate status to active to give authorization to the system to use the mandate in payment program. (F110).

CUSTOMER 480

Localization objects - per Business Priority

To change the mandate, run the transaction FSEPA_M2 or from the menu, choose Accounting  Financial Accounting  Accounts Receivable  Master Records  SEPA Mandates  Change.

4.7 Localization objects for Production Planning 4.7.1 Production Planning and Control Settings [local] (BJ1) 4.7.1.1

Configuration – On-Premise

4.7.1.1.1

Basic Data

Defining Planner Group Use In this step, you define planner groups per plant. A planner group is a group of people responsible for the maintenance of routings. You can use the planner group as a selection criterion for task list selection.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Basic Data  Routing  General Data  Configure Planner Group

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

On the Change View “Maintenance planner group”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following:

4.

Plnt

PlGrp

Planner Group Desc.

3710

1

Planner Group 1

3710

2

Planner Group 2

Save your entries.

Defining Wage Group Use In this step you define wage groups for operations and work centers. By assigning an operation or a work center to a wage group you can evaluate the work to be performed in the operation from a job evaluation point of view (for example, suitable for unskilled labor or requiring special training). When you confirm the operation, you enter the wage group that was actually used.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Basic Data  Routing  Operation Data  Define Wage Group

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

In the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box, in the Plant field, enter 3710, then choose Continue.

3.

On the Change View “Wage Groups”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

4.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following:

5.

Wage group

Description

1

Wage group 1

Save your entries.

Defining Suitability Use In this menu option, you can define the suitability required in a plant for carrying out certain tasks. In addition, you can determine whether suitability is copied or used as a reference. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Basic Data  Routing  Operation Data  Define Suitability

CUSTOMER 482

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

In the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box, in the Plant field, enter 3710, then choose Continue.

3.

On the Change View “Suitability”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

4.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following entries:

5.

Suitability

Text for suitability

10

Suitability 10

20

Suitability 20

Save your entries.

Defining Setup Type and Setup Group Use In this step, you define the setup. The setup includes:  Setup type key: You define the setup type according to plant by using the setup type key. You can print setup type with shop floor papers. In sequencing, the optimum sequences for setup are determined with the setup type key.  Setup group category: The setup group category classifies the setup groups. Setup group categories are plant-dependent.  Setup group: The setup group combines operations with the same or similar setup conditions. In capacity levelling, you can optimize the sequence using the setup group. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Basic Data  Routing  Operation Data  Define Setup Type and Setup Group

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

On the Setup screen, choose Setup Type Key.

3.

On the Change View “Setup Type Key”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

4.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following: Plant

STypeKey

Description

3710

1

Setup type 1

3710

2

Setup type 2

5.

Save your entries.

6.

Choose Back to the Setup screen, and then choose Setup group category.

7.

On the Change View “Setup group category”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

8.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following: Plant

Setup GrpCategory

Description

3710

1

Setup group cat. 1

3710

2

Setup group cat. 2

9.

Select the first row you created, then in Dialog Structure, double-click Setup group key.

10.

On the Change View “Setup group key”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

11.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following:

12.

13.

Setup Group Key

Description

2

setup group 2

Repeat the steps for the second row you created: Setup Group Key

Description

2

setup group 2

3

setup group 3

Save your entries.

Defining Type of Standard Value Determination Use The type of standard value calculation specifies how the standard values of an operation are calculated (for example, using CAPP). You define the types of standard value calculation for each plant. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Basic Data  Routing  Operation Data  Define Type of Standard Value Determination

Transaction Code

SPRO

CUSTOMER 484

Localization objects - per Business Priority

2.

On the Change View “Standard Value Determination Type”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following entries:

4.

Plant

StdVDetT

3710

1

3710

2

3710

3

Save your entries.

Defining Reduction Strategy Use In this step, you specify the reduction strategy to be used when the reduction measures are carried out on operations. Scheduling reduces the lead time automatically if the basic dates given are not adhered to, that is if the scheduled dates lie outside the basic dates. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Basic Data  Routing  Operation Data  Define Reduction Strategy

Transaction Code

OPJS

2.

On the Change View “Reduction strategy”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following entries: Plnt

Reduction Strategy

Reduction Strategy

3710

01

Reduction strategy 1

4.

Select the 3710 row, then in the Dialog Structure, double-click Reduction Levels.

5.

On the Change View “Reduction levels”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

6.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following: RedLevel

Red.Queue

Transport

1

50

2

100

X

3

100

X

Overlap

X

Split

4 7.

100

X

X

X

Save your entries.

Defining Move Time Matrix Use The purpose of this step is to define move time matrix settings.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Basic Data  Work Center  General Data  Define Move Time Matrix

Transaction Code

OP30

2.

On the Change View “Location groups”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following entries: Plnt

Loc. group

Description

3710

A

Location group A

3710

B

Location group B

4.

Select the first row you created, then in Dialog Structure, double-click Transport time matrix.

5.

On the Change View “Transport time matrix”: Details screen, choose New Entries.

6.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following entries: Plnt

Loc. grou p

371 0 7.

A

Targ Plnt

To locatio n grp

Std. move time

Min. move time

Calenda r

Start

Finish

371 0

B

160,00 0 MIN

30,00 0 MIN

1

07:00:0 0

18:00:0 0

Calenda r

Start

Finish

Repeat the steps for the second row you created: Plnt

Loc. grou p

Targ Plnt

To locatio n grp

Std. move time

Min. move time

CUSTOMER 486

Localization objects - per Business Priority

371 0 8.

B

371 0

A

120,00 0 MIN

15,00 0 MIN

1

07:00:0 0

18:00:0 0

Save your entries.

Determining Person Responsible Use The purpose of this step is to determine a person responsible.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Basic Data  Work Center  General Data  Determine person responsible

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

On the Change View “Person Responsible for Work Center”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following:

4.

Plant

Pers. Respons.

Person responsible for work center

3710

001

Work center supervisor

Save your entries.

Defining Alternative Determination for Inventory Management Use The purpose of this step is to define the alternative determination for Inventory Management.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Basic Data  Bill of Material  Alternative Determination  Alternative Determination in Related

Application Areas  Define Alternative Determination for Inventory Management Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

On the Change View “Alternative Determination in Inventory Mgmt”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following:

4.

Plant

Application

3710

BEST

Save your entries.

Defining Alternative Determination for MRP Use The purpose of this step is to define the alternative determination for MRP. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Basic Data  Bill of Material  Alternative Determination  Alternative Determination in Related Application Areas  Define Alternative Determination for MRP

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

On the Change View “Alternative Determination in MRP”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following entries:

4.

Plant

SelID

3710

Y1

Save your entries.

CUSTOMER 488

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Define Strategies for Stock Determination Use The purpose of this step is to define strategies for stock determination. The configuration settings are located in MM customizing, but required for PP.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management  Inventory Management and Physical Inventory Stock Determination  Define Strategies for Stock Determination

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

Double-click the section in Dialog structure for Stock determination group.

3.

On the Change View “Stock determination group”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

4.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following: Plant

SDG - Stock Determination group

Description

3710

0001

Stock determination group 0001

5.

Save your entries.

6.

On the Change View: “Stock determination group“: Overview screen, double-click the section in Dialog structure for Stock determination Header Table.

7.

On the Change View “Stock determination Header Table”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

8.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following: Plant Stock Stck Description determ. determation group rule 3710 0001

9.

0001

Sorting – Item table

Rank.Ordr Sorting Price

Stock Select 1 determination Ascending

Rank Order

Select 2 Ascending

Double-click the section in Dialog structure for Stock determination group. choose New Entries and enter the following: S -Special stock indicator

SLoc – Storage Location

Priority Indicator

F

371C

1

K 10.

371C

2

Save your entries.

4.7.1.1.2 Material Requirements Planning (MRP) Defining Rescheduling Check – Plant Use The purpose of this step is to define a rescheduling check for plant. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Material Requirements Planning  Planning  MRP Calculation  Define Rescheduling Check

Transaction Code

OMDW

2.

On the Rescheduling screen, choose Plant.

3.

On the Change View “Plant Rescheduling”: Overview screen, double-click the Plant 3710 and then enter the following: Field Name

4.

Description

User action and values

Rescheduling horizon

100

Firmed Planned Orders

X

Production order

X

Fixed Purchase Requisitions

X

PO/SA Schedule Line

X

QM inspection lot

X

Shipping notificat

X

Tolerance value forward

2

Tolerance value for displacemt

2

Save your entries.

CUSTOMER 490

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Defining Range of Coverage Profile (Dynamic Safety Stock) Use The purpose of this step is to define range of coverage.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Material Requirements Planning  Planning  MRP Calculation  Define Range of Coverage Profile (Dynamic Safety Stock)

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

On the Change View “Range of coverage profile”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following entries: Field Name

4.

Description User action and values

Plant

3710

Coverage Profile

001

Description

3 days in the next month, then 5 days

Period ind.

M

Determine average requirements Number of periods

3

Type of per.length

1

Range of coverage in the first period – target

3

Range of coverage in the first period Number of periods

1

Range of coverage in the second period – target

5

Save your entries.

Carrying out Overall Maintenance of Plant Parameters Use The purpose of this step is to carry out overall maintenance of plant parameters.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Material Requirements Planning  Plant Parameters  Carry Out Overall Maintenance of Plant Parameters

Transaction Code

OPPQ

2.

On the Plant Parameters for Material Requirements Planning screen, choose Maintain.

3.

In the Maintain Plant Parameters dialog box enter the following: Plant 3710

4.

Choose Maintain.

5.

Choose Number Ranges

Object

Plant

NRg.Pl.Orders

Simulative planned orders

Planned Orders

3710

01

01

Object

Plant

NR:StkTRns Res

Reservations / dependent requirements

3710

01

Object

Plant

NR:P req

Purchase Requisitions

3710

01

Object

Plant

No. Range -MRP

MRP list

3710

01

CUSTOMER 492

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Object

Plant

NR. SimDepRs

Simulative Dep Req

3710

01

6.

Choose Conversion and in the next screen Planned order  production order.

7.

Make sure that the following entries have been made: Plnt

Production Order

Process Order

3710

YBM1

YBM2

8.

Save your entries and go back to the Conversion screen.

9.

Choose Planned Order  purch. requisition.

10.

Make sure that the number of plant orders to be read is 500 for plant.

11.

Save your entries and go back to the Maintain Plant Parameters screen.

12.

Choose BOM/Routing Selection.

13.

Enter Y1 in BOM Sel ID for every plant.

14.

Save your entries and go back to the Maintain Plant Parameters screen.

15.

Choose BOM Explosion.

16.

Select the checkbox SOrd/WBS BOM Active.

17.

Save your entries and go back to the Maintain Plant Parameters screen.

18.

Choose Direct Procurement, and then maintain the following entries: Plnt

Direct procuremnt/production

Acc. Asst unknown: direct procmt

3710

3

U

19.

Save your entries and go back to the Maintain Plant Parameters screen.

20.

Choose Floats, and the maintain the following entries:

21.

Plnt

Marg.

3710

000

3710

001

Op. Per.

FI Bef.

FI After

Rel. Per.

10

2

1

5

Save your entries.

Carrying out Overall Maintenance of MRP Groups Use The purpose of this step is to create MRP groups and maintain the relevant parameters for these groups.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Material Requirements Planning  MRP Groups  Carry Out Overall Maintenance of MRP Groups

Transaction Code

OPPR

2.

On the MRP Group screen, enter the plant 3710 and choose Create.

3.

In the Create MRP Group dialog box enter the following: Plant

MRP Group

Description

3710

0000

External procurement (blank)

3710

0001

In-hse prod. w/o indpt reqmts (initial)

3710

0002

In-house prod. with planned indpt reqmts

3710

0010

Make to Stock Production

3710

0040

Production w. consump. with prel.plan

3710

0052

Production without final assembly

4.

Choose Create and then save your entries. Go back to the previous screen. In the following, maintain the parameters for the relevant MRP groups.

5.

On the MRP Group screen, enter the relevant plant (see the following table) and choose Maintain.

6.

On the Create Plant Parameters dialog box enter the relevant MRP group (see the following table) and choose Maintain. Plant /

3710 3710

3710

3710

0002 0010

0040

0052

10

40

52

Field MRP Group Consumption/adjustment radio button Planning Strategy group Consumption mode

2

2

2

2

Consumption period: backward

30

30

30

30

Consumption period: forward

2

2

2

2

Rescheduling horizon

100

100

100

Tolerance value forward

2

2

2

Tolerance value for displacement

2

2

2

Rescheduling horizon radio button

CUSTOMER 494

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Plant /

3710 3710

3710

3710

Field

Planning time fence radio button Planning Time Fence Order types radio button Process order

YBM2 YBM2 YBM2

Safety Stock radio button Share of safety stock which can be used for planning

100

100

100

Create Purchase Req.

2

2

2

Create MRP list

1

1

1

Schedule Lines

2

2

2

PP

PP

PP

Creation indicator radio button

Check Rule Dep Req radio button Checking Rule 7.

Save your entries.

Assign MRP Group to Strategy Group In this step, you allocate a strategy group to the MRP group. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Material Requirements Planning  Master Data  Independent Requirements Parameters  Assign MRP Group to Strategy Group

Transaction Code

SPRO

On the Change View “Strategy Group for MRP Group”: Overview screen, enter the following: Plnt

MRP Group

Planning Strategy Group

3710

0010

10

3.

3710

0040

40

3710

0052

52

Save your entries.

Defining Splitting of Forecast Requirements for MRP Use The purpose of this step is to define splitting of forecast requirements for MRP. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Material Requirements Planning  Forecast  Define Splitting of Forecast Requirements for MRP

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

On the Change View “Splitting Forecast Requirements”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following entries: Plnt

4.

Splitting indicator

Period indicator

Period indicator Descr.

No.dys No.wks Pds

3710 A

M

Monthly

1

3710 A

W

Weekly

4

2

4 16

Save your entries.

Defining Availability of Stock in Transfer/Blocked Stock/Restricted Stock Use The purpose of this step is to define availability of stock in transfer/blocked stock/restricted stock. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: CUSTOMER

496

Localization objects - per Business Priority

2.

3.

IMG Menu

Production  Material Requirements Planning  Planning  MRP Calculation  Stocks  Define Availability of Stock in Transfer/Blocked Stock/Restricted Stock

Transaction Code

SPRO

On the Change View “Available Stocks”: Overview screen, enter the following: Plnt

Stock in transfer

3710

X

Blocked Stk

Restricted-use stock

Save your entries.

Defining Special Procurement Type Use The purpose of this step is to define special procurement type.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Material Requirements Planning  Master Data  Define Special Procurement Type

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

On the Change View “Special Procurement”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following: Field Name

4.

Description

User action and values

Plant

3710

Sp.Pr. Type

10

Description

Consignment

Procurement Type

F

Special procurement

K

Choose Next Entry, and then enter the following: Field Name Plant

Description

User action and values 3710

Sp.Pr. Type

20

Description

External procurement

Procurement Type

F

Special procurement 5.

Choose Next Entry, and then enter the following: Field Name

6.

3710

Sp.Pr. Type

30

Description

Subcontracting

Procurement Type

F

Special procurement

L

Choose Next Entry, and then enter the following: Description

User action and values

Plant

3710

Sp.Pr. Type

50

Description

Phantom assembly

Procurement Type

E

Special procurement

E

Phantom item

X

Choose Next Entry, and then enter the following: Field Name

8.

User action and values

Plant

Field Name

7.

Description

Description

User action and values

Plant

3710

Sp.Pr. Type

52

Description

Direct production / collective order

Procurement Type

E

Special procurement

E

Direct production

X

Choose Next Entry, and then enter the following: Field Name

Description

User action and values

Plant

3710

Sp.Pr. Type

60

Description

Phantom in planning

CUSTOMER 498

Localization objects - per Business Priority

9.

Procurement Type

E

Special procurement

E

Save your entries.

Defining Line Item Numbers Use The purpose of this step is to define the line item numbers. Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Material Requirements Planning  Planning  Procurement Proposals  Define Line Item Numbers

Transaction Code

SPRO

On the Change View “Item Numbers”: Overview screen, enter the following: Plnt

Item PR

Item No. Stock Trans. Res.

3710

10

100

Save your entries.

Defining External Procurement per MRP Group Use In this step, you specify default values for externally procured materials which are included in materials planning. You can maintain the GR processing time for purchasing as well as the purchasing group at plant level. The purchasing group maintained here is then taken into account in the planning run, if a purchasing group has been maintained for the material in the master record. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:

IMG Menu

Materials Management  Consumption-Based Planning  Planning  Procurement proposals  Define External Procurement

Transaction Code

OMDT

2.

On the External Procurement screen, choose Plant.

3.

On the Change View “Default Values Purchasing/MRP”: Overview screen, doubleclick plant 3710.

4.

On the Change View “Default Values Purchasing/MRP”: Details screen enter the following: Field Name

Description

User action and values

Purch. Process. Time

3

Unknown Acct Assignment

U

5.

Choose Back to return the External Procurement screen.

6.

On the External Procurement screen, choose MRP group.

7.

On the Change View “External Procurement per MRP Group”: Overview screen, enter the following: Plnt MRP Scheduling: Group Info/Agreemt

DocType Standard purchase order (SPO)

DocType Subcontractor (SC)

DocType Stock transfer (ST)

3710 0000 3710 0001 3710 0002 8.

Save your entries.

Defining Safety Stock Availability Use In this step, you define the percentage of the safety stock to be available for planning. This function is used to avoid the situation where order proposals are created unnecessarily by the system for small shortage quantities.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: CUSTOMER

500

Localization objects - per Business Priority

2.

3.

IMG Menu

Materials Management  Consumption-Based Planning  Planning  MRP Calculation  Stocks  Define Safety Stock Availability

Transaction Code

SPRO

On the Change View “Safety Stock Availability”: Overview screen, enter the following: Plnt

MRP

AvSS

3710

0000

000

3710

0001

000

3710

0002

000

Save your entries.

Defining Period Display for Period Totals Use In this step, you specify which periods are to be displayed in the period totals display of the MRP list and the stock/requirements list. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Material Requirements Planning  Evaluation  Period Totals  Define Period Display for Period Totals

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

On the Change View “Period Grouping”: Overview screen, select the 3710 row and choose Details.

3.

On the Change View “Period Grouping ”: Details screen, enter the following:

4.

Days

Weeks

Months

X

X

X

Save your entries.

Defining Receipt Elements for Receipt Days’ Supply Use In this IMG activity, you define which receipt elements are used to calculate receipt days' supplies. The receipt days' supply indicates how many days a material will last. It takes the current plant stock and predefined receipts into consideration.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management  Consumption-Based Planning  Evaluation  Define Receipt Elements for Receipt Days' Supply

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

On the Change View “Calculation of Days’ Supply”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following:

4.

Plnt Prd/Prc

PO/SN/SL QM- Fixed Firm APOrd Receipt Shipping Safety Insp. Purch. Planned Reservations Notes Stock Req Orders

3710 X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Save your entries.

Parameters for Determining the Basic Dates Use In this step, you can determine for each plant that the system will not automatically switch to forward scheduling in the calculation of the basic dates if the planned start date lies in the past.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Materials Management  Consumption-Based Planning  Planning  Parameters for Determining the Basic Dates

CUSTOMER 502

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

On the Change View “Order Proposals in the Past”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following: Plnt

Start in past

3710 4.

Save your entries.

Defining Storage Location and Supply Area Determination in BOM Use In this step, you define the strategy the system uses to find the storage location (issue storage location) for the components in BOM explosion, when back flushing and in MRP. This logic is also used in supply area determination. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Repetitive Manufacturing  Cross-Process Settings  Define Storage Location and Supply Area Determination in BOM Explosion

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

Double-click Storage Location Determination for Component Withdrawal.

3.

On the Change View “Storage Location Determination in Repetitive Mfg”: Overview screen, enter the following:

4.

Plnt

MGr

3710

0000

3710

0001

3710

0002

Save your entries.

PSSel

Defining Profiles with Default Values Use In this step, you define task list profiles. A profile is a collection of default values for task list headers and operations.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Basic Data  Routing -> Control Data  Define Profiles with Default Values

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

On the Default Values Profile screen, choose Profile/General Data.

3.

On the Change View “Default Values for Routings”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

4.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following: Field Name

5.

Description

User action and values

Application

P

Profile

371

Description

Default Value Profile

Predefined Plnt

3710

Usage

1

Stat

4

Unit

PC

Increment

0010

Base Quantity

100,000

Counter

1

Denominator

1

Crcy

EUR

SV Determ.Type

1

Std val.key

SAP1

Entry tool

X

Save your entries. CUSTOMER

504

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Defining Default Values – Task List Selection Use In this step, you specify which data is contained in an operation that is automatically created during order creation.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Shop Floor Control  Operations  Task List Selection  Define Default Values

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

In the Determine Work Area: Entry dialog box, in the Plant field, enter 3710 and choose Continue.

3.

On the Change View “Default values for generation of operations”: Overview screen, Choose New Entries.

4.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following: Field Name

Description

User action and values

Plant

3710

Order Type

YBM2

Control Key

YBP1

Task list unit Usage Denominator

1

Numerator

1

Base Quantity

100,000

Operation

0010

Operation Description Purchasing group Material Group 5.

Choose Next Entry, and then enter the following: Field Name

Description

User action and values

Plant

3710

Order Type

YBW1

Control Key

YBP1

Task list unit Usage

1

Denominator

1

Numerator

1

Base Quantity

100,000

Work Center Operation

0010

Operation Description

Rework

Purchasing group Material Group 6.

Save your entries.

Scheduling Planned Orders Use The purpose of this step is to define scheduling parameters for planned orders. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Capacity Requirements Planning  Operations  Scheduling  Define scheduling parameters for planned orders

Transaction Code

OPU5

2.

On the Change View “Scheduling planned orders”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following: Field name Plnt

Description Values 3710

CUSTOMER 506

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.

Order type

*

ProdSupervisor

*

Sched. Hor.det

550

detailed scheduling Scheduling

X

detailed scheduling – Generate capacity reqs.

X

Adjust dates

Adjusts basic dates, Adjust dep. reqmts to operation dates

In Capacity scheduling

Always basic dates, dep. reqmts to operation dates

Scheduling Type

Backwards

Reduction Type

All oper. In the future will be red.

Maximum Reduction Level

Do not reduce

Choose Next Entry, and then enter the following: Field name

5.

Description Values

Plnt

3710

Order type

PE

ProdSupervisor

*

Sched. Hor.det

550

detailed scheduling Scheduling

X

detailed scheduling – Generate capacity reqs.

X

Adjust dates

Adjusts basic dates, Adjust dep. reqmts to operation dates

In Capacity scheduling

Always basic dates, dep. reqmts to operation dates

Scheduling Type

Backwards

Reduction Type

All oper. In the future will be red.

Maximum Reduction Level

Do not reduce

Save your entries.

4.7.1.1.3 Shop Floor Control (SFC) Defining Scheduling Margin Key Use The purpose of this step is to define the scheduling margin key. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Shop Floor Control  Operations  Scheduling  Define Scheduling Margin Key

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

On the Change View “Margins for scheduling”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following entries: Plant Key Opening Period

Float After Production

Float Before Production

Release Period

1

2

5

3710 000 3710 001 10 4.

Save your entries.

4.7.1.1.4

Repetitive Manufacturing

Defining Control Data for Pull List Use This step contains all the information needed to define control data for the Pull List. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:

CUSTOMER 508

Localization objects - per Business Priority

IMG Menu

Production  Repetitive Manufacturing  Material Staging  Define Control Data for Pull List

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

On the Change View “Pull List Control”: Overview screen that appears, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following entries: Field name

Description

Values

Plant

3710

Stock Transfers

311

MTO

4.

StkRule

0001

Search proced.

YB0001

Save your entries.

Result After performing this activity the necessary settings for control data for pull list are made.

Defining Generation of Cost Log Use In this step, you control whether a costs log is created in repetitive manufacturing when backflushing activities. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Repetitive Manufacturing  Cost Object Controlling  Define Generation of Cost Log

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

On the Change View “Repetitive Manufacturing: Cost Log”: Overview screen that appears, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following entries:

4.

Plnt

Log

3710

X

Save your entries.

4.7.2Make-to-Stock Production - Discrete Industry [local] (BJ7) 4.7.2.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.7.2.1.1 Shop Floor Control (SFC) Defining Order Type Dependent Parameters Use The purpose of this activity is to define the parameters for the production order types.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Shop Floor Control  Master Data  Order  Define Order Types-dependent Parameters

Transaction Code

OPL8

2.

Choose New Entries.

3.

Make the following entries:

4.

Plant

3710

Order type

YBM1

On the Planning tab, make the following entries: Master Data Production version

1

Routing Application (Routing)

P

Routing selection ID

Y1

CUSTOMER 510

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Sequence exchange

0

Alternative sequence

X

Routing type

N

Operation Entry tool

X

Oper./act. increment

0010

Bill of Material BOM Application

PP01

Batch Determination Search procedure

YB0001

Check batch

X

Purchase Requisitions Reservation/Purchase Req. 5.

2

On the Implementation tab, make the following entries: Status change documents For Order Header

X

For Operation

X

For Material

X

For Production Resource/Tool

X

Shop floor information system Update

X

Header

X

Item Operation Documentation of goods movements

6.

GR for Purchase Order

X

GR for Production Order

X

Planned Goods Issue

X

Unplanned Goods Issue

X

On the Cost Accounting tab, make the following entries: Controlling Cstg variant planned

PYG1

Cstg variant actual

PYG2

Results Analysis Key

MBMF01

Planned Cost Calcul.

Determine Planned Cost When Saving

Distribution Rule Default Rule 7.

PP1

On the Display profiles tab, make the following entries: Collective order display Graphics profile

000001

Graphic Group

PP

Name

Standard

Index

2

Missing parts list ProfMissPrtsLstOrdNo

000001

Missing Parts Prof.

000002

8.

Save your entries.

9.

Choose

Back.

Defining ATP Checking Control Use The purpose of this activity is to define parameters for the confirmation of operations. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Shop Floor Control  Operations  Availability Check  Define Checking Control

Transaction OPJK 2.

On the Change View “Order Control”: overview Screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, make the following entries: Field Name Plant

Description

User action and values 3710

CUSTOMER 512

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Order Type

YBM1

Availability Check

1

Material availability No Check

X (set indicator)

Checking Rule

SO

PRT availability No Check

X (set indicator)

Capacity availability No Check 4.

X (set indicator)

Save your entries and make a new entry by maintaining the following values: Field Name

Description User action and values

Plant

3710

Order Type

YBM1

Availability Check

2

Material availability No Check

Leave blank/Remove indicator

Checking Rule

SP

Check material availability when saving order

X

Release material

1

PRT availability No check

X (set indicator)

Capacity availability Capacity Availability No Check 5.

X (set indicator)

Save your entries and go back to the IMG menu.

Defining Confirmation Parameters Use The purpose of this activity is to define parameters for the confirmation of operations.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Shop Floor Control  Operations  Confirmation  Define Confirmation Parameters

Transaction OPK4 2.

On the Change View “Parameters for Order Confirmation”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the following values: Field Name

Description User action and values

Plant

3710

Order Type

YBM1

Accept default settings on General valid settings tab Individual Entry General tab Confirmation type

Partial confirmation

Shift - Proposal

Shift Not used

indiv. Entry of Operation w. initial Screen tab

4.

Quantities - Propose

X

Quantities - Display confirmed quantities

X

Quantities - Display Standard Values

X

Activities - Propose

X

Activities - Display confirmed activities

X

Activities - Display Standard Values

X

Dates – Display confirmed dates

X

Dates – Display Standard Values

X

HR Data – Display Standard Values

X

Screen Control Time Ticket Quantities/activities

X

Selection – Incl.Finally Confirmed Operations

blank

Selection – Include Confirmable Operations

X

Save your entries and go back to the IMG menu. CUSTOMER

514

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Defining Scheduling Parameters for Production Orders Use The purpose of this activity is to define for each plant the order type, the production scheduler/production supervisor and the parameters for the scheduling of production orders.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Shop Floor Control  Operations  Scheduling  Define Scheduling Parameters for Production Orders

Transaction OPU3 2.

On the Change View “Specify Scheduling Parameter”: Overview screen, choose New entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the following values: Field Name

4.

Description User action and values

Plant

3710

Order Type

YBM1

Production Supervisor

*

Generate Capacity Req.

X

Adjust Dates

Adjust basic dates, adjust dep. reqmts to order start

Scheduling Type

Backwards

Start in the past

Leave blank

Automatically Scheduling

X

Operation Segment

Setup

Reduction Type

All operations in the order will be reduced

Maximum reduction level

Do not reduce

Save your entries and go back to the IMG menu.

Defining Production Scheduling Profile Use The purpose of this activity is to create the production-scheduling profiles for specific plants.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Shop Floor Control  Master Data  Define production scheduling profile

Transaction OPKP 2.

On the Change View Production Scheduling Profile: Overview Screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the following values: Field Name

4.

Description

User action and values

Plant

3710

Production Scheduling Profile

YB0001

Description

MTS DI Valuated

Schedule Order

X

Confirm Available Partial Qty

X

Order Type - MTS Production

YBM1

Save your entries and go back to the IMG menu.

Define Production Supervisor Use The purpose of this activity is to define production schedulers/production supervisors for your plants. In addition to this, you can assign a control profile to each production scheduler. By assigning production schedulers to materials within the application, you can define responsibilities for a material within production activity control.

CUSTOMER 516

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Shop Floor Control  Master Data  Define Production Supervisor

Transaction OPJ9 2.

On the Change View “Production Scheduler”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the following values: Field

4.

Description

User action and values

Plant

3710

Production Scheduler

YB1

Description

MTS DI Valuated

Prod.Profile

YB0001

Save your entries and go back to the IMG menu.

4.7.3 Make-to-Stock Production - Process Industry [local] (BJA) 4.7.3.1

Configuration – On-Premise

4.7.3.1.1 Define Order Types-Dependent Parameters Use The purpose of this activity is to define order types-dependent parameters. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production Planning for Process Industries  Process Order  Master Data  Order  Define Order Types-dependent Parameters

Transaction Code

COR4

2.

On the Change View “Order Type-Dependent Parameters” Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of added entries screen, enter the following:

4.

Plant

3710

Order type

YBM2

On the Master data tab, enter the following values: Field Name

5.

User Action and Values

Production Version

0 Automatic selection of production version

Operation Det. Verif.

X

Relationship View

1 Predecessor

Selection ID

Y4

Order Record Required

Radio button selected

Entry Tool

X

Operation Increment

0010

On the Planning tab, enter the following: Field Name

6.

Description

Description

User Action and Values

Reservation/Pur.req

3

Application

PI01 Process Manufacturing

Search Procedure

YB0001 BP: Search procedure

Check: Specified Batch Active

X

On the Implementation tab, enter the following: Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

For Order Header

X

For Operation

X

For Material

X

Statistics

X

Planned Goods Issue

X

Unplanned Goods Issue

X

CUSTOMER 518

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

7.

Description

Goods receipt for process order

X

Goods Receipt for Purchase order

X

On the Cost Accounting tab, enter the following: Field Name

8.

Description

User Action and Values

Standard Costing Variant

PYG1

Actual Costing Variant

PYG2

Results Analysis Key

MBMF01

Planned Cost Calculation

2 Determine Planned Cost When Saving

Default Role

PP1

On the Display profiles tab, enter the following: Field Name

9.

User Action and Values

Description

User Action and Values

ProfMissPrtsLstOrdNo

000001

PrfMissPrtLstCollOrd

000001

Save your entries.

Result The order type-dependent parameters are defined.

4.7.3.1.2 Define and Set Up Control Recipe Destinations Use The purpose of this activity is to define and set up control recipe destinations. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production Planning for Process Industries  Process Management  Control Recipes / PI Sheets  Control Recipe Destinations  Define and Set Up Control Recipe Destinations

Transaction Code

O10C

2.

On the Determine Work Area: Entry, enter 3710 Continue.

3.

On the Change View “Maintain Control Recipe Destinations” Overview screen, choose New Entries.

4.

On the New Entries: Details of added entries screen, enter the following: Field Name

Description

and then choose

User action and values

Plant

3710 (field already filled)

CtrlRec.Destin.

01

Description

Default

Dest. Type

Transfer to ABAP listbased PI Sheet

Address 5.

for Plant

1 DEFAULT

Save your entries.

4.7.3.1.3 Define Checking Controls Use The purpose of this activity is to define checking controls. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production Planning for Process Industries  Process Order  Operations  Availability Check  Define Checking Control

Transaction Code

OPJK

2.

On the Change View “Order Control”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the following: Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

Plant

3710

Order Type

YBM2

Availability Check

1

CUSTOMER 520

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

4.

User Action and Values

Material availability No check

X

Material availability Checking Rule

SO

PRT availability - No check

X

Capacity availability No check

X

Choose Next Entry, and then enter the following: Field Name

5.

Description

Description

User Action and Values

Plant

3710

Order Type

YBM2

Availability Check

2

Material availability Checking Rule

SP

Material availability Release material

1

PRT availability - No check

X

Capacity availability No check

X

Save your entries.

Result The checking control is defined.

4.7.3.1.4 Specify Scheduling Parameters Use The purpose of this activity is to specify scheduling parameters.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:

IMG Menu

Production Planning for Process Industries  Process Order  Operations  Scheduling  Specify Scheduling Parameters

Transaction Code

OPUZ

2.

On the Change View “Specify scheduling parameters”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the following: Field Name

4.

Description

User Action and Values

Plant

3710

Order type

YBM2

Prodn Superv.

*

Generate Capacity Reqs

X

Adjust Dates

Adjust basic dates, adjust dep. reqmts to operation dates

Scheduling Type

1 Forwards

Start in the Past

30

Automatic Scheduling

X

Maximum reduction level

0 Do not reduce

Save your entries.

Result The scheduling parameters are defined.

4.7.3.1.5 Define Production Scheduling Profiles Use The purpose of this activity is to define production scheduling profiles.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: CUSTOMER

522

Localization objects - per Business Priority

IMG Menu

Production Planning for Process Industries  Process Order  Master Data  Define Production Scheduling Profiles

Transaction Code

CORY

2.

On the Change View “Production Scheduling Profile”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the following values: Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

Plant

3710

ProdProfile

YB0002

On Creation - Release

X

On Release – Carry Out Scheduling

X

Batch Management Aut. Batch Creation

No Automatic batch creation in Production/process order

Batch Management Classify Batches

1 Classification carried out in background (all batches)

Transport - WM Request

No creation or transfer requirements on order release

Order Type - Make-tostock

YBM2

4.

Choose Back F 3 .

5.

On the Change View “Production Scheduling Profile”: Overview screen, enter MTS Process Manufacturing in the corresponding field for profile description.

6.

Save your entries.

Result The production scheduling profile YB0002 is defined.

4.7.3.1.6 Define Production Supervisor Use The purpose of this activity is to define the production scheduler/production supervisor.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production Planning for Process Industries  Process Order  Master Data  Define Production Supervisor

Transaction Code

CORU

2.

On the Change View “Production Scheduler”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Overview of Added Entries screen, enter the following values:

4.

Plant

ProdSched.

Description

ProdProfile

3710

YB2

MTS PI valuated

YB0002

Save your entries.

Result The production scheduler YB2 is defined.

4.7.3.1.7 Define Confirmation Parameters Use The purpose of this activity is to define confirmation parameters. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production Planning for Process Industries  Process Order  Operations  Confirmation  Define Confirmation Parameters

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

On the Change View “Parameters for Order Confirmation”: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the following: Plant

3710

Order type

YBM2

CUSTOMER 524

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.

Generally valid settings tab Field Name

5.

User Action and Values

Operation sequence

Operation sequence is not checked

Underdelivery

Underdelivery tolerance is not checked

Overdelivery

Overdelivery tolerance is not checked

Results Rec. (QM)

Message if no inspection results exist

Selection - Open orders

X

Propose Time Units Automatic optimization

X

Individual Entry General tab Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

Confirm.type

Final confirmation

X

Clear open reservations

X

Act. costs

X

Goods movements

X

Shift - Proposal 6.

Description

Shift Not Used

Individual entry for Operation with initial screen tab Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

Quantities - Propose

X

Quantities - Display Confirmed Quantities

X

Quantities - Display Standard Values

X

Dates - Display Confirmed Dates

X

Dates - Display Standard Values

X

Screen Control Time Ticket Quantities/Activities

X

Field Name

7.

Description

User Action and Values

Activities - Propose

X

Activities - Display Confirmed Activities

X

Activities - Display Standard Values

X

HD Data - Display Standard Values

X

Save your entries.

Result The confirmation parameters are defined.

4.7.4 Make-to-Order Production w/o Variant Configuration [local] (BJG) 4.7.4.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.7.4.1.1 Sales and Distribution Pricing Define and Assign Pricing Procedures - Control Data Use The purpose of this activity is to define pricing procedure. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Sales and Distribution  Basic Functions  Pricing  Pricing Control  Define and assign pricing procedures

CUSTOMER 526

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Maintain pricing procedures.

3.

Select the pricing procedure A37002 and in the Dialog Structure pane, double-click Control data.

4.

On the Change View Control data: Overview screen choose New Entries.

5.

Enter the following data: Field Name

6.

Description

User Action and Values

Step

25

Ctype

YB01

Print

X

SuTot

4

Reqt

2

AccKey

ERL

Comment

Save your entries.

Result You have defined and assigned the Pricing Procedure A37002.

4.7.4.1.2 Production Planning and Batch Management Production Order Defining Production Order Type Use This task allows you to define the production order type. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Shop Floor Control  Master Data  Order  Define Order Types

Transaction Code

OPJH

2.

On the Change View Maintain Production Order Types: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

Maintain the following settings: Field Name

User Action and Values

Order category

10

Order Type

YBM4

Description

Production Order Processing MTO

Comment

Control Indicator CO Partner Update

Semi-active

Reorganization Residence Time 1

1

Residence Time 2

1

Cost controlling Settlement profile

YBMFP1

BP: PP Valuated to COPA

Status Profile Header 4.

Save your entries.

Result Production order type YBM4 is defined.

Assignment Functional Areas to Order Type Use In this step, you make additional settings for a functional area in the order type. Only perform this procedure when testing the configuration. Use caution if you decide to perform it in a productive system.

CUSTOMER 528

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP system Menu

Controlling  Product Cost Controlling- Cost Object Controlling - Product Cost by Order - Manufacturing Orders  Check Order Type

Transaction Code

KOT2

2.

On the Change View “Order Type”: Overview screen, double-click order type YBM4

3.

Make the following entries:

4.

Field

User Action or Values

Object class

Production

Functional area

YB20

Save your entries.

Defining Order Type Dependent Parameters Use The purpose of this activity is to define the parameters for the production order types. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Shop Floor Control  Master  Data  Order  Define Order Types-dependent Parameters

Transaction Code

OPL8

2.

Choose New Entries.

3.

Make the following entries:

4.

Plant

3710

Order type

YBM4

On the Planning tab, enter the following: Master Data Production version

0

Routing Application (Routing)

P

Routing selection ID

Y1

Sequence exchange

0

Alternative sequence

X

Routing type

N

Operation Entry tool

X

Oper./act. increment

0010

Bill of Material BOM Application

PP01

Batch Determination Search procedure

YB0001

Check batch

X

Purchase Requisitions Reservation/Purchase Req. 5.

2

On the Implementation tab, enter the following: Status change documents For Order Header

X

For Operation

X

For Material

X

For Production Resource/Tool

X

Shop floor information system Update

X

Header

X

Item Operation Documentation of goods movements GR for Purchase Order

X

GR for Production Order

X

Planned Goods Issue

X

CUSTOMER 530

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Unplanned Goods Issue 6.

X

On the Cost Accounting tab, make the following entries: Controlling Cstg variant planned

PYG1

Cstg variant actual

PYG2

Results Analysis Key

MBMF01

Planned Cost Calcul.

Determine Planned Cost When Saving

Distribution Rule Default Rule 7.

PP1

On the Display profiles tab, enter the following: Collective order display Graphics profile

000001

Graphic Group

PP

Name

Standard

Index

2

Missing parts list

8.

ProfMissPrtsLstOrdNo

000001

Missing Parts Prof.

000002

Save your entries.

Result You have defined order dependent parameters for order type YBM4.

Defining Production Scheduling Profiles Use The purpose of this activity is to define production scheduling profiles.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:

IMG Menu

Production  Shop Floor Control  Master Data  Define Production Scheduling Profile

Transaction Code

OPKP

2.

On the Change View Define Production Scheduling Profiles: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

Enter the following settings: Field Name

User Action and Values

Plant

3710

Prod. Sched. Profile

YB0004

Description (of prod. sched. Profile)

MTO w/o VC – Val.

Automatic Actions On Release Schedule Order

X

Material Availability Check Confirm Available Partial Qty

X

Order Type Make-to-Order Production 4.

YBM4

Save your entries.

Result You have defined the production scheduling profile YB0004.

Defining Production Supervisor Use The purpose of this activity is to define the production scheduler/production supervisor. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Shop Floor Control  Master Data  Define Production Supervisor

CUSTOMER 532

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Transaction Code

OPJ9

2.

On the Change View Production Scheduler: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

Enter the following settings:

4.

Field Name

User Action and Values

Plant

3710

Prod.Sched.

YB4

Description

MTO w/o VC – Val.

ProdProfile

YB0004

Save your entries.

Result You have defined the production scheduler YB4.

Scheduling Defining Scheduling Parameters for Production Orders Use The purpose of this activity is to specify scheduling parameters. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Shop Floor Control  Operations  Scheduling  Define Scheduling Parameters for Production Orders

Transaction Code

OPU3

2.

On the Change View Specify Scheduling Parameters: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

Enter the following settings: Field Name

User Action and Values

Plant

3710

Field Name

User Action and Values

Order type

YBM4

Prodn Superv.

*

Detailed Scheduling Scheduling

X

Generate Capacity Reqs.

X

Adjust Dates Adjust Dates

Adjust basic dates, adjust dep. reqmts to operation date

Scheduling control for detailed scheduling Scheduling Type

Backwards

Automatic Scheduling

X

Start in the Past

5

Requirements Date Determination for Components Operation Segment

Setup

Reduction Reduction type

All operations in the order will be reduced

Maximum reduction level

Do not reduce

% reduction in floats 4.

Save your entries.

Result You have defined the scheduling parameter for production order type YBM4.

Availability Check Defining ATP Checking Control Use The purpose of this activity is to define parameters for the confirmation of operations.

CUSTOMER 534

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Shop Floor Control  Operations  Availability Check  Define Checking Control

Transaction OPJK 2.

On the Change View Order Control: overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the following settings: Field Name

Description

User action and values

Plant

3710

Order Type

YBM4

Availability Check

1

Material availability No Check

X (set indicator)

Checking Rule

SO

PRT availability No Check

X (set indicator)

Capacity availability No Check

X (set indicator)

4.

Save your entries and go Back.

5.

On the Change View Order Control: overview screen, choose New Entries and enter the following settings: Field Name

Description User action and values

Plant

3710

Order Type

YBM4

Availability Check

2

Material availability Check material availability when saving order

X (set indicator)

Checking Rule

SP

Release material

1

PRT availability No check

X (set indicator)

Field Name

Description User action and values

Capacity availability No check 6.

X (set indicator)

Save your entries.

Result You defined the ATP checking control.

Confirmation Parameters Defining Confirmation Parameters Use The purpose of this activity is to define parameters for the confirmation of operations. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Shop Floor Control  Operations  Confirmation  Define Confirmation Parameters

Transaction OPK4 2.

On the Change View Parameters for Order Confirmation: Overview screen, choose New Entries.

3.

On the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the following: Field Name

Description

User action and values

Plant

3710

3710

Order Type

YBM4

YBM4

Control data Generated confirmations w/o quantity adjustment

X

Generally valid settings tab

CUSTOMER 536

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Checks Operating sequence

Warning when operation sequence is not adhered to

Underdelivery

Under delivery tolerance is not checked

Overdelivery

Error when over delivery tolerance is exceeded

Results Rec. (QM)

Message if no inspection results exist

Selection Open orders

X

Propose time units Automatic Optimization

X

Goods movements All components

blank

Individual Entry General tab Confirmation type

1

Automatic final confirmation

Act.cost

X

X

Goods movements

X

X

Shift - Proposal

Shift Not used

Individual Entry of Operation with initial scrn tab Quantities Propose

X

Display confirmed quantities

X

Display Standard Values

X

Dates Display confirmed dates

X

Display Standard Values

X

Screen control Time Ticket Quantities/activities Activities

X

Propose

X

Display confirmed activities

X

Display Standard Values

X

HR Data Display Standard Values

X

Selection Include Confirmable Operations 4.

X

Save your entries.

Result You have defined confirmation parameter for order type YBM4.

SD Batch Determination and Batch Check Allocate SD Search Procedure/Activate Check Use The purpose of this activity is to allocate the batch search strategy to order type CBMO. Automatic batch determination can be done either on the sales order level or in the delivery. When you assign the batch already in the sales order, a batch split is not possible. The standard configuration foresees the automatic batch determination in the delivery. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Logistics - General  Batch Management  Batch Determination and Batch Check  Batch Search Procedure Allocation and Check Activation  Allocate SD Search Procedure/Activate Check

Transaction Code

SPRO

CUSTOMER 538

Localization objects - per Business Priority

1.

On the Change view “Search Procedure for Batches: Determination in Sales Docs screen, choose New entries.

2.

Enter the following information:

3.

Sales Org

Distr. Chl

Division Sales Doc Type

Search Procedure

Check Batch

3710

10

00

YB0001

X

CBMO

Save your entries.

Result You have allocated the batch search strategy to the order type SBMO.

Activate Automatic Batch Determination in SD (Item Cat Delivery) Use The purpose of this activity is to activate automatic batch determination in SD. General Information: The automatic batch determination can be done either on sales order level or in the delivery. If the batch is assigned already in the sales order, a batch split is not possible. The standard configuration foresees the automatic batch determination in the delivery.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Logistics - General  Batch Management  Batch Determination and Batch Check  Activate Automatic Batch Determination in SD

Transaction Code

SPRO

2.

Choose Activate Automatic Batch Determination for Delivery Item Cat.

3.

Enter the following information:

4.

Item Category

Description

Automatic Batch Determination

CBTA

MTO Standard Item

X

Save your entries.

Result You have activated the automatic batch determination in SD.

4.7.5Repetitive Manufacturing [local] (BJJ) 4.7.5.1

Configuration – On Premise

4.7.5.1.1 Defining Production Scheduling Profile Use The purpose of this activity is to define the production scheduling profile for your plant.

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Production  Shop Floor Control  Master Data  Define Production Scheduling Profile

Transaction code

SPRO

In the Change View "Production Scheduling Profile": Overview screen, choose New Entries and enter the following values: Field

Description

Values

Plant

3710

Prod. Sched. Profile

YBR001

Comment

REM - Rep. Man.

On Release Schedule Order

Selected

Material Availability Check Confirm Available Partial Qty 3.

Selected

Save your entries.

CUSTOMER 540

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.7.5.1.2 Defining Production Supervisor Use The purpose of this activity is to define the production scheduler/production supervisor.

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG menu

Production  Shop Floor Control  Master Data  Define Production Supervisor

Transaction code

SPRO

In the Change View "Production Scheduler": Overview screen, choose New Entries and enter the following values: Field

3.

Description

Values

Plant

3710

Prod. Sched.

YBR

Description

REM –Rep. Man.

Prod.Profile

YBR001

Comment

Save your entries.

4.7.6 Production Material Related Sample Master Data [local] (BM2) 4.7.6.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.7.6.1.1 Create Material Master – Organization Dependent for Production material Creating Raw Material Use A new raw material is needed.

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP ECC Menu

Logistics  Materials Management  Material Master  Material  Create (General)  Immediately

Transaction code

MM01

On the initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter: Field name

Description

User action and values

Material



Industry sector

M Mechanical Engineer

Material type

ROH Raw Materials

Material

Industry Sector

RM12

M

RM13

M

RM14

M

RM16

M

RM17

M

RM18

M

RM124

M

RM20

M

RM122

M

RM120

M

RM128

M

RM27

M

RM28

M

RM09

M

RM15

M

RM19

M

RM30

M

Note

see table below

CUSTOMER 542

Localization objects - per Business Priority

General Plant Data / Storage 1/2 3.

Choose the Plant data/stor.1/2 tab, view entries and choose Enter to continue. Field Name

Description User Action and Values

Plant

Comment

3710

Stor. location

see table below for material- and plant-specific data

Material

Plant

Stor. location

RM12

3710

371B;371C

RM13

3710

371B;371C

RM14

3710

371B;371C

RM16

3710

371B;371C

RM17

3710

371B;371C

RM18

3710

371B;371C

RM124

3710

371B;371C

RM20

3710

371B;371C

RM122

3710

371B;371C

RM120

3710

371B;371C

RM128

3710

371B;371C

RM27

3710

371B;371C

RM28

3710

371B;371C

RM09

3710

371B;371C

RM15

3710

371B;371C

RM19

3710

371B;371C

RM30

3710

371B;371C

4.

Choose Enter to open the second screen.

5.

Choose Save to go to the initial screen.

6.

On the initial screen, enter the following and choose Enter: Field name

Description

User action and values

Material



Industry sector

M Mechanical Engineer

Note

see table below

Material type 7.

ROH Raw Materials

In the Select View(s) dialog box, select the following views and press Enter: Sales Org. Data 1 and 2, Sales General Plant Data: for all materials Purchasing and Purchase Order Text: for all materials MRP views 1, 2, 3 and 4: for all materials Accounting 1 and 2: for all materials Costing 1 and 2: for all materials

8.

In the Organizational Levels dialog box, enter the following values: Field name

9.

Description User action and values

Plant

3710

Sales Org.

3710

Distr.Channel

10

Note

Enter the main plant where the material will be procured (see special instructions below)

Choose Enter To view the material lists, execute transaction MM60 or from the menu, choose Logistics  Materials Management  Material Master  Other  Materials List.

Sales Data 10.

Choose the Sales: sales org. 1 tab.

11.

Enter the following and press Enter: Field name

Description

User action and values

Delivering plant

3710

Tax classification ("TTX1")

1 for taxable

12.

Choose the Sales: sales org.2 tab.

13.

Enter the following and press Enter: Field name

Description

User action and values

Comment

Note

Acct assignment grp Item category group 14.

Choose the Sales: General/plant tab.

15.

Make the following entries and press Enter

NORM

CUSTOMER 544

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field name

Description

User action and values

Availability check

Y2 for Indiv.requirements

Trans. Grp

0001

LoadingGrp

0001

Profit Center

YB111

16.

Choose the Sales text tab.

17.

Enter text that should appear on sales documents for this material.

Note

Purchasing Data 18.

On the Initial purchasing screen, enter the following values and press Enter: Field name

Description User action and values

Note

Purchasing group



see table for material-specific data

Goods Receipt Processing Time



see table for material-specific data

Material

Purchasing Group

Goods Receipt Processing Time (days)

RM09

001

1

RM12

001

0

RM120

002

0

RM122

002

0

RM124

002

1

RM128

002

0

RM13

001

0

RM14

001

0

RM15

001

1

RM16

001

0

RM17

003

0

RM18

003

0

RM19

001

1

Material

19.

Purchasing Group

Goods Receipt Processing Time (days)

RM20

002

0

RM27

001

0

RM28

002

0

RM30

003

1

On the Purchase order text screen, enter the text that should appear on purchasing documents for this material.

MRP Data 20.

Choose the MRP1 tab.

21.

Enter the following and choose Enter. Field name

Description User action and values

MRP type

PD, VB

Note The MRP type for materials RM124 and RM30 must be VB PD for all the other row material.

MRP controller



see table for material-specific data

Reorder Point

see table for material-specific data

Lot size 22.



see table for material-specific data

Material-specific data MRP view 1: Material

MRP Controller

Reorder Point

RM09

001

EX

RM12

001

EX

RM120

001

EX

RM122

001

EX

RM124

001

RM128

001

EX

RM13

001

EX

RM14

001

EX

RM15

001

EX

200

Lot Size

EX

CUSTOMER 546

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Material

MRP Controller

Reorder Point

RM16

001

EX

RM17

001

EX

RM18

001

EX

RM19

001

EX

RM20

001

EX

RM27

001

0

EX

RM28

001

0

EX

RM30

001

200

EX

23.

Choose the MRP2 tab.

24.

Enter the following and press Enter. Field name

Description User action and values

Lot Size

Note

Procurement type

F

Special procurement



Prod. Stor. Location

371B

Storage loc. for EP

371C

Plnd delivery time



see table for materialspecific data

SchedMargin Key

Required

see table for materialspecific data

Backflush



see table for materialspecific data

Stock determination group

0001

see table for materialspecific data

Material Special Procurement Planned Delivery Time

Scheduling Margin Key

RM09

10

000

RM12

10

000

RM120

10

000

RM122

10

000

RM124

10

000

RM128

10

000

RM13

10

000

RM14

10

000

RM15

10

000

RM16

10

000

RM17

10

000

RM18

10

000

RM19

10

000

RM20

10

000

RM27

10

000

RM28

15

000

RM30

10

000

25.

Choose the MRP3 tab.

26.

Maintain the following values and choose Enter. Field name

Description

Backflush

1

1

1

User action and values

Note

Planning: Strategy Group 27.

Choose the MRP4 tab.

28.

Enter the following values and choose Enter. Field name

Description User action and values

Indiv./Coll



Note see table for material-specific data

Material

Indiv./ Collective Requirements

RM09

2

RM12

2

CUSTOMER 548

Localization objects - per Business Priority

29.

RM120

2

RM122

2

RM124

2

RM128

2

RM13

2

RM14

2

RM15

2

RM16

2

RM17

2

RM18

2

RM19

2

RM20

2

RM27

2

RM28

2

RM30

2

Choose Enter.

Accounting Data 30.

On the Accounting 1 tab, enter the following and choose Enter. Field name

Description User action and values

Price unit

1

Standard price



Valuation Class

3000

Material

Standard price

RM09

0,08

RM12

1

RM120

1,25

RM122

0,75

RM124

0,35

Note

see table for materialspecific data

RM128

1,65

RM13

0,5

RM14

0,75

RM15

0,2

RM16

0,25

RM17

0,88

RM18

0,67

RM19

0,12

RM20

1,3

RM27

0,75

RM28

2,25

RM30

0,01

31.

Choose the Accounting 2 tab.

32.

Choose Enter.

Costing Data 33.

Choose the Costing 1 tab.

34.

Maintain the following and then choose Enter. Field name

Description

Material origin

User action and values

Note

select the checkbox

35.

Choose the Costing 2 tab.

36.

Choose Enter.

37.

On the Last data screen reached dialog box, choose Yes to save your entries.

Result The raw material is created.

Creating Semi-finished (HALB) Material Use A new semi-finished material is needed. CUSTOMER 550

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP ECC Menu

Logistics  Materials Management  Material Master  Material  Create (General)  Immediately

Transaction code

MM01

On the initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter: Field name

Description User action and values

Material

required

Industry sector

M Mechanical Engineer

Material type

HALB Semi finished products

Material

Industry Sector

SG124

M

SG21

M

SG22

M

SG224

M

SG23

M

SG24

M

SG25

M

SG325A

M

SG325B

M

Note

see listed data below

General Plant Data / Storage 1/2 3.

Choose the Plant data/stor.1/2 tab, view the entries, and choose Enter to continue. Field Name Plant Stor. location

Description User Action and Values

Comment

3710 See the following table for material- and plant-specific data

Material

Plant

Stor. location

SG124

3710

371B

SG21

3710

371B

SG22

3710

371B

SG224

3710

371B

SG23

3710

371C

SG24

3710

371B

SG25

3710

371B

SG325A

3710

371B

SG325B

3710

371B

4.

Choose Enter to open the second screen.

5.

Choose Save to go to the initial screen.

6.

On the initial screen, Maintain the following and then choose Enter: Field name

7.

Description User action and values

Material



Industry sector

M Mechanical Engineer

Material type

HALB Semi finished products

Note

see table below

In the Select View(s) dialog box, select the following views and press Enter: Sales Org. Data 1 and 2, Sales General Plant Data: for all materials Purchasing and Purchase Order Text: for all materials MRP views 1, 2, 3 and 4: for all materials Accounting 1 and 2: for all materials Costing 1 and 2: for all materials

8.

Enter the following: Field name

9.

Description

User action and values

Plant

3710

Stor. location



Sales Org.

3710

Distr.Channel

10

Note

Choose Enter. To view the material lists, execute transaction MM60 or from the menu, choose Logistics  Materials Management  Material Master  Other  Materials List.

CUSTOMER 552

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Sales Data 10.

Choose the Sales: sales org. 1 tab.

11.

Maintain the following and then choose Enter: Field name

Description

User action and values

Delivering plant

3710

Tax classification ("TTX1")

1 for taxable

12.

Choose the Sales: sales org.2 tab.

13.

Maintain the following and then choose Enter: Field name

Description

User action and values

Acct assignment grp

02

Item category group

NORM

14.

Choose the Sales: General/plant tab.

15.

Maintain the following and then choose Enter: Field name

Description

User action and values

Availability check

Y2 for Indiv.requirements

Trans. Grp

0001

LoadingGrp

0001

Batch management



Profit Center

YB111

Note

Note

Note

16.

On the Sales text tab, enter the text to appear on sales documents for this material.

17.

Choose the Purchasing tab Enter does not work when the cursor is in a text field.

Purchasing Data 18.

Choose the Purchasing tab.

19.

Make the following entries and press Enter: Field name Purchasing group

Description User action and values

Note see table below for material- and plantspecific data

Goods Receipt Processing Time



see table below for material- and plantspecific data

Material

Plant

Purchasing group

Goods Receipt Processing Time (days)

SG124

3710

001

0

SG21

3710

001

0

SG22

3710

001

0

SG224

3710

001

0

SG23

3710

001

0

SG24

3710

002

0

SG25

3710

001

0

SG325A

3710

001

0

SG325B

3710

001

0

20.

On the Purchase order text screen, enter the text to appear on purchasing documents for this material.

21.

Choose the MRP1 tab Enter does not work when the cursor is in a text field.

MRP Data 22.

Maintain the following and then choose Enter. Field name

Description User action and values

MRP type

PD

MRP controller



Lot size

EX

Note

see table below for materialand plant-specific data

Material

Plant

MRP controller

SG124

3710

001

SG21

3710

001

SG22

3710

001

CUSTOMER 554

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Material

Plant

MRP controller

SG224

3710

001

SG23

3710

001

SG24

3710

001

SG25

3710

001

SG325A

3710

001

SG325B

3710

001

23.

Choose the MRP2 tab.

24.

Maintain the following and then choose Enter. Field name

Description User action and values

Note

Procurement type



see table below for materialand plantspecific data

Special procurement

40 if material will always be transferred from another plant, otherwise leave blank

see table below for materialand plantspecific data

Prod. Stor. Location



see table below for materialand plantspecific data

Storage location for External Procurement



see table below for materialand plantspecific data

In-house production



see table below for materialand plantspecific data

Plnd delivery time



see table below for materialand plantspecific data

SchedMargin Key

001

Stock Determination group



see table below for material-

and plantspecific data

Materi al

Plant

Procur Special . procure -ment Type key

Prod. Stor Loc.

Stor. Loc. for Ext. proc.

Inhou se pro d. time

Plann Stock ed determ.g delive roup ry time in days

SG124

3710

E

371B

371C

1

10

SG21

3710

X

20

371B

371C

1

10

SG22

3710

E

50

371B

1

10

SG224

3710

E

SG23

3710

F

SG24

3710

E

SG25

3710

X

SG325 A

3710

SG325 B

3710

371B

371C

1

10

371C

371C

1

10

371B

371C

0

2

20

371B

371C

1

10

X

20

371B

371C

1

10

X

20

371B

371C

1

10

30

25.

Choose the MRP3 tab.

26.

Maintain the following and then choose Enter. Field name

Description User action and values

0001

0001

0001

Note

Planning Strategy group

40

Consumption mode

2

Bwd consumption per



see table below for material- and plantspecific data

Fwd consumption per



see table below for material- and plantspecific data

Total replenishment lead time



see table below for material- and plantspecific data

CUSTOMER 556

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Material Plant Backward consumption

Forward consumption

Total replenishment lead time

SG124

3710 100

100

2

SG21

3710 100

100

2

SG22

3710 100

100

2

SG224

3710 100

100

2

SG23

3710 100

100

2

SG24

3710 100

100

2

SG25

3710 100

100

2

SG325A

3710 100

100

2

SG325B

3710 100

100

2

27.

Choose the MRP4 tab.

28.

Maintain the following and then choose Enter. Field name

Description User action and values

Individual/coll.

2 for collective requirements 1 for individual requirements

Repetitive Manufacturing



REM profile

Material Plant Individual/ coll. requirements SG124

3710 2

SG21

3710 2

SG22

3710 2

SG224

3710 1

SG23

3710 2

Note see table below for material- and plantspecific data

see table below for material- and plantspecific data see table below for material- and plantspecific data

Repetitive Manufacturing

REM profile

x

0002

Material Plant Individual/ coll. requirements

29.

SG24

3710

SG25

3710 2

SG325A

3710 2

SG325B

3710 2

Repetitive Manufacturing

REM profile

Choose Enter.

Accounting Data 30.

31.

On the Accounting 1 screen, maintain the following entries and then press Enter. Field name

Description User action and values

Price unit

1

Standard price

enter standard cost of material

Valuation Class

7900

Note

see table below for materialand plant-specific data

Material

Plant

Standard price

SG124

3710

0,52

SG21

3710

1,5

SG22

3710

2,7

SG224

3710

0,52

SG23

3710

1,88

SG24

3710

0,17

SG25

3710

5,75

SG325A

3710

6,6

SG325B

3710

5,6

On the Accounting 2 tab, choose Enter.

Costing Data 32.

On the Costing 1 tab, make the following entries and then choose Enter. CUSTOMER

558

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field name

Description

User action and values

Material origin

select the checkbox

Variance key

000001

Note

33.

On Costing 2 tab, choose Enter.

34.

On the Last data screen reached dialog box, choose Yes to save your entries.

Result The semi-finished material is created.

Creating Finished (FERT) Material Use A new finished material is needed. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP ECC Menu

Logistics  Materials Management  Material Master  Material  Create (General)  Immediately

Transaction code

MM01

On the initial screen, enter the following values and then choose Enter: Field name

3.

Description

User action and values

Material



Industry sector

M Mechanical Engineer

Material type

FERT Finished Products

Note

Industry Sector M for all of materials.

General Plant Data / Storage 1/2 4.

Choose the Plant data/stor.1/2 tab, view entries and choose Enter to continue.

Field Name

Description User Action and Values

Plant

Comment

3710

Stor. location

see table below for material- and plant-specific data

Material

Plant

Stor. location

FG126

3710

371A, 371B, 371R

FG226

3710

371A, 371B,

FG29

3710

371A, 371B, 371R

5.

Choose Enter to open the second screen.

6.

Choose Save to go to the initial screen.

7.

On the initial screen, make the following entries and choose Enter: Field name

8.

Description

User action and values

Material



Industry sector

M Mechanical Engineer

Material type

FERT Finished Products

Note

see table below

In the Select View(s) dialog box, select the following views and then choose Enter:

 Sales Org. Data 1 and 2, Sales General Plant Data: for all materials  Foreign Trade: Export Data  Purchasing and Purchase Order Text: for all materials  MRP views 1, 2, 3 and 4: for all materials  Accounting 1 and 2: for all materials  Costing 1 and 2: for all materials 9.

Enter the following: Field name

Description User action and values

Plant

3710

Stor. location



Sales Org.

3710

Note

First create the materials for plant 3710; see table below for further plants

First create the materials for sales organization 3710. see table below for further sales organizations

CUSTOMER 560

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field name

Description User action and values

Distr.Channel 10.

Note

10

Choose Enter.

Sales Data 11.

Choose the Sales: sales org. 1 tab.

12.

Make the following entries and then choose Enter: Field name

Description

User action and values

Delivering plant

3710

Tax classification ("TTX1")

1 for taxable

13.

Choose the Sales: sales org.2 tab.

14.

Make the following entries and then choose Enter: Field name

Description

User action and values

Acct assignment grp

03

Item category group

NORM;

15.

Choose the Sales: General/plant tab.

16.

Make the following entries and then choose Enter: Field name

Description

User action and values

Availability check

Y2 for Indiv.requirements

Trans. Grp

0001

LoadingGrp

0001

Batch Management

Blank

Profit Center

YB110

Note

Note

Note

17.

On the Sales text tab, enter the text to appear on sales documents for this material.

18.

Choose the MRP tab

19. 20.

Enter does not work when the cursor is in a text field.

MRP Data 21.

Choose the MRP1 tab.

22.

Make the following entries and then choose Enter. Field name

Description

User action and values

MRP type

PD

MRP controller



Lot size

EX

Material

Plant

MRP controller

FG126

3710

001

FG226

3710

001

FG29

3710

001

23.

Choose the MRP2 tab.

24.

Make the following entries and then choose Enter. Field name

Description User action and values

Note

Note

Procurement Type

E;

E for plant 3710;

Special Procurement

blank;

blank for plant 3710;

Prod. Stor. Location

see table below for material- and plantspecific data

Storage Location for External Procurement

see table below for material- and plantspecific data

SchedMargin Key

000; 001

In-house production time

Material Plant Production Storage Location FG126

3710 371A



Storage Location for External Procurement

see table below for material- and plantspecific data see table below for material- and plantspecific data

Scheduling Margin Key

In-house Production

000

1

CUSTOMER 562

Localization objects - per Business Priority

FG226

3710 371A

000

FG29

3710 371A

000

25.

Choose the MRP3 tab.

26.

Make the following entries and then choose Enter. Field name

1

Description User action and values

Note

Strategy group

40

See the following table for material- and plant-specific data

Consumption mode

2 (see special instructions)

Bwd consumption per



See the following table for material- and plant-specific data

Fwd consumption per.



See the following table for material- and plant-specific data

Total replenishment lead time



See the following table for material- and plant-specific data

Material Plant Period Planning Consumption Consumption Total period: repl. Indicator strategy period: lead group forward backward time FG126

3710 W

40

100

100

2

FG226

3710

40

100

100

2

FG29

3710

40

100

100

2

27.

Choose the MRP4 tab.

28.

Make the following entries and then choose Enter.

Field name

Description User action and values

Individual/coll.

2 for collective requirements 1 for individual requirements

29.

Material

Plant

FG126

3710

FG226

3710

FG29

3710

Note see table below for material- and plantspecific data

Individual/ coll. requirements

1

Choose Enter.

Accounting Data 30.

On the Accounting 1 tab, make the following entries and then choose Enter. Field name

Description User action and values

Price unit

1

Standard price



Valuation class

31.

Note

see table below for material- and plant-specific data

7920

Material

Plant

Standard price

FG126

3710

18,65

FG126

3710

27,19

FG29

3710

0,88

Choose the second Accounting screen, and then choose Enter.

CUSTOMER 564

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Costing Data Use For the SpecProcurem Costing field, when the standard cost must be copied from the same material in a different plant, and no value was entered in the Special Procurement field in MRP2, then enter the appropriate value.

Procedure 1.

On the Costing 1 tab, make the following entries and then choose Enter. Field name

Description

User action and values

Material origin

Selected

Variance key

000001

Note

2.

On the Costing 2 tab, choose Enter.

3.

On the Last data screen reached dialog box, choose Yes to save your entries.

Result The finished material is created.

Creating Info Records Use The purpose of this activity is to create Info Records.

Prerequisites The material master records have been created. Vendor master records have been created. Procedure 4.

Access the activity using the following navigation option: SAP Menu

Logistics  Materials Management  Purchasing  Master Data Info Record  Create

Transaction Code 5.

At the entry view, maintain the fields as: Field name

6.

ME11

Description User action and values

Material



Plant

3710

Purchasing Organization

3710

Vendor



Info category:

Standard

Comment see table below for material-specific data

see table below for material-specific data

Choose the Purchase Organization Data 1 tab and enter the following: Field name

Description User action and values

Comment

Pl. Deliv. Time



see table below for materialspecific data

Purch. Group



see table below for materialspecific data

Tol. Underdl

10

Tol. Overdl

10

Standard Qty



Tax Code

AA

Net Price



Currency Key

EUR

Price unit

100

Incoterms 1

EXW

Incoterms 2

VENDOR

Material Vendor RM09

Purchasing Group

37300001 001

see table below for materialspecific data

see table below for materialspecific data

Planned Delivery Time

Standard quantity

Net Price

5

1

0,084

CUSTOMER 566

Localization objects - per Business Priority

RM12

37300001 001

5

1

1,05

RM12

37300002 001

5

1

0,95

RM120

37300001 001

5

1

1,31

RM120

37300002 001

5

1

1,37

RM122

37300001 001

5

1

0,75

RM124

37300001 001

5

1

0,35

RM15

37300001 001

5

1

0,21

RM16

37300001 001

5

1

0,24

RM17

37300001 001

5

1

0,84

RM18

37300001 001

5

1

0,70

RM18

37300002 001

5

1

0,64

RM19

37300001 001

5

1

0,13

RM20

37300001 001

5

1

1,23

RM27

37300001 001

5

1

0,71

RM28

37300001 001

5

1

2,70

RM30

37300001 001

5

100

0,01

SG21

37300001 002

5

1

1,43

SG23

37300001 002

5

1

1,78

SG23

37300002 002

5

1

2,25

SG25

37300001 002

5

1

5,46

RM13

37300001 001

5

1

0,48

RM14

37300001 001

5

1

0,71

7.

Choose Enter.

8.

Save your entries.

9.

Choose Back F 3 .

10.

Enter the data required on the Create Info Record: Initial Screen. Enter the data as follows: Field name

User action and values

Vendor

37300001

Material

SG23 (SEMI material)

Purchasing Organization

3710

Plant

3710

Field name

User action and values

Info category:

“Subcontracting”

11.

Choose Enter.

12.

On the Create Info Record: General Data screen, choose Purch. Org. Data1.

13.

On the Create Info Record: Purch. Organization Data screen, enter the data as follows: Subscreen Control: Field name

User action and values

Pl.Deliv.Time

10

Purch. group

001

Standard Qty.

100

GR-Bsd IV

Selected

Net price

0,59

Currency Key

EUR

Price unit

1

Order price unit

PC

Tax Code

AA

14.

Choose Enter. The system fills the missing data from material master.

15.

Save your entries.

Result The info records have been created.

Creating Sales Pricing Conditions Use The SAP Baseline Package scenarios require several pricing conditions.

Prerequisites The material master records have been created.

CUSTOMER 568

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using the following navigation option: SAP Menu

Logistics  Sales and Distribution  Master Data  Conditions Select Using Condition Type  Create

Transaction Code

VK11

2.

On the Create Condition Records screen, enter PPR0 in the input field Condition type.

3.

Choose Key combination.

4.

In the Key Combination dialog box, select Material with release status.

5.

Choose continue E n t e r .

6.

On the Create Price Condition (PPR0 Fast Entry screen, enter the values for Sales Organization, Distribution Channel, Material, Amount according to the details list in the section above (Use). In the Valid From field, enter the current date and in the Valid to field, enter 31.12.9999. Sales Organization

Division

Material

Per

Amount

3710

10

SG23

1

2,44

SG25

1

7,48

FG126

1

24,25

FG226

1

35,35

FG29

1

1,15

7.

Choose Enter.

8.

Save your entries.

9.

Choose back F 3 .

Result The pricing conditions have been created.

4.7.7 Rework Production Order - Stock-Manufactured Material [local] (BJP) 4.7.7.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.7.7.1.1 Shop Floor Control Defining Order-Type-Dependent Parameters Use The purpose of this activity is to define order types-dependent parameters. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Shop Floor Control  Master Data  Order  Define Order Types-dependent Parameters

Transaction Code

OPL8

2.

Choose New Entries.

3.

Enter the following:

4.

Plant

3710

Order type

YBW1

On the Planning tab, enter the following: Production version Production version

1

Routing Routing selection

P

Selection ID

Y1

Sequence exchange

0

Alternative sequences Task List Type

N

Operation Entry tool CUSTOMER 570

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Oper./act. increment

0010

Bill of material

5.

BOM Application

PP01

Reservation/Purch.Req

2

On the Implementation tab, enter the following: Status change documents For Order Header For Operation For Material For Production Resource/Tool Shop floor information system Update

X

Header

X

Item Operation Documentation of goods movements

6.

GR for Purchase Order

X

GR for Production Order

X

Planned Goods Issue

X

Unplanned Goods Issue

X

On the Cost Accounting tab, enter the following: Controlling Cstg variant planned

PYG1

Cstg variant actual

PYG2

Results Analysis Key

MBMF01

Planned Cost Calcul.

Determine Planned Cost When Saving

Distribution Rule Default Rule 7.

PP1

On the Display profiles tab, enter the following: Collective order display Graphics profile Graphic

000001

Group

PP

Name

Standard

Index

2

Missing parts list ProfMissPrtsLstOrdNo

000001

Missing Parts Prof.

000002

8.

Save your entries.

9.

Choose Back.

Defining Checking Control Use In this activity, you define the checking control.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Shop Floor Control  Operations  Availability Check  Define Checking Control

Transaction Code

OPJK

2.

Choose Execute.

3.

Choose New Entries.

4.

Enter the following: Plant

3710

Order type

YBW1

Availability check

1

Material availability Checking Rule

PP

PRT availability No check

X

Capacity availability CUSTOMER 572

Localization objects - per Business Priority

No check

X

5.

Save your entries.

6.

Choose Back.

7.

Repeat the steps for the following information: Plant

3710

Order type

YBW1

Availability check

2

Material availability Checking Rule

PP

Release Material

1

PRT availability No check

X

Capacity availability No check

X

Defining Parameters for Order Confirmation Use In this activity, you define the parameters for order confirmation. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Shop Floor Control  Operations  Confirmation  Define Confirmation Parameters

Transaction Code

OPK4

2.

Choose New Entries.

3.

Enter the following:

4.

Plant

3710

Order Type

YBW1

On the Generally valid settings tab, enter the following:

Checks Operation sequence

Warning when operation sequence is not adhered to

Under delivery

Under delivery tolerance is not checked

Over delivery

Over delivery tolerance is not checked

Results Rec.(QM)

Message if no inspection results exist

Selections Open orders

X

Propose time units Automatic optimization

Selected

Goods movements All components 5.

Choose the individual entry General tab.

6.

Enter the following: Confirmation function except fast entry Confirm.type

Partial confirmation

Error handling/logs Act costs

X

Goods movements

X

Shift - Proposal

Shift Not Used

7.

Choose the indiv.entry of Operation w initial screen tab.

8.

Make the following entries: Quantities Propose

X

Display confirmed quantities

X

Display Standard Values

X

Activities Propose

X

Display confirmed activities

X

Display Standard Values

X

Dates Display confirmed dates

X

CUSTOMER 574

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Display Standard Values

X

HR Data Display Standard Values

X

Screen control Time Ticket Quantities/activities

Selected

Selection Incl.Confirmable operations 9.

Save your entries.

10.

Choose Back.

X

Defining Scheduling Parameters for Production Orders Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: IMG Menu

Production  Capacity Requirements Planning  Operations  Scheduling  Define Scheduling Parameters for Production Orders

Transaction Code

OPU3

2.

Choose New Entries.

3.

Enter the following: Plant

3710

Ord.Typ

YBW1

Prod.sched.

*

Detailed Scheduling Scheduling

X

Capacity reqts

X

Adjust scheduling Adjust Dates

Adjust basic dates, adjust dep. reqmts to operation date

Scheduling control for detailed scheduling Scheduling type

Backwards

Automatic scheduling

X

Start. in.past

005

Requirements Date Determination for Components Operation Segment

Setup

Reduction Reduction type

All operation in the order will be reduced

Max.redctn.level

Do not reduce

4.

Save your entries.

5.

Choose Back.

4.7.8 Rework Production Order Sample Master Data [local] (BJY) 4.7.8.1

Master Data –OP

Create Routing – Finished Product Use The purpose of this activity is to create routings for the finished product. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics  Production  Master Data  Routings  Routings  Standard Routings  Create

Transaction Code

CA01

On the Create Routing: Initial screen, enter the following values and then choose Enter. Field Name

Description

Values

Material number

FG126

Plant

Plant 1 NL (3710)

Group

4101000

Key Date



Comment

CUSTOMER 576

Localization objects - per Business Priority

3.

Choose Header Details, on the Create Routing: Header Details screen, enter the following values. Field Name

4.

5.

Description

Values

Group Counter

99

Task list description

Packaging Line 1

Task list usage

Production (1)

Status

Released (general)

From Lot Size

0

To Lot Size

99999999

Comment

Choose Operation Overview, on the Create Routing: Operation Overview screen, enter the following values for each Operation/Activity Number. Field Name

Values

Operation/Activity Number

010

Work center

WORK

Plant

Plant 1 NL (3710)

Control Key

YBP1

Operation short text

WORK

Base Quantity

1

Unit of Measure for Operation

PC

Double-click the table to open Operation Details, on the Create Routing: Operation Details screen, enter the following values for each Operation/Activity Number. Field

Values

Setup

30

Unit of measure for Setup

min

Activity Type

3

Machine

10

Unit of measure for Setup

min

Activity Type

1

Labor

10

Unit of measure for Setup

min

Activity Type

11

6.

Save your entries.

Create BOMs - Finished Products Use The purpose of this activity is to create a BOM for materials FG126. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics  Production  Master Data  Bills of Material  Bill of Material  Material BOM  Create

Transaction Code

CS01

On the Create material BOM: Initial screen, enter the following values and then choose Enter. Field Name

3.

Description

Comment

Material number

FG126

Plant

Plant 1 NL (3710)

BOM usage

Production (1)

Valid From



e.g. 01.01.2007

On the Create material BOM: General Item Overview screen, choose Header F 6 and enter the following values: Field Name

4.

Values

Description

Values

Base quantity

1

BOM Status

Active (1)

Comment

Choose Item Overview F 5 , enter the following values: BOM Item Number

Item Category (Bill of Material)

BOM Component

Component quantity

Component unit of measure

010

Stock item (L)

FG126

1

PC

5.

Choose Enter. You are prompted that the BOM is recursive and you are taken to the Item General data tab. Select the recursive allowed tick box.

6.

Save your entries.

CUSTOMER 578

Localization objects - per Business Priority

The BOM will be created as Alternative 2 if Alternative 1 BOM has already been created from configuration guide Building Block BJL (MTS Production – Discrete Industry Sample Master Data) for the material FG126.

Create Production Version for Finished Product Use You use production versions to determine which alternative BOM is used with an alternative routing to produce a material. The purpose of this activity is to create a production version for the material Finished Good MTS (FG126).

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics  Production  Master Data  Production Versions

Transaction Code

C223

On the Create material BOM: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter: Field Name

3.

Description

Values

Plant

Plant 1 NL (3710)

Material number

FG126

Key date for the selection of production versions

Today’s Date

On the Production Versions table, enter the following values: Field Name

Description Values

Plant

Plant 1 (3710)

Material Number

Finished Good MTS (FG126)

Production Version

0099

Short text on the production version

Production Version 99

Comment

Comment

Field Name

4.

Description Values

Valid-from date of production version

Today’s Date

Run-time end: production version

31.12.9999

Lot Size from

0

To Lot Size

99999999

Alternative BOM

2

BOM Usage

1 (Production)

Key for Task List Group

410100XX

Group Counter

99

Task List Type

N

Comment

Enter the group number from the Routing of your finished product.

Save your entries.

4.7.9 Production Subcontracting - External Processing [local] (BJM) 4.7.9.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.7.9.1.1 Master Data Creating Purchase Info Record Use The purpose of this activity is to create an Info Record.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: CUSTOMER

580

Localization objects - per Business Priority

2.

SAP Menu

Logistics  Materials Management  Purchasing  Master Data  Info Record  Create

Transaction Code

ME11

On the Create Info Record: Initial screen, enter the following values and then choose Enter. Field Name

3.

Vendor Account Number

37300001

Purchasing Organization

Purchasing Organization 1 (3710)

Info category

Standard

Comment

On the Create Info Record: General Data screen, enter the following values for each of the materials and then choose Enter. Field Name

4.

Description User Actions and Values

Description User Actions and Values

Material Group

01

Short Text

Shrink Wrapping

Salesperson

Mr. Salesman

Telephone

172595959

Order Unit

PC

Certificate of origin: Country of issue

DE

Region

BadenWürttemberg (08)

Sort Term



Comment

For example,FG126, Enter material number of any finished good.

Choose Purchase Organization Data, enter the following values. Field Name

Description User Actions and Values

Planned delivery time days

1

Purchasing Group

004

Comment

5.

Standard purchase order quantity

100

Net price

35

Price unit

100

Sales Tax Code

AA

Save your entries.

4.7.10 Central Production Sample Master Data (for Library - Mfg.) [local] (BJ3) 4.7.10.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.7.10.1.1 Logistics – General Data Creating Bill of Material Use The purpose of this activity is to create BOM Header Data and all items for materials SG22;SG23. Prerequisites The material master records have been created.

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using the following navigation option: SAP Menu

Logistics  Production  Master Data  Bills of Material  Bill of Material  Material BOM  Create

Transaction Code

CS01

On the Create Material BOM: Initial Screen, enter the following data to create the BOM of material SG22. Field name Material

Description User action and values

Comment

SG22

CUSTOMER 582

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field name

Description User action and values

Plant

3710

BOM Usage

1

Comment

Effectivity Valid From

First date of the fiscal year

For example 01.01.2006

3.

Choose Enter.

4.

On the Create Material BOM: General Item Overview screen, choose Header F 6 .

5.

On the Create Material BOM: Header Overview screen, enter 100 in the input field Base quantity.

6.

Choose Enter.

7.

On the Create Material BOM: Header Overview screen, choose Item Overview F 5 .

8.

On the Create Material BOM: General Item Overview screen, enter the following data: Item

ICt

Component

Quantity

Un

0010

L

RM16

100

PC

0020

L

RM17

100

PC

0030

L

RM18

100

PC

9.

Save your entries.

10.

On the Create Material BOM: Initial Screen, enter the following data to create the BOM of material SG23. Field name

Description User action and values

Material

SG23

Plant

3710

BOM Usage

1

Comment

Effectivity Valid From

First date of the fiscal year

For example 01.01.2006

11.

Choose Enter.

12.

On the Create Material BOM: General Item Overview screen, choose Header F 6 .

13.

On the Create Material BOM: Header Overview screen, enter 100 in the input field Base quantity.

14.

Choose Enter.

15.

On the Create Material BOM: Header Overview screen, choose Item Overview F 5 .

16.

17.

On the Create Material BOM: General Item Overview screen, enter the following data: Item

ICt

Component

Quantity

Un

0010

L

RM13

100

PC

0020

L

RM14

100

PC

Save your entries.

Result You have created BOM Header Data and all related items for material SG22 and SG23.

4.7.10.1.2 General Data Production Creating Resources Use The purpose of this activity is to create all kind of resources to be used in Master Recipes. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics  Production Process  Master Data  Resources  Resource  Create (CRC1)

Transaction Code

CRC1

At the entry view, maintain the fields as: Field name

Description User action and values

Note

Plant

3710

Resource



see table below for specific data

Resource category



see table below for specific data

CUSTOMER 584

Localization objects - per Business Priority

3.

4.

5.

Resource

Resource Category

BOTTLING

0008

MIXING

0008

PACKING

0008

In the Basic data view, maintain the following fields: Field name

Description User action and values

Resource Description



see table below for specific data

Person Responsible



see table below for specific data

Usage



see table below for specific data

Standard Value key



see table below for specific data

Resource

Person Responsible

Usage Standard value key

BOTTLING Ink Bottling

001

008

YBP1

MIXING

Ink Mixing

001

008

YBP1

PACKING

Ink Packing

001

008

YBP1

Resource Description

Note

In the Default Values view, maintain the following fields: Field name

Description User action and values

Note

Control Key



see table below for specific data

Standard value units



see table below for specific data

Resource

Control Key

Standard value unit 1

Standard value unit 2

BOTTLING

YBP4

H

H

MIXING

YBP4

H

H

PACKING

YBP4

H

H

In the Capacities view, maintain the following fields:

Field name

Description User action and values

Capacity Category

001

Other formula



see table below for specific data

Capacity Category

002

see table below for specific data

Other formula



see table below for specific data

Resource

Capacity Category

Other formula

BOTTLING

001

YBPI01

002

YBPI02

001

YBPI01

002

YBPI02

001

YBPI01

002

YBPI02

MIXING PACKING 6.

Note

Select the Capacity header data, maintain fields (first for capacity category 001, then return to the main screen, set the cursor on capacity category 002, and select the Capacity header data, if applicable) Field name

Description User action and values

Note

Capacity Category



see table below for specific data

Capacity Category Description



see table below for specific data

Capacity Planner Group



see table below for specific data

Factory calendar ID

01

Unit of measure



see table below for specific data

Start Time



see table below for specific data

CUSTOMER 586

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field name

Description User action and values

Note

Finish Time



see table below for specific data

Length of Breaks



see table below for specific data

Capacity Utilization



see table below for specific data

No. of individual capacities



see table below for specific data

Relevant to finite scheduling



see table below for specific data

can be used by several operations



see table below for specific data

relevant for long-term planning



see table below for specific data

Resource

UoM Cap. Pln. Grp

Start Time

Fin. Time

BOTTLING 001

H

06:00

002

H

001

H

002

H

001

H

002

H

MIXING PACKING

Resource

Cap. Cat.

Cap. Cat.

BOTTLING 001 002

A A A

Length of Breaks

Cap. Utilization

No. of indiv. cap.

18:00

100

1

06:00

18:00

100

1

06:00

18:00

100

1

06:00

18:00

100

1

06:00

18:00

100

1

06:00

18:00

100

1

Capacity short text

Relevant to finite scheduling

Can be used by several operations

Long-termplanning

Machine Capacity



 

 

Labor Capacity

Resource

Cap. Cat.

Capacity short text

Relevant to finite scheduling

Can be used by several operations

Long-termplanning

MIXING

001

Machine Capacity



 

 



 

 

002

Labor Capacity PACKING

001 002

Machine Capacity Labor Capacity

7.

Choose the Scheduling Tab page and make the following entries: Field name

8.

Description User action and values

Capacity Category

001

Int.Proc.Duration



Resource

Int.Proc.Duration

BOTTLING

YBPI01

MIXING

YBPI01

PACKING

YBPI01

Comment

see table below for specific data

Choose the Costing tab and make the following entries: Field name

Description User action and values

Note

Controlling Area

A000

Cost Center



Start Date



Activity Type



see table below for specific data

Activity Unit



see table below for specific data

see table below for specific data

CUSTOMER 588

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field name

Description User action and values

Reference Indicator



set always indicator

Formula



see table below for specific data

Work Center

Cost Center

Activity Type

Activity Unit

Formula

BOTTLING

37101301

3

H

YBPI01

11

H

YBPI02

3

H

YBPI01

11

H

YBPI02

3

H

YBPI01

11

H

YBPI02

MIXING PACKING 9.

Note

37101301 37101301

Save your entries.

Result You have created the necessary resources.

Creating Work Centers Use The purpose of this activity is to create all kind of work centers with different work center categories, according to their different applications. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics  Production  Master Data  Work Centers  Work Center  Create (CR01)

Transaction Code

CR01

At the entry view, maintain the fields as:

Field name

3.

Description User action and values

Note

Plant

3710

Work Center



see table below for specific data

Work center category



see table below for specific data

Work Center

Work Center Category

ASSEMBLY

0001

DISCR_MF

0001

PACK01

0001

PACK02

0001

PVRSN_MF

0001

TECHNIC

0001

TESTING

0001

TOT_PLNT

0001

WORK

0001

WINDING

0007

In the Basic data view, maintain the following fields: Field name

Description User action and values

Note

Work Center Description



see table below for specific data

Person Responsible



see table below for specific data

Usage



see table below for specific data

Standard Value key



see table below for specific data

CUSTOMER 590

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.

Work Center

Work Center Description

Person Responsible

Usage Standard value key

ASSEMBLY

Assembly

001

009

SAP1

DISCR_MF

Manufacturing - Top Level

001

009

SAP1

PACK01

Packing Line 1

001

009

SAP1

PACK02

Hand Packing Work Center

001

009

SAP1

PVRSN_MF

Pen Manufacturing Top Level

001

009

SAP1

TECHNIC

CNC machine

001

009

SAP1

TESTING

Testing

001

009

SAP1

TOT_PLNT

Manufacturing - Top Level

001

009

SAP1

WINDING

Spring Winding

001

009

SAP1

WORK

Work for machine/person

001

009

SAP1

In the Default Values view, maintain the following fields: Field name

Description User action and values

Control Key



see table below for specific data

Standard value units



see table below for specific data

Work Center

Control Key

Note

Standard value unit 1

Standard value unit 2

Standard value unit 3

ASSEMBLY

MIN

MIN

MIN

DISCR_MF

MIN

MIN

MIN

PACK01

MIN

MIN

MIN

Work Center

Control Key

Standard value unit 1

Standard value unit 2

Standard value unit 3

PACK02

YBP1

MIN

MIN

MIN

PVRSN_MF

H

H

H

TECHNIC

MIN

MIN

MIN

TESTING

MIN

MIN

MIN

MIN

MIN

MIN

MIN

MIN

MIN

TOT_PLNT WINDING

YBP3

WORK 5.

In the Capacities view, maintain the following fields: Field name

Description User action and values

Note

Capacity Category

001

Setup formula



See the following table for specific data

Processing Formula



See the following table for specific data

Other formula



See the following table for specific data

Capacity Category

002

See the following table for specific data

Setup formula



See the following table for specific data

Processing Formula



See the following table for specific data

Other formula



See the following table for specific data

Work Center

Capacity Category

Setup formula

Processing formula

ASSEMBLY

001

SAP005

SAP006

CUSTOMER 592

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Work Center

Capacity Category

Setup formula

Processing formula

DISCR_MF

001

SAP005

SAP006

002

SAP007

PACK01

001

SAP005

SAP006

PACK02

001

SAP005

SAP006

PVRSN_MF

001

SAP005

SAP006

002

SAP005

SAP006

TECHNIC

001

SAP005

SAP006

TESTING

001

SAP005

SAP006

TOT_PLNT

001

SAP005

SAP006

WINDING

001

SAP005

SAP006

WORK

001

SAP005

SAP006

002 6.

SAP007

Select the Capacity header data and maintain fields (first for capacity category 001, then return to the main screen, set the cursor on capacity category 002, and select the Capacity header data, if applicable) Field name

Description User action and values

Note

Capacity Category



See the following table for specific data

Capacity Category Description



See the following table for specific data

Capacity Planner Group



See the following table for specific data

Factory calendar ID

01

Unit of measure



See the following table for specific data

Start Time



See the following table for specific data

Finish Time



See the following table for specific data

Field name

Description User action and values

Note

Length of Breaks



See the following table for specific data

Capacity Utilization



See the following table for specific data

No. of individual capacities



See the following table for specific data

Relevant to finite scheduling



See the following table for specific data

can be used by several operations



See the following table for specific data

relevant for long-term planning



See the following table for specific data

Work Center

Cap. Cat.

UoM Cap. Pln. Grp

Start Time

Fin. Time

ASSEMBLY 001

MIN

Cap. Utilization

No. of indiv. cap.

07:00

16:00 01:00

100

1

DISCR_MF

001

H

07:00

16:00 01:00

100

4

002

H

07:00

16:00 01:00

100

4

PACK01

001

MIN

B

07:00

16:00 01:00

100

1

PACK02

001

MIN

B

07:00

16:00 01:00

100

1

PVRSN_MF

001

H

06:00

00:00

100

3

002

H

06:00

00:00

100

3

TECHNIC

001

MIN

A

07:00

16:00 01:00

100

1

TESTING

001

MIN

A

07:00

16:00 01:00

100

1

TOT_PLNT

001

H

A

07:00

16:00 01:00

100

7

WINDING

001

MIN

C

07:00

16:00 01:00

100

1

A

A

A

Length of Breaks

CUSTOMER 594

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Work Center

Cap. Cat.

UoM Cap. Pln. Grp

Start Time

Fin. Time

WORK

001

H

07:00

002

H

07:00

A

Length of Breaks

Cap. Utilization

No. of indiv. cap.

16:00 01:00

90

2

16:00 01:00

90

4

Work Center

Cap. Cat.

Capacity short text

Relevant to finite scheduling

Can be used by several operations

Long-termplanning

ASSEMBLY

001

Default Capacity







DISCR_MF

001

Machine Capacity

 

 

002

Labor Capacity

PACK01

001

Default Capacity





PACK02

001

Default Capacity





PVRSN_MF

001

Machine Capacity

 

 

 

002

Labor Capacity TECHNIC

001

Default Capacity







TESTING

001

Default Capacity







TOT_PLNT

001

Default Capacity





WINDING

001

Default Capacity





Work Center

Cap. Cat.

Capacity short text

Relevant to finite scheduling

WORK

001

Machine Capacity

 

002

Can be used by several operations

Long-termplanning  

Labor Capacity 7.

Choose the Scheduling Tab page and make the following entries: Field name

Comment

Capacity Category

001

Setup formula



See the following table for specific data

Processing Formula



See the following table for specific data

Work Center

Setup formula

Processing formula

ASSEMBLY

SAP001

SAP002

DISCR_MF

SAP002

PACK01

SAP002

PACK02

SAP003

PVRSN_MF

SAP002

TECHNIC

8.

Description User action and values

SAP001

SAP002

TESTING

SAP002

TOT_PLNT

SAP002

WINDING

SAP002

WORK

SAP002

Choose the Costing tab and make the following entries:

CUSTOMER 596

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field name

Description User action and values

Note

Controlling Area

A000

Cost Center



Start Date



Activity Type



See the following table for specific data

Activity Unit



See the following table for specific data

Reference Indicator



Set always indicator

Formula



See the following table for specific data

See the following table for specific data

Work Center

Cost Center

Activity Type

Activity Unit

Formula

ASSEMBLY

37101301

3

MIN

SAP005

1

MIN

SAP006

11

MIN

SAP007

3

MIN

SAP001

1

MIN

SAP002

11

MIN

SAP003

3

MIN

SAP005

1

MIN

SAP006

11

MIN

SAP007

3

MIN

SAP005

1

MIN

SAP006

11

MIN

SAP007

DISCR_MF

PACK01

PACK02

PVRSN_MF

37101301

37101301

37101301

37101301

Work Center

Cost Center

Activity Type

Activity Unit

Formula

TECHNIC

37101301

3

MIN

SAP005

1

MIN

SAP006

11

MIN

SAP007

3

MIN

SAP005

1

MIN

SAP006

11

MIN

SAP007

3

MIN

SAP005

1

MIN

SAP006

11

MIN

SAP007

3

MIN

SAP001

1

MIN

SAP002

11

MIN

SAP003

TESTING

TOT_PLNT

37101301

WINDING

37101301

WORK

9.

37101301

37101301

Save your entries.

Result You have created the necessary work centers.

Creating Work Center Hierarchy Use The purpose of this activity is to create the work center hierarchy Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using the following navigation option: SAP Menu

Logistics  Production  Master Data  Line Design  Environment  Work Center  Hierarchy  Create

Transaction Code

CR21

Make the following entries: Hierarchy Name

Plant

Short description Language EN

TOT_PLANT

3710

Total Plant

CUSTOMER 598

Localization objects - per Business Priority

3.

Choose the Work Center Assignment button, S h i f t

4.

On the dialog box, maintain Plant 3710, then choose Enter.

5.

Confirm the message with Enter.

6.

Choose Select all S h i f t

7.

Go to Graphic F 6 and create the following hierarchy using the connect function:

+ F7

+ F5 .

Work Center

Superior work center

ASSEMBLY

DISCR_MF

BOTTLING

PVRSN_MF

DISCR_MF

TOT_PLNT

MIXING

PVRSN_MF

PACK01

DISCR_MF

PACK02

DISCR_MF

PACKING

PVRSN_MF

PVRSN_MF

TOT_PLNT

TECHNIC

DISCR_MF

TESTING

DISCR_MF

TOT_PLNT

8.

WINDING

PVRSN_MF

WORK

DISCR_MF

Save your entries.

Result The work center hierarchy has been created, all work centers are now assigned to this hierarchy.

Create Routing (centrally used Routings) Use The purpose of this activity is to create a dummy routings.

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics  Production  Master Data  Routings  Routings  Standard Routings  Create

Transaction Code

CA01

On the Create Routing: Initial screen, enter the following values and then choose Enter. Field Name

3.

Comment

SG22

Plant

Plant 1 (3710)

Group

5000000

Key Date



Choose Header Details, on the Create Routing: Header Details screen, and enter the following values: Description

Values

Comment

Group Counter

1

Task list description

SEMI22,PD,Phantom

Task list usage

Production

1

Status

Released (general)

4

From Lot Size

0

To Lot Size

99.999.999

Choose Operation Overview, on the Create Routing: Operation Overview screen, enter the following values for each Operation/Activity Number. Op/Acti Work Num center 0010

5.

Values

Material number

Field Name

4.

Description

Plant Control Description Based Setup Machine Labor key quantity

ASSEMBLY 3710 YB99

Dummy operation for costing only

100

0,001 0,001

0,001

Save your entries.

CUSTOMER 600

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Create Production Version for Semi-finish Product Use You use production versions to determine which alternative BOM is used with an alternative routing to produce a material. The purpose of this activity is to create a production version for the material Finished Good MTS (SG22). Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics  Production  Master Data  Production Versions

Transaction Code

C223

On the Create Production Version: Mass Processing, enter the following values and choose Enter: Field Name

3.

Description Values

Plant

Plant 1 (3710)

Material number

SG22

Key date for the selection of production versions

Today’s Date

Comment

On the Production Versions table, enter the following values: Field Name

Description Values

Plant

Plant 1 (3710)

Material Number

SG22

Production Version

0001

Short text on the production version

Production Version 1

Valid-from date of production version

Today’s Date

Run-time end: production version

31.12.9999

Lot Size from

1

To Lot Size

99.999.999,000

Comment

Field Name

Description Values

Alternative BOM

1

BOM Usage

1 (Production)

Comment

Key for Task List Group Group Counter

1

Task List Type 4.

Select the two lines of your new product versions and choose versions.

to check the product

5.

If the message Task List exists and BOM exists appears for each production version, quit screen with F 3 . The indicator in the Test Status field signals when the check was successfully (green traffic light).

6.

Save your entries.

4.7.10.1.3 Rework Creating Reference Operation Set Use In this activity, you create a Reference Operation Set. Prerequisites The routing, in which you want to include the reference operation set, has already been created in the system. The work center used has already been created in the system. Procedure 7.

Access the transaction choosing the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics  Quality Management  Quality Planning  Inspection Planning  Routing  Routings  Reference Operation Sets  Create

Transaction Code

CA11

CUSTOMER 602

Localization objects - per Business Priority

8.

Make the following entries and then choose Enter: Field

9.

Description

Group

YBREW

Change Number

leave blank

Key date



Description

Values created operation routing set

Plant

3710

Group Counter

10

Usage

(Production)

1

Status

Released (general)

4

From Lot size

1

To Lot size

99.999.999

Unit of Measure

PC

Choose Operation Overview and make the following entries: Description

Values

Work center

WORK

Plant

3710

Control Key

YBP1

Description

Rework

Comment

Choose Enter. Then maintain the following field: Field

Description

Labor 12.

Comment

Group description

Field

11.

Comment

Make the following Header Details entries and then choose Enter: Field

10.

Values

Save your entries.

Result The Reference Operation Set has been created.

Values 10

Comment

4.7.11 Repetitive Manufacturing Sample Master Data [local] (BR4) 4.7.11.1

Master Data – On Premise

4.7.11.1.1 Creating Material Master - Work Scheduling View Use The purpose of this activity is to change the material master data on work scheduling view. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP menu

Logistics  Materials Management  Material Master  Material  Create (General )  Immediately

Transaction code

MM01

On the Create Material: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter. Field

Description

Values1

Material

SG21

Industry sector

Mechanical engineering

Material type

Semifinished Product

3.

Select Work Scheduling, choose Enter.

4.

Enter the required data and choose Continue. Field

Description

Plant 5.

Values

Comment

Comment

Plant 1 NL (1010)

On the Work Scheduling tab, enter the following values for each material and choose Enter. Field

SG21

Comment

Production Supervisor

YBR

Scheduler responsible for a material in production activity control.

Production Scheduling Profile

YBR001 Profile you use to specify certain business transactions are carried out in parallel in a production order, trigger an automatic goods

CUSTOMER 604

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field

SG21

Comment receipt or specify an overall profile for capacity levelling.

Issue Storage Location

101A

Receiving storage location to which the receipt of the produced material is posted.

In-house production time

10

Specifies the time in workdays needed to produce the material in-house.

Under delivery tolerance limit

99

Percentage rate that specifies the percent below which the quantity posted for a goods receipt may drop below the production order quantity.

Over delivery tolerance limit

99

Percent by which the quantity that is posted to goods receipt may exceed the production order quantity.

Save your entries.

4.7.11.1.2 Changing Material Master – MRP Views Use The purpose of this activity is to change the material master data on work scheduling view. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP menu

Logistics  Materials Management  Material Master  Material  Create (General )  Immediately

Transaction code

MM01

On the Create Material: Initial screen, enter the following values for each of the materials and choose Enter. Field

Description Values1

Values2

Material

SG21

RM12

Industry sector

Mechanical engineering

Mechanical engineering

Material type

Semifinished Product

Raw material

Comment

3.

Select MRP1 / MRP2 / MRP3 / MRP4, choose Enter.

4.

Enter the required data and choose Continue. Field

Description

Plant 5.

Values

Comment

Plant 1 NL (3710)

On the MRP1 / 2 / 3 / 4 tab, enter the following values. MRP1 tab Field

Description Values1 (SG21)

Values2 (RM12)

Purchasing group

001

100

MRP Type

PD

PD

MRP controller

003

100

Lot size

EX

EX

Reorder Point Minimum Lot size Planning time fence MRP2 tab Field Procurement type

Description Values1 (SG21) E

Backflush Prod. stor. location

Values2 (RM12) F 1

371A

Storage loc. for EP

371B 371C

Stock det. grp SchedMargin key

001

Planned delivery time in days In-house production in days

000 5

1

Goods Receipt Processing time

1

Stock determination group Batch Entry MRP3 tab Field Strategy group

Description Values1 (SG21) 40

Values2 (RM12) 10

CUSTOMER 606

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Consumption mode

2

Fwd consumption per.

30

00

Bwd consumption per.

30

00

Availability check

Y2

Y2

Forecast Requirements Period Indicator

M

M

Total repl. lead time

2

0

MRP4 tab Field

6.

Description Values1 (SG21)

Values2 (RM12)

Selection method

2

Individual/coll.

2

Repetitive manufacturing

Set indicator

REM profile

Y002

2

Save your entries.

4.7.11.1.3 Creating BOMs Use The purpose of this activity is to create a BOM for material FG126 and SG124.

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP menu

Logistics  Production  Master Data  Bills of Material  Bill of Material  Material BOM  Create

Transaction code

CS01

On the Create material BOM: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter. Field

Description

Values

Material number

SG21

Plant

Plant 1 NL (3710)

BOM usage

Production (1)

Comment

Valid From 3.



On the Create material BOM: General Item Overview screen, choose Header F 6 and enter the following values: Field

4.

5.

e.g. 01.01.2007

Description

Values

Base quantity

1000

BOM Status

Active (1)

Comment

Choose Item Overview F 5 , enter the following values. BOM Item Number

Item Category (Bill of Material)

BOM Component

Component quantity

Component unit of measure

010

Stock item (L)

RM12

1000

PC

Save your entries.

4.7.11.1.4 Creating Routing Use The purpose of this activity is to create routings for the finished product. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP menu

Logistics  Production  Master Data  Routings  Routings  Standard Routings  Create

Transaction code

CA21

On the Create Routing: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter. Field

3.

Description

Values

Material number

SG21

Plant

Plant 1 NL (3710)

Group

40003710

Key Date



Comment

Choose Header Details, on the Create Routing: Header Details screen, enter the following values: Field

Description

Values

Comment

CUSTOMER 608

Localization objects - per Business Priority

4.

5.

6.

Group Counter

37

Task list description

Spring Coil

Task list usage

1 (Production)

Status

4 Released (general)

From Lot Size

1

To Lot Size

100

Choose Operation Overview, on the Create Routing: Operation Overview screen, enter the following values: Field

Value

Operation/Activity Number

010

Work center

WINDING

Plant

Plant 1 NL (3710)

Control Key

YBP3

Operation short text

Winding

Base Quantity

100

Unit of Measure for Operation

PC

Double-click the table to open Operation Details, on the Create Routing: Operation Details screen, enter the following values for each Operation/Activity Number. Field

Values1

Setup

10

Unit of measure for Setup

min

Activity Type

3

Machine

10

Unit of measure for Setup

min

Activity Type

1

Labor

30

Unit of measure for Setup

min

Activity Type

11

Save your entries.

4.7.11.1.5 Creating Production Version for Semi - finished Product Use You use production versions to determine which alternative BOM is used with an alternative routing to produce a material. The purpose of this activity is to create a production version for the material Finished Good MTS (F126). Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP menu

Logistics  Production  Master Data  Production Versions

Transaction code

C223

On the Production Version: Mass Processing screen, make the following entries: Field

3.

Description Values

Comment

Material number

SG21

Plant

Plant 1 NL (3710)

Key date for the selection of production versions

Today’s date

On the Production Versions table, enter the following values. Field

Description Values

Plant

Plant 1 (3710)

Material Number

SG21

Production Version

0001

Short text on the production version

Production Version 1

Valid-from date of production version

Today’s date

Comment

CUSTOMER 610

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field

4.

Description Values

Run-time end: production version

31.12.9999

Lot Size from

1

To Lot Size

100

Alternative BOM

1

BOM Usage

1 (Production)

Key for Task List Group

40003710

Group Counter

37

Task List Type

R

REM allowd

Set indicator

Prod.Line

WINDING

Comment

Enter the group number from the Routing of your finished product.

Save your entries.

4.7.12 Make-to-Order Production w/o Variant Configuration Master Data [local] (BJU) 4.7.12.1

Configuration - On Premise

4.7.12.1.1 Master Data – On Premise Enhance Materials for MTO Create Material Master - Work Scheduling View Use The purpose of this activity is to change the material master data on work scheduling view.

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics  Materials Management  Material Master  Material  Create (General )  Immediately

Transaction Code

MM01

On the Create Material: Initial screen, enter the following values for each of the materials and choose Enter. Field Name

Description Values1

Values2

Material

FG226

SG224

Industry sector

Mechanical engineering

Mechanical engineering

Material type

Finished Product

Semi-Finished Product

3.

Select Work Scheduling, choose Enter.

4.

Enter the required data and choose Continue. Field Name

Description

Plant 5.

6.

Comment

Values

Comment

Plant 1 NL (3710)

On the Work Scheduling tab, enter the following values for each material and then choose Enter. Field Name

FG226

SG224

Comment

Production supervisor

YB4

YB4

Scheduler responsible for a material in production activity control.

Production Scheduling Profile

YB0004 YB0004 Profile that you can use to specify that certain business transactions are carried out in parallel in a production order, trigger an automatic goods receipt or specify an overall profile for capacity leveling.

Issue Storage Location

101B

101A

Receiving storage location to which the receipt of the produced material is posted.

In-house production time

20

1

Specifies the time in workdays needed to produce the material in-house.

Save your entries and go Back.

CUSTOMER 612

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Result You have created the Work Scheduling view for material FG226 and SG224.

Change Material Master MRP Views for Special MTO Settings Use The purpose of this activity is to change the material master MRP views for special MTO settings.

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics  Materials Management  Material Master  Material Change  Immediately

Transaction Code

MM02

On the Change Material: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter. Field Name

Description

Values

Material

FG226

3.

Select MRP2 and MRP3, choose Enter.

4.

Enter the required data and choose Continue. Field Name

Description

Plant 5.

Values Plant 1 (3710)

Description

In-house production

Values

Comment

5

Choose MRP3 tab, enter the following values. Field Name Planning Strategy Group

7.

Comment

On the MRP2 tab, enter the following values. Field Name

6.

Comment

Description

Values B6

Save your entries and go Back.

Result You have changed the MRP 2 and MRP 3 view for material FG226.

Comment

Create Routing Use The purpose of this activity is to create routing needed for the MTO scenario.

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics  Production  Master Data  Routings  Routings  Standard Routings  Create

Transaction Code

CA01

On the Create Routing: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter. Field Name

3.

Values

Comment

Material number

FG226

Plant

3710

Key Date



Group

41010002

Choose Header Details, on the Create Routing: Header Details screen, enter the following values. Field Name

4.

Description

Description

Values

Comment

Task list usage

1 Production

Status

4 Released (general)

Choose Operation Overview, on the Create Routing: Operation Overview screen, enter the following values for each Operation/Activity Number. Field Name

Values1

Values2

Values3

Values4

Operation/Activity Number

010

020

030

040

Work center

ASSEMBLY

TESTING

PACK01

TESTING

Plant

Plant 1 (3710)

Plant 1 (3710)

Plant 1 (3710)

Plant 1 (3710)

Control Key

YBP1

YBP1

YBP1

YBP1

Operation short text

Assembly

Final Acceptance

Packaging

Posting GR (optional with SerialNo assig)

CUSTOMER 614

Localization objects - per Business Priority

5.

Field Name

Values1

Values2

Values3

Values4

Base Quantity

100

100

100

100

Unit of Measure for Operation

PC

PC

PC

PC

Double-click the table to open Operation Details, on the Create Routing: Operation Details screen, enter the following data: Field Name

Description

Values

Setup

30

Unit of measure for Setup

MIN

Activity Type

3

Machine

200

Unit of measure for Setup

MIN

Activity Type

1

Labor

200

Unit of measure for Setup

MIN

Activity Type

11

Comment

6.

Save your entries and go back.

7.

On the Create Routing: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter. Field Name

8.

Values

Material number

SG224

Plant

Plant1 NL (3710)

Key Date



Group

41010003

Comment

Choose Header Details, on the Create Routing: Header Details screen, enter the following values. Field Name

9.

Description

Description

Values

Group Counter

1

Task list description

SF Subassembly

Task list usage

1

Status

4

Comment

Choose Operation Overview, on the Create Routing: Operation Overview screen, enter the following values for each Operation/Activity Number.

Field Name

10.

Values2

Comment

Operation/Activity Number

020

Work center

TESTING

Plant

Plant 1 NL (3710)

Control Key

YBP1

Operation short text

Testing

Base Quantity

100

Unit of Measure for Operation

PC

Double-click the table to open Operation Details, on the Create Routing: Operation Details screen, enter the following. Field Name

11.

Description

Description

Values

Setup

30

Unit of measure for Setup

min

Activity Type

3

Machine

10

Unit of measure for Setup

min

Activity Type

1

Labor

10

Unit of measure for Setup

min

Activity Type

11

Comment

Save your entries and go Back.

Result You have created the routings necessary for MTO production for material finished material FG226 and semi-finished material SG224.

CUSTOMER 616

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Create BOM Create BOM for FG226, SG224 Use The purpose of this activity is to create BOM for finished material FG226 and semifinished material SG224. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics  Production  Master Data  Bills of Material  Bill of Material  Material BOM  Create

Transaction code

CS01

On the Create material BOM: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter. Field Name

3.

Description

Material number

SG224

Plant

Plant 1 NL (3710)

BOM usage

Production (1)

Valid From



Comment

On the Create material BOM: General Item Overview screen, choose Header F 6 and enter the following values: Field Name

4.

User Action and Values

Description

User Action and Values

Base quantity

100

BOM Status

Active (1)

Comment

Choose Item Overview F 5 , enter the following values: BOM Item Number

Item Category (Bill of Material)

BOM Component

Component quantity

Component unit of measure

010

Stock item (L)

RM124

100

PC

5.

Save your entries and go Back.

6.

On the Create material BOM: Initial screen, enter the following values and then choose Enter.

Field Name

7.

Description

Material number

FG226

Plant

Plant 1 NL (3710)

BOM usage

Production (1)

Valid From



9.

Comment

On the Create material BOM: General Item Overview screen, choose Header F 6 and enter the following values: Field Name

8.

User Action and Values

Description

User Action and Values

Base quantity

100

BOM Status

Active (1)

Comment

Choose Item Overview F 5 , enter the following values: BOM Item Number

Item Category (Bill of Material)

BOM Component

Component quantity

Component unit of measure

010

Stock item (L)

SG21

100

PC

020

Stock item (L)

SG22

100

PC

030

Stock item (L)

RM122

100

PC

040

Stock item (L)

RM128

100

PC

050

Stock item (L)

RM120

100

PC

060

Stock item (L)

SG23

100

PC

070

Stock item (L)

SG25

100

PC

080

Stock item (L)

SG224

100

PC

090

Stock item (L)

RM27

100

PC

Save your entries and go Back.

Result You have created the BOM for subassembly semi-finished good SG224 and finished good FG226.

CUSTOMER 618

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Create Production Version for Finished Product Use You use production versions to determine which alternative BOM is used with an alternative routing to produce a material. The purpose of this activity is to create a production version for the material Finished Good MTS (FG226). Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics  Production  Master Data  Production Versions

Transaction Code

C223

On the Create material BOM: Initial screen, enter the following values and then choose Enter: Field Name

3.

Description Values

Plant

Plant 1 NL (3710)

Material number

FG226

Key date for the selection of production versions

Today’s Date

On the Production Versions table, enter the following values: Field Name

Description Values

Plant

Plant 1 NL (3710)

Material Number

Finished Good MTS (FG226)

Production Version

0001

Short text on the production version

Production Version 01

Valid-from date of production version

Today’s Date

Comment

Comment

Field Name

Description Values

Run-time end: production version

Comment

31.12.9999

Lot Size from

4.

To Lot Size

99999999

Alternative BOM

01

BOM Usage

1 (Production)

Key for Task List Group

410100XX

Group Counter

01

Task List Type

N

Enter the group number from the Routing of your finished product.

Save your entries.

Enhance Materials for Batch Management Change Material Master: Activate Batch Management Use The purpose of this activity is to activate batch management for finished good FG226 and raw material RM122. Prerequisites The materials FG226 and RM122 must be virgin, that means they must not have stocks and must not be used in any documents, to be able to make them relevant to batch management.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics  Materials Management  Material Master  Material  Change  Immediately

Transaction Code

MM02

CUSTOMER 620

Localization objects - per Business Priority

2.

On the Change Material (Initial Screen) screen, enter finished good FG226 in Material input field and choose Select view(s).

3.

On the Select view(s) screen, select General Plant Data / Storage 1 view and choose Organizational levels.

4.

On the Organizational levels screen enter 3710 in Plant input field and choose Enter.

5.

On the Change Material FG226 (Finished Good) screen select the Batch management checkbox (checkbox must be flagged).

6.

Save your entries C t r l

7.

Repeat the steps with raw

+ S.

material RM122.

Result You have activated the batch management for finished good FG226 and raw material RM122.

Batch Management Search Strategies Conditions Batch Search Strategy for Production Order Use The purpose of this activity is to create batch search strategies for production order type YBM4 for materials FG226 and RM122. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics Central functions  Batch Management  Batch Determination  Batch Search Strategy  For Production Order

Transaction Code

COB1

2.

On the Create Batch Search Strategy: Initial Screen enter YB11 in Strategy type input field and choose Enter.

3.

On the Create BP: Batch number YB11: Fast Entry screen, enter YBM4 in the Order Type input field and 3710 in the Plant input field.

4.

Make the following entries for Order Type/Plant/Component:

Material No. Changes Dialog batch Dialog Quantity OverSelection batch allowed determination UoM proposal delivery Type splits allowed FG226

99

X

X

A

1

X

O

RM122

99

X

X

A

1

X

O

5.

Choose Enter.

6.

Ignore any warning messages.

7.

Select both entries and choose Selection criteria.

8.

The batch class YB_BATCH assigned to the material and the characteristics of the class are displayed. Confirm the data by choosing Enter and Back F 3 .

9.

On the Create BP: Batch number (YB11): Fast Entry screen, select both entries again and choose Sort.

10.

On the Create BP: Batch number (YB11): Sort Rule screen, enter YB_FIFO_SORT in the Sort rule input field.

11.

Choose Enter and Back F 3 .

12.

Save your entries and go Back.

Result You have created the batch search strategies for production order type YBM4 for materials FG226 and RM122.

4.7.13 MTS Production - Process Industry Sample Master Data [local] (BJR) 4.7.13.1

Configuration – On-Premise

4.7.13.1.1 Master Data Create Material Master - Classification View Use The purpose of this activity is to change the material master data on classification view.

CUSTOMER 622

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics  Materials Management  Material Master  Material  Create (General )  Immediately

Transaction Code

MM01

On the Create Material: Initial screen, enter the following values for each material and choose Enter. Field

Description Values1

Values2

Values3

Material

FG29

SG24

RM09, RM19, RM30

Industry sector

M - Mechanical engineering

M - Mechanical engineering

M - Mechanical engineering

Material type

Finished Product

Semifinished Product

Raw materials

3.

Choose Classification.

4.

Enter the following values. Field

Description

Values

Plant

Plant 1 (3710)

Class type

Batch (023)

5.

Choose Enter.

6.

On the Classification screen, enter the following value: Field Class number

7.

Description

Values1

Values2

Values3

YB_EXP_DATE_001

YB_BATCH

YB_BATCH

Save your entries.

Create Material Master - Work Scheduling View Use The purpose of this activity is to change the material master data on work scheduling view. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options:

2.

SAP Menu

Logistics  Materials Management  Material Master  Material  Create (General )  Immediately

Transaction Code

MM01

On the Create Material: Initial screen, enter the following values for each of the materials and choose Enter. Field

Description Values1

Material

FG29

SG24

Industry sector

M - Mechanical engineering

M - Mechanical engineering

Material type

Finished Product

Semi-finished Product

3.

Select Work Scheduling.

4.

Choose Enter.

5.

Enter the required data and choose Continue. Field

Description

Plant 6.

7.

Values2

Values Plant 1 (3710)

On the Work Scheduling tab, enter the following values for each material and choose Enter. Field

FG29

SG24

Production Supervisor

YB2

YB2

Production Scheduling Profile

YB0002

YB0002

Underdelivery tolerance limit

99,0

99,0

Overdelivery tolerance limit

99,0

99,0

Save your entries.

Change Material Master - MRP Views Use The purpose of this activity is to change the material master on MRP views.

CUSTOMER 624

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics  Materials Management  Material Master  Material  Change  Immediately

Transaction Code

MM02

On the Change Material: Initial screen, enter the following values for each material and choose Enter. Field

Values1

Values2

Values3

Values4

Material

FG29

SG24

RM30

RM09, RM19, RM15

3.

Select MRP1 / MRP2 / MRP3 / MRP4 and then choose Enter.

4.

Enter the required data and choose Continue: Field

Description

Plant 5.

Values

Comment

Plant 1 (3710)

On the MRP1 / 2 / 3 / 4 tab, enter the following values. MRP1 tab Field Purchasing group

Description Values1 Values2 Values3 Values4 blank

002

001

002 – RM09 003 – RM19 001 – RM15

MRP Type

PD

PD

VB

PD

MRP controller

001

001

001

001

Lot size

EX

EX

WB

EX

Reorder Point

200

Minimum Lot size

1.000

Planning time fence

13

12

10

10

E

F

F

MRP2 tab Field Procurement type

Description Values E

Backflush Bulk Material

X

Prod. stor. location

371A

Storage loc. for EP SchedMargin key

001

371B

371B

371B

371C

371C

371C

001

000

000

5

5

1

1

Planned delivery time in days In-house production in days

1

1

Goods Receipt Processing time Stock determination group Batch Entry MRP3 tab Field

Description Values

Tot.repl.lead time

2

2

Strategy group

40

40

Consumption mode

2

2

Fwd consumption per.

30

30

Bwd consumption per.

30

30

Availability check

Y2

Y2

Y2

Y2

Forecast Requirements Period Indicator

W

W

W

W

2

2

MRP4 tab Field

Individual/coll. 6.

Description Values

Save your entries.

Change Material Master - Plant Data/Storage 1 Use The purpose of this activity is to change the material master on Plant Data/Storage 1 view. CUSTOMER 626

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics  Materials Management  Material Master  Material  Change  Immediately

Transaction Code

MM02

On the Change Material: Initial screen, enter the following values for each material and choose Enter. Field Name

Description

Material

Values1

Values2

Values3

FG29

RM09, RM19, RM30, SG24

RM15

3.

Select General Plant Data/Storage 1.

4.

Choose Enter.

5.

Enter the required data and choose Continue. Field Name

Description

Plant

Plant 1 (3710)

6.

On the General Plant Data / Storage 1 tab.

7.

Enter the following values: Field Name

8.

Values

Description Values1 Values2 Values2

Batch management requirement indicator

X

X

blank

Storage conditions

10

10

10

Max. storage period

150

min. remaining shelf life

50

Period Indicator for SLED

D

D

D

Time unit

D

Total shelf life

200

Save your entries.

Create BOM – Semi-finished and finished Products Use The purpose of this activity is to create a BOM for material S24 and F29.

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP ECC Menu

Logistics → Production → Master Data → Bills of Material → Bill of Material → Material BOM → Create

Transaction code

CS01

On the Create material BOM: Initial screen, enter the following values and then choose Enter: Field Name

3.

Description

Values

Material number

SG24

Plant

Plant 1 NL(3710)

BOM usage

Production (1)

Valid From



On the Create material BOM: General Item Overview screen, choose Header F 6 and enter the following values: Field Name

Description

Values

Base quantity

10000

BOM Status

Active (1)

4.

Choose Item Overview F 5 .

5.

Enter the following values: BOM Item Number

Item Category (Bill of Material)

BOM Component

Component quantity

Component unit of measure

010

Stock item (L)

RM09

1

KG

020

Stock item (L)

RM19

1,2

L

030

Stock item (L)

RM30

8,5

L

6.

Select BOM Item number 030 (material RM30) and choose Item.

7.

On Status tab, Lng Text screen, remove the indicator for Costing Relevancy in Item Status section.

8.

Save your entries.

9.

On the Create material BOM: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter: Field Material number

Description

Values FG29

CUSTOMER 628

Localization objects - per Business Priority

10.

Plant

Plant 1 NL (3710)

BOM usage

Production (1)

Valid From



On the Create material BOM: General Item Overview screen, choose Header F 6 and enter the following values: Field

Description

Base quantity

10000

BOM Status

Active (1)

11.

Choose Item Overview F 5 .

12.

Enter the following values:

13.

Values

BOM Item Number

Item Category (Bill of Material)

BOM Component

Component quantity

Component unit of measure

010

Stock item (L)

RM15

1000

PC

020

Stock item (L)

SG24

15000

CCM

Save your entries.

Create Master Recipe Use The purpose of this activity is to create master recipes for the semi-finished and finished products.

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics  Production Process Master Data  Master Recipes  Recipe and Material List  Create

Transaction Code

C201

Make the following entries and then choose Enter. Field Name

Description

Recipe group Semi or finished material number

User Action and Values MR-50001

Material number

3.

Semifinished Product PI

SG24

Plant

Plant 1 NL (3710)

Key date

date master recipe is effective (typically today's date)

Profile

YPI1

Make the following entries: Field Name

Description

User Action and values

Recipe Counter

10

Recipe Description

SG24 - Ink (Process)

Status

4

Usage

1

Planner group

1

Base quantity

10000

4.

Choose Enter.

5.

On the Recipe screen, Operations tab, make the following entries and choose Enter. Operation 0010 Field name

Description

User action and values

Operation/Activity Number

0010

Control key

YPI1

Operation short text

Operation 1

Phase Indicator Superior Operation Resource

MIXING

Base Quantity

10.000

Unit of Measure for Operation

CCM

Operation 0020 Field name

Description

User action and values

Operation/Activity Number

0020

Control key

YPI1

Operation short text

Phase 1 to Operation 1

Phase Indicator

X

CUSTOMER 630

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Superior Operation

0010

Destination

01

Resource

MIXING

Relevant for costing

X

Base Quantity

10.000

Unit of Measure for Operation

CCM

1st Std. Value

1

Unit of Measure

H

Activity Type

3

2nd Std. Value

2

Unit of Measure

H

Activity Type

11

Operation 0030 Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

Operation/Activity Number

0030

Control key

YBP4

Operation short text

Operation 2

Phase Indicator Superior Operation Resource

BOTTLING

Base Quantity

10.000

Unit of Measure for Operation

CCM

Operation 0040 Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

Operation/Activity Number

0040

Control key

YBP4

Operation short text

Phase 1 to Operation 2

Phase Indicator

X

Superior Operation

0030

Destination

01

Resource

BOTTLING

Relevant for costing

X

Base Quantity

10.000

Unit of Measure for Operation

CCM

1st Std. Value

0,5

Unit of Measure

H

Activity Type

3

2nd Std. Value

1

Unit of Measure

H

Activity Type

11

6.

Select operation number 0020.

7.

Choose Relationships and make the following entries: Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

View Successors

X

Relationship type

FS

Phase

0040

Recipe group

MR-50001

Recipe number

10 (Same as created)

8.

Go back.

9.

Choose the Materials tab, which prompts you to maintain the production version: Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

Production Version

0001

Description

SG24 - Ink (Process)

Lock

not locked

valid from

01.01.2007

valid to

31.12.9999

Task list type

2 Master Recipe

Group number

MR-50001

Group counter

10

Alternative BOM

1

BOM Usage

1

From lot size

1

To lot size

99999999

Receiving location

371B

CUSTOMER 632

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

Issue storage location

371B

10.

Close the screen and save changes F 8 . Now, you can maintain the materials view.

11.

Select all item lines and choose Create assignment.

12.

Enter assignment

13.

Choose Save.

14.

On the Create Master Recipe: Initial Screen, create the master recipe for Finished Product PI (FG29):

15.

to op./phase 0020.

Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

Recipe group

Semi or finished material number

MR-50002

Material number

Finished Product PI

FG29

Plant

Plant 1 NL (3710)

Key date

Date master recipe is effective (typically today's date)

Profile

YPI1

Make the following entries: Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

Recipe Counter

10

Recipe Description

FG29 - Bottled Ink (Batched-Process)

Status

4

Usage

1

Planner group

1

Base quantity

10.000

16.

Choose Enter.

17.

On the Recipe screen, Operations tab, make the following entries and choose Enter. Operation 0010 Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

Operation/Activity Number

0010

Control key

YBP4

Operation short text

Final operation

Phase Indicator Superior Operation

Resource

PACKING

Base Quantity

10.000

Unit of Measure for Operation

BT

Operation 0020 Field Name

18.

Description

User Action and Values

Operation/Activity Number

0020

Control key

YBP4

Operation short text

Final operation - phase

Phase Indicator

X

Superior Operation

0010

Destination

01

Resource

PACKING

Relevant for costing

X

Base Quantity

10.000

Unit of Measure for Operation

BT

1st Std. Value

2

Unit of Measure

H

Activity Type

3

2nd Std. Value

2

Unit of Measure

H

Activity Type

11

Choose the Materials tab, which prompts you to maintain the production version: Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

Production Version

0001

Description

FG29 - Bottled Ink (Batched-Process)

Lock

not locked

valid from

01.01.2007

valid to

31.12.9999

Task list type

2 Master Recipe

Group number

MR-50002

Group counter

10

Alternative BOM

1

CUSTOMER 634

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Description

User Action and Values

BOM Usage

1

From lot size

1

To lot size

99999999

Receiving location

371B

Issue storage location

371A

19.

Close screen and save changes F 8 . You can now maintain the materials view.

20.

Select all item lines, then choose Create assignment.

21.

Enter assignment

22.

Choose Save.

to op./phase 0020.

Result The Master Recipes are created.

Maintain and Check Production Versions Use You use production versions to determine which alternative BOM is used with an alternative routing to produce a material. Within master recipe maintenance, you are automatically prompted to create the production version when accessing the material view. Only when you use alternative BOMs are you allowed to create additional production versions or to assign the alternative BOM to the same master recipe. Within this standard scenario, additional production version maintenance is not required.

Create Batch Search Strategies Create Batch Search Strategy for Process Order – Expiration Date Use The purpose of this activity is to set the search strategy for process order.

Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics  Central functions  Batch Management  Batch Determination  Batch Search Strategy  For Production Order

Transaction Code

COB1

2.

On the Create Batch Search Strategy: Initial Screen, enter YB12 in the Strategy type input field.

3.

Choose Enter.

4.

On the Create BP: Expiration Date (YB12): Fast Entry screen, enter the following values: Field Name

Description

Values

Order Type

YBM2

Plant

Plant 1 NL (3710)

Material

FG29

5.

Choose Enter.

6.

Make the following entries for Order Type/Plant/Component: Material No. Changes Dialog batch Dialog Quantity Overdelivery batch allowed determination UoM proposal allowed splits FG29

99

X

X

A

1

X

7.

Choose Enter.

8.

On the Create BP: Expiration Date (YB12): Fast Entry screen, select the first line and choose Selection criteria.

9.

On the Create BP: Classification screen, enter the following values: Field Name

Description Values

Comment

Characteristic Description

Remaining shelf life for batch

Value

> 300

10.

Choose Back F 3 .

11.

On the Create BP: Expiration Date (YB12): Fast Entry screen, choose Sort.

12.

On the Create BP: Expiration Date (YB12): Sort Rule screen, enter the following values:

CUSTOMER 636

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field name

Description Values

Sort rule 13.

Comment

YB_EXP_DATE_SORT

Sorting rule expiration date

Choose Save C t r l + S .

Result The search strategy YB12 for Process Manufacturing has been created.

Create Batch Search Strategy for Process Order – FIFO Use The purpose of this activity is to set the search strategy for process order. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics  Central functions  Batch Management  Batch Determination  Batch Search Strategy  For Production Order

Transaction Code

COB1

2.

On the Create Batch Search Strategy: Initial Screen, enter YB11 in the Strategy type input field.

3.

Choose Enter.

4.

On the Create BP: Expiration Date (YB11): Fast Entry screen, enter the following values: Field Name

Description

Values

Comment

Order Type

YBM2

Plant

Plant 1 NL (3710)

Material

SG24

5.

Choose Enter.

6.

Make the following entries for Order Type/Plant/Component: Materia l

No. batc h

Change Dialog batch s determinatio allowed n

Dialo g UoM

Sel. Typ e

Quantit y proposa l

Overdeliver y allowed

split s SG24

99

X

X

A

O

1

X

7.

Choose Enter.

8.

On the Create BP: Expiration Date (YB11): Fast Entry screen, choose Sort.

9.

On the Create BP: Expiration Date (YB11): Sort Rule screen, enter the following value: Field

Description

Sort rule

Values

Comment

YB_FIFO_SORT

Sorting rule for batches FIFO

10.

Choose Save C t r l + S .

11.

Repeat these steps for each additional material: R09, R19, R30.

Result The search strategy YB11 for Process Manufacturing has been created.

4.7.14 MTS Production - Discrete Industry Sample Master Data [local] (BJL) 4.7.14.1

Master Data –OP

4.7.14.1.1 Create Material Master - Work Scheduling View Use The purpose of this activity is to change the material master data on work scheduling view. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics  Materials Management  Material Master  Material  Create (General )  Immediately

Transaction Code

MM01

On the Create Material: Initial screen, enter the following values for each of the materials and choose Enter. CUSTOMER

638

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Description Values1

Values2

Material

FG126

SG124

Industry sector

Mechanical engineering

Mechanical engineering

Material type

Finished Product

Semi-Finished Product

3.

Select Work Scheduling, choose Enter.

4.

Enter the required data and choose Continue. Field Name

Description

Plant 5.

6.

Values

Comment

Comment

Plant 1 (3710)

On the Work Scheduling tab, enter the following values for each material and choose Enter. Field Name

FG126

SG124

Comment

Production supervisor

YB1

YB1

Scheduler responsible for a material in production activity control.

Production Scheduling Profile

YB0001

YB0001

Profile you use to specify that certain business transactions are carried out in parallel in a production order, trigger an automatic goods receipt or specify an overall profile for capacity leveling.

Issue Storage Location

371A

371B

Receiving storage location to which the receipt of the produced material is posted.

In-house production time

any value

any value

Specifies the time in workdays needed to produce the material in-house. The in-house production time is maintained on MRP view

Save your entries.

4.7.14.1.2 Change Material Master – General Plant Data/Storage 1 Use The purpose of this activity is to change the material master and assign the batch management flag and the serial number profile on General Plant Data / Storage view.

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics  Materials Management  Material Master  Material  Create (General )  Immediately

Transaction Code

MM02

On the Create Material: Initial screen, enter the following values for each material and choose Enter. Field Name

Description

Material

Values1

Values2

FG126

RM122

Comment

3.

Select General Plant Data / Storage 1 and General Data / Storage 2, choose Enter.

4.

Enter the required data and choose Continue. Field Name

Description

Plant 5.

Values

Comment

Plant 1 (3710)

On the General Plant Data / Storage 1 tab, enter the following values: Field Name

Description Values Comment

Batch management requirement indicator



Specifies whether the material is managed in batches.

4.7.14.1.3 Create Routing - Finished- and Semi Finished Product Use The purpose of this activity is to create routings for the finished product. Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics  Production  Master Data  Routings  Routings  Standard Routings  Create

Transaction Code

CA01

On the Create Routing: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter. Field Name Material number

Description

Values

Comment

FG126

CUSTOMER 640

Localization objects - per Business Priority

3.

Plant

Plant 1 (3710)

Group

4371000

Key Date



Choose Header Details, on the Create Routing: Header Details screen, enter the following values. Field Name

4.

5.

Description

Values

Comment

Group Counter

1

Task list description

Packaging Line 1

Task list usage

Production (1)

Status

Released (general)

From Lot Size

1

To Lot Size

100

Choose Operation Overview, on the Create Routing: Operation Overview screen, enter the following values for each Operation/Activity Number. Field Name

Values1

Values2

Values3

Values4

Operation/Activity Number

010

020

030

040

Work center

ASSEMBLY

TESTING

PACK01

TESTING

Plant

Plant 1 (3710)

Plant 1 (3710)

Plant 1 (3710)

Plant 1 (3710)

Control Key

YBP1

YBP1

YBP1

YBP1

Operation short text

Assembly

Final Acceptance

Packaging

Posting GR

Base Quantity

100

100

100

100

Unit of Measure for Operation

PC

PC

PC

PC

Double-click the table to open Operation Details, on the Create Routing: Operation Details screen, enter the following values for each Operation/Activity Number. Field

Values1

Values2

Values3

Values4

Setup

30

30

30

30

Unit of measure for Setup

min

min

min

Min

Activity Type

3

3

3

3

Machine

10

10

10

10

Unit of measure for Setup

min

min

min

min

Activity Type

1

1

1

1

Labor

10

10

10

10

Unit of measure for Setup

min

min

min

min

Activity Type

11

11

11

11

6.

Save your entries.

7.

On the Create Routing: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter. Field Name

8.

Values

Comment

Material number

FG126

Plant

Plant 1 (3710)

Group

4371000

Key Date



Choose Header Details, on the Create Routing: Header Details screen, enter the following values. Field Name

9.

Description

Description

Values

Comment

Group Counter

2

Task list description

Packaging Line 2 (manual)

Task list usage

1

Status

4

From Lot Size

101

To Lot Size

99.999.999

Choose Operation Overview, on the Create Routing: Operation Overview screen, enter the following values for each Operation/Activity Number. Field Name

Values1

Values2

Values3

Values4

Operation/Activity Number

010

020

030

040

Work center

ASSEMBLY

TESTING

PACK02

TESTING

Plant

Plant 1 (3710)

Plant 1 (3710)

Plant 1 (3710)

Plant 1 (3710)

Control Key

YBP1

YBP1

YBP1

YBP1

Operation short text

Assembly

Final Acceptance

Manual Packaging

Posting GR (

Base Quantity

100

100

100

100

Unit of Measure for Operation

PC

PC

PC

PC

CUSTOMER 642

Localization objects - per Business Priority

10.

Double-click the table to open Operation Details, on the Create Routing: Operation Details screen, enter the following values for each Operation/Activity Number. Field

Values1

Values2

Values3

Values4

Setup

30

30

30

30

Unit of measure for Setup

min

min

min

min

Activity Type

3

3

3

3

Machine

10

10

10

10

Unit of measure for Setup

min

min

min

min

Activity Type

1

1

1

1

Labor

10

10

10

10

Unit of measure for Setup

min

min

min

min

Activity Type

11

11

11

11

11.

Save your entries.

12.

On the Create Routing: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter. Field Name

13.

Values

Material number

SG124

Plant

Plant1 (3710)

Key Date



Comment

Choose Header Details, on the Create Routing: Header Details screen, enter the following values. Field Name

14.

Description

Description

Values

Group Counter

1

Task list description

SF Subassembly

Task list usage

1

Status

4

Comment

Choose Operation Overview, on the Create Routing: Operation Overview screen, enter the following values for each Operation/Activity Number. Field Name

Values1

Values2

Operation/Activity Number

010

020

Work center

TECHNIC

TESTING

Plant

Plant 1 (3710)

Plant 1 (3710)

Control Key

YBP1

YBP1

Operation short text

Mechanical Processing

QM Check

15.

Base Quantity

100

100

Unit of Measure for Operation

PC

PC

Double-click the table to open Operation Details, on the Create Routing: Operation Details screen, enter the following: Field Name

16.

Description

Values

Setup

30

Unit of measure for Setup

min

Activity Type

3

Machine

10

Unit of measure for Setup

min

Activity Type

1

Labor

10

Unit of measure for Setup

min

Activity Type

11

Comment

Save your entries.

4.7.14.1.4 Create BOMs - Finished- and Semi Finished Products Use The purpose of this activity is to create a BOM for materials FG126 and SG124.

Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics  Production  Master Data  Bills of Material  Bill of Material  Material BOM  Create

Transaction Code

CS01

On the Create material BOM: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter. Field Name

Description

Values

Material number

FG126

Plant

Plant 1 (3710)

Comment

CUSTOMER 644

Localization objects - per Business Priority

3.

BOM usage

Production (1)

Valid From



On the Create material BOM: General Item Overview screen, choose Header F 6 and enter the following values: Field Name

4.

e.g. 01.01.2007

Description

Values

Base quantity

100

BOM Status

Active (1)

Comment

Choose Item Overview F 5 , enter the following values: BOM Item Number

Item Category (Bill of Material)

BOM Component

Component quantity

Component unit of measure

010

Stock item (L)

SG21

100

PC

020

Stock item (L)

SG22

100

PC

030

Stock item (L)

RM122

100

PC

040

Stock item (L)

RM128

100

PC

050

Stock item (L)

RM120

100

PC

060

Stock item (L)

SG23

100

PC

070

Stock item (L)

SG25

100

PC

080

Stock item (L)

SG124

100

PC

090

Stock item (L)

RM20

100

PC

100

Stock item (L)

RM27

100

PC

5.

Save your entries.

6.

On the Create material BOM: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter: Field Name

7.

Description

Values

Material number

SG124

Plant

Plant 1 (3710)

BOM usage

Production (1)

Valid From



Comment

e.g. 01.01.2007

On the Create material BOM: General Item Overview screen, choose Header F 6 and enter the following values: Field Name Base quantity

Description

Values 100

Comment

Field Name

Description

BOM Status 8.

Comment

Active (1)

Choose Item Overview F 5 , enter the following values: Field Name

9.

Values

Description

Values

Comment

BOM Item Number

010

Item Category (Bill of Material)

Stock item (L)

BOM Component

RM124

Component quantity

100

Component unit of measure

PC

Save your entries.

4.7.14.1.5 Create Production Version for Finished Product Use You use production versions to determine which alternative BOM is used with an alternative routing to produce a material. The purpose of this activity is to create a production version for the material Finished Good MTS (FG126). Procedure 1.

2.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics  Production  Master Data  Production Versions

Transaction Code

C223

On the Create material BOM: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter: Field Name

3.

Description Values

Comment

Plant

Plant 1 (3710)

Material number

FG126

Key date for the selection of production versions

Today’s Date

On the Production Versions table, enter the following values: CUSTOMER

646

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

4.

Description Values

Plant

Plant 1 (3710)

Material Number

Finished Good MTS (FG126)

Production Version

0001

Short text on the production version

Production Version 1

Valid-from date of production version

Today’s Date

Run-time end: production version

31.12.9999

Lot Size from

1

To Lot Size

100

Alternative BOM

1

BOM Usage

1 (Production)

Key for Task List Group

43710000

Group Counter

1

Task List Type

N

Comment

Enter the group number from the Routing of your finished product.

On the next row, enter the following values. Field Name

Description Values

Plant

Plant 1 (3710)

Material Number

FG126

Production Version

0002

Short text on the production version

Production Version 2

Valid-from date of production version

Today’s Date

Comment

Run-time end: production version

31.12.9999

Lot Size from

101

To Lot Size

99.999.999

Alternative BOM

1

BOM Usage

1 (Production)

Key for Task List Group

43710000

Group Counter

2

Task List Type

N

Enter the group number from the Routing of your finished product.

5.

Select the two lines of your new product versions and choose product versions.

to review the

6.

If message Task List exists and BOM exists appears for each production version, quit screen with F 3 . The indicator in the field Test Status signals if the check was successfully (green traffic light).

7.

Save your entries.

8.

On the Create material BOM: Initial screen, enter the following values and choose Enter: Field Name

9.

Description Values

Comment

Plant

Plant 1 (3710)

Material number

SG24

Key date for the selection of production versions

Today’s Date

On the Production Versions table, enter the following values: Field Name

Description Values

Plant

Plant 1 (3710)

Material Number

SG

Production Version

0001

Short text on the production version

Production Version 1

Comment

CUSTOMER 648

Localization objects - per Business Priority

Field Name

Description Values

Valid-from date of production version

Today’s Date

Run-time end: production version

31.12.9999

Lot Size from

1

To Lot Size

100

Alternative BOM

1

BOM Usage

1 (Production)

Key for Task List Group

43710001

Group Counter

1

Task List Type

N

Comment

Enter the group number from the Routing of Material SG124

10.

Select the two lines of your new product versions and choose product versions.

to review the

11.

If message Task List exists and BOM exists appears for each production version, quit screen with F 3 . The indicator in the field Test Status signals if the check was successfully (green traffic light).

12.

Save your entries.

4.7.14.1.6 Create Batch Search Strategy for Production Order Use The purpose of this activity is to create batch search strategies for production order for materials FG126 and RM122. Procedure 1.

Access the activity using one of the following navigation options: SAP Menu

Logistics  Central functions  Batch Management  Batch Determination  Batch Search Strategy  For Production Order

Transaction Code

COB1

2.

On the Create Batch Search Strategy: Initial Screen enter YB11 in Strategy type input field and choose Enter.

3.

On the Create FIFO (YB11): Fast Entry screen, enter YBM1 in Order Type input field and 1000 in Plant input field.

4.

Make the following entries for Order Type/Plant/Component: Material No. Changes Dialog batch Dialog Quantity Overdelivery batch allowed determination UoM proposal allowed splits FG126

99





A

1



RM122

99





A

1



5.

Choose Enter.

6.

Select the first entered line and choose Selection criteria.

7.

The batch class YB_BATCH assigned to the material and the characteristics of the class are displayed. Confirm the data by choosing Enter and Back F 3 .

8.

On the Create FIFO (YB11): Fast Entry screen, select the first entered line again and choose Sort.

9.

On the Create FIFO (YB11): Sort Rule screen, enter YB_FIFO_SORT in Sort rule input field.

10.

Choose Enter and Back F 3 .

11.

Save your entries.

CUSTOMER 650

Localization objects - per Business Priority

© 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate company) in Germany and other countries. Please see http://global.sap.com/corporateen/legal/copyright/index.epx#trademark for additional trademark information and notices. Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors. National product specifications may vary. These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP SE or its affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. In particular, SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business outlined in this document or any related presentation, or to develop or release any functionality mentioned therein. This document, or any related presentation, and SAP SE’s or its affiliated companies’ strategy and possible future developments, products, and/or platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time for any reason without notice. The information in this document is not a commitment, promise, or legal obligation to deliver any material, code, or functionality. All forward-looking statements are subject to various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations. Readers are cautioned not to place undue reliance on these forward-looking statements, which speak only as of their dates, and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions.

CUSTOMER 652

Localization objects - per Business Priority